SEOTips.ws

Sponsored Video

Cora SEO Software measures 520 on-page and off-page SEO factors for your keywords

3 Psychology Principles That Boost Social Media Engagement

3 Psychology Principles That Boost Social Media Engagement

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are your social media posts getting enough engagement? Do you want tips for connecting with your audience? Social media engagement is largely determined by how well your social posts trigger action from your target audience. In this article you'll discover how to boost social media engagement by incorporating psychological triggers in your posts. Listen to this article: #1: Focus on a Desire In Nobel Prize-winning psychologist Daniel Kahneman's book, Thinking, Fast and Slow, he shared this idea: "A general 'law of least effort' applies to cognitive as well as physical exertion. The law asserts that if there are several ways of achieving the same goal, people will eventually gravitate to the least demanding course of action." To apply this principle to your social content, you should keep it simple. In the GetResponse post below, they show that they recognize social media marketers want their email subscribers to feel as if they're having a real conversation with the brand. To do that, GetResponse suggests that marketers need to "use these strategies." The post also incorporates the word "want" ("if you want your subscribers to feel as if they're talking to a real person"). This word triggers a desire in readers' brains that convinces them that, yes, they can do this. Additionally, GetResponse captured the idea of simplicity in the article linked to in the post: 7 Strategies to Give Your Email Campaign a Human Touch. By presenting content in a simple, straightforward way, readers begin to believe that it's not as hard to connect with their audience through email as they might think and that they've found a solution to their problem. Key takeaway: You'll get more engagement with your content if you make your audience believe that they can do something. Walk readers through the hard stuff and break it down in easy-to-digest chunks of information so they can take action quickly and easily. #2: Appeal to Knowledge Seekers There is nothing people love more than an explanation. In fact, in the well-known Xerox study, Ellen Langer and her colleagues conducted a simple experiment to see how people reacted when someone tried to cut in line at the Xerox machine. Ellen discovered that she was allowed to cut the line more frequently when she explained to people why she needed to. The word "why" is one of the trigger words you can use in your own social media marketing. Use "why" to ignite readers’ brains to want to search for the answer to a question. Eric Enge from Stone Temple Consulting used this strategy to create the Here's Why video series for his target audience. In the Here's Why post below, Eric poses a question to reader: Why Is SEO So Hard? If you weren't thinking about that question before, you likely are now. Why is SEO so hard, anyway? Eric provides just enough information to grab the audience's attention. He tells them what they can expect and how they will benefit from watching the 5-minute video. Key takeaway: Communicate to your audience why they need something and how they're going to get it by reading your content, watching your video or using your product. #3: Tap Into the Fear of Missing Out It's human nature to be apprehensive about being left out. We want to be in the know and be where the action is happening. We want to be included. If we say no to an opportunity, we fear we'll miss out on something that could be of great benefit to us. For example, if there's an important conference in your industry, you may be compelled to attend because you fear you'll miss out on great opportunities that other people in your industry will be afforded. With a good industry conference, you can build your brand and business by networking with new and long-time colleagues. You can also attend sessions that help you improve your craft. The opportunity is so compelling that you're afraid if you don't attend, you'll read lots of enthusiastic posts about it in your ...

Twitter Promotion: How to Encourage Others to Promote for You

Twitter Promotion: How to Encourage Others to Promote for You

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use social media to promote your product, service or events? Are you wondering how you can use Twitter to help get more visibility and sales? To learn how Twitter can be used to encourage others to promote for you, this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast gives you insight into the subject. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, you'll discover five different ways you can use Twitter to promote what you have to offer. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter Promotion Why Twitter promotion? I believe that Twitter is the most frictionless form of social media communication. You can also create an enormous amount of buzz on Twitter. Here are five techniques to help you promote and boost excitement around what you have to offer. #1: Include a Customized Tweet Button on Every Single Page of Your Product When you have several pages on your product, service or event site, it's important to have the same tweet on every single page. The first thing you need to do is create a custom Twitter share button. The button options available are Share a Link, Follow, Hashtag and Mention. You want to choose the Share a Link button. The next step is to click on the option to include a different URL, rather than the Use the Page URL option. In this particular case, you'll use the home page of your product, service or event. So when someone clicks on that tweet button to share on Twitter, they'll be directed back to one central place, which is your home page. The next option is Tweet Text. This is where you can write in your own custom tweet. Also make sure you check the Show Count option, because it will display the total number of tweets. You'll hear why it's important to show the number of tweets on your sales page, and the advantages to the Via and Recommend Twitter ID options. The last step is to add a hashtag. When you visit our event page for Social Media Marketing World, you'll notice that once you click on the tweet button, not only does it have our customized tweet, but it also includes the URL for the home page and the hashtag for the event. Once you have created your custom tweet, it'll give you a little piece of code that you can put in a sidebar widget if you're on WordPress, or embed the HTML where you want it. The good news is that it works over and over again. Here are a few tips on how to craft your tweet: Write the tweet as if the user was writing it him- or herself. Make sure it's not overly promotional. Craft it in a way that it's easy to read. Include a hashtag. Listen to the show to discover the types of phrases you should use in your custom tweet. #2: Embed a Twitter Widget on Every Page That You Use to Promote When you visit the event page for Social Media Marketing World, you'll see the widget below. On the event page it's live. You can see the hashtag at the top, and underneath are the tweets relating to the event. The reason that they're all in one place is because of the hashtag. As you scroll through the tweets, you'll see the people who have clicked on the custom tweet, plus those who are talking about the event in general. You'll hear why the value proposition in something like this on your sales page is huge, and the reason why I decided to have it on every single page at Social Media Examiner. To create a Twitter widget, you first need to log into Twitter and then visit here. Next, click on Create New and then Search. You will see that it asks for Search Query.

YouTube Community Development: How to Build a Following With YouTube

YouTube Community Development: How to Build a Following With YouTube

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create YouTube videos? Want to increase your audience? To learn how to create an online community using YouTube, I interview Tim Schmoyer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Tim Schmoyer, the author of 30 Days to a Better YouTube Channel and The Secret to Building Your YouTube Audience. His site, videocreators.com helps people spread their message via video. Tim explores how to create a community with YouTube. You'll discover how to make videos that will engage your viewers and keep them watching. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: YouTube Community Development How Tim got involved with YouTube Tim explains how one night in grad school (March 2, 2006), he was bored at home, and decided to check out YouTube. After seeing what was on there, he decided to upload his first video. It was a quick, 30-second video of him talking to the camera. He had no idea where that first experience would lead. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0sbC_K0cCUI As this was pre-Facebook, Tim says he and his girlfriend at the time made videos to show their friends and family what they were up to. They made videos of their dates, engagement and wedding, as well as when they moved, had kids and so on. Tim believes they made about 1,000 videos just sharing their story. It started as a way to communicate with family and friends. Along the way, other people started watching. Around 2009, Tim reached out to Mark Robertson, ReelSEO, and YouTube personality Kevin Nalty, and asked them why certain things did and did not work on YouTube. When they didn't know the answers, Tim decided to figure it out himself. He said he'd report back to them what he learned. Tim began having conversations with people who were trying to figure out the same things about YouTube and audience growth. That was the start of him turning YouTube into his business. A while later, Tim reached out to Mark Robertson again with constructive feedback. Tim told Mark that while he had a great website about video, there was nothing being done with online video. Tim ended up taking over Mark's YouTube channel, and trained the site's viewers how to master YouTube as a platform for audience development. After a few years, Tim started working full time for an animation studio to do audience development for their web series. A year later, after he had grown it to almost 100,000 subscribers, Tim's job was eliminated. However, they paid him full-time for six months to get his own business started. In February 2013, Tim launched his YouTube channel, called Video Creators. By the end of six months, it was his full-time income. Video Creators has three series on it. Every Tuesday, Tim talks about news in the online video industry. Wednesdays, he shares a YouTube tip. Then, on Thursdays he answers a question from his audience. The channel revolves around using online video as a platform to change lives. Without spending any money on promotion, Tim has grown his YouTube channel to over 75,000 subscribers and more than four-million views. He gets tons of interaction and engagement, including about 15,000 comments a month. Listen to the show to learn what YouTube was like in the beginning. Common mistakes with video The biggest mistake Tim sees people make with video is that they treat it like it's the same as television. People new to video (who don't watch YouTube) don't have another frame of reference for how to craft video content. Therefore, they make the same content they would create for television,

Crisis Management: What to Do When Your Business Makes a Public Mistake

Crisis Management: What to Do When Your Business Makes a Public Mistake

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is your business ready for a social media crisis? Are you wondering what you should do if you or a colleague makes an embarrassing public mistake? To learn how to handle a social media crisis, I interview Gini Dietrich for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Gini Dietrich, author of the brand-new book, Spin Sucks: Communication and Reputation Management in the Digital Age, and founder of the blog Spin Sucks. She runs Arment Dietrich, a PR agency. Gini shares common mistakes businesses make when facing a crisis, and the best ways to deal with these situations when they happen. You'll discover the first steps you need to take, how to handle the situation throughout and when to seek legal advice. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Crisis Management What happened with Applebee's and the challenges they faced Gini explains how approximately 2 years ago, a waitress at an Applebee's in St. Louis left a check at a table that included an automatic gratuity of 18%. When she returned to collect the check, the customer had crossed out the 18% and had written, "I give God 10%, why do you get 18%?" The customer left a 10% tip instead. One of the waitress' friends took a photo of the receipt, which included the customer's name, and posted it on Reddit. This led to it going viral and the whole world saw it. Applebee's response was that they were going to fire the waitress and her friend, because it was against their policy to show pictures or talk about customers. Especially when a name is included. What happened next on Applebee's Facebook page added fuel to the fire. Applebee's replied to every person's comment on Facebook with a canned PR response. You'll hear what the response included. People didn't take kindly to the way Applebee's handled the situation, and started to dig deep on the Internet. Pictures were discovered that had been posted with good customer feedback on their Facebook page. Although these pictures included the customer's name, nobody got fired for it. A Facebook page was then started to try to get the waitress' job back. You'll hear what Gini's gut instinct was on the person who was handling the corporate Facebook page for Applebee's, and why it contributed to the crisis. Gini advises you never to use a canned PR message on social media, because it's about being social. You need to engage, be transparent and remain human. This means you need to show sympathy and empathy toward what's happening. Always take time to think about the statement before you put it out there. Listen to the show to find out how the way you handle a social media crisis can affect your sales. The first thing you should do once you're aware of an issue Gini says that the first thing you should do is understand what has happened. This means communicating with both sides to get the bigger picture. In Applebee's case, they should have listened to the customer, the waitress and her friend before they did anything else—whether they had a policy in place or not. You have to remember that we live in a world of instant gratification, where people tend to react before they think the situation through. This is when trouble starts and the problem spirals out of control. As a company, you need to step back and figure out your plan of action and your strategy before you can move forward. You'll hear why it's important to acknowledge that you are aware of the situation,

Social Media Science: How Behavior Impacts Social Media Marketing

Social Media Science: How Behavior Impacts Social Media Marketing

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Want to understand the psychology behind why people interact via social networks? During this fascinating interview I explore these very concepts. To learn about the science and psychology of social media marketing, I interview Ric Dragon for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Ric Dragon, author of Social Marketology and CEO of DragonSearch. Ric shares tips on how businesses can build relationships on social media. You'll learn how relationships develop and why the concepts of gamification and gifting are important. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Media Science How to develop relationships via social networks People look for other people like themselves, which is called group affinity. People want to find like-minded souls. It is much easier in this age of social media than ever before. Ric shares insights into the importance of small-talk in building relationships. You'll learn how small-talk is an extension of social grooming and how sharing a little about yourself humanizes you and makes it easier to grow your social networks. Ric talks about how people bring common salad to social media. Listen to the show to learn more about building relationships on social media. What gamification and gifting bring to social media Ric explains what gamification and gifting are and the different types of elements within social media. Learn why the most powerful rewards are the unexpected ones. You'll hear about different ways you can gift someone. Ric explains why it's important to measure the depth of engagement and also how to measure the effectiveness of your company's social media activities. Listen to the show to learn why the need to reciprocate is very powerful and relevant to your social activities. How communities develop via social media  Strong communities can form very quickly on social media and sometimes there are micro-communities.  Ric talks about how strong communities can form spontaneously on social media. He also talks about how these communities form around hashtags. You'll learn why listening is important for both pre-existing communities and when communities are forming. Ric talks about online ethnography—the studying of people in an in-depth way online. Listen to the show to learn about how communities develop. How to craft the right brand voice on social media People project personality onto brands and Ric explains why this is important to remember when you shape your brand voice. Ric shares how brands can create the right voice. For example, you need to make sure that even though you want individuals to have their own voice when they speak for your company, you also want this voice to be consistent. Listen to the show to find out why it's important to be consistent. The different subcategories of social media marketing  As social media evolves, the word community is thought of in different ways by different people. The expression social media also has different definitions for different people. Ric explains how there are at least five different types of social media projects. You'll learn why Ric believes brand management will experience the biggest area of growth. He says people are thinking most about brand management and when the brand has a really strong sense of purpose, it becomes a valued member of the community. Listen to the show to discover more about brands using social media well.

8 Ways to Use Google+ Hangouts for Your Business

8 Ways to Use Google+ Hangouts for Your Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Google+ Hangouts? Interested in ways to use them for your business? Google+ Hangouts are a great way to hold group meetings, interact with customers, interview people and share your expertise. In this article you'll discover eight ways to use Google+ Hangouts for your business. Listen to this article: A Quick Introduction to Google+ Hangouts Before getting into ways to use Google+ Hangouts, here's a quick look at the types available. For public Google+ Hangouts, you'll want to choose Google+ Hangouts on Air. Google+ Hangouts on Air allow you to have up to 10 hosts in a live hangout that is publicly accessible on Google+, your YouTube channel and your website. You can record hangouts directly to your YouTube channel for future use. For private Google+ Hangouts, choose Google+ Video Hangouts, which allow you to have up to 10 participants in a video chat that is accessible only to the people invited. You can run Google+ Hangouts from your desktop browser or by using the recommended Google apps. Try running a private Google+ Hangout with yourself and a select group of people to start with, so you can install the proper browser software and test out the controls before you go live with a hangout. Google+ Hangout Controls & Apps At the top of a Google+ Hangout, you see controls that (from left to right) allow you to invite people to the hangout, mute your microphone, turn off your webcam, adjust your bandwidth settings, configure your video and sound settings and end the hangout. In the left sidebar you'll find apps that allow you to do specific things during the hangout, some of which are available only in hangouts on air, not in the video hangouts. These apps may also be ordered differently depending on which ones you choose to use or have used in the past. Starting at the top in the above image, you find the Group Chat app icon, which opens a chat box on the right side of your hangout. This is a great way to invite a person to interact during the hangout, even if he or she isn't one of the 10 people in the video with you. Next, you have the Screen Share app icon. This allows you to share your screen to show slides, live software demos and other information on your desktop. The Tag icon allows you to showcase links from websites of your choosing on the right side of the hangout. These can be links to your website, social profiles, landing pages and other items that your hangout attendees and viewers would need. The Q & A icon allows you to specifically start a Q&A in the hangout. The Camera icon enables you to take a screenshot of the hangout while it's live. You can use this feature at a specific point during the hangout to create a thumbnail image to use for your YouTube video preview. You can also use it anywhere you're planning to promote the hangout replay. The Video Camera icon allows you to control who is being shown during the hangout and how guests will appear when they join the hangout. Use the UberConference app icon to create a conference call number that people can use to call in to the hangout if they're unable to access the live video stream. The Control Room app icon allows you to quickly control which participants in the hangout are seen and heard. You can also use it to kick people out of the hangout if needed. The Hangout Toolbox app icon triggers a box of features you can use to further enhance your hangout. In the example below, you can see how to add a lower-third banner with your name tagline or a custom overlay image so every person on the hangout is identified when they're on video. The Effects app icon toggles special effects you can use on your video during the hangout. These are more for personal use than business use. Finally, there's a YouTube app icon that allows you to choose a YouTube video to stream live during your hangout.

What is SEO and how can it help my website's Google visibility?

What is SEO and how can it help my website's Google visibility?


the Guardian

Learning how to improve your site's SEO can significantly improve your business' prominence in online search results

Rules To Consider When Writing Content For The Benefit Of SEO

by Matt DiMartino @ Search Engine Optimization – Driven Local

One of the most important factors of ranking in search engine results is having strong, quality content on your website. With every algorithm update, the search engines become smarter and more likely to read your site the same way a human would. On-page content should provide trustworthy answers to visitors who come seeking information about […]

The post Rules To Consider When Writing Content For The Benefit Of SEO appeared first on Driven Local.

LinkedIn Publishing Platform: What Marketers Need to Know

LinkedIn Publishing Platform: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you publish long-form content? Are you wondering if the new LinkedIn publishing platform can help your business? To learn about the LinkedIn publishing platform and why you may want to consider it, I interview Stephanie Sammons for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Stephanie Sammons, who is a LinkedIn marketing expert and CEO of Wired Advisor, a digital marketing platform that helps financial advisors create and publish content. She blogs at Build Online Influence. Stephanie shares how marketers can make the most out of the LinkedIn publishing platform. You'll discover what type of content works best, when to schedule posts and how you can use the platform to grow a following. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: LinkedIn Publishing Platform What is the LinkedIn publishing platform? Stephanie explains that the LinkedIn publishing platform was first made available to around 500 LinkedIn influencers. These individuals were chosen by LinkedIn to be a part of the initial rollout. More recently LinkedIn has opened up the publishing platform to all 277 million+ members. It will be rolled out over time, allowing every single person the opportunity to publish his or her own content on the LinkedIn platform. Listen to the show to find out why this new addition is great for publishing long-form content. Does the LinkedIn platform support images and multimedia? Stephanie says that you can embed content from SlideShare, which is owned by LinkedIn. It's a network where you can publish PowerPoint presentations, Keynote presentations, PDFs, white papers, infographics and embed videos from YouTube. In addition, you can embed images in the posts that you publish to LinkedIn. The formatting capabilities are very similar to a basic blogging platform. It's a little bit easier to use than WordPress, although you don't have the ability within the editor to categorize or tag your posts. You can use headers, bullets, numbered lists, bold, italics and hyperlink text as well. Listen to the show to find out why it's really important to double-check your post before you hit Publish. Marketers and business owners should consider posting content on LinkedIn You have to remember that LinkedIn is your professional identity online and this not only gives you an opportunity to demonstrate and illustrate your expertise, but also to get in front of a very active and engaged audience. You'll discover why you now have the ability to grow a following on LinkedIn—even with people who aren't in your LinkedIn network—and how this can be a huge benefit to your business. It's still important to have your own platform that's away from all of the other social networks. One of the real advantages of when you use the LinkedIn publishing platform is that you can grow an audience very fast. My friend Dave Kerpen, the founder of Likeable Media, is a great example. Although he has mostly written for traditional print and didn't really have a huge platform online, he was able join the original LinkedIn influencer network. Since then, he has seen amazing growth as a result of the articles he has published on the platform. You'll hear about an article that Dave wrote on the LinkedIn publishing platform about 10 Marketing Podcasts That You Ought to Listen to and how this affected the podcasts mentioned in a phenomenal way. When you put your content together,

Tips for the Overwhelmed Business Owner

by ThriveHive @ ThriveHive

No matter how strong you are as a business owner, at some point you will feel overwhelmed. It’s just a part of the job. There’s always […]

The post Tips for the Overwhelmed Business Owner appeared first on ThriveHive.

How to Increase Your Google+ Engagement

by Lakeshore Branding @ Lakeshore Branding

Google + may not have the mass appeal of Facebook and Twitter, but it does have another benefit – the backing of the largest search engine in the world and the one most marketers and people rely on daily. Improving your Google+ presence and engaging more people is a definite way to really help your business and is worth the investment in time we can assure you. So, here are five excellent strategies that will help increase Google+ engagement. Website The first big step you should take to get people and customers interested in your Google+ account is to make it findable. This can be easily achieved by simply adding a badge to your site. This means it’s easy for visitors to find, engage and follow you with one simple click. Curation of People and Content Google’s Circles was a revelation when it arrived and it still is. The Circles feature is a great way to manage interest groups that - Read the full article

How to Secure Your Social Media Accounts: 5 Tools

How to Secure Your Social Media Accounts: 5 Tools

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are your social media accounts secure? Interested in ways to prevent security breaches? There are tools you can use to protect your social and online accounts, and prevent them from being compromised. In this article you'll discover five tools to keep your company's social media safe. Listen to this article: #1: Get Alerts on Suspicious Activity One way to keep tabs on access to your social accounts is to install an intrusion detection system on your mobile devices. This type of app will detect suspicious activity and unauthorized access to your online accounts. One app you may want to try is LogDog (currently available only for Android), which takes on the role of a 24-hour-a-day watchdog. It can serve as your own personal mobile security system for your company's online accounts. The application closely monitors your online accounts, continuously scanning for a variety of unauthorized-access indicators. If a hacker attempts to gain access to any of your accounts, you'll receive an alert that there is unauthorized access, allowing you to take back control of your accounts as soon as possible. The app currently will monitor Facebook, Gmail, Evernote, Yahoo and Dropbox accounts, but the company plans to add more social platforms in the future. #2: Login Securely With a Password Manager Your company's social media account passwords are what stand between you and unscrupulous hackers. If your social accounts get hacked, your business's reputation may be harmed, so be sure to create strong profile passwords and modify them often. A tool like LastPass or 1Password makes it easier to protect your passwords, and store them in an encrypted vault. LastPass takes the hassle out of continuously logging in, while simultaneously ensuring online security of your accounts. It also provides a random password generator that helps you create strong, secure passwords when signing up for access to new sites. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=i_lJd3SnL5U LastPass is available to install as an app on Android and iOS devices, or you can download a browser extension to access your passwords on Windows or Mac OS. 1Password is available for both Windows or Mac OS, and Android or iOS devices. #3: Control Access to Your Social Accounts The more people who have access to your company's social accounts, the greater the chance those accounts may be compromised. If you want to minimize the risk to multiple accounts, there are tools you can use to manage access to your company's social accounts. With a social media management system like Hootsuite or SproutSocial, you can grant your employees access to your social accounts without disclosing sensitive account information to them. Access to your company's social accounts should be managed primarily by your IT staff. They can beef up security by making sure that account passwords are changed on a regular basis. If you don't change your account passwords frequently, you may not have any idea how many current or former employees have access to your company's social accounts. Keep in mind, too, that you should avoid using a work email address when signing up for company social media accounts. Your work email address may be accessible to outside parties on your organization's contact page or advertisements, which could make it easier for someone to hack your account. Another tool to make use of is the Login Approval feature. Specific to Facebook, this feature will help control employee access to your Facebook page. When you turn on the Login Approval feature, it will prompt your Facebook page admins to enter a special security code each time they access your Facebook page from a new computer, device or browser. #4: Manage Account Privacy Settings It's essential that you learn about and use the privacy and security settings on Facebook or any other social networks you use. These settings help you securely manage your online experience,

Does Your Small Business Really Need a Website?

by BMM @ BlueMatrix Media

Imagine this: You are a local business without a small business website. You have a modest but well-performing company. Your business is mostly local and you have just enough clients to make a decent income without having to struggle to keep up. You’re happy with how your business is performing and you don’t feel the […]

The post Does Your Small Business Really Need a Website? appeared first on BlueMatrix Media.

How to Create Instagram Ads

How to Create Instagram Ads

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Instagram for business? Interested in running ads? Instagram advertising gives businesses and brands an effective way to increase visibility and connect with customer and prospects. In this article you'll discover how to create Instagram ads for your business. Listen to this article: #1: Connect Your Instagram Account to Facebook Before you can start advertising on Instagram, you need to connect your Instagram account to your Facebook page. This will allow you to create your ads in Facebook Power Editor. To get started, go to your Facebook page and click Settings in the top-right corner. In the left column, click Instagram Ads and then click the Add an Account button on the right. If you have an existing Instagram account, select Add an Existing Account, enter your Instagram username and password and click Confirm. If you don't have an Instagram account, you can create one from within Facebook. Select Create a New Account, enter a username for the Instagram account and type in your email address. When you're finished, click Confirm. Look for an email about your new Instagram account. Then follow the directions to set a password for it. Once you've finished these steps, your Instagram account will be connected to your Facebook page. Now when you use your Facebook page to create ads that will run on Facebook, you can show those same ads on Instagram. If you don't have the ability to edit and create ads yet, you will soon, as Facebook and Instagram are still rolling out this feature. #2: Select an Ad Type For Instagram ads, you can choose from three ad objectives: clicks to your website, mobile app installs and video views (up to 30 seconds in length). Within these objectives, there are three key ad units that you can capitalize on: image, video and carousel ads. Image ads are standard photos with a button driving users to click. Video ads are the same as image ads but with video. Carousel ads are a series of images that users can browse. All of these ad options can drive results depending on what you want to accomplish. #3: Target the Right Audience Most Facebook ad targeting options are also available for Instagram ads. These include location, demographics, interests, actions and more. With Instagram ads, you set your target audience preferences in the same way as you do for Facebook ads. Keep in mind you don't have to use all of the targeting options. The only options that are required are location, age and gender. Use the other targeting options if you want more control over who sees your ads so you can ensure you're delivering a message that will resonate with them. This Instagram ad from Shomi Canada showcases the importance of good targeting. The ad resonated with the younger audience on Instagram which responded with more than 5,700 likes and 41 comments. If you create an ad for a specific audience, you need to make sure that it will be seen by only that audience. For example, if you create an ad geared toward working moms, you don't want it to be shown to high school students. Leverage the targeting features and focus on delivering Instagram content that is both relevant and engaging. #4: Use Attention-Grabbing Visuals Instagram is known for its rich and attractive visuals. If want to create ads that drive results, take the time to create compelling visuals to catch people's attention. The Instagram audience is savvy enough to sniff out stock photos and is less likely to engage with that type of content. Capture photos yourself or invest in a photographer/illustrator to create great content. #5: Include a Call to Action With Instagram ads, currently there are no stipulations about the amount of text you can have in a photo. This gives you the opportunity to create ads that are text-heavy and communicate complex stories. You can also include calls to action directly in your photos or video.

How to Cultivate Loyal Customers With Social Media

How to Cultivate Loyal Customers With Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want long-term customers for your business? Have you used social media to increase customer loyalty? To build customer loyalty, you need to show your customers you care. In this article I'll share how to use social media to embrace and cultivate loyal customers for your business. Listen to this article: #1: Personalize the Fan Experience The key to encouraging more customer loyalty on social media is to make your fans feel like they matter. Whether you have 1,000 or 10,000 fans, each one should feel special. A simple way to take a personal approach on a daily basis is to sign off on posts and comments with your name. Another method is to literally personalize your product or service for fans. Coca-Cola fans can personalize and share a virtual bottle of Coke and Heinz ran a promotion that gave their fans and customers the opportunity to add a friend's name to a soup can and send it to him or her. When you personalize your fans' experience, it boosts their trust and loyalty. It also gives them a chance to take full ownership of and share the experience with their network. #2: Offer Rewards Show your fans and customers you appreciate their input on your social channels by offering a reward. A lot of companies miss out on the opportunity to create more loyal customers, because they only reward customers who engage the most. While there's nothing wrong with rewarding regular engagement from fans, the key to appreciating your social media community as a whole is to reward fans based on the quality of the interaction, not the quantity. Remember, a fan who comments once, but leaves very detailed feedback (for example, a testimonial, suggestions or visual post), is just as valuable as someone who comments 40 times on posts. Involve and reward your entire social media community with offers, such as unique discounts, contests and bonus or sneak previews. GoEnnounce gave away exclusive "Welcome to College" gifts to the first 50 high school seniors who posted a photo with their college acceptance letters. When you reward all fans and customers, it gives everyone a reason to keep coming back to your page. It also shows your company appreciates both new and existing customers. #3: Surprise Fans and Customers Add to your customers' experience on social media by finding ways to create surprise and intrigue. One option is to surprise fans with a random act of kindness. For example, reward your community with a discount code when you reach 20,000 fans. Also, send fans who go above and beyond in adding value to your company, product or service a handwritten note and gift. When a young fan submitted a dragon drawing to Samsung to impress the brand, the company not only replied back with a great drawing of a kangaroo on a unicycle, but also took things one step further. Samsung sent the fan a Samsung phone, which included a case customized with the dragon drawing. Now that's what you call a surprise! Companies can also send fans a surprise on special occasions, such as after their first purchase, the one-year anniversary of their first purchase, their birthday or on seasonal holidays. Surprises are a great way to build word-of-mouth marketing. They also encourage brand advocacy, because fans who get a treat are likely to share the experience with their network. Remember, since social media conversations happen in real time, when you decide to surprise your fans, be sure to deliver the treat within a reasonable time frame. #4: Listen to Your Customers Build loyalty with your fans and customers and increase engagement by listening. Monitor daily what your customers and fans are saying about your company, whether it's a question, concern or problem, and then engage with your fans, respond and take action. Snapchat listened to their users, and as a result they created an update to make the app even easier to use. Listening is so important on social media because ...

5 Ways to Use Storytelling in Your Social Media Marketing

5 Ways to Use Storytelling in Your Social Media Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to use storytelling in your social media marketing? Are you looking for inspiration? Building your social media campaigns around stories helps you stand out from other brands, and grab the attention of consumers. In this article you'll discover five ways to use storytelling in your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Pay Attention to Story Structure Freytag's pyramid is a powerful storytelling framework used in a variety of creative works from Aesop's Fables to Shakespeare's plays. This structure splits the story into five narrative arcs, evoking various emotional reactions from your audience. These arcs include the inciting moment, the complication or rising action, the climax (or turning point), the reversal or falling action and the moment of release. In your storytelling you can follow the steps in Freytag's pyramid or use them in parts, but the approach helps you make an emotional connection with your consumers. In 2014 Jaguar launched a high-suspense campaign with David Beckham in China, targeting local social networks WeChat and Weibo. Before revealing Beckham as the brand ambassador, the campaign asked consumers to guess Mr. Jaguar's identity. Jaguar released street interviews and videos to build suspense. They also dropped hints throughout the campaign to get consumer traction. The exercise was highly successful and drew 50,000 reposts when it started. An additional 30,000 reposts came in after David Beckham was introduced as the ambassador. #2: Sequence Your Ads to Create Stories According to the recently published The Power of Storytelling from Facebook IQ, online storytelling on social media can have a direct impact on in-store purchases. As an experiment, Refinery29 tested Facebook ads that were sequenced like stories. Overall, the experiment yielded a 56% conversion lift and an 87% rise in view-throughs. Refinery29 also saw a 7% increase in in-store purchases and a 10% increase in online purchases. Deliver sequenced Facebook ads that combine quality content with a strong call to create a social media-led storytelling campaign like this one. #3: Align Your Story with Audience Values A belief ecosystem allows you to move away from product-oriented branding to a more lifestyle or customer value-oriented branding. This is a natural fit for social media where businesses need to define a niche target group (the first believers), develop a brand communication strategy (giving consumers a simple and clear reason to believe) and create online and offline spaces for brand reach and to share stories. This approach is effective because it allows you to sharpen your brand identity, creating strong competitive differentiation and higher price flexibility. This, in turn, has a direct impact on your bottom line. In 2014 Daimler's smart division launched a campaign for the FOR lifestyle brand. As Daimler explains, "'FOR' stands for a constructive, positive and optimistic outlook that can change the world." The company set up a special portal to aggregate social content for the #WhatAreYouFOR campaign hashtag. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SB_0vRnkeOk Another component was an offline campaign centered on pedestrian safety. A key element was the Dancing Traffic Light Manikin, which entertained and asked customers, "What are you for?" This approach helped solidify smart's positioning as a consumer lifestyle choice: a green city car that cares about the world. The customer experience was the central pull for smart's campaign. This was in stark contrast to the pre-2013 online positioning of smart cars that talked more about product features than value. The FOR brand campaign also clearly differentiated smart cars from Daimler's performance-oriented cars. #4: Tell Local Stories With powerful social media reach (1 in 7 people in the world are on Facebook) and democratization of the narrative,

Choosing a Domain Name for Your Business

by Will Paccione @ Dot Xero

Congrats! You just finalized your business idea. Your next step is to choose a business name so you can start the legal process. Before you settle on a name though, you may want to see if the domain name (for your website) is available. Many people think, “I’ll just buy MyBusinessName.com“. Well, good luck with […]

The post Choosing a Domain Name for Your Business appeared first on Dot Xero.

Google Partner Connect Richmond, VA

by Third Marble @ Search Engine Optimization | Third Marble Marketing

Thank you to everyone who joined us for our Google Partner Simulcast Event today! Today, Sept 30, 2015, Third Marble hosted a Google Partner Connect event which included a simulcast from some of the AdWords folks from Google. Google discussed the trends in mobile marketing. In general, people are using their phones more frequently, but […]

The post Google Partner Connect Richmond, VA appeared first on Third Marble Marketing.

How to Grow Your Facebook Fans Without a Budget

How to Grow Your Facebook Fans Without a Budget

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to increase the size of your Facebook community? Want to avoid costly Facebook ads? When you develop relationships with others in your niche and experts, your Facebook page can easily grow without advertising. In this article you'll discover three ways to grow your Facebook fan base without ads. Listen to this article: #1: Guest Curate for Other Pages Curating content for other pages is a great way to network with other people in your industry, while increasing your own visibility and reach. Choose 5 to 10 successful Facebook pages run by companies offering services complementary to yours, since they share your target audience. Your expertise will offer real value to their fans. Then offer to curate content for them once a week in return for credit on their page. For example, the CEO of a company was a speaker at a marketing and advertising course, which spent a lot of money promoting its own Facebook page. Every week on "Mobile Wednesday," this CEO would be the guest curator on the course's page, and share interesting articles on the topic. At the end of each update there was a shout-out: "Posts today are curated by OnTheMob." They also included a link to the company's Facebook page. The result of this simple technique was a few thousand new Facebook likes a month. To get started, simply send each of your targeted Facebook pages a message offering to curate content under a specific category for them once a week. You can even do this once or twice a month. However, the more exposure, the quicker the results. The pages you approach should appreciate the opportunity to mix up their content and take some of the pressure off from posting. Remember, the pages you reach out to need to be complementary, not competition. Any direct competitors likely won't allow you to use their Facebook page to promote yourself. #2: Seek Out Promotional Swaps Search for and list about 30 to 40 Facebook pages for products, services or communities that are complementary to yours. As above, these complementary pages likely share your target audience and have roughly the same number of fans. Here's the Excel spreadsheet template I use to track partnerships. Once you have a good list, send each page a message, explaining a bit about yourself and your Facebook status (such as page likes and engagement). Offer to mention their Facebook page to your fans on a Facebook update if they mention yours in return. Here is a sample intro message to adapt for your promotional outreach. Hi (Name of page admin), How are you? My name is (your name) and I'm (name of brand)'s Facebook page manager. I'd love for you to consider a promotional partnership with our page. I think we can both benefit. Our company's Facebook page targets mostly (target audience including: gender, age, occupation, interest), and we post mostly content about (type of content you post). We have (number of fans) with decent engagement rates. You can check our page out here (URL of your Facebook page). It looks like we target a similar audience with different products. Would you consider doing a promo swap between our pages? You would mention us to your fans and we'll mention you. That way we can both get some fresh likes from real people in our target audience. Please let me know if this seems interesting to you. Send me a message so we can clarify the rest of the details. Thanks for your consideration. Best, (Your Name) Once you reach an agreement, share your cross-promotional posts. Track results so you know which partners are good to work with in the future. I first heard about this technique from Neil Patel on a content hackathon. He praised this technique as the one he used to grow his Facebook page for his new experiment, Nutritious Living. Using this concept, pages have received great initial results: 1,200 new likes in less than two weeks. Note: For this concept to work,

The Art of Story: How to Captivate an Audience

The Art of Story: How to Captivate an Audience

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you give presentations or speak to clients? Want to illustrate your knowledge with better stories? To discover how to improve your stories, and your storytelling, I interview Michael Port. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Michael Port, the author of NYT best seller: Book Yourself Solid. He also teaches workshops called Heroic Public Speaking, where he applies the craft of acting to public speaking. His latest book is Steal the Show: From Speeches to Job Interviews to Deal-Closing Pitches. Michael will explore how to find, use and create stories in your marketing. You'll discover tips to improve the delivery of your stories. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: The Art of Story Michael's story Michael shares how he started his career as an actor. He has a master from the graduate acting program at New York University. Michael worked professionally on the shows Sex and the City, Third Watch, All My Children, Law & Order and 100 Center Street, as well as in the films The Pelican Brief, Down to Earth and The Believer. He earned a living doing commercial voice overs for companies including AT&T, Pizza Hut, Braun, Coors Beer, MTV and others. After he left acting, Michael says he decided to talk his way into a job for which he was completely unqualified. He pitched himself, got the job and worked his way up in the fitness industry on the business side. He credits his post-acting success to being an actor, as he was able to perform during life's high-stakes situations. When the spotlight and eyes are on you, the way you perform will determine the quality of your life, Michael says. After Michael left the fitness industry, he went into consulting for businesses and started writing books, and he saw it more and more. Over the last 13 years, Michael realized he had to meld his experience and training as an actor, his experience as a professional keynoter and what he knows about the business world. That's what Steal the Show is about, Michael says. Half the book is on the techniques associated with being a great public speaker and the other half is focused on performing during life's everyday situations. Listen to the show to learn more about how Michael coaches speakers, as well as why he originally resisted helping people with their public speaking. Why people love stories People love narrative, wonder and imagination, Michael says. Stories can get us out of our own head and into another world. We turn everything into a story, he continues. Politics, religion, love, our success or our failures become stories. Sometimes the stories we tell actually get in our way and sometimes they can change the world. Michael talks about a researcher named Jonathan Gottschall, who studies the neuroscience behind stories. Jonathan says the constant firing of our neurons in response to fictional stimuli strengthens and refines the neural pathways that lead to skillful navigation of life's problems. Listen to the show to discover in what way projects are stories. How to find your stories People sometimes draw a blank when they start to work on a presentation or prepare for an upcoming meeting, because so many things have happened over the years. Those experiences and stories are not top of mind, since you are more likely thinking about today and tomorrow. There are four different prompters for the discovery part of the process. Take a piece of paper and write out four columns, one for each of these categories. Then, when you go to craft a speech or presentation for a sales pitch,

How to Get Your New Business on the First Page of Google | ThriveHive

How to Get Your New Business on the First Page of Google | ThriveHive


ThriveHive

How to improve google ranking: a step-by-step tutorial to get your new business on the first page of Google.

Experiences: How to Stand Out in a New Age of Marketing

Experiences: How to Stand Out in a New Age of Marketing

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you looking for a competitive advantage? Have you thought about creating experiences for your audience? To learn how to create experiences and why they are essential to stand out in this noisy world, I interview Robert Rose. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Robert Rose, chief strategy officer at the Content Marketing Institute. He's co-author of Managing Content Marketing and co-host of the This Old Marketing podcast. His latest book is called Experiences: The 7th Era of Marketing. In this episode Robert will explore how creating experiences can help you stand out in a noisy world. You'll discover businesses doing experiences right, as well as how to get started creating experiences for your audience. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Experiences The book's premise Robert says he and co-author Carla Johnson believe we're moving into a new era of marketing. Marketing school textbooks (which stop around the mid-1990s) teach the five eras of marketing. All eras last about 20 years. According to Robert, we are now in the 6th era, which is relationship marketing. The Relationship Era was kicked off in the early 1990s with The One to One Future by Dr. Martha Rogers and Don Peppers, which gave birth to the CRM movement. As we move into 2015, Robert explains, we are evolving into a new era. "Developing delightful, informative, useful experiences from marketing's lens is really the new way to formulate a marketing strategy going forward," he says. Robert shares more about the evolution of the eras and how they inform this new one. From the early 1990s and into the Internet era (the late 1990s and early 2000s) the goal was to figure out how to develop a database or a relationship with our consumer and deepen it through the use of data, as well as how to assemble richer data sets around the consumer to be able to deliver a better product or service to that consumer, using that relationship. This is what gave birth to the CRM movement as we know it today. As this era progressed, and social media within it, relationship development between a brand and its consumers became more complex. These days, digital more broadly disrupts how we relate to consumers, since we now have to establish a relationship from that first meeting and beyond. That expansion of marketing's responsibility for the full life cycle of the consumer, and the complexity brought on by all of the different channels, are creating a real evolution of marketing. We need to develop more compelling experiences to be able to delight those customers at various stages of their journey. Listen to the show to discover more about the book. What Robert means when he talks about experiences  When a business creates a website or something with a physical dimension, such as a conference or a print magazine, it's creating an experience for its audience. The hope is to deliver value that's separate and discrete from the company's product or service. Robert shares a few examples. Kraft makes macaroni and cheese, as well as other products. However, Kraft's Food & Family magazine and Kraft's online recipes are experiences. They are value delivered to a consumer that's separate from the company's products. Another example would be a home cookware shop that teaches cooking classes as a means of providing a physical experience. The shop is trying to align its brand or a need or want, and is doing so by creating an experience for its customers.

Selling With Video: YouTube and Facebook Video Marketing

Selling With Video: YouTube and Facebook Video Marketing

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Want to create a sales video that converts? Looking for expert tips about building rapport with your prospects? To explore how to sell with video on YouTube and Facebook, I interview Jeremy Vest. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers, business owners, and creators discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Jeremy Vest, founder of Vidpow, the YouTube-certified agency for big brands and channels including Hewlett-Packard, Funimation, and ServiceMaster. He also created Adobe TV, a video training site for Adobe, and he's the host of the TubeTalk podcast. Jeremy explains how to hook your viewing audience and introduce them to your product. You'll discover why remarketing is essential to improving conversions from your videos. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Selling With Video Jeremy's Story Jeremy has been designing websites and marketing products online since 1998. He also loved teaching college-level web design, graphic design, and marketing classes. When Internet bandwidth increased enough to do online videos and courses, Jeremy realized he could teach many more people via video so he created xTrain, a video-based training company. Then, when YouTube came out in 2005, Jeremy started getting into it immediately. About four years ago, Jeremy launched Vidpow, which helps brands with strategy for creating videos. In his work for Vidpow, Jeremy combines his love for design with his interest in marketing, especially analyzing what improves conversion rates. Vidpow helps brands understand the universe of video and how to navigate it. Over four years, Vidpow has helped clients get more than a billion organic views. Listen to the show to find out how many websites Jeremy has created since 1998. Misconceptions About Selling With Video After Jeremy helps a client create an awesome ad or video strategy, the first thing the client often asks is, "Why aren't we getting massive sales?" Jeremy has to explain that there's no magic pill to sell stuff. It just takes time. Before people take their relationship with your brand to the next level, they need to see your brand 7 to 20 times, whether it's an email, your website, or social media ads. Even the most viral videos and the best sales videos don't produce that result. Instead, someone who has watched your video lands on your web page and gets put into your company's remarketing process. Jeremy believes that video is better than images for selling online. If a picture is worth a thousand words, what's a video worth? Text and pictures are great, but video has the highest capacity to show emotion. Showing your product or service with a video helps it sell better than any type marketing, other than connecting in person. Another misconception is that lots of views mean that your video is a success. However, if you're reaching the wrong people, they won't watch your video for very long. Because the YouTube algorithm prioritizes how long people watch your content, lots of short view times can harm your marketing. Listen to the show to hear me discuss a problem with an Instagram apps article that received lots of views. Traits of Successful Sales Videos Whether your video is on Facebook, YouTube, or Instagram, the first five seconds of your video have to be weird. Seth Godin calls this concept the purple cow. Even if you have a good or great video, odds are most people won't even watch it. The average view duration of Facebook video is six seconds so you have only a few seconds to engage someone and tell their brain to keep watching. One of Jeremy's favorites is the video created by Derral Eves and the Harmon Brothers for Squatty Potty.

How to Optimize Your Business Pinterest Account for Conversions

by Guest Post @ Pickaweb

Pinterest has accrued a reputation as being a platform to waste time on, looking for recipes and planning the ideal wedding. For those of us not in the wedding, crafts or food industries, it’s easy to ignore Pinterest as yet another platform we don’t need to be on. However, to ignore Pinterest could be to

The post appeared first on Pickaweb!

13 Instagram Marketing Tips From the Experts

13 Instagram Marketing Tips From the Experts

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to improve your Instagram marketing? Are you interested in the latest tips and tools for Instagram? Instagram is a fast-growing platform and businesses are eager to establish a presence and encourage engagement on the network. We asked social media experts to share their hottest Instagram tips. Here’s what they had to say. Listen to this article: #1: Shoot Square Your Instagram feed is only as good as your photographs, so starting with high-quality photos makes your Instagram marketing more effective. One of the best ways to save time and compose better photos for Instagram is to shoot square photos. Many digital cameras and smartphones have this in their settings so it’s really easy to do. This lets you save time on cropping and ensures that the essential elements in the photo won't be cropped out later. Because shooting photos inside the Instagram app can be limiting, I like to use Camera Awesome by the SmugMug team on my iPhone (also available for Android users). Using this app, you can take fantastic photos using the grid to follow the rule of thirds. Peg Fitzpatrick is a speaker, social media strategist and co-author of The Art of Social Media. #2: Use a Customized Link Shortener to Track Traffic One of the most important things marketers need to know is how well their Instagram account is driving traffic and leads back to their website. Unfortunately, Google Analytics can’t accurately track this traffic when users visit your website from your mobile Instagram account. To monitor accurate click rates, I recommend businesses use a customized bit.ly link (or a link from another shortener) exclusively for the URL in their Instagram bio. Then you can check your bit.ly data to document how many clicks your Instagram account is actually sending to your website. Create a different bit.ly link each time you change the link for a new landing page, campaign or default page to continuously track successful traffic leads. Jenn Herman is a social media trainer, blogger and Instagram advocate. #3: Be Strategic With Your Bio Link For personal use, Instagram is fun and spontaneous. But if you want to use it as a marketing tool, you have to be a little more calculating with it. I suspect the businesses that are really killing it on Instagram (like Nordstrom, Starbucks, Nike and others) plan their posts well in advance. If you’re a smaller brand or a one-man show, you can still develop a great presence on Instagram. Use the link in your bio to connect to a landing page that holds the same posts you put on Instagram, and allows you to collect leads, promote your ecommerce site, gain subscribers to your blog, collect entries for a giveaway, etc. Jim Belosic is the CEO of ShortStack. #4: Cross-Promote Your Partners Cross-promote whenever you can! The trend on Instagram now is to share the love, so to speak, by tagging others or even by outright promoting other companies, products and services. Locally we have restaurants that serve beer from the many craft brewers in the area. Both the brewers and the restaurants take full advantage of Instagram by tagging each other. The brewers also support one another with tap takeovers, which are rich grounds for Instagram photos and tags. The results are threefold: higher recognition for everyone involved, increased followers (who in turn tag the businesses during visits) and increased traffic and sales for the local businesses. Lisa Karl is a partner and founder at Savvy Digital Business. #5: Take Advantage of Trending Hashtags Users can now use Instagram's Explore feature to find posts related to trending hashtags such as #LoveWins, #CanadaDay and #FullMoon. If these trending tags are relevant to your brand, include them in timely posts to aid discovery. On the topic of search, Instagram also introduced the ability to search by emoji.

Fan Content: How to Leverage Your Fans to Enhance Your Social Media

Fan Content: How to Leverage Your Fans to Enhance Your Social Media

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want your fans to help market you? Are you wondering how to include fan content in your social media? To explore how fan content can enhance your social media, I interview Jesse Desjardins for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jesse Desjardins. Jesse is the head of social at Tourism Australia, where he manages a small team that oversees large Facebook, Instagram and Google+ communities. Working with fans, Jesse's team receives over 1000 images from fans a day! Jesse shares how he and his team leverage fan content--specifically photos--to promote Australian tourism. You'll discover how Jesse and his three-person team have grown Facebook to 6M fans and Instagram to 800K fans to reach 3M to 6M people a day. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Fan Content How Jesse got started at Tourism Australia Jesse shares that while he was working at a small advertising agency in the U.S. in 2004, he went to Australia on holiday for a month and fell in love with the country. He ended up getting a job and staying. After four years, he returned to the U.S. and was working in advertising doing campaigns for celebrity perfumes when he realized he'd left a brand he loved—Australia and travel. For the next two years, Jesse spent time on SlideShare doing things like You Suck at PowerPoint. During that time he also put up proposals for people to send him money to attend festivals like SXSW and Cannes Lion in exchange for his notes and photos. Jesse says that gave him a good foundation for how to build community. When he saw a job open up for social media manager at Tourism Australia, he sent his résumé, but he knew he needed to do something more. He put his résumé on SlideShare that night and the next morning, it had 40k views and a lot of supportive comments. Listen to the show to find out how Twitter helped Jesse get his résumé into the hands of Tourism Australia's managing director. What Tourism Australia's job is and how promoting tourism has changed Jesse explains that Tourism Australia is basically the marketing agency for tourism in Australia. His team promotes tourism to the country as a whole and also works with the different states and international offices. He says that advocacy and word-of-mouth have always played a role in promoting any industry, especially travel. Tourism Australia had started a Facebook page before he joined the organization; however, it took them three years to hit 1M fans. Jesse shares that he took a look at what had already been done and made the decision to launch Instagram, Google+ and Twitter as well and he's ramped it up ever since. Listen to the show to hear how Jesse views the return on social media for Tourism Australia. The strategy behind Tourism Australia's social media Jesse's social media strategy has a couple of components. He says the first component is to build something that gets bigger over time. Jesse explains that in traditional advertising, the work tends to focus on big campaigns that you work on for 6 months, then launch. His approach for Tourism Australia is different. His team works on the small things that add value every single day. As an example, he explains that instead of running a big campaign or contest to grow Instagram quickly, they've grown the account slowly over the past two years by posting consistently. He says this has been a good way to use the small resources they have to perfect the system to ...

How to Track the ROI of Your Video Marketing

How to Track the ROI of Your Video Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you struggling to measure the ROI of your marketing videos? Looking for tools to help track sales from your videos? A simple framework and a few tools can reveal if your video campaigns are working for you. In this article you'll discover how to track and measure the ROI for your video marketing efforts. Listen to this article: #1: Outline Your Campaign Costs Take the time to do a complete breakdown of all of the projected costs of your video marketing campaign, including the marketing hours you'll spend promoting it. Include a buffer of at least 20% of your projected expenses if you manage the campaign on your own. This buffer will be used for unexpected costs, such as having to reshoot footage or invest more in editing. Keep in mind that there are video marketing companies that offer all-inclusive video marketing packages, and this can make doing a cost outline much easier and more effective. #2: Determine the Financial Tipping Point Think about how many sales you need to make from your video marketing campaign to break even. After you reach your break-even amount, everything else will be pure profit. But first you need to determine that amount. You can make this a very simple process. For example, if your video marketing campaign has a budget of $5,000 per month, you should expect to see your monthly sales go up by more than $5,000. If your average sale is $100, you already know that you'll need to make at least 50 sales to compensate for the cost of the video. You should track your sales (and other metrics) year-over-year in addition to month-by-month to make sure that you've adjusted for any seasonal changes. #3: Track Sales From Your Video Campaign That's all easy enough, but now you need to differentiate income from your video campaign from income from other marketing factors. To distinguish your video campaign from other marketing factors, you can always track people who flow from your video and go on to make a purchase. Do this by using web tools to embed links that are specific to your videos. Keep in mind that these won't track all of your sales. There will always be people who see your video and make a purchase later on or in a non-traditional way, so you'll need to inflate your sales slightly to get a true ROI. The benefit, naturally, is that you'll know that your video made you at least that amount of money. Use any one of these tools separately or combine them for more complete video marketing campaign analysis. Brandwatch makes it easy to quantify your company's brand awareness. Through this tool, you can identify brand sentiments to see if your campaign is working and whether you're building brand awareness in a positive, meaningful way. Clicky allows you to break down website visitors into marketing demographics and track their activity live. If you're hosting your own videos (rather than uploading them through a service), this is an ideal way to get a better picture of your audience. Audience demographics can be critical in determining not only your ROI and awareness, but also why a particular strategy may not be working (you're targeting the wrong demographic entirely, for example). Wistia offers one of the most advanced video analysis suites available. Not only does this tool provide demographic information, but it can also directly track engagement. You can see how long visitors watched and what actions they took when they finished watching. This includes any purchases that they may have made. Wistia can integrate into your sales funnel and give you critical information about optimizing your video marketing results. YouTube offers analytics such as YouTube Insights that will break down your viewership by demographic and track outgoing clicks. You can embed marketing prompts directly into your YouTube videos so you can funnel your viewers directly into a sales channel. #4: Improve Your Video Marketing Campaigns

Pinterest Tactics: How to Grow Your Pinterest Following and Your Traffic

Pinterest Tactics: How to Grow Your Pinterest Following and Your Traffic

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you post on Pinterest? Want to shake up your strategy? To discover what, how, and when to post on Pinterest, I interview Jeff Sieh. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Jeff Sieh, founder of ManlyPinterestTips.com and host of the Manly Pinterest Tips podcast. Jeff also oversees Social Media Examiner's Pinterest account. Jeff will explore proven tactics to grow your following and your website traffic with Pinterest. You'll discover what's new with Pinterest, including promoted pins. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Pinterest Tactics What's new with Pinterest After about a year and a half of testing, the do-it-yourself option for promoted pins (Pinterest's ad product) is now available to all small businesses in the United States. Features include a bulk editor, so you can add a lot of pins at once, and more forms of targeting. For example, there were only 30 possible interests to target when promoting a pin, and now there are 420; instead of targeting someone interested in men's clothing, you can be as specific as men's shoes. Pinterest also added keyword targeting, so you can combine interest and keyword targeting. It's a great way to find a specific audience when you promote a product or blog post. Promoted pins are just like regular pins, only you pay to have them seen by more people. They perform just as well as, if not better than, organic pins. The promoted pins in your feed are based on your interests and activity on Pinterest. They also take some off-site data, collected for Pinterest's ad partners. In your home feed, you will see suggested for you or sponsored by pins. If you don't want to see something, tap the X beside it and click on Hide this Pin. Pinterest uses that feedback to make sure you see relevant, promoted pins in the future. More people see your promoted pins. Plus, you get an extra 20% boost, because you only pay for the first click. For instance, let's say Jeff promotes a pin that points back to his website, and you click on it and repin it. Then, someone else pins it from your board to their account. Jeff does not pay for the secondary repins. He only pays for that first one. When I asked Jeff about entry level price points, he says he thinks you have to start with at least $1 a day. Jeff has seen results by spending $5 a day, and believes it's worth testing, especially with the new targeting features, to see how much traffic you can get to your website. Pinterest also has customer targeting, which allows you to upload your email addresses. This is called matching, and is currently only available to Pinterest's Developer Partners. If you have a store with a newsletter that's already driving traffic, you'll be able to upload that list to Pinterest and send promoted pins to that specific audience. They are rolling it out, along with the promoted pins, now. Listen to the show to learn when they opened up promoted pins for everyone in the United States. Social Media Examiner's Pinterest plan for third-party content Jeff explains how on Social Media Examiner he starts by finding good, third-party content (posts that we don't publish on our website) on marketing and social media to share with our audience. He uses Feedly to gather articles on Facebook's breaking news and other top websites, and goes there once a day to review the posts. When Jeff finds an interesting article, he clicks the link to make sure it's quality content and a fit for our audience. He then checks for a good, pinnable image; one that is engaging and also has a text overl...

4 Tips to Improve Your Pinterest Exposure

4 Tips to Improve Your Pinterest Exposure

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is the Pinterest algorithm burying your pins? Looking for tips to get better exposure in the Pinterest Smart Feed? Pinning more isn't always the answer to increasing your visibility on Pinterest. In this article you'll discover four ways to improve the quality of your pins and boards on Pinterest. Listen to this article: #1: Clean Up Your Account Every Month For Pinterest's algorithm to view your account as high-quality, you'll want to focus on curating the best of the best. In turn, Pinterest will be more likely to recommend your pins to others. Not all popular pins are created equal and many of your account's pins won't get substantial repins from your followers. To make sure your account is up to date, set aside time once a month to go through your boards and delete all of the pins that have fewer than five repins. Here's an easy way to delete underperforming pins from a board: Click on the board and then click on the Move Pins button at the top right corner of the board. Next, click on the red Move button. Now you're able to scroll down and view all of the pins on your board and note the number of repins each one has generated. Select the checkmark on each pin that has fewer than five repins. When you're done, click the red Delete button. Currently you can delete only 50 pins at a time, and be careful to stay below 100 daily pin deletions or Pinterest may block you. You should also wait at least seven days before you delete a new pin. Deleting pins is a lot of work, but if you want to build a valuable Pinterest presence, it's a tactic you can't ignore. #2: Pin and Repin Based on Popularity It's very tempting to repin every amazing image, but if you pin indiscriminately, you'll end up with a collection of great images that offer little value to your audience. To curate a popular account with boards that give value to your followers, look a bit further to see how many repins each image actually has before you share it to one of your own boards. Joy Cho / Oh Joy! has an impressive 12.8M followers on Pinterest, and her account is a great example of what happens when you only repin popular pins to your account. Pro tip: It's good practice to check the link of each image before you repin to make sure you're not directing people to a broken link or dodgy website. Check your Pinterest stats to see which of your boards are most popular. This information isn't limited only to your owned boards, but also extends to any group boards you pin to. When you want to share a new original pin from your website or blog, pin it to one of your popular boards and make sure the pin is related to the theme of the board you choose. #3: Combine Pinterest Analytics With Google Analytics to Identify Traffic-Driving Pins It's important to have your website verified on Pinterest. Not only does this reinforce your credibility, but it also allows you to view your website stats. This makes it possible to see which of your original pins from your website or blog are the most popular on Pinterest. You'll want to cross-check this information with Google Analytics and use the combined stats to verify which of your popular pins are driving traffic to your website. To find out, sign into your Google Analytics account and then go to Acquisition > Referrals > Pinterest. Look at the Visits column to detect high-performing pins. Create similar pins to deliver more of what your audience likes, which will improve your pinning strategy. #4: Adjust Board Elements for Visibility in Search If you have a board that isn't getting the visibility you expect or isn't generating the repins you want, you can change your board title to see if the board's performance improves. First, click on the board you want to change and then click on the Edit Board button. Next, you'll see an edit screen where you can change a number of elements for your board, such as the name (or title), description,

How to Create a Facebook Video Ad That Moves People to Action

How to Create a Facebook Video Ad That Moves People to Action

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Facebook video ads for your business? Want to improve your conversions? Well-structured video ads command viewers' attention and prompt them to take action. In this article you'll discover five steps to crafting the perfect Facebook video ad. Listen to this article: Why Facebook Video Ads? Facebook's head of ad product Ted Zagat recently said that a year or two from now, Facebook will be mostly video. This is likely the reason why we're seeing so many great new features for video advertisers. When you create a new ad campaign in Power Editor, you can choose from a number of objectives for your video ads: Clicks to Website, Page Post Engagement, Video Views and Website Conversions. Facebook is continuously adding new options as well. For example, Facebook automatically creates custom audience lists of people who've viewed your video ad. Until recently, these lists would be created only if you chose Video Views as the campaign objective. But now, if you use another objective (Website Conversions, for example), these video engagement lists will also be created automatically. This means you can easily retarget these groups of people later, similarly to retargeting your website visitors. Writing a Video Ad Script To create a video ad, you have a lot of different options. Of course, you can use a recording of yourself (or hire someone to do it for you), but you don't have to. Using videos with animated text, images and music can be equally (if not more) effective. To create strong ads, it's important to get your targeting right, and communicate a powerful message. This article walks you through a framework you can use to create the perfect Facebook video ad script with only five lines of text. For each line, you have a specific goal: grab attention, build interest, elicit desire, create conviction or add a call to action. To guide you through this method, you'll follow the creation of an example video ad for a free recipe guide, with the goal of growing your email list. #1: Grab Attention How do you grab attention in today's attention-deficit world? Start with a question. You want to immediately focus on the main pain point or desire that your target audience is experiencing right now. What are your customers' biggest problems or struggles? What are they frustrated about? What are their biggest wishes? For this step, it's important to focus not only on the problem or desire, but also on how that makes people feel. When you do this correctly, you have what's called an audience-to-problem match. You want people to instantly recognize themselves and say, "Hey, that's me!" If they do, they'll likely be curious about what else you have to say. The ad above tackles a typical frustration that a lot of people can relate to: struggling to eat healthy. #2: Build Interest Once you've successfully captured your viewers' attention, you need a way to keep it so they'll watch the rest of your ad. In this second phase of the script, hint at your solution by creating an open loop. You want to paint a picture for viewers that it is indeed possible to get rid of that problem or struggle. At the same time, you don't want to reveal what the actual solution is. Only hint at it for now. This ad creates interest by using the words "new" and "easy." Can you see how this approach is creating an open loop in your viewers' minds? If they're still watching at this point, they'll likely want to know what that new and easy method is. #3: Cultivate Desire For this line of the script, create desire for your product or service. Describe your offer in a way that makes it sound amazing and like something viewers must have. To do this, focus on a specific benefit of your product, or how it's different from the alternatives out there. How-to and step-by-step guides are always popular because they help people solve specific issues.

How to Optimize Your Facebook Posts With Facebook Audience Insights

How to Optimize Your Facebook Posts With Facebook Audience Insights

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to increase your Facebook engagement? Interested in discovering what content appeals to your audience? With Facebook Audience Insights, you can get the information you need to tailor content to your audience's preferences. In this article you'll find out how to use Audience Insights to optimize your Facebook posts. Why Facebook Audience Insights? Facebook Audience Insights is a social media marketer's dream come true. It was designed as a tool for targeting Facebook ads, but it also provides a treasure trove of data on your current audience, target market and competitors' customer bases. Listen to this article: Simply plug in your page or a heap of desired demographic data, including age, gender, location, interests, finances, employment, income, family structure, purchase behavior and more. Here are some ways to tap into this data to optimize Facebook posts for your audience, increasing organic reach and engagement without advertising. #1: Use Lifestyle Data to Create Personas The Lifestyle data in Audience Insights creates mini-personas based on demographic data, purchase behavior, brand affinity and interests. Though the personas are rather broad, they lay the foundation for a comprehensive picture of who your audience is. The Apple Pie Families lifestyle persona comprises 7% of the U.S. Facebook audience over age 18. Facebook defines this persona as "upper-middle class couples with school-age children . . . homeowners, often minivan drivers and avid radio listeners." From this snippet of information, you can picture the lives of this audience. You can envision parents driving their children to school in the morning, listening to the radio. After family dinners, the children retreat to their rooms to do their homework on weeknights. You can speculate these are parents who are highly present in their children's lives. They are involved, informed, and in some ways, defined by their status as parents. So how does this information translate into writing posts that will capture this audience's attention and motivate them to act? You do it on their terms. Consider what is likely on their minds right now, and how your brand can assist in quelling their anxieties and make their life better overall. When it comes to audience personas, it's all about framing. Say you're running a promotion. Could you adjust the timeframe and the scope of the promotion to frame it as a back-to-school campaign? Or more broadly, how could the campaign speak to the everyday joys and challenges of parenthood? For example, the largest Facebook audience segment for Kraft Foods is Apple Pie Families. In this August post the company includes a link to kid-friendly recipes. Understanding that at the time, a large segment of the audience was likely focused on sending the kids back to school, Kraft Foods adjusted their content not only to grab their audience's attention, but also to provide information people could put into action. #2: Gauge Interests and Affiliations With Page Likes You can learn a lot about an audience segment based on the Facebook pages they like. Think of this information less like a report on other businesses and more like a key interest breakdown. The Page Likes section of Facebook Audience Insights is comprised of the top pages liked in each category and the pages most likely to be relevant to your audience. This combined data helps you continue piecing together a comprehensive persona. Page Likes let you see insight into what your audience's political affiliations are, which media outlets they follow, where they shop, what organizations they support, what apps they use and more. From a macro perspective, study this data to get into the heads of your audience. Add to the picture you started to form from Lifestyle data. What do these people talk about with their friends? How do they spend their spare time? What issues do they care about?

How to Use Google My Business to Improve Local SEO

by VeySft @ BlueMatrix Media

Everyone knows that having a website is essential to success for today’s companies, both big and small. The tricky part is knowing how to stand out amongst all the others. Especially when you are competing with local businesses in the same industry. Ranking high on search engines is the most affordable and efficient way to […]

The post How to Use Google My Business to Improve Local SEO appeared first on BlueMatrix Media.

A Guide to International SEO: Strategies and Guidelines

by Natalie Severt @ Unamo Blog

You have a business. Your business has a website. You use localized keyword research and traditional SEO tactics to help your business rank well online. You have a diversified backlink profile and high domain authority. Congratulations! But now you want to expand. And this is where it gets complicated. How do you create an international […]

About Local SEO | How Can Local SEO Services Help Your Business?

About Local SEO | How Can Local SEO Services Help Your Business?


BrightLocal

Learn all about Local SEO in this quick guide. What is local search optimization & how can it help your business gain more visibility online?

The Ultimate Guide To Better SEO With Your Title & Meta Description

by Nick Leffler @ Search Engine Optimization – Exprance

The titles and meta descriptions on your website are the first steps to better SEO and more traffic for your business website. Learn why they're both so important and how you can optimize them to get more traffic to your website.

The post The Ultimate Guide To Better SEO With Your Title & Meta Description appeared first on Exprance.

Email Automation for wedding and event planners

by Amber Humphrey @ Vertical Response Blog

Wedding planners and other event businesses can promote their services and save time by sending these four automated emails

The post Email Automation for wedding and event planners appeared first on Vertical Response Blog.

How to Get Started on Blab: Group Video Broadcasting for Marketers

How to Get Started on Blab: Group Video Broadcasting for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you a fan of live-streaming video for business? Have you tried Blab? Blab, the newest platform in streaming video, lets you build a personal and business presence while creating community. In this article I'll explore Blab and share ways you can use it for business. Listen to this article: About Blab Blab.im, which is currently available on desktop and iOS (Android is coming soon), is a live-streaming video platform that lets you host your own live video show or conference with up to four people engaging at the same time. The moderator has control over who is in the three additional video seats, but anyone who wants to tune in can use the right panel to chat and the left panel to tweet. Blab's ease of use, simplicity and functionality give it the edge over other live-streaming platforms. For instance, Meerkat, Periscope and Facebook Mentions are mobile-only and are mostly just you talking to your audience. Plus, if you want to interview someone, he or she needs to be right next to you. And while you can include up to 10 people on a Google hangout, the session feels more like an interview and doesn't provide the same sense of engagement as a blab. Another plus is that Blab's time length is open-ended and most blabs last about an hour. According to Shaan Puri, CEO of Blab, most people using the platform spend at least an hour "blabbing" each day. Blab is more than just a new toy. It's a substantial method of connecting, and others are getting as excited about it as I am! #1: Get Started on Blab Use the same account for Blab as you do for Twitter. Just log in and you're ready to go. If you want to change your bio or notifications, click on your photo and select Settings. Once on the platform, follow people to receive notifications about their blabs. Finding people to follow is simple: do a search by name or look anyone up by adding their Twitter handle after blab.im/. To start a new blab, click the purple button next to your profile picture. Then give your blab a title and choose up to three tags (keywords). Next, set up your blab to go live immediately or schedule it for the future. Record Your Blab If you're the moderator, you can choose to record the blab. Within a minute of the end of the show, you'll receive two links to an mp3 or mp4 with the recording. After you receive those links, you can upload your recorded blab as a video to YouTube or as a podcast on Libsyn, iTunes or your preferred host. Additionally, all of the blabs you record are archived for access on your profile under Replay. While archived blabs can be replayed at any time, viewers cannot chat, send feels or follow people during a replay. Promote Your Blab If you go live, you can tweet a link to let people know about your blab. Promote your scheduled blabs the same way you would promote any event. Create a custom graphic, email your network, schedule a Facebook event, tweet it out and share on all of your social networks. Moderate Your Blab When there's an empty seat, someone can request to join in. When the moderator approves, the new person enters the video chat. Blab is similar to a late-night talk show format. There's a host and a primary special guest. When another guest comes on, the previous guest can slide over a seat and stick around. #2: Use Blab Chat Commands There are a few unique commands enabled in the chat column on the right of Blab's layout. To ask a question, type "/Q", and the word Question appears in a grey box so it stands out. To change the topic of the blab, the moderator can type "/Topic". For a bit of fun, you can add interest to your chat comments by typing "/shrug" or "/tableflip" in the chat box. I'm not aware of other commands, but it wouldn't surprise me if the Blab development team has more Easter eggs hidden. #3: Give Kudos to Blabbers Instead of hearts, like those used on Periscope,

Launching on Social Media: A Timeline for Business Owners

Launching on Social Media: A Timeline for Business Owners

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you starting from scratch with social media? Got a new product or a new business? Having a social media launch plan is essential. In this article you'll discover a step-by-step plan for launching your new social media presence. Listen to this article: #1: 12 Weeks Before Launch: Choose Your Social Platforms A few weeks before launch, choose which platforms you'll use to launch your brand. It's important to decide (or find out) how seriously you're going to take social media in the next 1-2 years. It's better not to launch on a platform at all than to launch it, post four times and then forget it. This is also when the social media manager (or team) should be coordinating with the marketing team or other marketing agencies (depending on the size of the company) to make sure the social media plan is integrated into a big-picture marketing approach for the brand. You'll want to do a competitive analysis to get a feel for your market. This makes it easier to decide how you want to differentiate. If every coffee shop in the city is on Instagram, it doesn't mean you (as a new coffee shop owner) have to start posting latte art with filters. Determine your overall goals for converting social media followers into customers (and back again), and spend some time thinking about which platforms best support those goals. Finally, plan 10-15 sample posts for each platform you'll kick off on launch day. Pass the posts around to the marketing team and key decision-makers. Or, if you're a solo-entrepreneur, try them out on socially savvy friends. This will give everyone (including you) a taste for your brand voice. If you report to higher-ups, everyone will be on the same page before planning has gone too far. Tip: Some of these posts may work to seed your accounts with activity before you're officially live. #2: 8 Weeks Before Launch: Write Social Media Guidelines The next step is to create character sketches and a brand handbook outlining your dos and don'ts for social media posts. This step is vital if your brand is, or will be, managed by multiple people. Spend some time thinking of your brand as a character. You may even want to write up who he or she is. What are her extracurricular interests? What would his online dating profile say? Here are a few more questions to get you started: Does your brand refer to itself as "we" or "I"? Are any words off-limits? Does your brand have a political leaning? How comfortable is your company with offending followers of a different political leaning? Will you respond to comments and how often? Even negative ones? What tone will you use to address negative comments? (There will be haters. It's a public forum after all.) If your social media account were a person, what would he or she do for fun? How would he or she talk? What TV shows or books would be of interest? The answers to these questions may be different from the interests of the brand manager or the CEO, as they should be. Unless you're creating a personal brand (in which case the answers to many of these questions will fall in line with you or the person you're representing), your brand's personality should be a reflection of the personas you want to attract. Once your team has a good grasp of your brand's "who," create a handbook to document rules and behaviors for your brand on social media. As with all rules, some will be broken, but having these guidelines will help establish your brand during launch. Write the handbook as if you were explaining things to a new employee who doesn't know anything about your brand. Who are you? What are you selling? How are you using social media to enhance user experience with the brand? #3: 1-4 Weeks Before Launch: Create a Social Media Calendar Next, create a first-month social media calendar, even if you don't plan on sticking to it 100%. Rigid social media calendars can be constrictive,

How to Perform a Detailed Analysis of Your Social Media Competitors

How to Perform a Detailed Analysis of Your Social Media Competitors

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want better results from social media? Have you considered researching your competitors? If you're not getting the results you want from social media, a little research and the right tool can help you refine your social media strategy. In this article, you’ll discover how to perform a detailed competitive analysis and improve your social strategy. Why Competitor Analysis? Competitor analysis lets you discover how your competitors use social media. You can see how your competitors position themselves on social media, what they share and how their audience responds. You can also find out what social media networks work best for your competitors, what information you should include in your social profile and page bios and what types of status updates get the most engagement. Listen to this article: While you can gain these insights for free on your own, it takes time to find multiple competitors' social accounts, collect all of the data (followers, engagement, etc.) and then analyze that data. To show how using a tool can help you gather the data more quickly and present it in an easy-to-analyze format, this article uses Rival IQ as an example. Now, let's look at how to do social media analysis and apply what you learn to improve your social media strategy. #1: Create a Landscape With You and Your Competitors To get started, you'll want to sign up for a free 14-day trial of Rival IQ's service. If you're just doing a one-time analysis of your competitors' social media strategy, you should be able to get it done before the free trial period ends. Otherwise, you'll want to choose a plan that best fits your needs. For each company (including your own), you'll be able to analyze and monitor one account per social network (Facebook, Twitter, Google+, Instagram and YouTube). Once you set up your account, create your first landscape by clicking the + button under the Landscape drop-down menu at the top left. In the dialog box that appears, enter the name for your landscape and click the Create Landscape button. Next, enter the website address for your company and select it from the drop-down list if it appears. Then click the Add to Landscape button. This will allow you to compare your social media presence and content against your competitors'. After Rival IQ confirms that your company has been added, continue adding your top competitors. Enter each competitor's website address and click the Add to Landscape button each time. When you're finished adding companies, click Done Adding Companies. When you click Done, your screen will refresh to show your landscape's dashboard. Rival IQ will confirm the accounts it has found for your company and your competitors. If the companies are new to their system, it might take a little while to update, but usually no more than 24 hours. If you know that one of your competitors has an account on a network that Rival IQ didn't find, you can hover over it and suggest it to them. They'll usually add it within 24 hours. In the above example, the only accounts Rival IQ didn't find were the ones that didn't exist for the specified companies. Once everything is set up, you're ready to start your analysis. #2: Find Social Engagement Opportunities Begin your analysis with the social networks where your competitors have profiles and pages. This should tell you at a glance if you're missing a network that might be beneficial for your social media strategy. In this case, you might assume that out of all of the networks, Instagram is the least important because a few of your competitors don't have a presence there. But that might not always be true, which you'll see shortly. In addition to seeing what social networks your competitors are on, check to see which ones they have the largest audiences on. You can do this by clicking the Cross-Channel link in the left sidebar and then clicking on Detailed Metrics at the to...

Weird Google Search Console Data? Here’s Why.

by James Neff @ LSEO Digital Marketing Services

If you’ve logged into Google Search Console (GSC) lately you probably received a note from Google about a data misconfiguration in its Search Analytics Report. Between August 14th and 15th, webmasters experienced a slight decrease in numbers due to an internal logging issue. This comes on the heels of a purported data delay that Google...

The post Weird Google Search Console Data? Here’s Why. appeared first on LSEO Digital Marketing Services.

How to Use Content to Improve Customer Lifetime Value

by John Waldron @ GetResponse Blog – Online Marketing Tips

It’s well-documented that it’s both easier and cheaper to sell to an existing customer than it is to a new one. Indeed, according to Gartner, “65% of a company’s business comes from existing customers, and it costs five times as much to attract a new customer than to keep an existing one satisfied.” Paul Farris […]

The post How to Use Content to Improve Customer Lifetime Value appeared first on GetResponse Blog - Online Marketing Tips.

LinkedIn Ads: What Marketers Need to Know

LinkedIn Ads: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you advertise on LinkedIn? Have you considered LinkedIn advertising and want to learn more? To discover everything there is to know about LinkedIn ads, I interview AJ Wilcox. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview AJ Wilcox, a LinkedIn ad expert. His agency, B2Linked, specializes in business-to-business advertising and lead generation on LinkedIn. In addition to managing accounts, AJ also specializes in LinkedIn ads training. AJ explores the different types of ads available on LinkedIn. You'll discover what B2B marketers need to know about advertising on LinkedIn. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How AJ Got Into LinkedIn Ads AJ is a long-time digital marketer who started out doing search engine optimization (SEO) and Google AdWords. About four years ago, a company in Utah recruited AJ. On his first day, he laid out his plans for SEO, pay per click, and social media to the CMO. She gave him the go-ahead and also informed him that the company had started a pilot program with LinkedIn ads. "See what you can do with it," she said. AJ replied, "absolutely," and then turned around and started laughing to himself. He felt like a veteran at digital marketing, yet had never heard of LinkedIn ads. He jumped into the platform to learn about it to try to keep the egg off his face. Within about two weeks, one of the salespeople approached AJ, telling him how much they loved the leads they'd been getting. When AJ discovered through Salesforce that the leads were all sourced from LinkedIn, he realized there was something to it. Listen to the show to hear how AJ started his business, B2Linked. Why Consider LinkedIn Ads? AJ explains that while Facebook's and LinkedIn's ad platforms are very different, they share the same principles. That means that if you have something nailed on Facebook, it will probably work well on LinkedIn and vice versa. While AJ doesn't run Facebook ads for his clients, when he's compared similar campaigns from Facebook to LinkedIn, he's found his conversion rate on LinkedIn to be about double that of Facebook. Plus, the sales teams have told him the LinkedIn leads are much higher quality than the ones from Facebook. LinkedIn is by far the best for B2B targeting, he continues. You can target by job title, seniority, company, skills, specific group membership, geography, and years in business; information people aren't putting on Facebook. AJ shares what he believes are the two best uses of LinkedIn ads. Number one is recruitment and the other is promoting B2B products and services such as an SaaS company (software as a service). Those businesses charge a substantial ongoing rate ($6,000 to $7,000 per month) for access to their software and have a lifetime value of more than $15,000. If you have a lifetime value of under $15,000, AJ cautions, make sure your funnel and your processes are really ironed out on Facebook first, because LinkedIn's cost per click (CPC) is much higher than Facebook's. Listen to the show to discover how to calculate lifetime value. The Ad Types When you go to LinkedIn.com/ads and start a self-service account, you'll have access to two different ad units. AJ explains the first type is text ads. These ads appear in the right sidebar of the LinkedIn homepage (on desktop) and you'll often see three ads there. According to AJ, text ads have a low click-through rate because most people are banner-blind to them. If four people click on them out of every 10,000 times they're viewed, you're doing great, he says.

Online Reviews Are Important for Local Businesses

by Third Marble @ Third Marble Marketing

“How can online reviews affect my local business?” Have you ever bought anything on Amazon without reading the online reviews first? Not likely. That’s because reviews are not written by the company, they’re written by the users of the products or services. Not that everybody trusts online reviews as the only factor in a buying decision, […]

The post Online Reviews Are Important for Local Businesses appeared first on Third Marble Marketing.

How to Find More Customers With Twitter

How to Find More Customers With Twitter

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to find new customers for your business? Have you considered searching for them on Twitter? Thanks to public updates, searchable bios and a plethora of third-party tools, you can find customers on Twitter easier than you can on any other network. In this article I'll show you how to find your current and future customers on Twitter, without advertising. #1: Start With a Strong Profile Before you start looking for potential customers on Twitter, you need to make sure that any potential customers who visit your profile know who you are and what you do. Listen to this article: Start by visiting your Twitter profile and reading your bio. Make sure that any products, services and qualifications are clearly listed in your bio, along with your website link and location. If they're not, click Edit Profile and add them. Once you're finished, save your changes. To complete your profile, make sure that you pin a tweet at the top that highlights your business, products, services, free ebook, top case study or anything else you want to promote to potential customers. You can create a new tweet for this or use one you've recently tweeted. Click on the three dots beneath your tweet to pin it to the top of your profile. Pinning the tweet ensures that potential customers don't miss the message you're trying to send them. Once your profile is set, you can start searching for potential customers on Twitter. #2: Search for Potential Customers Using Their Bios Can you identify potential customers by keywords they use to define themselves and by their location? If so, you can use Followerwonk to discover them. This Twitter search engine allows you to search for people using the criteria shown here. You then get the following search results. As a free user of Followerwonk, you need to click through to the person's profile to follow or add him or her to a Twitter list. If you want to do the latter, start by going to your Twitter profile and clicking on the Lists tab (to the left of the Edit Profile button). Scroll down to find the Create New List button. Give your list a name that you'll recognize, add a description and set the list to Private. If it's set to Public, each user you add to this list will be notified. When you visit the profile of a potential customer, you can follow that person and/or add him or her to your newly created list. To add someone to a list, click the Settings wheel icon to the left of the Follow button. Now go to your Twitter list and see the news feed of updates from the potential customers you've added to your list. Use this list to start engaging with your potential customers. #3: Get Specific Tweets Delivered to Your Inbox Do you know your potential customers' needs or pain points? Do they share them on Twitter? If they do, you can get potential customers, primed to buy, delivered directly to your inbox. Start by using Twitter search to query a few things you think your potential customers might talk about on Twitter in relation to your products or services. For example, if you have a web hosting company, you might want to search for recommend web hosting ? -http -link to find people looking for recommendations for web hosting. The -http -link­ part will remove a majority of the results that contain links, which usually won't be tweets from potential customers. Once you find a few good searches, head over to IFTTT, sign up for a free account and create a new recipe. Start by selecting Twitter as the trigger channel. Next, choose New Tweet from Search as the trigger. Paste in your Twitter keyword search that generated some potential customers. Then select your choice of an instant email, email digest or Gmail notification as the action. The best option is an instant email or Gmail, as you want to be the first person to respond. Now customize the email you want to receive.

Get More Traffic by Optimizing the Free Website Google is Giving You

by Maverick Web Marketing @ Maverick Web Marketing

The post Get More Traffic by Optimizing the Free Website Google is Giving You appeared first on Maverick Web Marketing.

The 4 elements every event landing page needs

by Amber Humphrey @ Vertical Response Blog

Preparing to host a big event? A landing page may be just what you need to spread the word to your customers. Follow these optimization tips to create a landing page that encourages visitors to take action

The post The 4 elements every event landing page needs appeared first on Vertical Response Blog.

6 Tips to Grow Your Pinterest Marketing Results

6 Tips to Grow Your Pinterest Marketing Results

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your Pinterest account working for you? Want to take your Pinterest marketing to the next level? Tailoring your profile, boards and pins to appeal to your target audience will grow your followers and increase engagement. In this article you'll discover six ways to improve your Pinterest marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Optimize Your Page The best way to convince visitors to follow you is to optimize your Pinterest page. Here are some key areas to focus on. Profile For the business name, use your company's name or your name (if it's for your personal brand). Upload a relevant profile image, such as your company logo or an image with your company's name. You want to make it easy for people to recognize your brand page. If it's a personal page, add a photo of you smiling or laughing. Match your username with your business name. If the username is already taken or is too long, choose something similar to it or use an abbreviation. Write a convincing bio. In 160 characters, describe your business and let people know about the types of images and content you share on your Pinterest page. Add your town or city and other location details. This will help you attract local followers. Add your website and social media details. Don't forget to add your website and Twitter account. This information will be displayed right below your profile image. Add your Facebook account only if it's a personal page. (You don't have the option to add a Facebook business page yet.) Boards Make sure that your page has at least 10 boards. Place your most important or popular boards in the top row. That way they're displayed above the fold, and people will see them immediately when they visit your brand page. Optimize your boards by adding good board names, descriptions and cover images. Shake Up Learning's Pinterest boards have relevant cover images that contain the name of the board and their logo. For your cover image, you can use an existing pin from the board or create a unique image, pin it and choose it as the board's cover image. In the image you can include the name of the board and a call to action asking people to check out the board or follow it. Another option is to use a technique similar to pricing tables, where one option (usually the most popular) has a unique color so it stands out. To apply this tactic to your boards, use similar cover images for all of your boards but choose a unique image for your most popular board (or the one you want to drive followers to). Also create a few secret boards so you can save images to pin publicly later on. #2: Design Content to Support Goals Before you can determine what to pin, think about your goals. They might be to drive engagement and build an audience or to drive traffic. Most businesses choose a primary goal (such as driving traffic) and a secondary goal that complements the primary goal (like gaining more followers). Once you choose your goals, you can determine what to pin by reviewing your Pinterest analytics. To access this data, click the gear icon and choose Analytics from the drop-down menu. Your analytics page has three sections: Your Pinterest Profile, Your Audience and Activity from [Your Website]. In the Your Pinterest Profile section, find out how your pins are performing. Your pins are categorized depending on the impressions, clicks, repins and likes they've received. Depending on your goal, choose the category you want to view. If you want to drive engagement, for example, look for pins that have been repinned and liked most. If you want to drive more traffic, take a look at clicks. Scroll down the page to see your most popular boards. You can also adjust the date to see how your pins have performed during longer or shorter time periods. Next, visit the Your Audience section to look at your followers' demographics and interests. Browse the Demographics tab to look at the coun...

YouTube Success: How to Create a Successful YouTube Channel

YouTube Success: How to Create a Successful YouTube Channel

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use video in your marketing? Are you wondering how YouTube can help promote your business? To learn about how to get started with marketing your business with YouTube, I interview Gideon Shalwick for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Gideon Shalwick, an online video marketing expert. His blog and YouTube channel help businesses understand how to achieve success with YouTube. He also wrote the ebook Rapid Video Blogging. Gideon shares why YouTube is increasingly important for your business. You'll learn about the strategies you need to succeed and how to promote your videos to grow your audience. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: YouTube for Business Why is YouTube important for business? Over the last year or two, Gideon has seen a huge increase in interest from businesses when it comes to YouTube. In the past, it was hard to try to use YouTube as a business tool. Back then, people used it for different reasons. Today businesses have started to wake up to the opportunities. YouTube's statistics show more than 1 billion unique users to their site each month. There's over 6 billion hours of video watched each month on YouTube. That's almost an hour for every person on earth. This number has increased by 50% from last year. There are 100 hours of video uploaded to YouTube every minute. According to Nielsen, YouTube reaches more U.S. adults ages 18–34 than any other cable network. When you take these statistics into account, you can see where your potential target audience is. YouTube is also an amazing tool to make good connections with your audience. Now that people can consume video on their smartphones, the mobile uptake has been phenomenal. Gideon shares how more and more people have started to watch YouTube videos on their television screens. If you look at videos that went viral on YouTube in 2012, 8 out of 10 were not your average cat or baby video, they were all professionally produced by someone who knew what they were doing. It's a sign that the game has changed on YouTube. Gideon believes we are still at the start of the game when it comes to the opportunity available for business exposure. Our 2013 Social Media Marketing Industry Report shows that 69% of marketers plan on increasing their YouTube marketing in 2013. You'll hear Gideon's story of how he got started with YouTube and discovered how it was good for business. Listen to the show to find out why there are no competitors on YouTube, only collaborators. What you should think about when planning your YouTube strategy Gideon states that you need to be very strategic when you set up your YouTube channels. A lot of people think that it's about the views, but that's not the case. When Gideon thinks about his own strategy and when he helps others, he always starts with the Hedgehog Concept. You'll learn how this concept relates to two different kinds of businesses. The concept is defined as the overlap of three things: Your area of passion Your area of skill or the thing that you can become the best at How you can make money from it When these three things overlap like a Venn diagram, the middle is your Hedgehog Concept. You'll learn how this can help you identify your target audience's needs. The effort you put into it will help you grow your business for long-term success. Gideon believes the two functions that YouTube offers for business are exposure and relationshi...

Blog Comments Revisited: Why Major Bloggers Are Turning Comments Back On

Blog Comments Revisited: Why Major Bloggers Are Turning Comments Back On

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have comments enabled on your blog? Have you ever turned them off? To discover why big bloggers turned their comment systems back on, I interview Michael Hyatt and Brian Clark. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Michael Hyatt and Brian Clark. Michael is author of Platform and co-author of the new book, Living Forward: A Proven Plan to Stop Drifting and Get the Life You Want. He's also an avid blogger at MichaelHyatt.com and host of the This Is Your Life podcast. Brian is CEO of Rainmaker Digital, founder of Copyblogger, host of the Unemployable podcast, and evangelist for the Rainmaker Platform. Back in May 2014, I had Mark Schaefer and Tim McDonald (who was with Huffington Post) on the show to talk about the trend of big blogs shutting down their comments. This was spurred by a controversial post from Copyblogger entitled, "Why We’re Removing Comments on Copyblogger" from March 2014. In January 2015, Michael Hyatt published, "I’ve Pulled Comments from My Blog-Here’s Why." Michael and Brian will explore why the initial decision to remove comments was made and why those comments are now back. You'll also discover tips for how to grow your email list. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Blog Comments Revisited Why Brian shut down comments Brian starts by saying he is not the one who made the decision to shut down or bring back blog comments. He left that up to his editorial team. On Copyblogger, a lot of the article feedback shifted to social media, while the product development feedback had moved over to their customer base. As you mature as a company, you really start listening to your existing customers, as opposed to those "out in the wild," Brian explains. At the time, they had 150,000 customers and their strategy was to pay more attention to them. Part of the decision to remove comments (not discussed in the post by Sonia Simone, who ultimately made the decision with input from the editorial team) was a situation Brian calls the six-month class of current commenters. When you publish a marketing blog, other marketers use commenting as a traffic strategy. You'd have six months of the same people showing up, leaving comments: some stupid, some thoughtful. Then they'd move on and a new group of people would come into the comments. The practical reasons for removing comments were the shift to social and to eliminate spam. It's a big deal to moderate comments and have the editorial team spend a significant amount of time trying to figure out whether something is spam or legitimate. Copyblogger's experiment to remove comments lasted for over a year. Listen to the show to learn why Brian left comments on their podcast network, Rainmaker.fm. Why Michael shut down comments Michael says his reasons for shutting down comments on his blog were similar to Brian's. Additionally, Michael noticed the number of comments per post had been going down for some time, so he decided to do a little research. He discovered that in 2011, he averaged about 195 comments per blog post. Then in 2012, while his traffic went up, his comments dropped to an average of 179. Traffic went up again in 2013, and the average number of comments went down to 114. In 2014 blog traffic was up 74% over the previous year, but the average number of comments had dropped down to about 62 per post. Michael adds he read Greg McKeown's book, Essentialism, and thought he had to pare stuff back. The final straw for Michael, who was and is using Disqus as his commenting platform,

Purpose: How People Over Profit Leads to Business Opportunity

Purpose: How People Over Profit Leads to Business Opportunity

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Does your business have a purpose beyond making money? Want to discover how shifting your business priorities can make a huge difference? To learn how focusing on purpose and people leads to powerful marketing, I interview Dale Partridge. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Dale Partridge, the founder of Sevenly (a company that couples t-shirts and causes) and a start-up expert. He blogs over at TheDailyPositive.com, founded StartupCamp.com and he has a podcast by the same name. Dale's latest book is People Over Profit: Break the System, Live With Purpose, Be More Successful. In this episode we'll explore how Dale combines purpose and social to create success. You'll discover the business system you need to break in order to be more successful, as well as social media tips to drive traffic for your business. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Purpose Dale's story Dale always thought he was going to be a professional baseball player. When he broke his arm the summer between high school and college, his dreams fell apart. As a baseball pitcher, Dale felt pitchers know how to lead the team, so he decided to create a business. Dale started a fitness company, which grew rapidly but was unsatisfying. So he sold the business. After that he worked in the stock market for a while, before raising money and opening a rock-climbing gym. Dale thought things were going well until he got pulled into the yoga room by one of his business partners and was fired from his own company for being a "horrible leader." Dale changed. He explains how for a few years he went on a frenzy starting companies before hitting a wall. Dale realized chasing profits wasn't putting meaning in his soul. He wanted to figure out how to blend purpose and profit, and this was the beginning of Sevenly. He was 25. "I said, 'let's create a company where every week, we partner with a new charity,'" Dale recalls. "We would create products like shirts and hats and beanies and jackets, and any time somebody bought one of our products, we would give $7 to the charity that week. So if we sold 1,000 products, we'd give that charity $7,000." Sevenly sold 800 products the first week. A few months later, they grew to 10 employees, then 20 employees, and two years later, 45 employees. Sevenly launched on June 13, 2013. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=neHwgakQcGI Dale explains that seeing money not as the primary goal, but as a byproduct of helping a million people, was the shift. He got lost in something that was so much fun and literally changing the world. Sevenly has raised $4.2 million in $7 donations. Listen to the show to learn about the "aha" moment that set Dale on this path. The system businesses need to break Dale explains the cycle of companies. They often start with a cycle of honesty and move into an era of efficiency. When companies get big, they go from people over profit to people and profit, and become addicted to more. They start confusing being bigger with being better, he adds. What often comes after the efficient era is what Dale calls the deceptive era. This is when businesspeople start to lose their soul and forget why they started the company. At that point they either go out of business, or those who stick around enter the final apologetic era. That's where they earn back consumers' trust, and go back into the honest cycle. For example, Domino's Pizza was one of the worst companies in the world in the 1990s. They released a documentary called The Pizza Turnaround in...

How to Use LinkedIn Publisher Statistics to Refine Your Marketing

How to Use LinkedIn Publisher Statistics to Refine Your Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use LinkedIn Publisher? Want to get deeper engagement from your posts? LinkedIn Publisher now offers the ability to review stats for your published posts, which helps you refine messaging, target the right audience and directly engage with the people who interact with you. In this article I'll share how to access LinkedIn Publisher statistics and how to use them strategically. Listen to this article: How to Access LinkedIn Publisher Stats LinkedIn Publisher is a powerful platform because it's sticky. Your posts live on forever on your profile, and the content is searchable. It's good for positioning yourself as an expert in your industry and sharing relevant information with your followers. Your LinkedIn Publisher analytics show you how your content is doing, make sure it's reaching the right people and help you connect with those who are responding to your posts. It's great for content development and lead generation. You can access your LinkedIn statistics in a couple of places: on your profile just above your posts and on your author page (the URL that's associated with the page where your posts are listed). Click on See More, and then select a post to see its statistics. The three sections of analytics are See How Your Post Is Doing, Demographics of Your Readers and Who Is Responding to Your Posts. Here's a look at how to use each section to create more powerful content and increase visibility. #1: Track Publication Trends Go to the See How Your Post Is Doing section to discover if your posts are getting views. You can see your posts' visibility for the last 7 days, 15 days, 30 days, 6 months and 1 year. This analytics section also lets you view how many likes, shares and comments a particular post has received, as shown in the upper-right corner of the image below. After you publish a post, keep a close eye on the activity for the first week. Often visibility increases on the second, third and fourth day. Therefore, if you're writing a post that has a specific timeline (perhaps it relates to a project, product or webinar release), make sure you post it a day or two before you need people to see it. Also, try posting on different days of the week and see if your results change. John White, a successful LinkedIn published writer, recommends posting at about 8 p.m. Eastern Time. Not only is this a good time to get views in Europe, but it's also not too late for U.S. time zones to see your content. It's interesting to look at the long-term view also to see if there's some correlation between trending events and the visibility of your post. For example, if your post on the latest Apple products gets a lot of traffic, you may want to write posts whenever Apple releases new products. Build on any increased reach by resharing a popular post as an update on Facebook, LinkedIn and Twitter. If you like to keep a close eye on your metrics, see if there's a correlation between reshares and LinkedIn views. #2: Discover Reader Demographics Scroll down the page to see the demographics of your readers. LinkedIn shows you reader demographics related to the top four industries, titles, locations and traffic sources. Use the first three demographics (industries, titles and locations) to make sure you're attracting the right audience with your content. For example, if your niche demographic is marketing and advertising executives, but your content is attracting job-seekers in software design, you're probably using the wrong keywords and content. Also check to see what other people in your field are writing about to attract the correct audience. Then reframe your content so it targets the right demographics. You can always use LinkedIn Pulse to research what other people in your industry are writing about. As far as traffic sources are concerned, it might surprise you to find out how people get to your posts.

Local SEO in 2017: 5 simple ways to dominate local search

Local SEO in 2017: 5 simple ways to dominate local search


Search Engine Land

New to local search? Wondering where to start? Columnist Sherry Bonelli offers five tactics to help you kick off your local SEO campaign.

Facebook and Twitter User Behavior Changes: New Research

Facebook and Twitter User Behavior Changes: New Research

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your business on Facebook and Twitter? Have you considered sharing news with your audience? Research indicates that people are using Facebook and Twitter for more than connecting with friends and brands. They're now looking to these platforms for updates on current events. In this article you'll discover how the way people use Facebook and Twitter is shifting, and how brands can respond. Listen to this article: #1: More People Get Their News From Facebook and Twitter A July 2015 study from Pew Research Center reveals that increasing numbers of Twitter and Facebook users visit the platforms to get news. Of the over 2,000 study participants, 63% now depend on both channels for updates on national events and political issues, big leaps from 2013 numbers. Twitter, which was more news-oriented from the beginning, didn't have as dramatic a leap: 52% to 63% during the two-year period. Those reporting they use Facebook for news, on the other hand, grew from 47% in 2013 to 63% in 2015, or 16%. While the opportunity to stay abreast of friends and family events gets users on Facebook initially, it's news (sports, science, technology, business and entertainment) that keeps them there. As the chart below shows, Facebook's user numbers didn't budge from 2013 to 2014. Despite the inevitable slowdown, today 71% of Internet users have a Facebook account, and 70% of those go to the site daily. Forty-five percent go there several times a day. By following friends, brands, organizations and news outlets, Facebook (and Twitter) users have created their own customized newspapers. They seem to like their new handiwork. While Twitter's audience numbers made an impressive 28% leap from 2013 to 2014, the platform's failure to gain the ubiquity of Facebook has disappointed many. Twitter remains hard at work creating a niche for live-tweeting events, television shows and sports, but it hasn't shown much promise for the retailers who pay for ads. Key takeaway: As Facebook and Twitter mature, their audience growth rates are leveling off. Younger audiences abandoned Facebook for Instagram, but baby boomers, Gen Xers and mature holdouts finally claimed their profiles. Brands should align their marketing content with current events to engage users. #2: Twitter Is the Go-to Platform for Breaking News The Pew Research Center image at the beginning of this article reveals another interesting fact: Even though most Twitter users tweet just once or a few times a week (far less often than Facebook users engage), if there is a nationwide crisis, exciting sports game, gaffe by a politician or a celebrity scandal, they flock to Twitter. Numbers for those who report they follow breaking news on Twitter (59%) are nearly double those who say they do so on Facebook (31%). Twitter is the go-to destination for up-to-the-minute news and comments on that news. Twitter is also the channel where sports fans and news junkies engage by sharing their opinions. Users do more than just read the headlines, they engage. As the graphic above shows, more than half of users tweet at least once about news each week. Also, while the majority of accounts that Twitter users follow are friends and family, the majority of tweets in their news feeds come from news outlets and journalists. In the image below, you can see that while just 14% of the accounts Twitter users follow are news outlets, 33% of the tweets in their Twitter feed are from these outlets. Breaking it down further, the most popular news outlets are sports (with 35% of Twitter news followers receiving sports tweets), business/science/technology (14% getting news on these topics) and civic and political (12%). Keep in mind that in this study, the final sample providing Twitter data was small. Pew drew from its original group of 3,212 respondents only those who self-identified as Twitter users, provided their Twitter handles for analysis and had valid publi...

How to Set Up a Shop Section on Your Facebook Page

How to Set Up a Shop Section on Your Facebook Page

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Does your business sell products? Have you considered setting up a shop on Facebook? Facebook allows you to add a Shop section to your Facebook page so customers can buy your products directly from Facebook. In this article you'll discover how to add a Shop section to your Facebook page. Listen to this article: Check if You Have Access to the Shop Section To find out if you have access to the Shop Section feature on your Facebook page, visit your page and look for the Add Shop Section link below your Facebook page cover photo. You can see Shop sections in action on Facebook pages such as American Kennel Club, Basics Products, The Awkward Yeti, ARDO USA, and Snow Lizard Products. Snow Lizard Products is powered by Shopify, so you can compare it to the others to get a feel for the difference between shops powered by Facebook versus those powered by ecommerce solution providers. If you're a Shopify or Bigcommerce customer, you can learn more about selling on your Facebook page using their respective links. So the good news is that it's not a feature available only to major retailers. The bad news is that it seems to appear at random. If you have the Add Shop Section link on your Facebook page, follow these steps to start selling products on your page. #1: Click the Add Shop Section Link Clicking the Add Shop Section link brings up a prompt explaining what this section will allow you to do. Click the Add Shop Section button to continue. #2: Agree to Merchant Terms and Policies Next, you're asked to agree to Merchant Terms and Policies on Facebook. Be sure to read these over. They include important information about what you can sell on your Facebook page, how problems will be handled during the "test phase" of the Shop Section launch, return and refund policies, and other details. #3: Add Business and Payment Processing Details Once you've agreed to Merchant Terms and Policies, you'll enter your business details and set up payment processing with Stripe. If you have a Stripe account already, log into that account first and then click the link to connect to an existing Stripe account. Otherwise, you'll need to set up a Stripe account and then proceed with the following setup. Once you've finished this setup, your call to action button changes to a Shop Now button, which takes page visitors to your Shop section. #4: Describe What You Sell Next, describe what your Facebook page shop sells in 200 characters or fewer. #5: Add Products to Your Shop Now you're ready to add products to your shop. To do this, click the Add Products button. You'll then be able to configure the following details for each of your products. You can find Facebook's detailed guidelines and recommendations for photos on the product listing guidelines page. They include the following: You must have one image for each product. The image must be a real image of the product, not a graphical representation, illustration, or icon of the product. It's recommended that the image is a minimum of 1,024 x 1,024 pixels. It's recommended that the product image has a white backdrop or captures the product in use in real-life situations. The image cannot contain text (calls to action or promo codes), offensive content, advertising or promotional material, watermarks, or time-sensitive information. You'll also need to follow the guidelines and recommendations for your product description. They include the following: The description should pertain to the product only and be easily digestible, making use of short sentences and bullet points. The description cannot contain HTML, phone numbers, email addresses, long titles, excessive punctuation, all letters capitalized or in lowercase, book or movie spoilers, or external links. Finally, you'll find a few guidelines and recommendations about product variants. In short, you can have only four variants per product and va...

Failing to Start: Why We Accept Mediocrity and How to Change

Failing to Start: Why We Accept Mediocrity and How to Change

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you accept your lot in life? Are you afraid of starting something new? To learn how to accept who we are and how to make a change, I interview Seth Godin for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Seth Godin, the bestselling author of Purple Cow, Tribes, Linchpin and many others. His most recent book is The Icarus Deception. He's also the CEO of Squidoo. Seth shares his experiences of having an idea and going for it, even if you think it might fail. You'll learn why he thinks everyone should be willing to fail and why art is so important. You'll also discover how Seth used Kickstarter to fund The Icarus Deception. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Taking Risks The idea behind The Icarus Deception The idea behind The Icarus Deception was Seth's manifesto rant that will hopefully shine some light on the revolution that he thinks we are living with right now. Seth explains how people don't understand the impact of the Industrial Revolution of 1880–1910. Before 1880, there was no such thing as jobs. The unemployment rate was zero and most people worked on the land or for their family business. The Industrial Revolution changed this and it also changed government, regulations, school, culture and society. It invented the weekend. We accept all this because it happened before we were born. You'll discover why right now we have a new revolution that is replacing the fading industrial age. What's happening now is that we have a revolution built with the connection we have about ideas, people to people and the ability to reach markets. We'd have never thought back then that one person working by him- or herself anywhere in the world with a laptop could touch a million or a billion people. Seth talks about how PSY, who made the Gangnam Style video in South Korea, was viewed 900 million times and how this was impossible 15 years ago. When Seth wrote Permission Marketing 12 years ago, he didn't realize that he was writing about a different way to make connections with people. He believes that it isn't about Facebook or Twitter, it's about a passion for doing things that might not work. The industrial age is about polishing things so they do work. It's the giant gap. Seth wants to teach people to like the idea of doing something that might not work. Listen to the show to find out more about why it's connections that create all of the value in business. Why the commonly told version of the Icarus story is no longer relevant Seth believes that all myths are true, to the extent that although there are no supernatural beings involved, they're about us. Myths have developed over thousands of years to talk to human beings about how to be our best selves. The myth involves Icarus and his father Daedalus stranded on an island. Daedalus fashions some wings for his son and says, "Put these on, but don't fly too high because if you do, the sun will melt the wax and you will die. But more importantly, don't fly too low because the mist in the water will get in your wings and you will surely perish." Seth explains the reason why the industrialists want us to fly too low is because they benefit from this. Listen to the show to find out why Seth thinks we are flying too low and what he wants us to do about it. The meaning of art Seth shares his definition of art. Art is the work of a human being doing something that has never been done before,

Marketing Mistakes Costing You Money

by SearchEngineOptimization @ Simply Design

Is your company making the most of its presence online? Many businesses tend to jump blindly into online marketing out of necessity, but may find themselves entangled in a mess of mistakes. If you want to make sure your company earns the sort of ROI it deserves with its web marketing, here are a few […]

The post Marketing Mistakes Costing You Money appeared first on Simply Design.

The Low Down On Search Engine Optimization

by Edward @ Search Engine Optimization For Business

Ensure that you have an excellent summary tag, so that internet search engine will certainly route your target customers to your site. This certain tag should be thirty words or less. This page ought to be smaller sized than 100 KB in size. Consider the opportunities of podcasting. Podcasting is a wonderful audio or video..

The post The Low Down On Search Engine Optimization appeared first on Search Engine Optimization For Business.

How to Create Quality Facebook Canvas Ads

How to Create Quality Facebook Canvas Ads

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to reach more mobile Facebook users? Wondering how Canvas ads might help? Facebook Canvas lets you create full-page, interactive mobile ads that work like landing pages for tablet and smartphone users. In this article you'll discover how to create quality Facebook Canvas ads. Listen to this article: Why Facebook Canvas? Facebook Canvas is a new tool for advertisers, built specifically for the mobile platform. Facebook users can scroll through Canvas ads to view photos, watch videos, and discover your company's story. Canvas is free to use beyond the standard Facebook advertising costs, and its drag-and-drop interface requires no coding knowledge. The ads are fully immersive, so there's nothing else on the page vying for users' attention when they're scrolling through or clicking on the content in your ads. And while interactive media is normally a concern because of loading times (long loading times drive people away in every corner of the web), Canvas ads load almost as soon as they're selected. This is because they're hosted on Facebook rather than redirected to an outside page. In fact, they can download up to 10 times faster than general mobile web pages. Here are some ways you can use Facebook Canvas to maximize the impact of video ads for your business. #1: Complement Videos With Text and Images To use Canvas effectively, you need to take advantage of everything it has to offer. The tool allows you to share much of the same content you can post on your website, such as articles, photographs, videos, and even products. You have the option to display photos in carousel format, which Facebook introduced last year. You can add up to five images with optional links in one Canvas ad. Facebook is slowly rolling out the ability to create a carousel of videos as well. While there may be an emphasis on video in Canvas ads, you should also consider using other content options to better tell your company's story, highlight your products, and pique consumer interest. A genuinely compelling multimedia Canvas ad will capture attention and engage your audience, which can translate to increased web traffic, more conversions, and more sales. You can also use your video content in a variety of ways. For example, you might create a video that highlights the core principles of your brand and then include a carousel of products. Alternatively, you might include a series of customer testimonials or behind-the-scenes highlights of your company. Tailor your video to your marketing goals, whether that's greater brand awareness or increased sales, to get the best results. Kit and Ace used this video in a Canvas ad to bring awareness to their brand and get their line of all-day technical performance apparel in front of their target market. . #2: Tell a Story With a Series of Video Clips Facebook allows a maximum of 2 minutes of video for your canvas, but you can split up the video content however you want. One tactic is to use a series of 15- or 20-second clips, as in this social media campaign for Evan Williams' Bourbon. . Not only are shorter clips more likely to hold your audience's attention than longer videos, but they also give you the freedom to explore different facets of your business or highlight individual customer experiences. This greater flexibility in storytelling allows you to truly guide your audience through the experience and direct them toward what you want them to see. #3: Draw the Viewer in With Immersive Content Videos let you harness the power of both visuals and words to tell your company's story. It's important, therefore, that you come across as genuine and sincere. Design your videos (and your entire canvas) to elicit some sort of emotion, whether it's funny, heartfelt, or exciting, and then tailor your words to that goal. Keep your language simple, but emotional. Never use business jargon or buzzwords in your video ads.

Content for Business: How to Build Your Business on a Solid Content Foundation

Content for Business: How to Build Your Business on a Solid Content Foundation

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a great idea for a business? Wondering if content marketing will help move the needle? To discover what it takes to build a content-driven business, I interview Joe Pulizzi. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Joe Pulizzi, founder of the Content Marketing Institute, author of the book Epic Content Marketing and the founder of Content Marketing World, the leading conference for content marketers. Joe's latest book is Content Inc.: How Entrepreneurs Use Content to Build Massive Audiences and Create Radically Successful Businesses. Joe will explore how you can build a sustainable small business with smart content marketing. You'll discover the six steps to take to create a content business in any niche. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Content for Business When and why Joe started the Content Marketing Institute Joe shares how he got into the content marketing industry. He was vice president of custom media (also known as content marketing) at business publishing company Penton Media until 2007. At Penton, Joe and his team helped advertisers who wanted to do something unique tell their stories. For example, if a company like Microsoft wanted to tell a story to an executive audience, Joe and his team would help them create an ongoing newsletter, a magazine, blog series or webinar series. Joe did that for seven years. Joe left Penton at the end of March 2007 and wrote his first blog post titled "Why Content Marketing?" on April 26, 2007. That led up to Joe launching Junta42, which he says was basically the eHarmony for content marketing. The idea was to match brand sites that wanted to outsource some portion of the content process (creation or distribution) with agencies that would pay for the service to get the leads. Joe explains how in 2008, with no money, no paid distribution and about 2,000 subscribers, he decided it was time to build relationships with influencers. He started a research project called The Top 100 Content Marketing Blogs. (I was on the list first for White Papers and then Social Media Examiner.) He notified everybody who was on the list, and it just took off. Fast-forward to 2009, Joe shares, the model was working and they matched up about 1,000 projects. However, they were still having trouble getting companies to pay for a subscription to the service, even though they were driving leads to them. After his best case study (they sent a $1 million+ customer to an agency, and the agency decided not to renew their subscription), it finally hit Joe that this business was not going to work. Although Joe was "in love with his product," he finally figured out the key was to fall in love with your audience and focus on their needs and pain points. His audience was asking for training, education, consulting and speaking. They weren't even ready for a matching service, because they didn't even know how to create a content marketing strategy. Joe pivoted to the education and training concept and launched Content Marketing Institute six months later. That was May 2010. "At that moment we said we were going to create the leading online destination for content marketing, the leading magazine and the leading event," Joe recalls. "And within two years we were able to do that." Listen to the show to hear how Joe and I first connected, as well as the similarities between our projects. Why now is the time to get into a content-driven business Content Inc. is Joe's fourth book. The other three are content marketing–related and f...

Blogging for Business: How Content Can Improve Your Sales

Blogging for Business: How Content Can Improve Your Sales

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you wondering how a blog can help your business? Are you trying to figure out how content can improve your sales? To learn more about the connection of blogging and content marketing, I interview Marcus Sheridan for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Marcus Sheridan, founder of The Sales Lion and author of the ebook Inbound and Content Marketing Made Easy. Marcus shares insights into the struggles marketers have to get results from business blogging. You'll learn what to focus your efforts on and a few simple tactics that will work. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Content Marketing for Business What blogging is today Marcus explains why blogging is essentially about teaching the people in your industry. He shares why it's important for your business to be better at teaching than anyone else in the world. You'll hear why social media is not in your control and why you need to have your content on your own blog. Marcus shares how your blog helps you to communicate with your prospects and existing customers and the different ways you can use your content for your business. Listen to the show to find out the power of producing your own content. How to use content marketing for your blog The expression content marketing has exploded in popularity over the last 18 months and Marcus thinks that it's going to become a more common marketing approach within the next 12-18 months. Marcus shares how content marketing helped River Pools & Spas become #1 on Google and how a single article made his company $1.2 million in sales. Learn why content is the greatest sales tool in the world when used properly and how it can shorten the sales cycle. Listen to the show to find out the rewards behind the principle of communication and great teaching. How to produce great content You'll learn why it's important to talk to the reader in your voice and how to deepen their trust in you and your business. You'll also pick up some useful tips to create great content: Speak in your own voice. Eliminate the marketing message from your content. Make your blog your education center to answer all of the questions your prospects and clients ask. Offer more articles for readers to look at examples. Add a call to action to help your readers learn more. Listen to the show to discover the benefits of using your own voice and keeping it real. How to connect blogging to business results Marcus shares why it's so important for your business to be aware of how your content performs in communicating with your prospects. You'll discover why he believes every salesperson should participate in the company blog. And Marcus shares his hottest blogging and content marketing tips for businesses today: Approach content marketing as a teacher. Discover your content marketing tipping points that impact your business results. He says, "If you hang around the barbershop long enough, you're going to get your hair cut." If people spend enough time on your site, they will become customers. You have got to put the content out there and make it valuable, and you've got to be a teacher. When you do, you'll start to see amazing benefits. Listen to the show to hear how your business can benefit from blogging and content marketing. Survival Tip: Social Sharing The secret to getting the results you want from the content you create is to embed social share triggers in key strategic locations withi...

How to Get Results From Facebook Ads on a Budget

How to Get Results From Facebook Ads on a Budget

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Facebook ads effectively for your business? Do you want to get results without spending a lot of money? By selecting a well-targeted audience with your Facebook ads, you can reach your goals without breaking the bank. In this article I'll show you how to set up your Facebook ads to generate big results on a small budget. Listen to this article: Set Proper Goals Before you spend any money on Facebook ads, think about the objectives for your ad campaign. Once you've set your goals, you can better determine your budget. The four most popular Facebook campaign goals for businesses are building a targeted fan base, promoting owned content, generating conversions and promoting a local business. Here's a look at what you can do with a budget of 5 to 10 Euros or Dollars per day. #1: Build a Targeted Fan Base When you get started with Facebook advertising, growing the audience for your Facebook page is the logical first step. Fans are more likely to opt into your list, read your content and buy from you than non-fans. In other words, when highly targeted people like your page, it's an indication that they want to see your content. There are many ways to target Facebook ads to grow your audience. To get the most from a small budget, focus first on attracting the people who know you best. This audience has already invested in you and is likely to convert at a higher rate and lower cost than any other group. Target Your Email List If you want to create a custom audience based on your customer email list, go to Audiences in your Facebook Ads Manager. In the upper-right corner of the page, click Create Audience and select Custom Audience from the drop-down menu. Then click Customer List in the Create a Custom Audience dialog box. To create your custom audience, upload a .CSV file with your customers' email addresses. Facebook then populates the audience and gets it ready for you to target with your ads. Target Website Visitors One of the most powerful Facebook ad types is the website custom audience. The people who visit your website already know you and are more likely to respond positively to your ads. After you've targeted a custom audience for your email list (as described above), move on to promoting your page to website visitors. To create a website custom audience, you need to install a custom audience pixel in the header of your website. Facebook lets you create an audience based on traffic in the last 30, 60, 90 and 180 days. Set up an audience for each option. You might target this audience for people who have visited your site, but aren't yet fans of your page. Target a Lookalike Audience Depending on your website traffic, it's likely that you'll always have an audience to target. But if you want to expand your options, consider lookalike audiences. You can create lookalike audiences based on your custom audience of email subscribers or website visitors. Facebook will match your database within a 1% similarity, giving you a narrower audience to target. Access Audiences from the Ads Manager and then create a lookalike audience for the location you want to target. Target Interests If you're a new business with a small customer list and limited website traffic, you may be wondering how to target your Facebook ads. Interest targeting can be effective if you do it right, but overall it's generally less effective than the options above. The reason for this is that when you target a page or interest, Facebook gives you an audience that includes people who've expressed an interest or liked pages associated with your audience. If you ask Facebook to optimize your ads, they will show your ads to the people most likely to take action. Split-Test Your Audiences After you've set up your audiences, it's a good idea to test each one over a 72-hour time period. A good rule of thumb is to spend 5 to 10 Euros or Dollars...

How to Setup a Google Plus My Business Account

by Third Marble @ Search Engine Optimization | Third Marble Marketing

Before you can create a Google+ My Business Account, you need to have a personal profile. If you have one you’d like to link to your account, go ahead and sign in to that account first. If you don’t already have a personal account, create one first. Once you’ve done that, you’re ready to proceed. […]

The post How to Setup a Google Plus My Business Account appeared first on Third Marble Marketing.

Did You Notice Any Difference From “Mobilegeddon”

by Brad Broekema @ Minneapolis SEO by Growth Marketing LLC | Digital Marketing Services

It’s been a little more than 8 days since Google started rolling out the update that some sites are calling “Mobilegeddon” so what has happened? A few days ago Searchmetrics posted a study of the winners and losers, the biggest winners were TV Troupes and Entertainment Tonight. While the biggest losers were Reddit and NBC […]

This post appeared first on Minneapolis SEO by Growth Marketing LLC | Digital Marketing Services. Connect with us on Facebook, Google+ or Yelp.

5 Marketing Tools You Can’t Live Without

by Jamie Turner @ GetResponse Blog – Online Marketing Tips

One of the great things about the web is that there are always new marketing tools you can use to help you improve your website, attract new customers, or grow your business. But there’s a problem with that. The problem is there’s not enough time in the day to analyze all the tools and to […]

The post 5 Marketing Tools You Can’t Live Without appeared first on GetResponse Blog - Online Marketing Tips.

Seo Company Charlotte | Search Engine Optimization Asheville

Seo Company Charlotte | Search Engine Optimization Asheville


Way James Design

Local search listings are most obviously the search results that show up amongst the normal listings when you perform a Google search with a ‘local’ focus.

Best Local SEO Strategies for Your Business

by admin @ SEO Company India, SEO Services, Digital Marketing Company SEO India – WebMatriks Technology

What is local SEO? Local SEO is a promising technique for local online marketing, which allows you to promote your […]

The post Best Local SEO Strategies for Your Business appeared first on SEO Company India, SEO Services, Digital Marketing Company SEO India - WebMatriks Technology.

Local SEO for Small Businesses

by Adam Coombs @ Unamo Blog

Local SEO for Small Businesses The organic search results are already a tough place to fight for top rankings. Local search results? Even harder. Besides traditional SEO, there are a variety of local SEO ranking factors that small businesses and even larger franchises have to worry about when jockeying for the top positions for localized […]

SEO Facts to Consider When Creating a Marketing Plan

by Shannon Flynn @ Search Engine Optimization – Driven Local

Search Engine Optimization sounds a bit like gibberish to many small business owners. By the time you form a foundation of knowledge and feel comfortable creating a business plan for online marketing, strategies may already be outdated. With technology constantly changing, it can be very frustrating keeping up with the trends on your own. As […]

The post SEO Facts to Consider When Creating a Marketing Plan appeared first on Driven Local.

Blog Comments: Should Your Blog Shut Down Comments?

Blog Comments: Should Your Blog Shut Down Comments?

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you like to get comments on your blog? Have you ever wondered if you should allow comments or shut them down? To learn about why blog comments are valuable to your business, I interview Mark Schaefer and Tim McDonald for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Mark Schaefer, who is a college educator and author of four books. His blog is called Grow and his latest book is Social Media Explained. Tim McDonald is the director of community at the Huffington Post, founder of My Community Manager and a member of the No Kid Hungry Social Council. Mark and Tim share what comments mean to their blogs, and some of the challenges they face with moderation. You'll discover the upside of blog comments, how you can use them to improve your business and moderation tactics for different-sized blogs. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Blog Comments A long time ago, Seth Godin shocked the industry when he decided to shut down comments on his blog. He didn't really care for comments—for him it was more about generating daily content. More recently, Brian Clark and his team at Copyblogger decided to shut down their blog comments. As a result of this, there has been a lot of interesting dialogue in this space. The upside of blog comments Mark explains how there are a lot of different business reasons behind blogs, and it's up to each individual business to make the decision whether to have comments on their blog. He says that there are probably some very good economic reasons why Copyblogger decided to remove comments, but Mark thinks that blog comments are the economic engine. The community that Mark has built on his blog has led to many different business benefits for him and his community. You can get to know people in the comment area, which can lead to collaborations, customers and suppliers. Mark feels that a lot of influence takes place in the blog communities, where you can develop strong relationships compared to the ones you make on Twitter or Facebook. You'll hear other great benefits that come from comments on your blog, and why Mark sees them as a gift every day. The Huffington Post has a little bit of a different viewpoint, just because of their sheer size. They face a bigger challenge because of the number of comments they get every day. It's hard for them to actually interact and engage with every single commenter. Tim explains at this point, it's a matter of them looking at some of the prolific commenters on their site and working with them. They've found that some commenters don't want to write for them, they are happy just commenting. Listen to the show to find out the cost of engagement, and why you can engage yourself broke. Some of the challenges the Huffington Post faces with blog comments Tim says that the biggest issue for them is to figure out how to allow people to share and express their thoughts on content, while appreciating that the standard for commenting is different from their editorial standards. They have to find ways to moderate this effectively with the different languages, countries and time zones. You can't replace a human when it comes comment moderation. You need to find a balance between using technology, combined with what people can do. You'll hear how the Huffington Post deals with heated dialogue and negative comments on their blogs. When it comes to dealing with spam, last year they made all commenters authenticate ...

How to Enhance Customer Experience With Social Media

How to Enhance Customer Experience With Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you have happy customers? Want to use social media to help keep them that way? Giving people an awesome experience on social media increases customer satisfaction and builds long-term loyalty. In this article you'll find five ways to improve your customers' experience with social media. Listen to this article: #1: Show Your Gratitude To keep your customers happy and gain a true edge over the competition, be sure your customers know they're seen and appreciated. Proactively reach out to fans and followers on a regular basis. Make your message truly resonate by keeping it personal. Innocent Drinks has more than 200,000 Twitter followers, and they take time to reply to and retweet fans who mention them. A treat is a great method to show your customers gratitude. Do customers regularly order from your web shop? Send them a thank-you note on social media. You can even offer them a small incentive, such as a personalized discount on their favorite items. While this will boost traffic to your website, your customers' happiness level will get an even greater lift. #2: Ask for Your Fans' Opinions Since the rise of social media, it's become a lot easier to reach out to customers and incorporate their preferences into your products and services. Your fans, especially your brand advocates, love to share their thoughts on their beloved products. So give them something to chime in about. #SamsoniteXLiberty - B-Lite or Cosmolite? pic.twitter.com/QV9CWTiMuW — Samsonite (@MySamsonite) June 26, 2015 One of the easiest, most straightforward means of asking for fan feedback is to create a short poll. While asking these kinds of questions on your website might be distracting for fans, social networks are the perfect arena for them. #3: Integrate Feedback When you stay in touch with your customers on social media, it's easy to see what does and doesn't resonate with them. General Mills learned through listening to their customers online and monitoring the right keywords on social media that families weren't just cooking with Pillsbury Dough. They also use it to make shapes and designs for fun as a family activity. By studying these insights, General Mills revitalized their brand and started focusing on the product's family activity value. This Pillsbury Dough holiday commercial is true to the brand. Gathering feedback is key, but it's meaningless if you don't do anything with it. Create a document or spreadsheet with all customer feedback, and then separate suggestions and complaints. Integrate the suggestions, deal with complaints (see #3), but also add them to your document so you can keep track of successful ways to handle them in the future. Review customer feedback regularly and integrate it into your brand activities. #4: Solve Issues Promptly Another way to keep customers happy and show them you care is to solve any issues promptly, whether it's a question or complaint. That means constantly monitoring social media accounts so you can see comments and reply as soon as possible. Set up a unique company policy with a step-by-step program to showcase how you want to handle complaints. Also, depending on the type of business you're in, decide how to rectify certain situations. For example, if someone is unhappy with your service, do you give a refund or a discount? Take it a step further and try to understand why your customer had an issue or question to begin with, and keep track of how frequently he or she contacts your business. When you make an unhappy customer into a happy one, you typically get a brand advocate as a result. Also, if your business finds itself in a social media crisis, no matter what the type or source, own up to it and address it immediately. Your customers' patience, and the customer experience in general, gets challenged the most during problem times. Identify keywords and set up alerts to stay on top of the situation.

6 Social Media WordPress Plugins for Bloggers

6 Social Media WordPress Plugins for Bloggers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your blog taking full advantage of social media plugins? Looking for tools to help grow your following and encourage sharing? The right WordPress plugins make it easy to grow your social media following and increase social shares. In this article you'll discover six WordPress plugins that’ll make your blog more social. Listen to this article: #1: Showcase Your Instagram Photos Pictures are worth a thousand words, and Instagram is all about the pictures. Feature Instagram images and posts in a widget on your blog to help send new users to your Instagram profile, as well as to provide vibrant, alluring images for your blog. The plugin that best lives up to this task is the appropriately titled Instagram Feed. It's another free tool that's easy to use and offers a lot of value. Use it to increase social engagement by automatically sharing your Instagram images with your blog readers. Instagram Feed also offers these handy features: Display images from multiple Instagram accounts. Choose the size of the images. Provide a Load More option that allows people to load more of your Instagram images. Because users often still flock to platforms like Facebook and Twitter first, having an Instagram feed on your blog is a great way to send your audience to your Instagram in hopes they'll become new followers. #2: Feature Your Twitter Feed Twitter is a powerful social networking platform and being able to showcase some of your Twitter activity on your blog can be very effective. WP Twitter Feeds is a free widget that simplifies the process, saving you from having to copy and paste code from Twitter. You just install the plugin and choose where you want to place the widget. The plugin gives you the option to exclude replies to your tweets and show or hide Twitter intents. It connects through the API, so it never has access to or requires your password. Feature your latest tweets to give your blog social credibility and make it seem more alive and active to new visitors. It also helps connect your Twitter and your blog, making them seem like two parts of a whole. #3: Make Pinning Effortless If you actively use Pinterest as part of your social media marketing and want to keep your plugins both free and simple, the Pin It button is a good tool to use. The button will let people pin your content without ever leaving your blog. This is especially helpful if you're a small business that doesn't use Facebook or Twitter, and you want to focus on making the posts, products and images on your blog more pinnable. Use this tool to help users not only share your content on Pinterest, but also save it to their own boards. The Pin It Button plugin comes in two different versions: the lite version, which is free, and the pro version, which comes with pricing plans starting at $29. The lite version offers these options: Let the pinner choose an image. Use a default pre-selected image for the pin being the first pin of the post. Hide the Pin It button on certain posts. Pick an official Pin It button in different sizes and colors. In addition to these options, the pro version offers other features, including: Add a Pin It button when a user hovers over an image. Provide Twitter, Facebook and Google+ sharing buttons. Add a Pin It button under each image. #4: Distribute New Content Automatically Jetpack is a great tool for anyone who has a WordPress blog. It offers features like enhanced security, optimized image performance and centralized management of other plugins, post scheduling and more. But the social media integration features alone would make it worth using. This tool will share your blog posts to your social channels automatically, right after you publish them. You can also create custom messages to share along with the posts. People typically set up Jetpack to share new posts to Facebook and Twitter automatically,

9 Time-Saving Tools for Social Media Marketers

9 Time-Saving Tools for Social Media Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you need to spend less time on repetitive social media tasks? Are you looking for tools that let you balance automation with a personal touch? In this article, you'll discover nine tools to help marketers save time while maintaining a human presence on social media. Listen to this article: Relationship-building Tools Just like any relationship, connecting on social media starts with finding the right people and reaching out in a human way. Here are some automation tools to help you do that. #1: Notifier Linking to other people's amazing content not only helps establish your own authority, but is also one of the best ways to make meaningful connections. If you're smart about leveraging those connections, you'll reach out directly every time you include someone else in your own work. With Notifier, simply enter the URL into an article you've published (whether on your own site or as a guest contributor) and the tool will pull out all of the people mentioned in the post, tag them based on their Twitter handles, and queue up those shares via Buffer. Here's what a recent article pulled in. Notifier then lets you select how many mentions you want to include in each share and will schedule them to drip out over a chosen time frame. #2: Leadfeeder Visitors pass through your digital presence every day by browsing on your website, looking at your product or services pages, or maybe even consuming your content, all without submitting their information. This means that most of the time you have no digital record that those visitors even exist (outside of raw Google Analytics traffic counts). Leadfeeder is especially valuable to B2B organizations, because it will connect your onsite Google Analytics with your visitors' off-site social profiles so you can see who's coming to your site, which company they're from, and what they're interested in. Once you've identified your visitors, you can easily assign visitors to a campaign, customize your automated responses based on what they've shown interest in, and then measure the results. #3: Socedo Many marketers overlook the bottom-line benefits of lead generation on social media because they haven't found the right tool to automate prospecting and report key metrics like testing. Similar to Leadfeeder, Socedo is another great tool that helps you zero in on your ideal prospects via Twitter and LinkedIn, so you can collect their profile information and add them to your sales pipeline and CRM. Most notably, Socedo's analytics provide robust reporting that links directly to platforms like HubSpot. This allows you to see exactly how specific campaigns have paid off, both on engagement and ultimate conversions. Having a system in place that treats social leads differently from more heavy-handed email campaigns is vital, especially if you want to stay human. Commerce Tools When it comes to advertising, selling, and customer service on social, things get even more inhuman than merely connecting with new leads. Here are three tools that strike an excellent balance among making the sale, supporting current customers, and being genuinely social. #4: Yotpo User-generated marketing in the form of reviews and recommendations is one of the most powerful purchase drivers online. While many websites feature reviews and testimonials, they drop the ball when it comes to sharing those same golden nuggets natively on social media. Enter Yotpo. Yotpo will incentivize reviews by offering bonuses or coupons to your existing customers. It will collect your reviews in a centralized database for easy access and allow you to instantly "push" your reviews both to your website and your social streams. Take Nest Bedding, for instance. Using Yotpo, Nest Bedding was able to integrate user-generated content into a host of their social selling platforms, most notably Facebook. Why this relentless "customer-centric" focus? Easy. Because,

11 Email Marketing Tips to Drive up Your Lead Conversion

by ThriveHive @ ThriveHive

Many businesses do well at generating leads, but it can’t just stop there. Your leads need to be carried further down your funnel. The question then […]

The post 11 Email Marketing Tips to Drive up Your Lead Conversion appeared first on ThriveHive.

Facebook Video for Marketers: Strategy for Future Success

Facebook Video for Marketers: Strategy for Future Success

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create videos for your business? Wondering how to best leverage your videos on Facebook? To explore Facebook video strategy, I interview Jay Baer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Jay Baer, a digital marketing and social media strategist. He authored Hug Your Haters, a book about social care, and also hosts the Social Pros Podcast and the Jay Today show. Jay discusses the differences between video on Facebook and YouTube. You'll discover the tech and tools Jay uses to produce his own videos. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Video for Marketers Facebook Versus YouTube Jay says a lot of people do very well with YouTube videos, and just as many do well with Facebook videos. However, not too many people do equally well with both because each platform has a specific use case. People watch YouTube as a replacement for television entertainment or they're searching for how-to videos. On Facebook, videos appear in the news feed and can interrupt people while they're on the platform. At Convince & Convert, Jay says they advise clients to think about what the video is and under what circumstances people will want to watch it. Based on that assessment, choose one of the platforms as the primary home for the video. I mention how views of The Last Jedi trailer on Facebook far surpassed views on YouTube within the first 30 minutes of its release. Jay responds by noting a few factors that might have contributed to that difference at that particular point in time. One is that Facebook allows users to share content with others easily. Also, Facebook defines a "view" differently than YouTube. Although we both suspect most viewers of The Last Jedi are watching the whole trailer, marketers should remember that Facebook counts 3 seconds as a view, whereas YouTube requires 30 seconds. Also, a video on Facebook may receive substantially more views immediately after it's posted but the YouTube video may receive more views in the long run, especially on a strong YouTube channel. To clarify how The Last Jedi example pertains to the everyday marketer, Jay stresses that Facebook drives exposure based on engagement. So if you put a video on Facebook and a disproportionate number of people like, comment, and share, then a disproportionate number of people will see the video in their feed. This visibility gives even more Facebook users an opportunity to share the video with somebody else, and the cycle continues. Jay sees this ripple effect every time he posts a video on Facebook. If he gets immediate engagement, then more people see it. If he doesn't, users' engagement with the video will plateau. Next we talk about streaming live video to Facebook versus YouTube. For vlogging, Jay says that you could use both Facebook and YouTube. Jay does something like this with his Jay Today show. He streams the live video first on his personal Facebook profile and posts the video file elsewhere afterward. Jay explains that Facebook's API prevents you from live-streaming anywhere else while you're streaming to Facebook Live. To stream to Facebook Live, Periscope, and YouTube Live simultaneously, you would need multiple phones or computers. That limitation is one reason Jay goes to Facebook Live first; he can't be anywhere else. He also notes that on YouTube (for now at least), you need to have 1,000 or more subscribers to stream live video from a mobile device. So YouTube's live video feature isn't as widely accessible as Facebook's. Listen to the show to hear Jay discuss his approach t...

5 Ways to Get More LinkedIn Leads

5 Ways to Get More LinkedIn Leads

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you struggling to build a pipeline of quality leads? Wondering how LinkedIn can help? With the right forms of targeting, pitching, and engagement, you can use your LinkedIn profile to secure warm leads for your business. In this article, you'll discover how to create an effective lead generation process with your LinkedIn profile. Listen to this article: #1: Use LinkedIn Search to Identify Prospects While getting more likes and followers for your company page is important, it doesn't necessarily generate leads. For lead generation, you need to connect with the right audience. Start by narrowing down the job roles you want to target; focus on the people who are most likely to understand the technical benefits of your product and have the authority to make a buying decision. You should consider talking to CMOs, CEOs, CTOs, COOs, or other heads of departments your product or service fits into. For example, if your product is a social listening tool that helps companies with brand mentions, crisis prevention, and other monitoring opportunities on the web, you would search for and connect with heads of marketing or digital marketing. After you connect with relevant people, pitch them with a soft sell. Introduce yourself and your company in a soft tone. Instead of trying to tell your new connection how amazing your company is with 500 words, ask to schedule a 10-minute call. It's also important to follow up on your pitch if you don't hear back. Follow up after a week and again after two weeks. Use Google Sheets and a good CRM to maintain the flow of leads and track each lead's stage in terms of conversion. #2: Connect With Website Visitors on LinkedIn When you add the following code to your website, you can see everyone who visits your website in the Who's Viewed Your Profile section on LinkedIn: These people are validated warm leads because they've shown some level of interest in your company. As you find people who fit your ideal lead, you can follow up with them via a LinkedIn InMail or an email from your personal business account. For example, your message could read something like this: Hi NAME, Hope you are doing well. My name is NAME and I am the DESIGNATION at COMPANY NAME. I just took a deeper look at your website and understand that your company might be looking for PRODUCT FEATURES OR SERVICE. At YOUR COMPANY NAME, we are SHORT DESCRIPTION OF YOUR PRODUCT FEATURES OR SERVICE. FEATURE 1/SERVICE OF YOUR COMPANY FEATURE 2/SERVICE OF YOUR COMPANY The companies that have been working with us for a long time include CLIENT 1 and CLIENT 2. I was wondering if we could schedule a call sometime this week to discuss this further? Regards, YOUR NAME DESIGNATION PHONE COMPANY NAME #3: Make Your LinkedIn Profile a Resource If you follow the lead generation process thoroughly, you'll form a significant number of connections over a short period of time. You'll need to engage your growing audience by sharing educational material that can help them. For example, if your product is solving problems in the hospitality industry and your leads are upper management of hotels, it's best to share content from your profile that talks about that topic. You should also consider publishing similar content on Pulse. The point here is to share valuable content that will help you build credibility with your target leads. To streamline this process, you can use tools like Hootsuite or Buffer to schedule content from your LinkedIn profile. #4: Share Advice in LinkedIn Groups One of the best ways to gain credibility, and by extension the notice of prospects, is to share your knowledge and insight with the very people you want to work with. LinkedIn groups offer a way for you to find these people and warm them up. If, for example, your company sells products or services related to the human resources industry,

Kickstarter: How Crowd Funding Is Changing Business

Kickstarter: How Crowd Funding Is Changing Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you considered crowd funding? Are you wondering how it can help your business grow? To learn about how Kickstarter has transformed the process of funding projects, I interview Richard Bliss for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Richard Bliss, host of the podcast Funding the Dream on Kickstarter. He's also a coach and consultant for crowd funding. Richard shares the do's and don'ts when it comes to creating a Kickstarter project. You'll learn the process in detail of how Kickstarter works for both the campaigner and the supporter. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Crowd Funding How would you describe Kickstarter? Richard believes that Kickstarter is a new phenomenon that most people are familiar with. He says the idea is similar to what happens in a church when they pass around a collection plate. The crowd helps fund an idea, a passion or something that they all would like to get more of. It's very public radio– and television–esque in its approach. Listen to the show to find out how Kickstarter has been around nearly 4 years and seems to have hit mainstream now.  Why entrepreneurs and marketers need to pay attention to Kickstarter Richard explains how Kickstarter is totally changing the rules of how we think about money. Traditionally it's the money that blocks us from fulfilling our dreams. However, what crowd funding and Kickstarter have done is made the money worry go away and that leaves us with "Now what do we do?" If you have an idea for a game or a project, for example, you can put it out there and Kickstarter allows you to go find like-minded people. These people want to see you succeed because they like what you are doing. We buy into people's passions. You'll hear an example of someone who wanted to do a tour through New Zealand taking video and photographs and how with help from Kickstarter, she achieved her goal. Kickstarter is not into causes, political campaigns, charities, funding businesses or equity. They are into one thing: If you have an idea for a project, which includes a beginning, an end and a deliverable, they will help you fund it. Richard describes what the deliverable can be and why it has to be clearly defined. You'll discover why the founders of Kickstarter built the platform and the reason it started with film and music. Listen to the show to find out how Richard picked the name for his podcast, Funding the Dream. Types of businesses that benefit from Kickstarter Richard explains how film is the largest category when it comes to sheer numbers. Sundance Film Festival has had 14 of their projects backed by Kickstarter. This year for the first time, an Academy Award was won by a Kickstarter project. Amanda Palmer made news when she raised more than $1 million to fund her new CD. Richard explains how Kickstarter has 13 different categories and 50 subcategories. One of the biggest categories that gets covered in the news is technology. Transformation is what is happening with Kickstarter and crowd funding. Every Kickstarter category that catches fire turns everything upside down. Richard gives an example of a project he has backed recently and how in the past you'd have to convince a bank to give you a business loan for your idea. But Kickstarter totally transforms the money. You'll hear the difference between reward-based and equity-based crowd funding. Richard tells the story of how his reputation led Kic...

How to Rank Your Google My Business & Maps Page

How to Rank Your Google My Business & Maps Page


Meaningful Marketing

Looking to rank your Google Places or My Business page? In this article you'll learn how to do just that as it provides and easy to follow tutorial.

Twitter Marketing: Does it Still Matter?

Twitter Marketing: Does it Still Matter?

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is Twitter still a good marketing channel? With so much focus on Facebook and Pinterest, has this network lost its value? I explore these questions with Brian Solis in this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, Brian Solis, author of The End of Business as Usual and Engage and principal analyst at Altimeter Group gives us the scoop on Twitter for business today. Brian shares insights into how Twitter has changed and what works on Twitter today. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter for Marketing Today Why is Twitter still important to businesses and what's different? You'll discover why Brian suggests you consider Twitter as an information network instead of a social network. As a "human seismograph," Twitter is both an inbound and outbound tool that can give you the information you need to execute successful business strategies. Listen to the show to hear what this means for your business. What can marketers learn from the statistics available on Twitter? Twitter provides access to its own API so that people can get statistics they need for incredible analysis. Here are some current Twitter stats: 175 million tweets daily 20% of Americans who use the web also use Twitter 8% are active every day on Twitter Brian explains how these statistics show that Twitter is becoming an extension of public conversation and how people are finding value in this conversation. Listen to the show to learn why the people who don't tweet are getting as much value as the people who are tweeting. How is Twitter impacting today's pop culture and what does this mean? In America, pop culture is strong. For example, television actively encourages people to tweet during live events such as America's Got Talent and American Idol. Twitter branding is omnipresent when it comes to television media. This is because Twitter is a platform for shared experiences and it's a very human network. Listen to the show to discover why Brian thinks Twitter's role in popular culture will increase even further.  How does the integration of multimedia on Twitter impact users? Twitter has historically been about text, but they recently added images and integrated video capabilities into the Twitter.com interface. As Twitter is a platform for shared experiences, when you tweet, you now take on the role of producer and publisher of a media outlet in your own right. Listen to the show to learn how multimedia increases the power of Twitter. Are there any businesses out there that are creative on Twitter? Brian shares how to approach this question. You'll learn about his experience with one company he really admires for their approach to Twitter. And you'll discover how Brian is personally using Twitter to listen and inspire his content development strategy. Listen to the show to find out how you should consider structuring your Twitter marketing plan. How do you get the best results on Twitter? Brian has learned over the years that one of the most powerful things that marketers need to start thinking about in terms of Twitter is the idea of resonance. Find out why it's important to look at how long a tweet stays alive in the Twitter stream and why you should start designing with resonance in mind to have a greater impact. Listen to the show to find out more about this critical element to get the results you want from Twitter. Survival Tip: Content Marketing In the business of creating content, first impressions are essential.

How to Grow Your Instagram Exposure

How to Grow Your Instagram Exposure

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Instagram to promote your business? Want to increase your exposure? Making a few simple tweaks to your Instagram marketing can generate more engagement and increase the visibility of your content. In this article you'll discover how to get more exposure for your brand on Instagram. Listen to this article: #1: Embrace the Hashtag Descriptive hashtags on Instagram will help expose your content to more people. This will lead to more engagement and ultimately grow your followers. For anyone who doesn't already know, hashtags are short, descriptive keywords, preceded by the hash sign (#), which enable users to find content they're looking for with a simple click. Relevant hashtags in posts help create a dialogue between your business and other users. There are a number of things you can do with hashtags to get the ball rolling on Instagram. First of all, add hashtags relevant to your industry or niche to every post your business makes on Instagram. Remember, you can use as many hashtags as you want, which will help you attract a wider audience. Note: Research has found even small accounts that use 11 or more hashtags receive an average of 77.6 interactions. So if you're an online retailer specializing in women's clothes, include the hashtag #womensfashion, among others, in your photo description. This will help users find inspiration, as well as help you land more followers, improve brand awareness and increase sales. Plus, spend some time commenting on relevant photos from other Instagram users with a hashtag you're targeting. Your brand will be exposed to users who are already interested in that specific hashtag, which will also help increase followers and engagement. There are a few more things you can do to get the most out of hashtags. First, be as specific as possible when choosing your hashtags. This will help your brand connect with other like-minded users on Instagram. You'll have a much better chance of converting them, since they're highly targeted prospects. Also, be relevant. Make sure you use applicable hashtags on your posts, so people who are interested in what you do are able to find you. Finally, keep your eyes open. Pay attention to which hashtags other users are including on their photos. You may find a new, popular hashtag that will help you reach more people. #2: Engage With Your Community To make the most of your efforts on Instagram, it's vital to spend time engaging with your community and other users on the platform. See what photos and hashtags attract the most comments and likes, and jump on the bandwagon. You can also re-post exceptional images from your followers. Also, determine where people from your target demographic hang out. Find out which accounts they follow and then engage with them. Comment on their photos and like their posts. Remember to add value with your comments and don't be spammy. If you've done your research and interact with the right people, these users are likely to engage with your brand and follow your account. Your brand will also start to show up on their followers' radar. #3: Launch a Contest The prospect of getting something for nothing has always been alluring in the world of marketing. Use the reach and popularity of your Instagram account to host competitions and attract more followers. An Instagram contest is a great way to drum up excitement and get people talking about your brand. Whether you go with a tag, hashtag, like to win, share or other type of promotion, your Instagram contest will certainly be a hit. #4: Build Awareness of Your Instagram Handle Even though this is fairly obvious and straightforward, it's still worth mentioning. The first step in Instagram marketing is to promote your handle to your customers. Then they'll know you have a presence on Instagram and where to find you. There are various ways to spread the word that your business is on Instagram.

Get the Boss On Board with Your SEO Efforts

by BMM @ BlueMatrix Media

You understand that your SEO efforts are important — no, critical — to bringing new prospects and customers to your business. The only problem? Convincing your boss that the cost is worth it. SEO efforts produce sustained results Regardless of whether you’re a small, local business or a midsize organization operating over a wider region, cost […]

The post Get the Boss On Board with Your SEO Efforts appeared first on BlueMatrix Media.

Unlocking the Latest Changes in Google AdWords and YouTube Advertising

by Imprezzio Marketing @ Imprezzio Marketing

On July 11, Google quietly announced on the AdWords forum that a new remarketing option is now available: YouTube Remarketing lists – Now on search! What You Need To Start Remarketing to YouTube Viewers • Requires an AdWords account linked to a YouTube channel • Allows you to remarket to people who previously interacted with [...]

The post Unlocking the Latest Changes in Google AdWords and YouTube Advertising appeared first on Imprezzio Marketing.

How to Prospect Using Twitter, LinkedIn, and Facebook

How to Prospect Using Twitter, LinkedIn, and Facebook

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you looking for more business? Wondering how social media can shorten the sales process? Twitter, LinkedIn, and Facebook make it easy to develop relationships with potential customers before you ask for a meeting. In this article you'll discover how to connect with prospects on social media. Listen to this article: #1: Research Your Prospects Researching prospects is critical to the sales process. As a salesperson, you want to know everything you can about your prospects and the companies they work for. You'll want to follow the news announced on their website, find out if they've hired someone special, look into whether they've raised money, and research how their stock is doing (if they're a public company). How do you guide your sales team to do this? Here are three social networks to start with. Twitter Find prospects and their companies on Twitter and see what type of content they're posting to their accounts. Do they answer each tweet? Are they tweeting multiple times a day? This type of data lets you get a glimpse into the person and company you want to do business with. LinkedIn The easiest way to find out what companies are up to is to research them on LinkedIn. For example, you might discover that a company regularly publishes how-tos on sales and marketing or that the CEO writes articles himself. To get information on prospects, look at their LinkedIn profile. Find out where they've worked in the past and where they went to school. Look for any information in their profile that you can identify with. If you find something, make a note of that information for future conversations. It's also helpful to note your prospects' interests, so you can connect with them on a personal level. Facebook Many people use their Facebook profile for personal reasons, but it doesn't hurt to check out prospective customers on the network. If the information is publicly available, find out what makes your prospects tick. Do they have a family? Do they like to ski? You can use this background information for upcoming conversations. #2: Connect and Engage With Your Leads After researching your prospects, the next step is to make them feel comfortable with your sales team and your company. You want prospects to turn to your salespeople when they need what you offer. How do you do this? Focus on a consultative sell of valuable information when people need it. Use your social networks to tell prospects more about your company and the valuable content you can provide. Content marketing is important with this approach, so your sales team needs to be aligned with your marketing team. Your salespeople are on the front lines, so they know what's important to their prospects. Share this data with your marketing team so they can develop case studies, guides, infographics, and how-to videos. These are critical to your sales success. Twitter Keep a close eye on what your prospects are tweeting about. If they're tweeting about personal things, you may not want to retweet them or chime in. But if they're posting about their business, it's game time. If the company is posting about great stuff happening, you'll want to like and retweet their content. The more they see that you're interested, the easier the next steps in your sales process will be. Here are some ways your company can start making connections on Twitter: If prospects tweet about their business from their personal account, your company should follow them. Your company account should follow your prospect's company account. If they feel comfortable doing so, your salespeople should follow both the company and the prospect. LinkedIn Keep an eye on what your prospects like and share in your LinkedIn stream. Then like and share that content with your connections. If prospects are writing and posting their own content, like and share that, too. To take it a step further,

Facebook Split Testing: How to Make Your Ads Better

Facebook Split Testing: How to Make Your Ads Better

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you run Facebook ads? Have you tried split testing? To explore different ways to split test your Facebook ads so you can refine your ad campaigns, I interview Andrea Vahl. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Andrea Vahl, a Facebook marketing expert. She's co-author of Facebook Marketing All-in-One for Dummies and co-founder of the Social Media Manager School. In addition, Andrea is a regular contributor to Social Media Examiner. Andrea explores Facebook split testing and how best to optimize your Facebook ads. You'll discover which elements to split test first. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Split Testing How Andrea Became Involved With Facebook In 2006, Andrea started using social media to promote her side business (in-home wine tasting). She says that as she was learning how to use Facebook and Twitter, she didn't see a lot of articles that were entertaining and explained things step by step. So Andrea decided to use one of her improv comedy characters to make an entertaining, fun, and useful blog. She chose Grandma Mary, and dubbed her a "social media edutainer." According to Andrea, Grandma Mary gets a little cranky about social media. The character is the voice of people who are frustrated with having to learn social media. Grandma Mary explains social media in an endearing, engaging, and understandable way. Andrea started her blog about nine years ago, and when the parent company of the wine business folded, she made the blog her side gig. It grew substantially (she had a lot of Twitter followers and Facebook fans), which led to the book deal for her to co-author of the Facebook Marketing All-in-One for Dummies series with Phyllis Khare and Amy Porterfield. Today, Andrea still blogs about Facebook, does Facebook consulting, runs ad campaigns for clients, and more. It's her full-time business and she gets to speak and train on Facebook all over the world. Listen to the show to discover which two loves Andrea combined when she created Grandma Mary. What You Can Split Test Andrea explains that the concept of split testing Facebook ads involves keeping things constant, while changing one thing about the ad at a time. That way, you'll easily be able to tell which variable contributed to the better-performing Facebook ad results. Then you can stop the ads that aren't performing, continue running the ones that are, and hopefully get your click price and cost lower and lower. For example, if you split test an ad to 1,000 people, 500 would see one version and 500 would see another. Then you compare the results. The hope is that you learn what works and what doesn't so larger audiences can be reached. First of all, Andrea says, you can split test all kinds of keywords, which go into the Interests area. For instance, if someone lists jogging as an interest in a profile, and you use that keyword in the Interest area of your Facebook ad, your ad will get shown to that person. Your ad could also be shown to people who have liked pages that are related to jogging, such as types of jogging clothing or shoes. You can also test all kinds of demographics. For example, say you want to reach people who are 35 to 55, live in a certain city, like certain things, and maybe own a home. There are all kinds of demographics targeting you can put in your ads to reach your perfect prospect. For Interests, Andrea suggests using general keywords like "jogging" and "running," versus specific pages like Runner's World or Nike shoes.

LinkedIn Mobile: What Marketers Need to Know

LinkedIn Mobile: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you tried the updated LinkedIn mobile app? Are you actively using LinkedIn to engage with your network? To discover how to use the LinkedIn mobile app for marketing on the go, I interview Viveka von Rosen. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Viveka von Rosen, the world's leading LinkedIn marketing expert. She authored the book LinkedIn Marketing: An Hour a Day and is the founder of Linked Into Business, a LinkedIn marketing consultancy. She moderates the Twitter chat #LinkedInChat Tuesdays at 5pm Pacific. Viveka will explore the latest mobile apps from LinkedIn and what they mean for marketers. You'll discover how to navigate the updated LinkedIn mobile app. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: LinkedIn Mobile LinkedIn's mobile apps Viveka shares that the newest LinkedIn app, the LinkedIn Mobile App is actually an update of the earlier app, but that there are a lot of other apps within LinkedIn people might not know about, such as the Job Search app. There are also the apps that came with companies purchased by LinkedIn, such as SlideShare and Connected, a Customer Relationship Management (CRM) tool. (Note: After this recording, LinkedIn announced they were retiring the Connected App on March 21, 2016.) In addition, there are tools like the Recruiter app, Sales Navigator, Lookup and Elevate which are associated with LinkedIn's premium accounts. Then there's LinkedIn's news reader, Pulse, and the new Groups app. Although all of LinkedIn apps are available to iOS users, only some are available on Android, and Viveka reminds listeners that not all of the apps are free.  For example, Elevate is a combination CRM, content management, content curation tool priced for medium to large companies. Viveka shares a free alternative to Elevate called LinkedIn Lookup, and discusses the differences between the Connected app and Lookup. Viveka talks about the new Groups app and shares ways users can take advantage of features like the Highlights tab and the @ tag function. Listen to the show to hear Viveka discuss how and why LinkedIn is focusing on mobile. Thoughts on the improved LinkedIn mobile app Viveka feels the updated LinkedIn app is significantly easier to use than the old version, which means people will use it to stay in contact with their network more often. She says users she's spoken to seem to like the update. She says there are still some minor limitations with the app, but LinkedIn appears to be on top of it. For example, early on you couldn't customize an invitation to connect on the mobile app, but LinkedIn has fixed that. Viveka goes on to discuss a current issue which affects the visibility of contact info for 1st level connections and why she thinks this is leading to a change to the Connected app. She also says that image updates have vastly improved. In the old app you had to send a picture to Evernote or Dropbox before you could share it on LinkedIn, and now you take a picture on your phone and post it immediately. Listen to the show to hear Viveka's thoughts about hashtags on LinkedIn. Navigating the app Viveka takes us through the navigation of the updated LinkedIn mobile app and starts with the Home button which takes you to a page that is similar to your home page on LinkedIn. She explains it's where you see and share updates, and she the algorithm on her mobile seems to be smarter than the desktop version. There are two pages behind the Me button, Viveka continues. The first page contains notifications about people's interaction...

Starting an Online Show: How to Quickly Grow Your Platform

Starting an Online Show: How to Quickly Grow Your Platform

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you ever dreamed of having your own show? Do you want to know how to get started? There is no easier way to build a platform quickly. To learn more about what goes into starting your own show, this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast goes deep on the subject. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, you'll learn the different formats involved in both audio and video shows and the key ingredients you must have to make it a success. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How to Create Your Own Online Show There are some amazing talk show hosts who do incredible things by simply talking to other people. Think about Jay Leno, Howard Stern, Dr. Phil, Ellen DeGeneres and Oprah Winfrey. Oprah Winfrey started out with a half-hour, low-rated talk show in Chicago, and look at her now. The secret to her success is interviewing people. In the social media world, the big name that comes to mind is Gary Vaynerchuk. He became famous for Wine Library TV. He sat behind a camera in his wine library store and he talked about wine. He also had interesting guests who talked to him about wine. Gary has a really cool personality, which led to incredible opportunities for him. As a result of him simply talking about wine, he got a $1 million book contract. If you think of the podcasters you listen to regularly, many of them have shows where there is more than one person and there is dialogue going back and forth. The secret source of everything I've ever done is interviews. Interviews have been the key to Social Media Examiner's growth. When I launched Social Media Examiner in October 2009, I took my friend Jeff, who's a video guy, to BlogWorld. And when I went to a MarketingProfs conference in Chicago, I took my flip camera and interviewed people. I got behind the camera and talked to the likes of Chris Brogan, Steve Rubel, Jessie Stay and a lot of other people for about 10 minutes each. These interviews catapulted Social Media Examiner to incredible success. Interviews weren't the reason for all the success, but they were extremely instrumental. Listen to the show to find out why interviews are one of the reasons for Social Media Examiner's success. My backstory  I never liked reading books in college, so to be able to pass tests, I had to arrange study groups with some of the smartest kids in class. By hosting the study group, I would learn enough to be able to ask questions to get the dialogue going. From this experience, I discovered that I could learn something by interviewing people in my group. These techniques led to my future success. One of my first companies was Stelzner Consulting. I was a writer for high-tech companies, where I interviewed engineers on the factory floors. It was my job to write materials to help the organization sell. Before Social Media Examiner, I was known for writing white papers and I did a lot of teaching. In the early 2000s, I ran teleclasses, where 100-200 people would pay $39 to $59 to listen to me on the phone interviewing experts every month. Listen to the show to learn how you could become the next Gary Vaynerchuk or Oprah Winfrey. The benefits of having a show When you start interviewing successful people, other people look at you and think "WOW! That person who is doing the interviewing must be really smart." A great example is Derek Halpern of Social Triggers, who goes out of his way to reach out to scientists who do really interesting psychological research.

Live Video Tools: The Best Apps for Going Live

Live Video Tools: The Best Apps for Going Live

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you planning to start a live video show? Want to know which tools you'll need to broadcast live? To explore the best live video apps and software to produce your own live show, I interview Ian Anderson Gray. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Ian Anderson Gray, the founder of Seriously Social, a blog focused on social media tools. Ian is also a live video tools expert. His courses include Seriously Social OBS Studio and Seriously Social Wirecast. Ian explores the best live video software for beginning and advanced broadcasters. You'll discover which software and add-ons offer the features you need. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Live Video Tools Ian's Live Video Story When Facebook Live started rolling out, Ian felt like everyone had access before he did, because he was an Android user (at the time) living in the United Kingdom. In his search for a workaround, Ian discovered OBS Studio, a free tool for Macs and PCs. With OBS Studio, Ian found a way to broadcast from his computer to his Facebook page, profile, and groups. That was his entry into Facebook Live and live video. Ian wrote a blog post on how to broadcast from your computer with OBS Studio and went out of his way to make the process as easy as possible for people to understand. He even included a tool that allows people to get the magic stream key necessary to broadcast with OBS Studio. Since Ian posted the article last year, the article has had just under three million views. Listen to the show to discover what platform Ian tried using before Facebook Live. What Stops Marketers From Going Live? Two things stop marketers from going live: "the fear and the gear." But Ian believes fear is what really gets in people's way. People are afraid they'll say something silly or wrong. They might be worried their cat will jump on the keyboard, the webcam will fall over, and it will be a complete disaster. Or maybe they're afraid others will think they're a fraud. Marketers also have issues with technology. People think they can't go live because they don't have this webcam, that phone, or a decent lighting setup. Those are excuses for people who are simply scared of getting on camera and communicating their message. Everyone gets nervous, explains Ian, who's trained as a professional singer. He feels it too. The key is to channel your nervous energy into your performance. If you feel nervous or scared, Ian says, it's a good thing. It shows you care. The best performance Ian ever gave was when he was absolutely petrified before he went on stage. The worst performance was when he was entirely complacent. He thought the performance would be absolutely fine, and it turned out to be a disaster. To help you overcome that fear, Ian recommends warming up your voice before each broadcast. Exercise the lower part of your voice up to the high part of your voice. These exercises will likely make you feel a bit more at ease. Also, when you warm up, using the high and low parts makes your voice more engaging. By using your vocal range, you're not trying to become a different person. You're heightening your personality by putting more energy behind it. Listen to the show to hear Ian's example of a vocal warm-up and what your voice might sound like if you don't warm up. Basic Apps The easiest apps for live broadcasting are web-based. Fire up your browser (Safari, Chrome, Internet Explorer, etc.), and go to the tool's web page. BeLive, probably the best-known app, has an advantage because has a free trial. You can broadcast up to two 20-minute broadcasts...

SEO Title Tags: Best Practices and Examples

by Adam Coombs @ Unamo Blog

Title tags in SEO are like the title of your book for the demographics of your two most important types of readers; people and robots. The people need to know what they can expect to find on your page when they click the link. The robots (crawlers) prioritize your page and its content through a […]

Search to Social Ads: How to Use Google With Facebook to Build Niche Audiences

Search to Social Ads: How to Use Google With Facebook to Build Niche Audiences

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Does your business serve a specialized customer base? Wondering how to reach specific niche audiences with Facebook ads? To explore a strategy for retargeting specialized audiences using Google ads in combination with Facebook ads, I interview Shane Sams. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Shane Sams, the co-host of the Flipped Lifestyle podcast, a show focused on helping families make money online. He describes himself as a normal guy from Kentucky who loves helping others. He's also the founder of the Flip Your Life Community. Shane explains how to use website traffic generated by Google ads to retarget Facebook users. You'll discover how highly focused keywords help manage your marketing costs. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Search to Social Ads Shane's Story Shane and his wife Jocelyn met at the University of Kentucky. After graduation, Jocelyn initially worked a corporate job and Shane coached football. They then decided to become schoolteachers, which they did for about 10 years. Shane taught social studies and continued to coach, while Jocelyn was an elementary school librarian. After some bad experiences at work, Shane realized he had traded control of his life for job security. He started looking for other things to do because he knew there had to be a better way. This was in 2012. One day, as Shane and his wife were driving around town, Shane said, "I wonder if I can get 100 people to send me $50." She asked what he was talking about and Shane said that out of the 7 billion people on the planet, surely 100 would give him $50. If they all did that in a month, it would be $5,000, and for 12 months in a row, it would be $60,000. If they could do that every month, they could quit teaching. Shane didn't know how he was going to make this money but he was determined to figure it out. He began seeking information about business. One day while mowing the grass, Shane decided to look up business podcasts. An image of a guy looking at the podcast art with his eyeballs caught Shane's attention. It was Smart Passive Income with Pat Flynn. In the podcast, Pat talked about how he sold a study guide and would email it to people. Shane decided he and Jocelyn could sell PDFs of information. After trying different things online, they were finally able to figure it out. They sold lesson plans to teachers and football playbooks to coaches. A year later, Shane and Jocelyn replaced their income. As soon as they quit their jobs (which they did on September 27, 2013), people started asking questions. For example, Lindsay, a friend of Jocelyn's, quit her job to be a stay-at-home mom and wanted advice on making money online. They helped Lindsay create digital products and she made $1,000 on the Internet in a month. This money enabled Lindsay to be at home with her daughter every day. After Shane and Jocelyn realized their experience and knowledge could change the lives of others, they started Flipped Lifestyle. It has helped a lot of people. People ask why it's called Flipped Lifestyle. Shane explains that everybody flipped out after Jocelyn and he left their jobs, where they had tenure and insurance. Shane recalls how his mom cornered him and said, "Shane Sams, you have babies. You have lost your mind. You have flipped out. And I do not approve of this decision." Hence, Flipped Lifestyle. Listen to the show to hear Shane recall how much sharing online business skills meant to his friends. Why Combine Google Ads With Facebook? Early on, Shane and Jocelyn discovered a lot of the marketing advice available online didn't work for ...

How Top Brands Improve Customer Retention on Facebook

How Top Brands Improve Customer Retention on Facebook

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you nurture relationships with customers on social media? Want to decrease customer acquisition costs? When you cultivate relationships with social media, you improve customer retention and ultimately boost your bottom line. In this article I'll share how top brands use Facebook to improve customer retention, and how you can apply their tactics to your social media marketing. Listen to this article: The Value of Customer Retention It's easier to keep a customer than to acquire a new one. Gartner, Inc. statistics show that 80% of a company's future revenue will come from just 20% of its existing customers. Furthermore, according to Bain & Company (working with Earl Sasser of Harvard Business School), a 5% increase in customer retention can increase a company's profitability by 75%. With social media, the door is wide open for companies to build relationships 24/7 with the customers who influence referral rates and keep their businesses alive and thriving. #1: Embrace Your Brand Advocates Give your customers a place to share their voice and their stories, and you'll develop a kinship that will lead to brand loyalty. The Walt Disney Company, which has been the go-to source for brand and relationship marketing inspiration for more than 50 years, has truly embraced social media. The Father's Day post below personifies that commitment to fans. Disney took a story that applies to a substantial segment of its audience, and put it into video form using recognizable characters. This Facebook post does three things: promotes Disney's core values, celebrates its brand advocates and invites participation. Through brand experience storytelling, among other campaigns, Disney celebrates the fan experience and endears itself to customers in the process. #2: Provide Exceptional Customer Service Fans who turn to Facebook for answers can quickly become loyal customers, especially if you respond to them immediately and with accurate information. JetBlue has perfected the art of customer service with their remarkable ability to respond to their more than one million Facebook fans within mere minutes of a comment or post to the page. JetBlue sees each social media conversation as an opportunity to cultivate an enduring relationship with specific individuals. They empowered their team members to do what it takes to improve the customer experience and repair potentially broken relationships. Although most businesses may not have the resources to monitor their social media accounts 24/7, they can provide the tools and encourage their team to do whatever is necessary to enhance their customers' experiences online, as well as in-store. #3: Show Additional Uses for Your Product If there are other uses for your products, let your customers know. If there aren't, see what you can come up with and share those uses with your fans. Oreo, which has been very active with social media marketing, has taken relationship building to an entirely new level by sharing recipes via video to promote their product. These 10- to 30-second videos directly resonate with existing customers, who also happen to be their target audience. Through these videos, Oreo gives customers (who ideally have a package of Oreos sitting in their pantry) additional uses for their product. The result is customers keep eating and purchasing their cookies. Brainstorm to determine how your business can provide additional value to the products or services your existing customers already have. When you consider how your product can be utilized creatively and share those uses, you encourage additional purchases, while you cultivate customer relationships. #4: Address Customer Concerns Publicly Business owners and marketers aim to develop strategies with precision and avoid mistakes. However, no brand is immune to mishandled incidents, mismanaged campaigns or a full-blown social media crisis.

MMGY Global Names Chris Campos President and Chief Operating Officer

by Richard Carufel @ Bulldog Reporter

MMGY Global, an integrated travel & hospitality organization, announced the appointment of Chris Campos as president and chief operating officer (COO). Campos, who previously held senior leadership positions at Arnold Worldwide (HAVAS), Y&R, BRAVO (WPP), will help MMGY Global scale its business in a period of major growth and expansion following several recent acquisitions. Clayton Reid, current President & Chief Executive Officer (CEO) will continue as CEO of MMGY Global. The hiring of Campos is a testament to the organization’s growth and its vision for its collective agency brands moving forward. MMGY Global will continue its growth organically and globally through additional acquisitions. Following MMGY Global’s

8 Ways to Generate Leads With Your Blog

8 Ways to Generate Leads With Your Blog

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your blog generating leads for your business? Are you looking for ideas? Offering a suitable and relevant reward in return for people's contact information is a great way to generate business leads. In this article you'll discover eight ways to generate leads with your blog. Why Lead Generators? A lead generator (or lead magnet) is something you offer to your blog visitors in the hope that they'll exchange their contact information (email, address, zip code, etc.) in return for access to whatever it is you're providing. Once you have that contact information, you can use it to target those people with ads on platforms such as Facebook, Twitter and Instagram. Listen to this article: Your free offer needs to be something prospects are genuinely interested in so they'll want to give you their information. The most effective incentives are uniquely tailored to your target audience's needs and objectives, and provide instant gratification. Here are some examples of lead magnets to consider for your business blog. #1: Offer Guides or Personalized Reports One way to collect leads is to offer a free guide or report, and then let people download it after filling out a form. You can also automatically send the guide or report via email. The freebie should provide practical value and advice to your target audience. Tarot offers a horoscope and cosmic profile report for visitors who fill out a form on the company's website. In addition to the visitors' names and email addresses, the form also asks for their birth date to automatically generate the personalized report. By signing up, visitors can get personalized and insightful horoscopes. These detailed reports provide greater value to Tarot's audience than the free generic daily readings available on the website. Online advertising company WordStream offers websites a free analysis and benchmarking report in exchange for their email address. WordStream can also use these reports to offer products and services to prospects as a way to improve their scores. #2: Grant Exclusive Access Another way to generate leads is to offer visitors access to a valuable resource that will improve something in their life, such as productivity, performance or ideation. Fitocracy is both an app and online platform that caters to people with health and fitness goals. They've built a community around a mobile application that features a fitness tracker and offers a huge fitness library with exercise videos and how-to articles. Access is free if people sign up and become members. Once they're members, they can hire fitness coaches to help meet their personal goals and connect with fitness-minded individuals just like a social network. #3: Recommend Relevant Newsletters This lead magnet is similar to free guides and reports. The difference is the time frame in which the offer is of value to the audience. You can provide more long-term value to your audience by emailing them digital handouts or newsletter updates on a periodic basis. If people fill out the above form, the Digital Photography School will send them weekly photography tips and tutorials via email. The site realizes they should make it easy for people to sign up by asking only for their email address. #4: Hold Webinars Another lead magnet is to hold free online seminars (webinars) about topics that matter to your target audience. Use this opportunity to ask for information from all of your attendees who are likely to be interested in your other offerings. Here, Amy Porterfield offers a free webinar in exchange for visitors providing their name and email address in a signup form. This webinar targets businesses that are new to Facebook and provides information to help them get up and running on the platform. #5: Make Perks Available If you have an online shopping website, consider offering free shipping and exclusive discounts as a way to generate leads.

Facebook Ads and Beyond: What Marketers Need to Know

Facebook Ads and Beyond: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Facebook ads? Are you wondering how paid Facebook marketing can work for your business? To learn about Facebook EdgeRank and paid Facebook marketing, I interview Jon Loomer for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jon Loomer, who blogs about advanced Facebook marketing at Jon Loomer.com. Jon used to do social media work for the the NBA and American Cancer Society before going out on his own in 2011. Jon shares what efficient targeting means for marketers and the metrics involved. You'll learn creative ways to generate more business on a minimal budget. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Advertising EdgeRank and why it's important Jon explains how EdgeRank is the unofficial term for Facebook's sorting algorithm. You don't see everything that's published in your news feed. It depends on your affinity, your connection with specific people and pages, how you interacted with a specific content type in the past and the 'weight' given to posts. The EdgeRank algorithm as described by WhatIsEdgeRank.com. Over time, the older something is, the less likely that you'll see it in the news feed. And in a perfect world, EdgeRank helps you see what you want to see. You'll discover as a marketer what you need to do to make sure your fans see your content and how EdgeRank can help you rise to the top. Listen to the show to find out what you need to do to encourage your fans to act on your Facebook updates. Facebook metrics marketers should pay attention to As a marketer, it depends what your goals are on Facebook. Jon explains that he is a publisher, and when people visit his website, he makes money. So for him, the more traffic the better. You'll find out why Jon focuses on consumption and a stat called link clicks. Jon explains that consumption is any type of click, whether it resulted in a story or not. It could be a comment, like or share, but it could also be a photo click, video play, link click or any other click. Remember Facebook records them all. You'll hear an example of the post-level export lists for all reposts over a given time period. You can look at it post by post, posts that had the most consumption and quantity of clicks. With a time decay on Facebook updates, Jon shares what you need to do to make sure you reach people in completely different time zones with your most popular links to help you reach a new audience. Listen to the show to find out the best time to reshare a post, with time decay in mind. Facebook targeting for marketers Over the last few months Facebook has made it easy for you to target your updates to different audiences. Jon explains there are two different forms of targeting. You can target your posts or you can target your ads. You'll hear why Jon is not a big fan of post targeting. Where Facebook targeting really comes alive is within advertising. Facebook constantly releases something new to make it incredibly powerful. On the Facebook advertising side, Jon reveals some of the newer things that Facebook has done with targeting. Last year when the Custom Audiences feature was first rolled out, it allowed you to target your offline customer list with email addresses you'd collected, phone numbers or Facebook UIDs. These are people who have proven to subscribe to your content or bought something from you in the past. Whether or not they are your fans,

6 Best Practices For Your Email Marketing Efforts

by Cohlab User @ Cohlab Digital Marketing – Mobile Website Design | SEO Website Design | SEO

Email marketing can seem like an extremely tricky business, even though email has been around for decades now. And how do you even begin to approach building a list to start emailing to? We’re sure you have a lot of questions, and hopefully this list helps you get started with your email marketing efforts. When [...]

The post 6 Best Practices For Your Email Marketing Efforts appeared first on Cohlab Digital Marketing - Mobile Website Design | SEO Website Design | SEO.

Google Keep, Voice Search, and Voice Typing in Google Docs – What’s New at Google

by Ray Sidney-Smith @ Blog – W3 Consulting :: Web and Beyond

Periodically, I will be writing a What’s New at Google post here to update you about new updates to the Google ecosystem that affects you as a Small Business owner. These can be warnings as well as the many frequent enhancements

Social Growth: How to Use Pinterest to Grow Your Following on Facebook, YouTube and Beyond

Social Growth: How to Use Pinterest to Grow Your Following on Facebook, YouTube and Beyond

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you active on Pinterest? Have you thought about using Pinterest to grow your other social networks? To discover how to drive traffic from Pinterest to other networks, I interview Natalie Jill. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Natalie Jill, the founder of Natalie Jill Fitness, a site dedicated to health and fitness. She inspires women around the world with her videos and visual content. She's also got a unique social strategy that helped her grow 1.3 million Facebook fans and 476,000 Instagram fans. Natalie will explore how she uses Pinterest as her secret marketing tool to build a loyal following on Facebook, Instagram, YouTube and beyond. You'll discover how to adapt your content for Pinterest. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Growth What led Natalie to social media Natalie says she got into social media by accident. While dealing with a lot of personal issues, she turned to Facebook to develop a support system and talk about her struggles. She explains how sharing what she was doing to lose weight and posting pictures of food in an album called "What I Eat" developed into a downloadable ebook of her recipes. This led to her first full product, which is now called 7 Day Jump Start. By sharing success stories of the people who bought her book and listening to what her audience was asking, Natalie's Facebook presence started to grow and her products started to take off. That's how Natalie Jill Fitness was born. Listen to the show to learn what Natalie thinks makes a good salesperson. Why Pinterest is great for marketers Natalie initially built her business on Facebook (pre-Facebook pages) and had about 5,000 subscribers when she realized she couldn't keep everything on Facebook. She started exploring other social media platforms like Twitter, Pinterest and Instagram. Natalie says she was looking for a social media site where she could post her content and reach more people over time. When she noticed older items getting repinned, she decided Pinterest had the content value-over-time effect she was looking for. A year and a half ago, Natalie started deep-diving into Pinterest and says she currently has 1.3 million fans on Facebook and fewer than 50,000 followers on Pinterest (it's one of her smallest social networks). She goes on to explain why the lower Pinterest follower count doesn't matter when it comes to content shares. She also points out that Pinterest comes up in Google search, which is a huge benefit. When Natalie noticed she was getting a lot of website traffic from Pinterest, she decided to figure out how to use Pinterest to help with her content in other places. Natalie explains how she tested her tactic, which she calls the Pinfinity concept, starting with Facebook and a Pinterest board called "Bodyweight Exercises." Now people searching for body, weight, exercise, workouts, fit mom, etc., find her on Google+ or on Pinterest, and they're taken back to her video on Facebook. Although there's no built-in option to pin things from Facebook, Natalie has found a way to do it. Natalie explains why she drives traffic to social networks instead of her website. Listen to the show to hear how many Facebook followers Natalie had before she started this experiment. How Natalie uses Pinterest to grow her other social networks YouTube is another example of Natalie's method at work. When she started her YouTube channel about a year and a half ago, she had a few videos but no subscribers. She shares how she's built her YouTube channel to ove...

6 Tools for Selling Products on Instagram

6 Tools for Selling Products on Instagram

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to sell your products using Instagram? Looking for tools to make it easier for customers to buy from you? The right Instagram tools help you maximize your revenue. In this article you'll discover six tools to help you sell products on Instagram. Listen to this article: #1: Identify Shoppable Content With a Hashtag Hashtags are a big part of how you connect with users on Instagram, and Inselly makes good use of them. Like other platforms on this list, Inselly lets you use the profile-link-to-storefront method of selling. It comes with the added bonus of the Inselly hashtag. Add the hashtag #inselly to your description, as well as any other relevant tags that might put you in front of your target audience. Not only does this hashtag make it easier for users to search for buyable content, but it also flags your content as being buyable if users stumble across it somewhere else. Sellers can process purchases through PayPal, and buyers can contact sellers through a message either on the app or the Inselly website. Buyers need to have Inselly installed and integrated with Instagram, but it's free for them to do so. It's also free for sellers to use, with no commissions or fees, although you can choose to purchase "coins" (the international currency Inselly utilizes) to promote your content. [Editor's note: Inselly recently updated. Buyers don't need to install or integrate the software with Instagram, and it's free for them to use.] #2: Sync Inventory Across Your Online Stores Shopseen is a multichannel listing interface that allows you to upload and list your products and have them automatically uploaded to a variety of ecommerce stores like Shopify, Etsy, eBay and Woo. Shopseen will then update your inventory, continually and automatically, across all of these sales channels. They also have a straightforward Instagram selling tool that's easy to use for both ecommerce businesses and customers. Shopseen will create a storefront using your profile link, similar to other services you'll see in this article. Once you've linked your Instagram to Shopseen, upload images of your products to Instagram, and add a price to the description. Shopsheen will then upload the product to your Shopseen page (which is off of Instagram). Ask followers to click to your store through your profile link and you can collect payment from a credit card. They don't have to set up their own Shopseen account, which is a strong benefit. This is particularly helpful for ecommerce businesses that feature their products on a wide variety of storefronts. Pricing is based on the amount of sales you make per month and the number of stores you have. You start with a free plan that allows you to have one store and Shopseen takes a 10% fee on Instagram sales. #3: Sell Through Comments Soldsie allows users to purchase directly from a seller's Instagram news feed without ever leaving the app. As an added bonus, this selling tool works for Facebook, too. Both buyers and sellers have to install and integrate the software with Instagram after registering with Soldsie, which uses "comment selling" as its method of making sales. Upload your products through your selling dashboard to turn the product images into shoppable Instagram posts. Then you include specific buying information and product details, such as "100% cotton, comes in blue and white" on each Instagram product post. Ask your buyers to make purchases by commenting "sold" directly on the post and including any necessary size/color/selection information. Once buyers comment with this information, Soldsie emails them an invoice so you can collect payment via PayPal or credit card. Soldsie has a variety of pricing plans based on the needs of your store, starting with a basic plan that costs $49 per month, with a 5.9% commission fee on all sales. #4: Connect To a Shoppable Storefront Have2Have.

4 Ways Visual Content Improves Social Media Results

4 Ways Visual Content Improves Social Media Results

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want better engagement for your social media campaigns? Wondering how visual content can help? Using visual content to support your messaging makes it easier to grab your audience's attention. In this article, you'll discover how visual content can support your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Drive Interest and Clicks With Simple Imagery Your social media followers are looking for you to provide relatable, easy-to-understand content. The Travel Channel demonstrates this concept in their Daily Escape series on Facebook. To draw fans in, they'll post a stunning destination photo and a brief description. Notice that the Travel Channel doesn't post a full URL to their blog post. Instead, they post a bit.ly link so it doesn't draw the reader's eye away from the short description. Why use a ton of words when you can let your image do the work for you? It's easy to create your own simple, stunning images that speak to your followers. #2: Sustain Viewer Interest With a Variety of Visuals The goal of any social media marketer is to use messaging that amplifies the brand. A goal that's just as important, however, is to create content that sparks a conversation with fans and followers. To do that, you need to post different types of visual content. Target does a great job of this in their social media marketing. On their Facebook page, you'll see a good mix of recipes, videos, partnership announcements, sales alerts, and more. Target has a strong Pinterest presence, too. Their well-designed and well-organized pin boards provide a wealth of ideas for everyone from wedding planners to interior designers and more. The visual product presentation is more effective than simple links or photos of the store. Target's visual marketing is consistent in its branding, and the company obviously has several templates they're using to create content. So how do you achieve consistency in your visual content? Once you've established your visual content style, use different templates across your social media platforms to reach as many users as possible. If you're a small business, you may not have an army of graphic designers at your fingertips. In that case, consider using an online design tool to create your own simple, beautiful images. To provide a variety of types of visual content, use memes, screenshots, how-to's, tutorials, tips, quotes, mood images, statistics, discounts, puzzles, and polls. #3: Spark Engagement With Fan Photos Once you’ve created visual content for your social channels, how do you get people to pay attention to it? The most successful brands know their audience and market well. Take Harley-Davidson, for example. While Harley-Davidson is a brand that's globally known, it's a particular favorite among the Baby Boomer and Generation X audiences. The company will encourage fans to share photos of their Harleys on social media and then post them on the company's Facebook page. To find out more about your target audience, look at your Facebook Insights to get an idea of the gender, age, and location of your followers. Instagram has also started to roll out tools for business accounts. The data provided by your social media accounts will help you target the right audience to help your business grow. Once you know your audience, find out where and when they're most likely to consume your content. #4: Create Relevancy With Trends, Events, and Holidays Content is king, but if you want your posts to be noticed, start paying attention to trends. Think about holidays, special days, newsbreaks, movie premieres, and more. Tie your message to something that's relevant now, make it visual, and soon you'll start to see positive results. Consider using a tool to help you keep track of holidays and trends. Find one that gives you templates you can customize to deliver your message. Support Your Message With Visual Design

360 Video for Marketers: What You Need to Know

360 Video for Marketers: What You Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you tried producing 360 video? Want to discover how to create immersive, sharable 360 video? To explore how marketers can use 360 video, I interview Ryan Anderson Bell. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Ryan Anderson Bell of VRScout, a firm that connects Hollywood to the world of virtual reality. Bell is also the director of the Help Erase Project, a 360 video documentary designed to raise awareness of child trafficking. You'll discover what you need to know to get started with 360 video. Ryan explores tools for creating 360 video. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: 360 Video for Marketers Ryan's Story Ryan recalls that his interest in 360 video is a product of his experience with Google's Tilt Brush, which he tried for the first time after a speech on the changing landscape of technology at the Consumer Electronics Show. He had approached Malia Probst at VRScout and said he wanted to be more involved in this technology. From there, Ryan went from playing with the big ball of GoPros to more finished, all-inclusive products, like the Samsung Gear 360's two 4K cameras. httpv://youtu.be/TckqNdrdbgk He's now a 360 filmmaker, trying to define how to tell a story and convey a message through the medium (whether that's from a personal or brand perspective). Listen to the show to hear our memories of virtual reality in the 1990s. Why Marketers Should Consider 360 Video Ryan explains that being an early adopter of 360 video means you're going to understand the language before the public does. Marketers can use that language to connect with intimacy and empathy. Your brand can have an impact on the masses in a way that's not been done before, because in a 360 video, the experience you provide in your message is more real to the viewer. You can share scale and scope with a canvas that's so big, it takes over everything. Listen to the show to learn my perspective on the benefits of 360 video for marketers. What You Can Do With 360 Video When asked for real-world examples of uses for 360 video, Ryan points to HBO's showcase of Westworld at TechCrunch Disrupt this year, and TOMS Shoes' Virtual Giving Trip last year. Both used 360 video to immerse the viewer in an experience. httpv://youtu.be/jz5vQs9iXCs Ryan agrees that restaurants can show what the kitchen atmosphere is like during prime time, and events or conferences can share all kinds of experiences in 360. He goes on to share that real estate agents can even use a 360 real estate app from Zillow to showcase properties for sale or rent. Causes such as ERASE Child Trafficking documentary can also take advantage of 360 video to share different narratives from the perspectives of characters in the film. Listen to the show to hear more about Ryan's documentary. Where to Publish 360 Video While there are some small places like Zeality or Oculus where you can publish 360 video, Ryan says the best platforms for marketers are likely YouTube and Facebook. It all boils down to where you'll get the most views. He shares that Facebook even has a new Heatmap tool to help 360 video storytellers move viewers through their stories. Listen to the show to discover what this concept reminds me of at Disneyland and why. Equipment Choices and Setup Tips When it comes to equipment, Ryan likes the Samsung Gear 360 video camera because it's basically two 4K cameras with fisheye lenses for $350. This one piece of machinery automatically stitches everything together, so you don't need to do any post-production.

What is the Likelihood that Someone Will Leave Your Business a Review?

by Maddie Costa @ Classy Brain

As a small business owner, you value the personal relationships that you have with your customers. There’s something so much more personal and intimate when you are a small company, and that often is the difference between you and the...

The post What is the Likelihood that Someone Will Leave Your Business a Review? appeared first on Classy Brain.

Meerkat and Periscope: How Businesses Are Using Live Mobile Broadcasting

Meerkat and Periscope: How Businesses Are Using Live Mobile Broadcasting

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you interested in live mobile broadcasting? Have you tried Meerkat or Periscope? To learn about mobile broadcasting apps, I interview Brian Fanzo. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Brian Fanzo, partner and chief digital strategist at Broadsuite, a company that helps businesses succeed with social and mobile marketing. Brian is one of the leading authorities on Meerkat and Periscope. In this episode Brian Fanzo will explore the live mobile broadcasting apps Meerkat and Periscope and what they mean for your business. You'll discover the pros and cons of each platform, as well as how to get started. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Meerkat and Periscope How Brian got started with mobile broadcasting Brian, who calls himself a change evangelist, has a technology background and a love of social media. He is always looking for ways people can leverage technology to be more productive and tell their story in unique ways. Brian likes to jump on every new app: it’ll either fail fast, and he’ll uninstall it or he'll run with it! Mobile broadcasting definitely falls into the later category. Brian shares how he was introduced to Meerkat. He was speaking at the Mobile World Congress in Barcelona, when he got a message from someone who worked at Twitter, telling him that Ashton Kutcher and Gary Vaynerchuck were on a new video app. About 35 seconds later, Brian had downloaded it and clicked the start button. Meerkat came out February 26, 2015, and Brian was on it March 2. Brian took to Meerkat immediately. He put his mobile device on his tripod, hit the stream button, put in the event hashtag and was live. He treated it like he does his regular YouTube videos: walking around, describing the event and sharing it with his audience. About three minutes in, someone commented, “I see the Samsung booth, can you turn to your right.” That’s when Brian realized he didn’t just bring the experience to his audience, he was letting his viewers be a part of it. People in the United States could dictate what they saw in Spain. "It felt interactive, like having a true conversation," he recalls. Since Brian was about to go to South by Southwest,  he put some strategy behind his Meerkating. Brian contacted a couple of brands that were holding different events, and asked for backstory, so he could be prepared to cover them. During SXSW, Brian did a Meerkat of all the sessions he went to, as well as a preview each morning and recap every evening. About 300-800 people watched each stream, no matter what he was talking about. Periscope was released into the Apple store during Social Media Marketing World (the last week of March 2015), and Brian recalls using Periscope for first time during the opening keynote. Listen to the show to hear where Brian was when he heard about Periscope at Social Media Marketing World. How live streaming apps work "Live streaming isn’t anything new," Brian explains. "It’s really just turning on a video and opening the portal to anyone who wants to use it." What's new is the fact that we’re able to download an app, sign in with a Twitter account or phone number, click stream and post the link. Then anybody in your Twitter community can click on that link and watch whatever you’re showing on your phone. The big piece is the mobile aspect. It’s as simple as a basic tweet and hitting the “stream” button. Listen to the show to learn how and where to watch a Meerkat or Periscope live stream. Businesses uses for live broadcasting

AMP Ads Load Faster: Phase 2 Complete Claims AMP Blog

by Mark Dymond @ LSEO Digital Marketing Services

The Accelerated Mobile Pages (AMP) blog announced they’ve completed phase 2 of 3 of their plans to make online ads faster and safer. AMP ads now feature ‘Fast Fetch’ rendering which make AMP ads, as well as non-AMP ads on an AMP document, much faster. Google’s quest to create a “de facto” ad format for...

The post AMP Ads Load Faster: Phase 2 Complete Claims AMP Blog appeared first on LSEO Digital Marketing Services.

Snapchat Gains Momentum: New Research

Snapchat Gains Momentum: New Research

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you adding Snapchat to your social media marketing? Wondering what Snapchat's audience responds to? In this article you'll discover recent insights on Snapchat and how marketers can use the platform to reach targeted audiences with ads and other content. Listen to this article: #1: Snapchat Nears Facebook Levels for Daily Video Views In January 2016, Bloomberg News reported that Snapchat now delivers more than 7 billion videos to users each day. The news is amazing for two reasons. First, previously reported numbers of Snapchat daily video views in September 2015 was 4 billion. A leap of nearly 50% in just three or four months is certainly newsworthy. Second, Facebook reported 8 billion video views daily in October 2015. Considering that at 1.55 billion users, Facebook's audience outstrips Snapchat's by 15 times, it's clear video is Snapchat's primary content form. Key Takeaway: Snapchat's 7 billion daily video views figure is important because mobile video is rapidly gaining favor with advertisers. According to eMarketer, companies spent $7.46 billion on digital video ads in the U.S. in 2015, an increase of 42% from the year before. eMarketer also relates that in the United States, mobile video ad spend is growing faster than all other digital advertising tactics. Marketers with a video strategy in place can easily adapt their tactics to reach Snapchat's video-friendly demographic. #2: Vertical Video Rising in Popularity When Snapchat emerged on the scene, some industry pundits criticized its vertical-only display as too limiting and unfamiliar for those used to more horizontal television and movie screens. Now, after five years in business, Snapchat reviewed its own internal data to find that users are more likely to watch a vertical video than a horizontal video until the end. In some instances, the vertical video had a completion rate nine times higher than its horizontal counterpart. Minutes spent on vertical screens have increasingly been edging out those spent on horizontal screens since 2011. Key Takeaway: Of course the consumer who views a mobile video until the end is more likely to respond to the call to action. Marketers will appreciate this finding because they typically put their strongest call to action at the end. It's also worth mentioning that if Snapchat's findings are correct, it's possible that although video consumers are accustomed to videos being horizontal, they're more accustomed to their phones being vertical and staying that way should a text or call come in. Marketers should consider testing response to their own video to see which orientation their followers prefer. #3: Snapchat Users Are Engaged Every day, between 300 and 350 million photos are uploaded to Facebook. With an audience of 1.59 billion and 1.04 billion monthly active users, the portion of the audience participating by uploading photos is less than 35%. In comparison, 65% of Snapchat users upload their own photos daily. They're engaged with the platform, viewing it as an extension of their own personal brand rather than just a place to passively receive information. (Read how Facebook and Twitter users now regard those channels as news outlets.) One of Snapchat's primary sales points is frequency of use. Its 100 million users visit the platform daily. Facebook started measuring their monthly active users (MAU), implying that the number of people going to the channel even once every 30 days constituted success. Snapchat founder Evan Spiegel scoffs at that metric, stating the time frame is far too long and not much to boast about. The numbers his company measures focus on daily activity. Key Takeaway: Engagement is such a sought-after metric because marketers know that those who are interacting with a company are far more likely to share and talk up its posts, offers and products. The engaged consumer uses the company to build a portion of his or her identity....

Webinar: Google Chrome: The Little Browser That Can

by Ray Sidney-Smith @ Blog – W3 Consulting :: Web and Beyond

Most people don’t realize the importance of vital resources until it’s missing suddenly from their lives. Case in point: you likely don’t contemplate the air you breathe at any given moment, unless you’re deprived of it. Not to be too

6 Productivity Tools for Twitter

6 Productivity Tools for Twitter

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you struggling to keep up with your Twitter activities? Looking for a way to streamline your Twitter marketing? The right productivity tools will help you manage your Twitter marketing more effectively and free up your time for other tasks. In this article you'll discover six tools and techniques that will boost your productivity on Twitter. Listen to this article: #1: Manage Twitter Messages With AgoraPulse Keeping on top of your Twitter mentions and messages can take a huge amount of time each day. According to research from Brandwatch, retail brands receive an average of 821 mentions per day on Twitter, but only manage to respond to 40 of them. You can do better than that by using a social media management tool like AgoraPulse. It allows you to display your mentions, direct messages, and monitoring alerts in a social inbox so you can respond as you would with an email. When you review or reply to messages, they're archived, which makes it easy to see which messages you've dealt with. The social inbox for your Twitter account is split into an Inbox tab for your incoming mentions and messages and a Monitoring tab for retweets and search queries. Whenever you reply to or review a message, it's highlighted and archived. This feature is particularly useful to archive low-value or spammy direct messages. Have you ever received one of those automated “thank you for following me” direct messages or something similar? With the Direct Messages filter, you can quickly select all direct messages that don't need a reply and review them in one go, which is a huge time-saver. Once you review or reply to all of your mentions, you'll get that lovely inbox zero feeling. Go to the Monitoring tab to view all of your retweets and searches. This tab is for less urgent messages, while the Inbox focuses on the most actionable messages. Select the Type filter to show only your recent searches or retweets. You can then reply to or like them on an individual basis, or via a bulk review if no action needs to be taken. If you work with a team or have a virtual assistant, you can assign individual messages to team members. To do so, view the message, click the Assign button, and select the relevant team member. You can easily see which messages have been assigned to which team members. If you have a social media team, using a social media management tool is important from a security standpoint. With AgoraPulse, you'll get full control over your team members and avoid having to share your Twitter password. Set aside two or three fixed times every day to attend to your Twitter engagement. Make sure you cap the time for these sessions (for example 10-15 minutes) so you can spend the rest of your day focusing on other areas of your business. AgoraPulse also integrates with Facebook and Instagram and offers reports and publishing features. #2: Automate Blog Content Shares With missinglettr When you post an article to your blog, how many times do you share it on Twitter? It's unusual for people to send just one tweet out when they publish blog content. If you want to maximize the engagement potential for your blog posts, use a tool like missinglettr to set up a drip marketing campaign for them. It allows you to publicize each individual article regularly via Twitter over the course of a year. To get started, set up your free account and connect your blog's RSS feed. Once you do that, missinglettr will start checking for new blog posts. When it detects a new article, it analyzes the content and creates a Twitter marketing campaign for that article for the year. The campaign consists of a series of tweets linking to the article and can include summaries, quotes, images, and a call to action. missinglettr will notify you when the campaign is ready so you can review it. Click the Review link to review the campaign schedule for the article.

8 Common Small Business Marketing Challenges (and How to Overcome Them)

by ThriveHive @ ThriveHive

In today’s competitive market, starting a small business is hard enough, let alone growing it. Small business owners have to juggle historical information, current priorities, future […]

The post 8 Common Small Business Marketing Challenges (and How to Overcome Them) appeared first on ThriveHive.

How To Handle A Multiple Location Business Website

by Nick Leffler @ Search Engine Optimization – Exprance

Learn how to handle a multiple location business website so you'll rank better in search and offer visitors what they're looking for. There's a specific way you should be showing multiple locations of your business on the internet. Older ways for search optimization are outdated, be sure you're doing it right.

The post How To Handle A Multiple Location Business Website appeared first on Exprance.

Questions to Ask When Hiring a Denver SEO Expert

by firestarterseo @ Firestarter Search Engine Optimization

We take our jobs very seriously here at FirestarterSEO. It’s our goal to provide you serve you as a leading…

The post Questions to Ask When Hiring a Denver SEO Expert appeared first on Firestarter Search Engine Optimization.

How to Create Custom Instagram Feeds

How to Create Custom Instagram Feeds

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want an efficient way to stay in touch with your peers, customers and colleagues on Instagram? Have you considered creating custom feeds of their updates? There are tools that make it easy to organize your favorite Instagram accounts into feeds so you never miss an update again. In this article you'll discover how to use Mashfeed and Iconosquare to create customized Instagram feeds. Listen to this article: #1: Create Instagram Feeds With Mashfeed Mashfeed allows you to create your own custom feeds from Instagram, as well as from Twitter, YouTube and Facebook (even from accounts you don't follow). The app makes it easy to categorize your favorite accounts. Mashfeed is available for iPhone and you can download it from the App Store for free. Set Up a Feed When you first open the app, you need to create an account. Pick a username, enter a password and type in your email address. You're then prompted to add a photo, invite friends and follow suggested feeds, but you can skip these steps if you want. To create an Instagram feed, tap the + button in the top-right corner of the screen. In the field at the top, enter a name for your new feed. By default, the feed is public, but you can make it private by tapping Change. Then tap Add Ingredients. Now you're ready to add Instagram users or hashtags you'd like to follow. To do that, tap the Add User button. The first time you use the app, you'll be prompted to connect it to your Instagram account. Tap the Connect to Instagram button and then type in your username and password. After logging into your Instagram account, tap Authorize to allow Mashfeed to access it. Once you've successfully connected your Instagram account, you can start adding users and hashtags to your Instagram feed. To add a user, tap Add User and then tap on the username of the account you'd like to add. You can use the search box at the top of the screen to find specific users. If you want to view a user's profile before adding the account to your Instagram feed, tap the eye icon to the right of the username. When you're finished adding users to your feed, tap Done in the top-right corner of the screen. View Your Feeds To view all of the Instagram feeds you've created, tap the Home button at the bottom of the screen. Then tap on the Instagram feed you want to view. You'll then see the most recent content from the accounts within that Instagram feed. Like Iconosquare, you can heart Instagram posts within the app. If you tap a username within your feed, here are some additional tasks you can do: Unfollow the account. Add the account to another Instagram feed you've created. View all of the posts from that Instagram account. Unlike Iconosquare, Mashfeed doesn't allow you to comment directly through your Instagram feeds, which is a frustrating limitation of the app. That said, many other third-party apps (including Iconosquare) use Instagram's API to allow users to post comments outside of Instagram's native environment. So hopefully this functionality will make its way into a future update of the Mashfeed app. #2: Create Instagram Feeds With Iconosquare Iconosquare is an online tool that provides metrics about your Instagram followers for free. You can also use it to create Instagram feeds you can view through your desktop or smartphone browser. Here's how to get started. Set Up a Group First, you need to create an Iconosquare account. In the top-right corner of the home page, click the Sign in With Instagram button. Once you've signed into your Instagram account, you'll be redirected to the Iconosquare dashboard. Next, you need to create groups to organize the accounts you follow. To do this, click the My Followings tab at the top of the dashboard. Now hover over the circle below any accounts you're following and on the pop-up menu, click New Group.

We Are Lowcountry Strategic Marketing Redefined!

by Edward @ Search Engine Optimization For Business

This verifies the reason that SEO is so important.

The post We Are Lowcountry Strategic Marketing Redefined! appeared first on Search Engine Optimization For Business.

Blogs, Books and Social: How the World Has Changed

Blogs, Books and Social: How the World Has Changed

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you think the world of publishing is evolving? Have you ever thought of self-publishing? To learn more about how blogs, books and social content have evolved, I interview Guy Kawasaki for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Guy Kawasaki, former chief evangelist for Apple and author of many books including Enchantment and What the Plus! Google+ for the Rest of Us. Guy shares his experience of publishing his first book in 1987 and how publishing has changed since then. You'll also learn tips and techniques to use on Google+. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Changes in Publication How the process of publishing books has changed Guy talks about what the book publishing process was like back in 1987 when he published The Macintosh Way and how it has changed since then. He explains the difference between a traditional publishing and self-publishing. With a traditional publisher, there's a lot of going back and forth and not a lot of control for the author. The timeline from finishing a book to it being on a shelf is around 6-9 months. Self-publishing today is a completely different world. You'll discover  how Guy's last book What the Plus was on sale on Kindle six days after he finished writing it.  Guy also shares the story of going from an electronic book to a print book. Listen to the show to hear the story of how What the Plus made it to paperback. How the publishing world is changing Guy explains why publishing is an industry in transition, where he feels this industry will go and the opportunities for publishers today. Guy shares how times have changed with desktop publishing and how anybody with InDesign or an Apple Mac and a laser printer can become a publisher. In addition, people with blogs and websites are publishers. With the variety of tablet computers available today, anyone with Microsoft Word can become a publisher. You'll find out why Guy believes in the theory of "infinite monkeys working on keyboards are going to produce a lot of masterpieces." Listen to the show to find out why now is a great time to self-publish. How Guy's publishing journey has changed and why Guy shares his story of how he ran out of ideas to publish on his own blog, which led him to guest writing for the American Express Open Forum, and how he ran out of ideas for that too. You'll learn why Guy considers his biggest challenges in blogging are to have enough topics to write about over time and to have the time to write. Now with Twitter, Google+ and Facebook, he finds himself more of a curator than a blogger. It's one thing to generate content; it's another to curate and find content. Guy says he has evolved from a blogger to a curator, and when he does write, he writes books. Social networks allow him to express himself spontaneously and the deeper ideas go into book format. He explains why a blog is the logical place to start and why he considers blogging good practice before writing a book. You'll discover the benefits of writing a blog-type post on Google+, compared to a stand-alone blog. Listen to the show to find out why Guy would use Google+ or a Facebook Fan Page today as a platform. How Twitter fits into the social ecosystem today Guy explains why his personal approach to Twitter now is unusual. You'll find out how Guy uses Twitter to curate great content from his website Alltop and a section there called Holy Kaw!

5 Ways to Grow Your LinkedIn Group

5 Ways to Grow Your LinkedIn Group

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more people to join your LinkedIn group? Are you looking for tips to get more exposure for your group? LinkedIn groups are a great way to generate leads and increase influence within an engaged community. In this article, you'll discover five ways to quickly build a larger membership for your LinkedIn group. Listen to this article: #1: Optimize Your Group Description One way to attract more members to join your LinkedIn group is to optimize your group description. This is the description that appears on every group page. In your description, lead with the ultimate reason why people should join your group. This is the first piece of information they see, so it makes sense to highlight your value proposition in this section. Make sure you also spell out the purpose and benefits of joining your group. You'll want to include industry keywords to make it easier for people to find your group when they're searching for groups to join. Identify four to five keywords that are most relevant to your group and use these keywords to optimize your description. Don't forget to mention that self-promotional material is not allowed; otherwise, your group will receive a lot of spammy posts from members who are only there to promote their products or services. You're looking for members who can provide actual value to your LinkedIn group. LinkedIn has a built-in feature that flags posts that are potentially self-promotional or spammy, so even if people do attempt this you can still moderate their posts. #2: Invite Your LinkedIn Connections Because LinkedIn groups are now private, you'll need to manually invite your LinkedIn connections to join. To do this, go to your group's main page and click the Invite Others button. A search box appears where you can type in the name of individual connections who meet your group's criteria. Avoid inviting people who aren't likely to be interested in joining. You can usually tell whether they're suitable by viewing their profile and job title. You can select multiple connections to invite. If you plan to invite as many as possible, start with the letter A, and work your way down to Z. This is the only way to invite a large number of connections. It's important to note that inviting connections does vary by group type. For example, in standard groups, anyone can invite connections to join, but only group managers and owners can pre-approve members and invite them by email address. With unlisted groups, only owners and managers can invite members. Plus, an invitation is required to join unlisted groups. #3: Ask Colleagues and Peers to Promote Your Group Do you know someone with a massive database in your target market? How about someone who runs a digital publication in your niche? Consider asking relevant people to promote your group to their members, and offer an incentive in return. This is how mutually beneficial relationships work, and it could result in many new members for your LinkedIn group. You want to sound as human as possible when doing this type of outreach. Avoid using automation platforms, because most people can tell when you're using one. One-to-one email works best. When you compose your outreach email, start by suggesting you have a new channel that their audience could receive tremendous value from. Use bullet points when identifying this information to make it easier for the recipient to read. If you don't have many industry contacts, consider spending more time working on your personal brand. #4: Send a Newsletter to Your Email Database The importance of growing an engaged email database is well documented. In fact, according to the 2016 B2B Marketing Outlook Report, 60% of marketers are set to conduct more email marketing campaigns in 2016, highlighting its importance. As when doing influencer outreach to your target market, you should create one-on-one emails that are short and to the point an...

6 Location-based Social Media Monitoring Tools

6 Location-based Social Media Monitoring Tools

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to reach local customers on social media? Are you monitoring the online conversations near your business? Geo-specific social media monitoring tools help businesses engage with customers who are close to their brick-and-mortar stores. In this article I'll share six location-based monitoring tools to use for local social media marketing. Why Use Location-Based Monitoring Tools? Geo-specific social media monitoring tools are different from the conventional keyword-based monitoring tools in many respects. For one thing, these tools offer a clear picture of what's happening at a particular location, which helps you reach out to local audiences. Plus, they allow you to connect better with your community by engaging with local social media influencers and leveraging local hashtags. Listen to this article: If you do social media for a company with multiple locations, here are some excellent tools to explore. #1: Search Real-time Feeds With Geofeedia Geofeedia allows you to search real-time social feeds by location to discover geolocation social media posts from anywhere worldwide. You also have the ability to monitor multiple locations to archive, curate and share your content. Simply draw a custom perimeter or enter an address on Geofeedia's digital map. It will then display all social content posted by users in that particular area. While the tool searches by location first, you also have the ability to filter your search by keywords, date, time, users and more, across various social media channels including Facebook, Instagram, Twitter, Flickr and YouTube. Discover what's trending in an area. Then leverage those trends by including the right keywords and hashtags into your social conversations. Geofeedia offers custom social media monitoring solutions for different industries. The pricing depends on the features you require, as well as the number of locations you want to monitor. #2: Engage and Target Customers With WeLink If you're looking for a cutting-edge social monitoring tool for geo-specificity, WeLink is an excellent option. It lets you engage your potential customers with targeted ads and instant offers on their preferred social media channels. This easy-to-use tool combines keyword-based monitoring with geo-specific listening to offer enterprise-grade location-based social monitoring solutions. The result is a hybrid solution, which uses cellular data mining and WiFi to help you discover and collect all social chatter within your selected area. Gather feeds from all popular social channels using this tool. Use WeLink across various verticals including event management, retail, malls, airlines, hospitality, sports teams and stadiums, schools, security and law enforcement, etc. WeLink offers custom pricing, depending on the features you require. #3: Listen to Trends With Sysomos Sysomos enables you to listen to what's trending locally and understand what your customers are talking about. Use this location-based tool to discover and dig into social content posted by local influencers. Sysomos will gather digital content from popular social media platforms like Facebook, Twitter, Google+ and LinkedIn, as well as posts on blogs and forums. It then collects and displays insightful actionable data in a single platform. Filter digital conversations by both keywords and demographic information. This makes Sysomos particularly beneficial if you're targeting customers within a specific age group or gender, for instance. Discover which topics, trends and brands particularly interest your target audience, and then create marketing campaigns based around these areas. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=N2DpsHXh5rY Sysomos differs from other location-based social media tools in many ways. For one thing, it collects both real-time and previously posted content on any topic across social networks. Plus, you have the ability to capture the conversations most r...

Building a Business on the Back of Interviews

Building a Business on the Back of Interviews

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you interview people for your blog or podcast? Want to discover different ways to repurpose those interviews? To explore how he built his business through expert interviews, I interview Nathan Chan. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Nathan Chan, the founder, CEO, and publisher of Foundr Magazine, a paid digital magazine that profiles well-known entrepreneurs. He's built a huge following of almost 1 million Instagram fans and 300,000 email subscribers. He's also launched a new book, Foundr V1.0: Everything you need to know about starting and building a successful business, from the world's most influential entrepreneurs. Nathan shares his interviewing process. You'll discover how Nathan used expert interviews to build his business. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Building a Business on the Back of Interviews The Start of Foundr In 2013, Nathan was working in IT support at a travel company. He loved the company culture, but the work wasn't a fit. As he searched for something more fulfilling to do, he noticed that the major business magazines, of which he was a fan, were difficult for him to relate to. His life wasn't like the lives of the people on a Forbes billionaire list. Nathan started his magazine with about $3,000 and a goal of filling the gap between major business magazine content and entrepreneurs like himself. He wanted to speak to aspiring young entrepreneurs (he was 26 years old at the time) and provide in-depth content about what it takes to build a successful business. Nathan says that podcasts inspired this vision for his magazine, too. Podcasts were becoming increasingly popular, featured stories about relatable people, and could cover a topic in depth. Four months into producing the magazine, Nathan and his startup magazine faced a major roadblock. A large business magazine sued Nathan's startup magazine for trademark infringement. Luckily, Nathan says, the rebranding of the magazine resulted in the name Foundr, which is a better fit. Listen to the show to learn more about how Nathan responded to the lawsuit by improving the magazine's branding. The Business Model Foundr has three main sources of revenue: magazine subscriptions, the membership site, and courses. The magazine subscription is $2.99/month or $21.99/year and is available through the iTunes and Google Play stores. Across monthly and yearly subscriptions, Foundr has 20,000 monthly readers. On the Foundr membership site, subscribers have access to premium content, an online community, and exclusive training. In addition to the main revenue sources, Foundr includes a bit of sponsorship and advertising. Listen to the show to discover the similarities between what Nathan and I do. Nathan's Interviewing Process Nathan has interviewed successful entrepreneurs including Richard Branson, founder of Virgin; Steve Case, founder of AOL; Arianna Huffington, founder of Huffington Post; Gary Vaynerchuk; Barbara Corcoran; Tim Ferriss; Robert Herjavec; Jessica Livingston, founder of Y Combinator; and others. Much of Nathan's interview preparation involves his day-to-day reading about and listening to the topics, brands, and people Foundr covers. He regularly looks at Facebook, reads what's happening in TechCrunch and Mashable, and follows podcasts to see what they're doing and whom they're interviewing. To help find guests, he looks for people who have books coming out or otherwise need press. By consuming a lot of content, Nathan is aware of what's happening in his space and how to guide the i...

Live Video and Marketing: Where the Industry Is Heading

Live Video and Marketing: Where the Industry Is Heading

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Interested in using live video for business? Have you considered creating a live video show? To find out what live video can do for your business, I interview Brian Fanzo. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Brian Fanzo, a tech evangelist who specializes in live video. He's the founder of iSocialFanz and host of the FOMOFanz podcast. Brian explores live video, where it's headed, and how it can help your business. You'll discover whether to use Facebook Live or Periscope if you're just getting started. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Live Video and Marketing What Live Video Means for Business Whether yours is a small business, a brick-and-mortar store, or an ecommerce company, you need to shrink the distance between yourself and your customer, Brian explains. Live video is much more than a marketing play because it shrinks that distance by humanizing your brand and business. Live video is also the gateway to technologies such as augmented reality (AR) and virtual reality (VR), which Brian believes will be huge by 2020. To embrace AR and VR, he says, companies and brands will need to have a live video strategy already in place. He says today's consumers want you to convince them that you can be trusted, that you're a resource, are invested in them, and can understand them. They don't want to be marketed or sold to; they want to engage and have a conversation with you. Businesses need to spend time building rapport, a relationship, and trust with their audience, and live video is a great vehicle for that. With regard to building trust, Brian believes the most valuable statement anyone can make on live video is, "I don't know." If a brand admits they don't know something on live video, it adds validity to what they do know. (When you're stumped, you can also ask audience members to send you a message on Twitter or Facebook, and say you'll have your product manager get back to them.) Listen to the show to hear more about the strategy behind using live video to break down barriers with your audience. Getting Started With Live Video Brian says that according to Cisco, 79% of Internet traffic in 2020 will be video. Nowhere did anyone say that's going to be great video, good video, or live video, Brian continues. However, he believes most brands are thinking about video. Many people think live video is scary because they picture themselves on the video. Brian has to remind them that the best live videos are often made when you're celebrating customers and employees. And if your live video brings people access they can't get anywhere else, the camera doesn't even need to be on you. For example, say you use live video to interview a client, a customer, or a celebrity while they're in the office. As the person behind the camera, you can watch the comments for questions and decide which are important enough to ask the guest. With these kinds of live videos, all of the scary elements of being on air are taken away. Listen to the show to discover my process for doing live videos. Innovative Examples of Live Video Brian says Cisco has done an amazing job with their We Are Cisco campaign. Employees in different offices are trusted to take over the company's social media accounts, including Snapchat and Instagram, to share their point of view. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=oMjEzVH1d0k Not only does the campaign celebrate Cisco's employees, it's also a great recruiting tool. The company doesn't have to convince job applicants that they trust their employees; the proof is v...

eCommerce Basics for Retail Small Business | Web and Beyond

by Ray Sidney-Smith @ Blog – W3 Consulting :: Web and Beyond

Find the original archive of the video here: https://youtu.be/ct9-zrgffHk. Point of Sale – eCommerce – mCommerce solutions for Small Business Selling online today is seemingly easier than ever! You hear the advertising online and in television ads on how easy

Google AdWords: Campaign Experiment BETA

by Mike Poserina @ Engine Ready is an innovative industry leader in SEO and PPC

A fairly new addition to the current selection of Tools in Google AdWords is the Experiment BETA. The next time you are editing your campaign settings take a look and see if

The post Google AdWords: Campaign Experiment BETA appeared first on Engine Ready is an innovative industry leader in SEO and PPC.

How to Grow Your Twitter Following

How to Grow Your Twitter Following

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to grow your followers without advertising? Is Twitter working for you? Investing in organic growth on Twitter takes time, consistency and commitment. But the rewards are more credibility and social proof. In this article you'll find simple steps to organically grow your Twitter followers. Listen to this article: #1: Use IFTTT to Curate Twitter Lists Automatically When you add people to a Twitter list, it signals to them that their tweets are valuable enough to be put in a specific category. People on your lists are likely to reciprocate by following your account. While adding users to a Twitter list manually takes time, it's getting easier to automate the process thanks to new technology. Go to the IFTTT website and create an account or login, then connect your Twitter account. Next, create a recipe that tells your Twitter account that when a new tweet is posted with a hashtag you determine, it should add that user to a new list you create. That's it. Now, whenever people tweet with the hashtag in your recipe, they will be automatically added to your list. Some people will follow you immediately. Send out a tweet to thank them. Connect with the others on your list with a tweet, saying that you added them to your list because you find their content valuable. One more thing: when you're using the automatic method, make sure you follow all of the people you add to your lists. #2: Stay On-Topic and On-Trend Twitter users want to view content they're interested in, not the stuff you think is interesting. Do some research to find which topics related to your field are also popular on Twitter. To find out what's trending, sign into Twitter on your desktop. You'll see the trending hashtags and topics appear on the left-hand side of your page. If appropriate, find ways to contribute to the conversation by tweeting with a trending hashtag. For example, find ways your product or service relates to a holiday. Now, I'm not saying you should tweet out your latest blog post and include a trending hashtag that is completely unrelated just to get more views. This is a pretty spammy approach. The goal is not to abandon your brand and jump on whatever shines brightest. It's to take advantage of any widespread trends, news and happenings that are related to your business. Ideally, find something subtle, funny and relatable. When the conversation changes, go with the flow. Jump on the right trends and you'll increase the visibility of your tweets and ultimately gain followers. #3: Respond to Tweets From Large Accounts It's also good practice to reply to tweets posted by accounts with hundreds of thousands or millions of followers. Responding to a giant in your industry is a prime opportunity to engage with bigger crowds. Once you respond, your tweet is attached to their tweet and everyone else can see it. #4: Thank People Who Engage With You This should be the golden rule of Twitter: Engage with people when they engage with you. When people add you to a Twitter list, thank them. When users favorite a tweet you're mentioned in, thank them. When people follow you, thank them. When people retweet you, thank them. This goes beyond gratitude. Thank and engage with people every single time they engage with you, whether they ask a question, offer a suggestion, mention you at an event, etc. Not only will this help you keep new followers, it also prompts them to share your stuff even more with their network, thereby increasing your visibility. People like people who notice them and respond to them. Getting in this habit is a surefire way to organically build an engaged Twitter community. #5: Tweet Those You Quote Whether you write a blog post that includes a Twitter user or use a tool like Storify to compile a bunch of tweets, remember to @mention those you include. People like to see their names published.

Instagram Strategy: How to Grow a Loyal Following With Instagram

Instagram Strategy: How to Grow a Loyal Following With Instagram

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is your business on Instagram? Want to develop an engaged following? To discover how to create an Instagram strategy for your business, I interview Nathan Chan. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Nathan Chan, the publisher of Foundr magazine, a digital publication designed to help entrepreneurs succeed. He's also host of the Foundr podcast. Nathan is also crushing it on Instagram with nearly 400,000 followers. Nathan will explore how he built a massive following on Instagram. You'll discover techniques you can employ right now for your Instagram strategy. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Instagram Strategy Why Nathan started Foundr Nathan launched Foundr on March 5, 2013, because he wanted to become an entrepreneur and didn't know where to start. He realized there weren't any magazines targeting aspiring or novice entrepreneurs, only magazines aimed at established businesses. Foundr is a monthly publication, available on iOS and Android mobile devices. Download the app and explore the interactive magazine, which is subscription-based. Once you get inside, Nathan says, it's like a flipbook, where you click and explore. Nathan explains why Foundr differs from a traditional print magazine. Because some people prefer to read and others like to listen, Nathan added a Foundr podcast to the mix after he left his day job. He wanted to share several amazing interviews he'd recorded on Skype. For example, the issue with Tony Robbins on the cover includes a feature article with exclusive material, as well as the audio interview embedded inside the magazine. Listen to the show to hear how long it took Nathan to leave his job and what he was doing when he started Foundr. Foundr and Instagram Foundr has been on Instagram since November 2014, and has more than 400,000 followers. A year and a half ago, Nathan tried Instagram and was having no success. He shares how a reader from Melbourne who had an entrepreneur page on Instagram with 20,000 followers contacted him. The reader thought if he posted Foundr's Richard Branson cover, he would get Foundr more readers. Nathan shares why the tactic didn't work and what he learned he should have done instead. Last November, Nathan revisited Instagram. He'd already got about 500 followers organically, since Foundr had 20 or 30 images posted. When Nathan did a couple of posts on the Foundr Instagram page, he saw their magazine sales spike on Google Analytics. By this time, the guy from Melbourne was up to 80,000 followers, so Nathan reconnected with him and they started battle-testing different combinations on Instagram to see what would get more followers, encourage people to click on his bio and build his email list. Foundr's email list has since grown considerably, due to traffic from Instagram. Last November, it was around 2,000. Now it's just about to hit 100,000. Nathan explains how to use lead magnets on Instagram to get people on your email newsletter list. Listen to the show to discover why Nathan gave Instagram another try. Nathan's Instagram strategy Nathan says his strategy is to create viral-type content that resonates with Foundr's target audience and provide it on a consistent basis. The goal of the Instagram account is to build community, raise awareness of the brand and build the email newsletter database. To get more email subscribers, Foundr currently links to an ebook as a lead magnet in the bio. The link pushes people to a landing page where they can get the "How to Get Your First 10,

Mobile’s New Impact on SEO

by Propel Marketing & Design, Inc. @ Propel Marketing & Design, Inc.

The post Mobile’s New Impact on SEO appeared first on Propel Marketing & Design, Inc..

Andrew MacDonald joins team at Access Publishing

by Access Publishing @

The team at Access Publishing recently welcomed a new advertising executive, Andrew MacDonald. Scott Brennan, CEO of Access Publishing, has brought MacDonald onto the team to help bring new advertising clients to the company. He will be selling advertising for the Paso Robles Daily News, the A-Town Daily News, the San Luis Obispo County Visitor’s Guide, as well as helping local businesses get found online with Local...

Read More

The post Andrew MacDonald joins team at Access Publishing appeared first on .

What Are The Basics of a Good Blog Post? Part 1

by Will Paccione @ Dot Xero

If you’ve heard me talk about search engine optimization, you’ve heard me say “industry relevant content on a continual basis”. Which just means putting good information online that your prospects and clients want to know about (and search for on search engines). However, I think it’s time to take that to the next step, because […]

The post What Are The Basics of a Good Blog Post? Part 1 appeared first on Dot Xero.

3 Facebook Live Examples That Generated Sales

3 Facebook Live Examples That Generated Sales

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Looking for ways to use Facebook Live for business? Interested in what's working for others? Facebook Live broadcasts can help you expand your current audience and get new clients and customers. In this article, you'll discover how three companies used Facebook Live to generate sales and how to adapt their tactics for your own business. Listen to this article: #1: Broadcast a Milestone Celebration Results Fitness Santa Clarita decided to do a Facebook Live flash mob to celebrate their 16th anniversary. Although the culminating event seemed impromptu, weeks of planning went into it. Here's how they did it. Build Excitement With a Story Fitness professionals and gym owners Rachel and Alwyn Cosgrove started the celebration by sharing their stories. To build up anticipation, they shared a different post (part 1, part 2, part 3, and part 4) on the first four days of anniversary week. In preparation for any event, do whatever you can to make it personal. Build a genuine rapport with your audience and they'll be even more invested in what you have to say when you go live. Plan the Event While Rachel and Alwyn needed to get permits from the city (in addition to other requirements), your planning might be as simple as picking a date and planning the event. They also started a secret Facebook group to coordinate. Fitness instructors, participants (gym members), and anyone involved with the flash mob itself were invited to the group. This made it easy to share practice times and other logistics. Build Buzz With a Live Pre-party To get their Facebook fans excited about the big surprise, Results Fitness broadcasted the pre-party. The owners, staff, and guests were interviewed live. A behind-the-scenes pre-live can help you generate anticipation for a surprise event. Broadcast Live The Live flash mob went for 9 minutes and got 360 views. With a performance Live such as this, in-the-moment interaction via comments is less likely. However, you could always stay on afterwards and engage with your audience. Post the Highlights Rachel and Alwyn created a 3-minute highlight reel from the flash mob and uploaded it after the fact. It received 400 views the day it posted. Whether you post a sizzle reel, a clip, or the event in its entirety, do some form of follow-up. Thank those who attended and shared in your celebration, too. Results: Because of the flash mob and all of the Facebook interaction surrounding it, memberships at Results Fitness increased. People loved the fun and wanted to become part of the culture of the gym. #2: Stream an Online Sale The Funky Fairy is an online store based in the United Kingdom that sells personalized, embroidered gifts for kids. Owner Vicki Stewart decided to do a sale via Facebook Live to liquidate the personalized items with kids' names in her overstock inventory. Here's the process: Plan and Have a Sale The Funky Fairy did three sales over four days. Each was a stand-alone Facebook Live that ran about 20 minutes. The first sale went so well, Vicki did a second (the first and second each had about 7,000 views) and then a third (which got about 10,000 views). During the Live, Vicki chatted as she showed the names and available sale items and people would comment to request the names they wanted. If customers wanted an item she didn't have on sale, they were directed to the special order page. To make the most of it, do a sale on Live as a limited-time or limited-inventory sale or series. Whether the reason is summer, weekend, or closeout, always give a credible purpose. Alternatively if you're a consultant without physical stock and you want to get more of a certain type of client on your roster, offer a limited number of coaching slots for people in that industry. Another option is to limit a sale to only people who are commenting during the Live broadcast. You can then make a different offer available t...

Blab.im: Why Your Business Should Consider Blab

Blab.im: Why Your Business Should Consider Blab

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you host live-streaming video? Want to hear about the latest live-casting technology? To discover more about Blab, I interview Joel Comm. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Joel Comm, the author of many books, including Twitter Power 3.0. He also is host of The Joel Comm Show and he's all in on Blab! Joel will explore Blab live casting and why your business might want to consider using it. You'll discover the difference between Blab.im and other live-streaming platforms, as well as some tips to get started. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Blab.im How Joel got started with video Joel shares how he signed up for his first YouTube account in 2006. The next year, he decided that video online needed to be kicked up a notch. Inspired by the rise of YouTube and the reality show The Apprentice, in 2007 Joel produced and hosted the world's first competitive Internet reality show, called The Next Internet Millionaire, which received an honorary Webby award for reality TV. In 2008 UStream.tv became one of the first tools for streaming live video from a desktop, so he started doing The Joel Comm Show from his offices with co-host Dan Nickerson. They did a weekly interactive show that was usually about an hour long. Sometimes they would have a guest in his studio office, and other times they would just engage with the people who were commenting. It's very similar to how people comment on Blab. Joel believes streaming video is a great way to communicate, broadcast, share and deliver content, and build community. Listen to the show to learn what was involved with filming The Next Internet Millionaire. Joel and Blab Joel, who has been using Meerkat, Periscope and Live for Facebook Mentions for several months, thinks it was Mia Voss who first told him about Blab. She mentioned it at the beginning of August, and he started using Blab a couple of weeks later. He has been immersed in the platform ever since. He hosts two different shows and then logs on at other random times, either to do a Blab that's not really a show, to hang out and talk with people or to be interviewed on somebody else's show. Joel explains that Blab, in its simplest form, is a video conferencing tool that allows up to four people to be on screen at once. It's integrated with a chat room, and whoever wants to watch a blab can do so. Viewers are also able to interact with each other and the hosts. Blab is integrated with Twitter (your login is your Twitter account), and you're able to easily tweet from the Blab interface. There's a mobile app available for iOS devices and an Android app is on the way. What's so cool about Blab is that it works, Joel says. While Google hangouts sometimes require a whole tutorial, Blab is so simple that most people get it intuitively. Audience members click to request to join a seat. When the host approves you, you're on the show. People ask Joel what's better: Periscope or Blab. He believes that's not the right question, because it's comparing apples to oranges. Periscope, Meerkat and Facebook Live Mentions are all one-to-many broadcasting apps. They allow one person to instantly reach and talk at their audience. It's only a conversation in that those watching can comment, and whoever is hosting can refer to those questions and comments on video. Unless you have somebody right next to you on the screen, it's just one person. Blab puts the "social" component into social media in the most profound and effective way. Blab allows people to be face to face in real time with...

Search Engine Optimization - SEO Services for Local Business | Hearst DMS

Search Engine Optimization - SEO Services for Local Business | Hearst DMS


Hearst DMS

Ranking your company at the top of search engines is key to growing your brand and attracting new customers. See how the SEO experts at Hearst DMS can help.

Google is Launching a New Website Builder for Small Businesses

by Maddie Costa @ Classy Brain

The rumors have been confirmed. Earlier this June, Google released its own website builder feature that is available to every Google My Business account across the globe. The launch of Websites has been speculated for quite a few months, being...

The post Google is Launching a New Website Builder for Small Businesses appeared first on Classy Brain.

5 Tips for Enhancing Your Website

by John Blaze @ Driven Local

SEM, SEO, social media marketing, local listings — at the end of the day, what all of these digital marketing efforts come down to is getting more traffic to your business — whether it is actual foot traffic into your location or web traffic to your landing page. But, in order to see success in […]

The post 5 Tips for Enhancing Your Website appeared first on Driven Local.

Social Media Tools: How to Simplify Your Social Media Marketing

Social Media Tools: How to Simplify Your Social Media Marketing

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you looking for a better way to manage your social activities? Are you wondering what tools can help your social media marketing? To discover free or low-cost tools to simplify your social media marketing, I interview Ian Cleary for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Ian Cleary, the founder of Razor Social—a blog dedicated to social media tools. He's also the social media tools writer for Social Media Examiner. Ian shares why as a marketer you should look beyond Google Analytics and Facebook Insights data. You'll learn the services available to keep up to date with relevant content and the tools to use to monitor your overall activities across all social channels. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Media Tools How did you become interested in social media tools? Ian explains how his history working for software companies and his very strong technology background led him to social media. When he started to look at all of the key influencers around social media, he soon realized the social media tools niche was perfect because nobody owned that space. Listen to the show to hear how Ian is amazed by the number of tools in development. Why you should look beyond Google Analytics and Facebook Insights data Ian states that although Google Analytics is useful, it doesn't track things such as what's happening on social media related to Twitter or LinkedIn. And the Facebook analytics tool is a little too complicated for many people. One free tool that Ian recommends is LikeAlyzer, which is a very simple Facebook analytics tool. It evaluates your Facebook Page and will give you a score out of 100. You'll then receive some basic recommendations on what to improve. Listen to the show to find out what other amazing recommendations it will reveal. Tools to help marketers keep up with news and content they may want to share Ian explains why there is a lot of activity in this area. The two tools that Ian likes to use on a day-to-day basis are Feedly and Scoop.it. Feedly is a website that allows you to read a selection of posts from any blogs you subscribe to. When you log in, you will see the latest posts. It has a really nice user interface. You can access the content through the web and your mobile device. It also integrates with Buffer app. You'll discover how this can help you with your social media workflow. Another advantage of Feedly is you can group the sites you subscribe to. You'll hear Ian explain the benefits of this and how he groups his. The integration of Feedly and Buffer saves marketers a lot of time. Another tool to help you discover content is Scoop.it. You can follow people on Scoop.it to find relevant content. You can then add this content to one of your boards. It's not only a great way to find content, but also for others to help create it for you. Scoop.it is similar to Feedly in terms of the collection of content, except it's based around people who pick the content for you. You'll discover how to find the right people to follow and the most popular boards around your niche. Ian shares what replacement he uses for Digg and why it's a good source of content. Ian uses a tool within Facebook called Post Planner. It shows you trending content and what's been shared the most. You can then select content and add it to your Facebook Page. Listen to the show to hear about how LinkedIn has invited authorities to bl...

How to Use LinkedIn Showcase Pages for Business

How to Use LinkedIn Showcase Pages for Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you looking for more ways to use LinkedIn for your business? Have you considered showcase pages? LinkedIn showcase pages enable you to promote certain products or services to specific customer segments. In this article you'll discover how to use LinkedIn showcase pages for your business. Listen to this article: What Are Showcase Pages? Showcase pages are an extension of your LinkedIn company page and allow you to highlight a particular product line or brand. Although you need to have a company page to create showcase pages, they're somewhat of a standalone feature. Each showcase page has its own followers, status updates and functionality, sort of like a mini LinkedIn company page. Any showcase pages you've created for your business are listed in the right column of your company page. For example, IBM has a number of showcase pages, including IBM Cloud, IBM Analytics, IBM Security, IBM with MSPs, IBM Social Business and IBM Watson. Here's how to set up showcase pages for your business's products and services. #1: Choose a Page Name First, you need to choose a page name. To take advantage of showcase pages for SEO, include your target SEO keywords as part of the page-naming process. For example, because I provide search engine optimization training, I claimed, created and optimized the showcase page with the same name: Search Engine Optimization Training. The URL for the showcase page I claimed is http://www.linkedin.com/company/search-engine-optimization-training. As you can see from the URL, showcase pages are not directly linked to your LinkedIn company page. The URL just says .../company/..., and only the name of the showcase page is included in the URL. This means no one else can claim a LinkedIn showcase page with that same name. It's sort of like registering and claiming a really cool .com URL and making it yours. #2: Create a Showcase Page To create a showcase page, log into your LinkedIn company page, hover or click on the down-pointing arrow next to Edit and select Create a Showcase Page from the drop-down menu. You can claim up to 10 showcase pages for your company. If you need additional pages, reach out to LinkedIn’s support team and request them. #3: Optimize the Page for Search Without a doubt, Google loves LinkedIn company pages, and frequently ranks them high in search results if they're properly optimized. The same principle applies to showcase pages. The more followers you have and the more actively those followers engage with your showcase page, the better. There are a number of ways you can optimize your showcase pages for search. You get more SEO juice by including target SEO keywords in the showcase page name (as described earlier) and in the description. You can use up to 200 characters to draft an engaging and compelling product or service description, so make good use of this real estate. In the Website area of your page, make sure you include a link to the corresponding service or product page on your website. Also add your logo and a header image to your showcase page. For the header image, you can upload an image in the PNG, JPEG or GIF format. The maximum file size for the image is 2MB, and it must be 974 x 330 pixels or larger. Be sure to invite people to follow your showcase page and encourage them to engage with your posts. When you post status updates on the page, keep them focused and include your target SEO keywords. Companies Using Showcase Pages Here's a look at how three well-known companies use showcase pages to promote their products and services. Adobe Creative Cloud The Adobe Creative Cloud showcase page has more than 15,700 followers and features an excellent and relevant header image. The Adobe company page encourages visitors to follow all of their LinkedIn showcase pages. Intel IT Center The Intel IT Center showcase page, which has more than 47,200 followers,

6 Ways to Improve Engagement With Social Media Content

6 Ways to Improve Engagement With Social Media Content

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you struggle to get your fans to engage? Interested in ideas to get people talking? Simple content ideas can give you something to talk about, even if you feel like you don't have anything new or original to say. In this article you'll discover six ways to create social media conversations with content. Listen to this article: #1: Ask Your Audience Questions Everyone wants to be heard, so consider asking questions in your social media posts. This gives your audience the opportunity to chime in with their opinions, tips and wisdom. Inviting people to join the conversation makes them feel like your company cares about what they have to say. It also provides insights into your audience that can inform your marketing decisions. Prior to opening a new location, YO! Sushi asked their Facebook followers to guess where the new location would be, based on photos of local landmarks. Everything that Loot Crate does on social media pertains to the gamer and geek culture. In this Facebook post Shenron the dragon asks the audience a question from Anime Expo. Female Entrepreneur Association is all about inspiring and empowering female entrepreneurs and creating a community for them. The question posed below not only engages their audience, but also creates a sense of community among members who are planning to attend the same conference. Money Crashers, which provides expert information on personal finance, flips the script in this post and asks the audience to share their tips. Asking a simple question like "Where in the world are you?" is an easy way to connect with people and find out more about them. This Facebook post from Sprouting Photographer provides an inspirational quote and then asks followers to share their favorite quotes. #2: Post Lighthearted or Humorous Content If you're having a rough day, lighthearted or humorous social content can lighten your mood a bit. You can be that ray of sunshine for your followers, and at the same time, develop meaningful relationships. The Honest Company, whose mission is to empower people to live happy and healthy lives, does a great job of using graphics. The brand is lighthearted, so this amusing post ties in perfectly. If you see content that makes you smile, it will probably make your followers smile as well. In this post Save The Date Wedding Podcast shares a cute animal video from BuzzFeed. Headspace, a meditation app, posts graphics that people can identify with and asks followers to tag friends on Instagram who are like-minded. Denise Duffield-Thomas has an audience of female entrepreneurs who work from home, so she knew this photo of a smartphone cover would make them laugh. #3: Show Off Your Personal Side The more people connect with you on a personal level, the more likely they are to do business with you. If you're a business owner, give people a glimpse into your personal life. If you're a marketer, show what it's like behind the scenes of your company. This post from business strategist Amber McCue reminds people that she, too, is juggling a family life and career. By sharing this post about her kids, she connects with other entrepreneurial moms. Fizzle focuses on helping people start businesses. They post behind-the-scenes photos of their staff spending time together, which helps them connect with their audience. Even Oprah takes readers behind the scenes on her social accounts. In this Instagram post she's learning to make Tibetan dumplings for a lesson she showed on Periscope. Natalie Sisson's followers are interested in her Suitcase Entrepreneur lifestyle, and this Facebook post gives them a taste. #4: Share Inspirational Quotes We all love to be inspired. That's why posts with quotes are so popular on social media. When choosing quotes, keep in mind the perspective of your customers and what they hope to achieve. DailyWorth,

How to Build a Periscope Audience for Your Business

How to Build a Periscope Audience for Your Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you marketing on Periscope? Want to reach more people? You can develop a following on Periscope by promoting your broadcasts, engaging with viewers and repurposing your content on other channels. In this article you'll discover how to build a Periscope audience for your business. #1: Cross-Promote Broadcasts While content is ultimately king, think about how you can attract enough of an audience to Periscope to drive results. Listen to this article: If you've already established and nurtured followers on other social channels, especially Twitter, you likely have a strong foundation to begin distributing your Periscope content and generating interest. Think about your branding guidelines for the social channels that you plan to use in your promotion strategy. Even though you're promoting Periscope content, make sure that you optimize your promotions to match the tone and format of the different channels. By aligning your promotion to each network, you increase the likelihood of earning social shares, receiving feedback and gathering an audience. Consider the following distribution tactics when planning your Periscope promotions. Twitter When promoting your live stream on Twitter, craft a brief yet compelling tweet equipped with hashtags and an attractive visual, which are some Twitter best practices. In the tweet below Michael Hyatt included hashtags to attract people interested in Periscope streams, as well as the followers of his #VirtualMentor brand. Hashtags on Twitter can make your Periscope event (or scope) more noticeable and easily searchable on the channel. Hyatt also used an informative and eye-catching visual to attract users' attention when they're scrolling through their Twitter feeds. Pinterest Pinterest is largely built on visually compelling, do-it-yourself and project-based content. Create informative content that incorporates images with a tall aspect ratio, detailed descriptions of your event and a call to action to your Periscope stream or landing page. Instagram When promoting your live stream on Instagram, consider adding a text overlay to your images. Content descriptions on this channel tend to be shorter (around 100 characters) and include multiple hashtags (try three to five). In this Instagram post, Sue B. Zimmerman promotes a scope with Kim Garst. Facebook Visual content typically does well on Facebook, particularly video. Create a brief video preview to attract attention and tag any guests participating in your Periscope stream to reach a broader audience. The LPGA promotes upcoming Periscope broadcasts on their Facebook page. This post previews an upcoming broadcast with golfer Morgan Pressel. Snapchat While Snapchat can be a tricky channel for promotions, start by creating a story to announce your Periscope stream. Since your followers won't be able to follow direct links to your content, ask them to take screenshots of your snaps that contain event details or publish snaps that reiterate the value of your Periscope stream to pique interest. LinkedIn Create a short LinkedIn Publisher article (between 500 and 800 words) to promote your Periscope efforts. Make sure to include an eye-catching visual and a call to action. You can share this content on your personal account or company profile, through LinkedIn groups or by direct messaging connections who are likely to be interested in your content. Hootsuite CEO Ryan Holmes promoted an upcoming AMA on Periscope in this LinkedIn article. Email List and Company Blog Okay, so your email list and blog aren't necessarily social channels. However, using your owned media channels to generate interest can be an excellent strategy for driving visitors to your Periscope content. Alert email subscribers to your upcoming broadcasts or write a blog post summarizing recent ones. Be sure to ask your followers for feedback and the type of content that they'd ...

Insights From Google Marketing Next

by Ray Kirsch @ Dynamics Online

Google Marketing Next 2017 Google is constantly evolving. Products such as Google My Business, AdWords and Analytics are regularly updated, and machine learning is now a core component of Google’s search algorithm. Google’s 2017 annual Marketing Next seminar focused on machine learning and user journeys. Out with Mobile-Friendly; In With […]

How to Create Facebook Video Ads: A Step by Step Guide

How to Create Facebook Video Ads: A Step by Step Guide

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Interested in creating Facebook video ads? Looking for an easy-to-follow guide? Facebook video ads don't require a lot of time or money. All you need is a script and some basic gear. In this article you'll discover how to design and record your own Facebook video ads. Listen to this article: Why Create Facebook Video Ads? According to data from comScore, 64% of consumers are more likely to buy products after watching videos about them. You can use the power of video ads to get more leads and sales for your business. Here are some ways to use video ads: Introduce your brand. This can be the type of video you would normally have on your home page, in which you share your company mission and story. Give value upfront. Use a how-to or tutorial video as an ad. Or simply share great content and get people to click through to your website. Build your email list. Create a quick video introducing your free ebook or upcoming webinar. Share testimonials. If your customers record a video testimonial for you, ask them if you can use it in a video ad. This is a great way to retarget people who have visited your sales page. For these videos, use animated text and images, a recording of yourself (or other people) or a combination of both. All of these options can work well, depending on your business and the goals for your campaign. This article focuses on how to create your own video ad, with the goal of building your email list. Here's an example of what this video ad might look like in a fan's Facebook news feed. The goal of this video ad is to entice people to sign up for a free report, which is similar to the strategy that this article focuses on. Here's how to get started creating your own Facebook video ads. #1: Set Up the Equipment You don't need a lot of fancy equipment to create a great-looking video. The most important thing is to be authentic and relatable in your video. For the background, you can use a white wall or backdrop, or a nicely decorated room in your house, as long as it doesn't distract too much. The example below uses a brick wall backdrop. You can use your smartphone to record the video. If your phone isn't older than three years, you probably have some great HD video recording options. If you want to turn the quality up a notch (and have the money to invest), the Logitech C930e webcam is a great alternative. Good audio quality is essential for a great video. Consider using a Blue Yeti or Rode Podcaster USB mic. Lighting is also important; however, you don't need professional lighting equipment. Simply use lamps from your living room or home office to light the area. Or record your video in a room where steady sunlight is coming through the windows. Avoid direct sunlight though, as this can overexpose your video and result in unwanted shadow effects. #2: Practice the Script Next, you need to practice your script. If you haven't created one yet, follow the five steps to create the perfect script: grab attention, build interest, cultivate desire, create persuasion and end with a strong call to action. Here's a basic script example: Struggling to eat healthy? There's a new method that makes it easy. This free guide shows you exactly how. 79,894 people have already tried it. Click Download to get your free recipes. This script is a great starting point for a talking-head video ad, but you'll likely feel like a robot when you say these words on camera. To make it flow better, say the script out loud a few times, and add some words that make it feel more natural to you. Also, consider introducing yourself to add a personal touch, especially if you're targeting a new audience. After some tweaking, the basic script above looks like this: Hi, do you ever struggle with eating healthy? My name is …. and I'm the founder of …. I've created a new method that makes eating healthy very easy, and I'm offering a free guide that shows you ex...

Businesses: Reach new customers in Cambria

by Access Publishing @

Your Cambria Phone Book deadline is May 30 Access Publishing, the parent company of the Paso Robles Daily News, is producing the 2017 edition of Your Cambria Phone Book. It’s the only local, family-owned directory serving Cambria, Harmony, San Simeon and the North Coast of San Luis Obispo County. Over 6,000 copies of the new Cambria Phone book will be delivered to every home, apartment,...

Read More

The post Businesses: Reach new customers in Cambria appeared first on .

How Snapchat and Periscope Can Grow a Business

How Snapchat and Periscope Can Grow a Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to use Snapchat for business? Wondering how to incorporate your brand into live stories? To explore how to use Periscope and Snapchat for business, I interview John Kapos. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview John Kapos, part of a long family line of chocolatiers who have run Perfection Chocolates in Australia since 1939. Online he's known as Chocolate Johnny. He's very active on Snapchat, Instagram, and Periscope. John shares how marketing on Snapchat has affected his business. You'll discover creative ideas to help your own business succeed with Periscope, Snapchat, and Instagram Stories. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How Snapchat and Periscope Can Grow a Business How John Got Started With Snapchat John shares that his store in Sydney, Australia gets bombarded with kids at the end of the school day, and he had begun to notice his sons and their friends using Snapchat. Even though he was told he's "too old" for Snapchat, he decided to take a chance. John, a self-described early adopter, started on Facebook and then got involved with Instagram. While he felt Instagram was cleaner, nicer, and crisper, he loved the functionality of Snapchat. For example, it let him do a video and include titles, add music, and so on. In the beginning, John posted photos of customers and chocolate, as well as videos of him introducing himself and making treats. In one of those early promos, he posted a picture and told his followers to screenshot it and then come in for a free hot chocolate. Two people did just that, and John shares that he's had as many as 60 people come to the store in response to a similar promotion. Now, John explains, his Snapchat stories all have a beginning, a middle, and an end, and all have a tie to chocolate. Each story also has a call to action such as Come to Perfection Chocolates, Come to the website, Come to meet me, or Be part of the party. For example, a Snapchat promotion of his Star Wars chocolate products began with an image of Han Solo and the text, "I'm in a dilemma. Help Me." The middle was an explanation of what John was making. The story ended with a call to action: "Please screenshot and tell me which one is better: milk chocolate or dark chocolate." A total of 63 people responded. Listen to the show to discover how using Snapchat has turned John's store into a global brand. Working Your Brand Into Snapchat Stories Everyone has a story, John believes, and he says it's all about getting out of your comfort zone and telling your story. People tell John he's got an advantage because he's promoting chocolate, and everybody loves chocolate. However, John doesn't think that should make a difference, and shares that he's helped a dentist create funny stories that make children want to come and see him, and a mechanic in New Zealand build a story around how to change a tire. John reiterates that anyone can create stories with any product, they just have to step out of the box. For example, he explains, spotting a large chocolate Easter egg in his store inspired a Snapchat video about two chocolate rabbits that mated to produce a 10-pound chocolate egg, out of which came a white chocolate elephant. John also creates stories about his characters, Johnny Chocolate, a chocolate 'dealer'; Johnny's bodyguard, Frankie; and Johnny's drag-queen girlfriend, Vanilla Chocolate. Listen to the show to hear what happened when John set out to prove he could go a week without using chocolate in his snaps.

Unlock the SEO Power of Facebook in 2 Minutes.

by Third Marble @ Search Engine Optimization | Third Marble Marketing

The post Unlock the SEO Power of Facebook in 2 Minutes. appeared first on Third Marble Marketing.

Why is Blogging Important For My Business

by Monique Thomas @ Search Engine Optimization – Driven Local

In today’s internet-based society, your business needs to have a powerful online presence in order to stand out among your competitors. One of the most cost-effective ways to create a strong online presence and drive traffic (or leads) to your website is blogging. Every time you publish a well-developed blog post, you are creating a […]

The post Why is Blogging Important For My Business appeared first on Driven Local.

Twitter Chats: How to Create a Successful Tweet Chat

Twitter Chats: How to Create a Successful Tweet Chat

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you familiar with Twitter chats? Wondering how Twitter chats can help market your business? To learn more about Twitter chats and what they can mean for your business, I interview Pam Moore for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Pam Moore, founder of Marketing Nutz, an agency specializing in social media marketing. One of Pam's areas of expertise includes Twitter. Pam shares why businesses should host Twitter chats and the marketing benefits of running them. You'll discover how to get started, where to find participants and ways to promote your Twitter chats. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter Chats What Is a Twitter Chat?  A Twitter chat is a way to get people together at a predetermined time and talk about a subject. Their purpose is to organize conversation and connect people. Pam says that if you're new to social media, and to Twitter specifically, then Twitter chats are a great way for you to learn how to use it. Twitter chats not only allow you to form a deep connection with a community, but Pam has also seen people empower their lives and businesses faster than they thought possible. When you plan a tweet chat, you can make them formal or informal. You'll find out why Pam recommends that you have a combination of both. You can also do tweet chats in a series, which can help with your brand's positioning. With this type of tweet chat, you need to put together a strategy over several months. One of Pam's clients, IBM, recently held an event called IBM Connect in Orlando, where they hosted tweet chats with some of the influencers and speakers for the event. The aim of these tweet chats was to generate awareness and excitement for the event, plus drive registration. This particular chat had over 40 million impressions over the course of a few days, and included 2500 tweets. Nearly 600 people took part in the conversation. You'll find out what comes after the tweet chat that is just as important as the chat itself and why you are left with a social asset. Listen to the show to find out what IBM added to the front and back ends of their tweet chat for IBM Connect. Why host a tweet chat? One of the marketing benefits when you host your own tweet chat is that you can start to a build a community around it. You can capture the mindshare of that audience for a specific time on a regular basis. This gives you an opportunity to communicate and support your marketing objectives. Your core goal is to focus on the needs of your audience. When you provide great content, which can bring good people to the community, then they'll begin to depend on you and want more. Pam has seen so many people—clients included—grow their businesses and make connections and partnerships. It easily puts you in a leadership role. Listen to the show to discover how a tweet chat can easily go viral. How to prepare for a tweet chat Pam says that the process includes both art and science. As the chat leader, you need to provide some framework, but you don't want it to look like you have planned everything that you say. You have to balance structure with flexibility and agility. In a structured-style tweet chat, you have a list of questions. Pam usually creates a list of questions and has a specific topic to talk about. Pam is the leader of the GetRealChat, which is held weekly to educate and help the audience. As the leader,

Gmail Ads: What’s New and How to Boost Performance

by Kayley Conti @ Driven Local

Gmail Ads, also known as Gmail Sponsored Promotions (GSPs), made their comeback in 2015. Since then, we have been utilizing these campaigns as an extremely cost-effective way to reach target audiences where they’re likely to be found multiple times per day — in their Gmail inbox. Google recently announced changes to the way Gmail ads […]

The post Gmail Ads: What’s New and How to Boost Performance appeared first on Driven Local.

On-Page vs Off-Page SEO

by ThriveHive @ ThriveHive

Advancements in search engine capabilities, as well as their widespread use among consumers, have shifted marketing priorities of businesses big and small today. It’s no longer […]

The post On-Page vs Off-Page SEO appeared first on ThriveHive.

How to Use Your Social Media Team for More Than Just Marketing

How to Use Your Social Media Team for More Than Just Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you fully leveraging the power of your social team? Have you considered using social for more than just marketing? Your social team can do more than manage your online community. Your team can also support the goals and functions of other departments in your business. In this article you'll discover four ways your social media team can contribute to the success of your business. Listen to this article: #1: Inform Planning Decisions Whether your business is working on annual or seasonal campaigns across traditional or digital channels, your social team can offer useful data and information on: Positioning and the opportunity to meet gaps in the marketplace Data and information that can fuel new ideas or positioning Ask for a briefing well in advance, so you can give your team time to get a firm grasp on the information that will be beneficial at the planning meeting. For example, if your business is planning a holiday campaign, have members of your team use social monitoring tools to conduct research that sheds light on successes and challenges with past holiday campaigns, the competitive landscape, and overall sentiment for a specific category or campaign. Or if a new brand position is being discussed, your community manager can reach out to key influencers who are active and loyal to test their perception of and receptiveness to proposed approaches. Additionally, your team can design a social media survey and target a larger pool of relevant audiences to test whether new ideas and messaging are on track and positively perceived. #2: Support New Initiatives When integrated with other distribution methods such as programmatic media and search engine marketing, social media can drive awareness for new initiatives, such as a product launch. Your social team can create visibility for the launch through paid social media ads to hyper-target potential customers, as well as through partnerships with influencers and brand advocates. To make working with brand advocates easier, you can use tools such as Crowdly to identify individuals who have previously engaged with your content beyond a "like," so you can leverage them to reach additional audiences. Regardless of which methods you combine, remember to align your messaging and timing to drive impact. #3: Extend the Life of Key Content Assets Brands spend tremendous resources building content, and often don't prioritize distribution. Your social team is ideally placed to ensure this content is seen and shared by the right people at the right time. Make it a priority to break long-form content or creative into short-form content snippets and shareable photos that will stay in circulation long after the initial publication release. #4: Develop Thought Leadership Positioning Many brands have an opportunity to leverage social to build thought leadership, by way of brand-owned channels or through key internal leaders who can serve as industry and brand advocates. Authenticity can be tricky though. It starts by taking a non-branded approach where content is positioned around challenges and solutions, instead of around promotion. Social media team leaders can oversee thought leadership training and governance internally to ensure that when executives develop a social presence, it is properly managed and set up for long-term success. Collaborating with the communications team is instrumental to ensure there is a clear delineation of roles and responsibilities. Share the Strategic View Brands continue to look for the best ways to connect with their customers across all digital channels, meeting them where they already live online. With an overwhelming number of platforms and marketing vehicles to choose from, the challenge remains: How do brands tell cohesive stories across digital channels that create a seamless experience for the consumer, while maximizing each channel's potential?

Email Sales Funnels: How to Automate Your Sales

Email Sales Funnels: How to Automate Your Sales

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have an automated way to market to your email list? Are you thinking of creating a sales funnel? To explore how to automate your email marketing, I interview Yaro Starak. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Yaro Starak, a blogging expert who specializes in helping people turn their blogs into profitable businesses. He's the author of the ebook Blog Profits Blueprint. Yaro also is an expert in building automated email sales funnels. Yaro shares what you need to know to build successful email sales funnels that sell for you. You'll discover how to create a successful automated email sequence. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Email Sales Funnels Yaro's Backstory Yaro discovered blogging in 2004 after someone suggested he start a blog for his editing company. While many bloggers were spending a lot of time writing content, Yaro knew of people who generated $30,000 using email. To avoid becoming one of those bloggers who was trapped writing 20 posts a day and to automate the sales process for his course, Yaro built what he now calls a blog sales funnel. He set up a series of blog posts to go to his email newsletter once a week for 52 weeks. Then at intervals throughout the email delivery process, he would include a sales message for his course. Yaro notes that it took him six months to write a year's worth of messages, so he recommends starting smaller. He's spent the last few years building and perfecting his process. Listen to the show to discover when and why Yaro first went online. How an Email Sales Funnel Works Email sales funnels deliver sequenced pieces of content to anyone who opts in, Yaro explains. When automated, those emails (autoresponders) let marketers deliver trust, educate, and sell their product on autopilot. Businesses have customers at different levels of interest, he points out. Some people are ready to buy a $30 ebook but aren't ready to invest $1,000 in a course. Some want to purchase everything you offer, while others just want to explore your free information. After you set up an email sales funnel, it automatically meets the needs of all of those different people. As each person goes through the email sequence and various product offers, they self-select to enter the next sales level. Yaro now markets a range of ebooks, his membership site, and a flagship course. Because he set up a range of email sequences to market each one, he's free to spend his time blogging and doing podcasts. When someone new discovers him via a blog post or a podcast, his sales funnel automatically goes to work. Listen to the show to hear Yaro discuss the old-school way of doing email newsletters. Examples of Successful Email Funnels Yaro shares that he uses an event-based direct selling launch sequence, similar to that of the Jeff Walker school of marketing, to sell his flagship course. The launch includes a series of free videos and a free copy of his Blog Profits Blueprint report. At the end of the launch, he delivers an offer to join his course. To automate that process, he's set up an email sequence that's triggered when someone visits his site and opts to receive a copy of the Blog Profits Blueprint report. Once people opt in, they receive a series of video trainings over three weeks via an automated email sequence. On the fourth week, he invites people to enter his course. Comparing the two processes, Yaro says it's not necessarily changing the way you sell; it's applying automation to create a more hands-off business process.

The #1 Search Engine Optimization Benefit For A Business Website

by Nick Leffler @ Search Engine Optimization – Exprance

You'll receive a steady stream of valuable leads for your business with proper search engine optimization. This search engine optimization benefit will be one of the best sources for bringing new leads to your business online. It's like hiring a new employee that doesn't sleep or take breaks.

The post The #1 Search Engine Optimization Benefit For A Business Website appeared first on Exprance.

10 Simple Tips To Optimize Your WordPress Website For Better Search Engine Ranking

10 Simple Tips To Optimize Your WordPress Website For Better Search Engine Ranking


Graph Paper Press

10 SEO tips for WordPress includes writing quality content, exchange linkbacks, use keywords in image files and titles, create xml sitemaps, highlight keywords, avoid flash

Why Things Catch On: The Science of Why People Share

Why Things Catch On: The Science of Why People Share

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to understand the science behind why people share? During this fascinating interview I explore these very concepts. To learn the reasons why people widely share content, I interview Jonah Berger for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jonah Berger, author of The New York Times bestseller, Contagious: Why Things Catch On. He's also a marketing professor at the Wharton School and columnist for BusinessWeek. Jonah shares the reasons behind why people engage with word of mouth and why marketers should pay attention to this. You'll learn about the 6 principles that drive people to share. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Why People Share How Jonah become fascinated by the reasons people engage in word of mouth As a scientist, Jonah thought it would be interesting to study why things go viral or why certain stories circulate around the water cooler. He grew up studying math, chemistry, computer science and material science and thought it would be interesting to apply these hard science tools to social science problems. It was after reading the book The Tipping Point that he was inspired to think about these things and soon realized there hadn't been a lot of research done on the subject. Listen to the show to find out why he spent his academic career trying to study these things and bottle the phenomena. Why social media marketers should pay attention Jonah starts with how a lot can be done with social media and that there are tons of content out there already from many brands and organizations. Some content does better, but it's not about luck and it's not random. Jonah and his team spent a decade doing research to try to understand why people share word of mouth. With the 6 principles they discovered, you can make it more likely for your own posts to be contagious. People will share them and pass them onto others. You'll find out what the research entailed and how it led to the discovery of the psychological drivers behind sharing. Word of mouth can be over 10 times as effective as traditional advertising. People trust word of mouth more. It's also more targeted than traditional advertising. Plus it's cost-effective, if you can get it to work. It doesn't cost you anything to get people to talk about your brand. However, it requires you to understand why they are talking about some things rather than others. Following the rigorous academic research, Jonah decided to write the book Contagious to help people apply the insights, so their products and ideas could take off. Jonah explains how when the science was applied to a number of different companies to increase word of mouth in a given campaign, there was an increase of 20-50%. You can definitely guarantee more views and more shares when you follow the 6 principles. Listen to the show to find out what you need to do to help activate your existing customers and get them to spread that message to more potential new customers. The 6 principles in Contagious Jonah gives the high-level of each principle, which is called the STEPPS framework. These 6 principles drive people to talk and share. Social currency Triggers Emotion Public Practical value Stories These steps are based on psychology. It's about being able to understand the motivation or the drivers that cause us to pass things on. Some people wonder if you need all 6 principles for it to work.

How to Recover From a Negative Social Media Update

How to Recover From a Negative Social Media Update

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Has a team member ever posted something inappropriate from your social media account? Are you ready with a recovery plan? If someone wreaks havoc on your account, you need to be prepared for a worst-case scenario. In this article you'll discover how to recover from a bad post to your social media account. Listen to this article: #1: Determine Whether to Delete the Post Whenever you discover a questionable post on your social media account, the first step in crisis management is to assess the situation. No matter the extent of your account hack or blunder, you will have to do some damage control. Just remember deleting the post will not make the entire situation go away. Many tools make it easy for someone to grab a screenshot of your social indiscretion. If you, someone on your team or an agency you've hired to run your social media campaigns created the post, deleting it could make you look bad. Plus, if it comes to light that you tried to sweep a bad situation under the rug, your brand will only look worse. That's why it's typically a better idea to let these posts stay, even if you later go on to regret them. However, there are some situations that make it permissible, if not mandatory, to delete social media posts. Lewd or Graphic Posts: It is unfair to subject your followers to images that make them feel uncomfortable, especially if your target audience is primarily composed of a younger demographic. If someone publishes wildly inappropriate (think R-rated and above) text or graphics to your account, delete the posts as quickly as possible. Obvious Hacks: If it's clear that your account has been hacked, there's a higher level of acceptance in deleting the post. In this day and age it's fair to assume people know that being "hacked" is just another cost associated with conducting business online. Remember, people won't always believe that you've been hacked. Plus, many social users are quick to call out a brand that they think faked a hack as a publicity stunt. It's also important to note that if your Twitter password is "password," you're not allowed to delete any hacked posts. #2: Take Responsibility When it comes to the apology message, there are typically two people who should send it: the person who made the mistake or someone higher up in the company. While most of the time it sounds better when the person who sent the inappropriate social message takes responsibility, it's not always an option. If that's the case, have someone who is higher up in the organization respond. This way your followers feel like you're taking the situation seriously and the spokesperson can address how the company plans to ensure nothing similar happens in the future. The Onion is notorious for their unapologetic brand of humor. However, when backlash over an inappropriate tweet backed them into a corner, they were forced to apologize to their fans. The incident took place during the 2013 Oscars when they insulted the then 9-year-old Oscar nominee Quvenzhané Wallis. After a massive social uproar, the CEO stepped up to apologize. Since it's in our nature to try to avoid fault, this is probably the most difficult part of the process. Even the largest of companies will need to swallow their pride and tell fans they're sorry. #3: Track Mentions and Engage Get ready. Your company's social messages are about to skyrocket. Granted, this depends on the size of your social media following and the level of offensiveness of the gaffe. Yet even the smallest brands should be prepared. Stay on top of posts and mentions by using a social media management tool like Topsy. These tools not only make it easy to respond to the influx of comments, tweets and page posts, many will also allow you to run social analytics that assess the damage done to your following. When you keep track of mentions, you can respond appropriately and in a timely manner.

Facebook Groups: How to Nurture a Community on Facebook

Facebook Groups: How to Nurture a Community on Facebook

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a Facebook group for your community? Are you considering starting a Facebook group? To learn how to use a Facebook group to build a loyal community that helps your business, I interview Jared Easley. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Jared Easley, host of the Starve the Doubts podcast and co-author of Podcasting Good to Great. He's also co-founder of the Podcast Movement, the industry-leading conference for podcasters. In this episode Jared will explore how he uses Facebook groups to cultivate an active community of podcasters. You'll discover the benefits of building a Facebook group, as well as tips for getting started. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Groups How Jared's podcasting conference got started In January 2014 Jared and co-founders Dan Franks, Gary Leland and Mitch Todd were at New Media Expo when they overheard several attendees asking why there wasn't a podcast conference. The group realized if they didn't take a step to create something, someone else would. They decided to move forward, even though there were plenty of things that could have prevented them from even getting started. Jared explains how they reached out to a few people who had put on large events, and asked for their perspective and advice. One person who gave them a lot of feedback was Phillip Taylor, who does a conference for financial bloggers. Armed with information, they turned to Kickstarter to crowdfund the conference. They just needed a small amount ($11,000) to validate the idea, and they weren't sure if it would take 30 days to raise the money or if they'd even get it at all. They asked the podcast community if they would support the conference, speak at it and share it with their network. A lot of people said yes, Jared shares, "but it's one thing to say yes and it's another thing to vote with your wallet." When the campaign was published, they hit that $11,000 within 9 hours. At the end of the 30 days, they had over three times the amount needed, which was more than enough validation to sell tickets, pursue sponsors and follow through. Six hundred people came to the first Podcast Movement Conference. Listen to the show to hear more about the Podcast Movement Kickstarter campaign. Why Jared started a Facebook group The Podcast Movement created a Facebook page so they could do ads and other promotions leading up to the conference, but they didn't initially have a Facebook group. Although they went to other podcast-focused Facebook groups to spread the word, they had to be careful, because some of the groups had a smart but strict policy on self-promotion. As soon as the first event was over, there was so much excitement that they realized they needed to create a way for the attendees to continue conversations. That's when Jared and his co-founders started the Facebook group. Not even a year later, the group has 1,600 members and is growing every month. The group is called Podcast Movement - Past, Present, and Future Attendees, so it's open to all past and potential attendees. This way, anyone who is interested in podcasting can be involved in the community and the conversations. Listen to the show to learn the original intent of the group. How the two Facebook communities have helped Jared's business The Podcast Movement group and page have served two different purposes. The Facebook page has been essential for Facebook ads and for getting the word out to people who might not already know about the conference.

Online Reviews: How to Respond to Fraudulent Reviews

Online Reviews: How to Respond to Fraudulent Reviews

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do people review your business online? Ever receive negative or fraudulent reviews? To discover what to do when you receive a review that's not what you were expecting, I interview Dan Lemin. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Daniel Lemin, the founder of One Good Brand. He is also a strategist for Convince & Convert, and author of the brand-new book, Manipurated. Dan will explore online reviews and how to deal with bad and fraudulent reviews. You'll discover why online reviews are so important. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Online Reviews Dan's backstory Dan started his online career with Google's corporate marketing team and saw the emergence of black hat SEO (search engine optimization). He explains the distinction between white hat (good) and black hat (bad) SEO, and talks about link farms as an example of black hat tactics. Google came to love Yelp's fresh content and Dan says that's how the rating and review platforms attracted shadowy SEO characters. They saw the opportunity to continue "tricking" consumers through new platforms. Listen to the show to discover why the owners of small- and medium-sized businesses need to know the dynamics of the SEO industry. Why reviews are important Dan shares that nearly 90% of consumers say they trust reviews as much as they trust their friends and family. Since so many people make decisions based on online reviews, the vast majority of a business's prospective customers are filtering through review sites. Since Google favors this type of content, reviews are a new SEO tactic, and that's why site owners are adding some type of rating and review component. For instance, a lot of hospitality businesses like Starwood Hotels have added reviews to their websites. He says one review will not necessarily make or break a business, but cautions that the presence of the review industry can make or break small businesses, because they don't have all the tools and techniques a large company like Chipotle might have. When asked which review sites matter most, Dan explains his research found it really depends on the business category. For example, Gondola Adventures in Newport Beach, which is in a super-specialized industry, says Yelp matters, but TripAdvisor is even more important. Dan says companies can track reviews manually by going to each review site, but it's very time-consuming. To help, there's a whole cottage industry of companies such as ReviewTrackers and ReviewPush that do review tracking for businesses. Listen to the show to learn how much traffic Yelp gets from Google. The purpose of fake reviews Dan shares that there are different layers to the purpose of fake reviews. He first discusses fake positive reviews and says that several weeks ago, Amazon filed an unprecedented lawsuit against 1,100 people. They accused anonymous people on Fiverr of selling reviews for profit on Amazon. For his book, Dan interviewed a young lady who writes reviews for a living, and says it's very difficult to distinguish her reviews from legitimate ones. Dan discusses fake reviews that are created to injure the reputation of a business. Dan also shares an example of another type of fake review, a scam that targeted wedding photographers in the Bay Area. After responding to what looked like a legitimate inquiry from their websites, the photographers would get an email saying "I decided not to hire you" or "we changed the date." The email would go on to say, "I work in the online reputation business,

How to Optimize Your Social Media Schedule for Maximum Impact

How to Optimize Your Social Media Schedule for Maximum Impact

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you schedule social media updates? Want to know the best days and times to share? Creating a social media calendar helps you deliver a steady flow of content to your followers. In this article you'll discover how to create an effective posting schedule for your social media updates. Listen to this article: #1: Determine a Daily Posting Frequency Just like you plan a blog schedule, consistent social sharing can help you stay top of mind. A calendar of when you plan to post to each platform helps you see when you have gaps in your sharing schedule or when you have too much going on at once. Take these informal guidelines into account when deciding how many times you'll post on each social network. Socialbakers reports you should post to Facebook once a day for the best engagement. For Twitter, Salesforce recommends you start with one to four tweets a day. Data directly from LinkedIn and compiled by Buffer suggests you'll reach 60% of your connections if you post on LinkedIn 20 times a month. SumAll recommends you pin five times a day. Brands can safely post to Instagram up to 15 times per day. One glance at your social media calendar and you'll know where to fill in gaps and remove extra messages from the overcrowded days and times. #2: Post at the Right Time of Day Once you know which days you'll be posting to each network, you'll need to find the best times to share your content on each platform. Don't just pick a few times to regularly share content. Try different times each day to give your social media schedule some flexibility for best results. Use trial and error, and check engagement stats to find the best times to share from your own accounts. Analyzing data from QuickSprout, Buffer, Fast Company and others to find the best times for social media posts, revealed the following insights: Try posting to Facebook on Wednesdays at 3 pm, Thursdays and Fridays from 1 to 4 pm, and Saturdays and Sundays from 12 to 1 pm. Tweet from 12 to 3 pm, and at 5 pm during the workweek. Post to LinkedIn just outside of working hours (7:30 to 8:30 am, and 5 to 6 pm) and on lunch breaks at 12 pm on Tuesdays, Wednesdays and Thursdays. Pin from 2 to 4 am and 2 to 4 pm. Avoid posting to Instagram from 3 to 4 pm on Mondays and Thursdays. Note: Most of those studies analyzed data in the United States. With 80% of the U.S. population in the Eastern and Central time zones, those time zones may be your best bet for optimal reach. #3: Share Your Content More Than Once Some people create great content, and then lose out on a ton of traffic because they only share it right after it's published, and only one time per social network. Sharing your content more than once can get you 3,150% more traffic all within your first day of publishing. Imagine what could happen if you spread out your social media sharing to publish links to your content throughout the week, month and year after the original publish date. Here's a schedule for sharing your content multiple times on social media: Schedule social messages to announce new content right when it publishes. Share your post again a few hours later on the same day. A tweet’s average lifespan is 18 minutes, so sharing it again, even on the same day, increases your visibility. Schedule a few more social messages for the following day to get the word out, while the content is still fresh. Drip a few more social messages the following week to reach people who missed it the first time around. Scatter at least one message per week, over the course of the next month, on all of your networks. #4: Vary Your Message Mix up your social messages to keep your updates fresh on different sites. This is especially important when you share your content more than once. Here are some ideas for crafting different messages for a single piece of content: Reference quotes from people in your posts.

How to Tell Stories With Facebook and Instagram Carousel Ads

How to Tell Stories With Facebook and Instagram Carousel Ads

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to make sure your ads stand out on Facebook and Instagram? Have you tried Carousel Ads? While many businesses use Carousel Ads solely to promote products, the ads also provide an excellent opportunity to showcase your brand’s unique narrative. In this article, I’ll share how to use storytelling in carousel ads to promote your products and stand out from your competitors. Listen to this article: #1: Grab Attention With the First Image The first rule of storytelling (and advertising for that matter) is to start out strong. Be sure the first image in your carousel ad series grabs attention and makes sense on its own. Since users may not scroll through all of the images in the series, you want to get your message across right away. Otherwise, you risk confusing your audience and wasting impressions. For example, in Progressive's #ActYourAge carousel ads, the first image immediately stands out. It uses a white background, which is very different from normal photography on the platform, and has a man playing with a baby's mobile (also known as a carousel). The picture is so unexpected and kooky, the user can't help but read the line below: "Dump your parents' car insurance company. #ActYourAge." While your first image shouldn't rely on any of the others to get its point across, it should still be intriguing enough to get users to swipe through to the end. #2: Make Them Swipe With any story, the point is to keep the reader engaged throughout and ultimately to read through to the end. Just as authors want to keep their readers interested, the same is true with carousel ads. Once you've hooked the user with the first image, encourage continued engagement with the other images. This gives your brand more exposure and increased recall. This carousel ad by Tesco Foods certainly elicits the "I can't stop swiping" response. To see the entire photo users must swipe through all of them. This is a great example of drawing a user through a story and, in this case, a very delicious-looking one. Test out this concept for your brand. Use Photoshop's splice tool (or play with pictures in your favorite design program) to cut separate images from a larger one. #3: Create a Scene Relating to your audience and evoking emotion are the other important parts of storytelling. To do these, provide the context necessary for users to feel like they're right there with you. Place them at the scene. Choose photos carefully to create imagery for carousel ads. Then write copy to draw in your audience. The TV series Wet Hot American Summer did a great job getting their audience members to envision themselves at Camp Firewood. Pictures show the characters hanging out and doing things with their friends. Plus the image and copy pairing is so clever that users not only picture themselves there, they also remember how they felt when they attended summer camp years ago. Obviously it's easier to set the scene when you're advertising something with a plot, like a television show or movie. However, for products and services, figure out how your brand fits into your customers' lives and create a scene that demonstrates it. For example, if you're advertising a shirt, rather than show still images of it, think about the lifetime of the shirt. It goes from fresh and new in a package to being worn to being cleaned to being borrowed by a friend, etc. Photos that showcase a story create a plot, which evokes emotion from your customers. #4: Think Sequentially The order of events is essential to story comprehension. A well-edited sequence provides a natural pace to the story within your ad. Help move your users through your story. Showtime did a great job incorporating natural sequence into its recent ads around the second season of Penny Dreadful. In just four photos you can tell the story is about a man on the run. He shoots someone, says goodbye to his girlfriend and runs away to a church.

Facebook Community Development: How to Cultivate Loyal Fans

Facebook Community Development: How to Cultivate Loyal Fans

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you creating a fan base on Facebook? Want to discover how to engage your audience via pages and groups? To explore how to nurture a community on Facebook, I interview Holly Homer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Holly Homer, a professional blogger whose Kids Activities Blog helps parents discover fun things to do with their kids. Her Facebook page (Quirky Momma) has more than 3 million fans. Holly shares how she's cultivated a thriving community using Facebook. You'll discover how Holly uses Facebook Insights to develop her content. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Community Development The Importance of Community Community is the key to performing well in the algorithm-driven world of Facebook. To serve the community of Kids Activities Blog and the Quirky Momma Facebook page, all of the content focuses on the people who make up that community. Those people are mostly moms (plus the occasional dad, grandparent, or teacher) who are looking for something to do with their small children and survive the day. Whether that content is a video, picture, or saying, it needs to help the community and bring people closer together. When Holly began blogging 10 years ago, the community developed via comments on her personal blog, June Cleaver Nirvana, as well as comments she made on her friends' blogs. A popular blog post might attract 300 visitors and 150 comments. Holly recalls that commenting made this community visible and close-knit. When social networks came along, Holly says she had to relearn how to establish community, so she steered the conversation from comments onto Facebook because that's where comments and engagement were happening. She had to tell her community where she would be engaging and eventually turned off the comments on her blog. Facebook Live changed Holly's community again. She says she can now talk directly to her fans, but Facebook Live allows her to have more of a two-way conversation and be a participant rather than the center of her community. Listen to the show to hear Holly's advice for maintaining a community as social media changes. Facebook Insights Holly is a bit of an analytics geek and uses Facebook Insights learn about her community and what they like. With Facebook Insights, Holly can learn what common traits her community shares (they're typically moms with small children), where they live (mostly the United States and Australia), when they're online, and what they do online. Holly says she can also see what types of content her community likes (such as photos, links, or videos) and even what kinds of links or videos attract the most engagement. What Holly learns in Facebook Insights helps her decide what type of content brings her community together. In Facebook Insights, Holly says she mostly focuses on the magical orange bar. This bar shows each post's reach in comparison to other content for that day or other content on the page. (You find the orange bar by clicking More under the list of posts to get a whole page of posts and then looking in the fifth column.) Holly says her team knows that if the orange bar is short, don't repeat that content. If the orange bar is long, try to figure out how to repeat the performance of that successful content. For Holly, a short orange bar doesn't mean that the proverbial algorithms didn't like some content. It means her fans didn't like the content. She says every single interaction on your page is a vote for more of that content.

Twitter for Business: How to Use Twitter to Grow Your Influence

Twitter for Business: How to Use Twitter to Grow Your Influence

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Twitter for your business? Are you wondering how to use Twitter to grow your online influence? To learn how to best use Twitter for your business, I interview Joel Comm for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Joel Comm, author of numerous books including Twitter Power 2.0 and So, What Do You Do? He's also the host of The Joel Comm Show, a business podcast. Joel shares how he uses Twitter to grow his platform. You'll learn how to grow a quality Twitter following, and which types of content work best. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter for Business So, "What do you do?" Joel explains how he asks questions and helps people discover what their core is. This can include passions, talents, skills, abilities and personality, which are used to bring value to the world around them. This is how you find ultimate fulfillment. Listen to the show to find out the importance of starting a conversation. Why marketers should pay close attention to Twitter Joel explains how Twitter is still relevant. They have 200 million active users every day, which is really impressive when up against Facebook's 1 billion–plus accounts. The thing that made Twitter cool in the first place is its simplicity. It remains relevant because it's where people gather. Joel calls it the virtual water cooler. Twitter is a place for short conversations, which can be extremely powerful and relevant. Joel says that the water cooler strategy is to engage. You'll find out the two different ways that Joel engages on Twitter and why significance is so important. The most essential part is to be authentic. You can connect in the moment, which can be greater than you might imagine. Joel describes how pictures are an excellent use of Twitter. He likes to tweet from Instagram and can post from his Instagram account to Facebook, Twitter, Tumblr and Foursquare, all at the same time. Twitter only allows 140 characters, so when you use pictures, it can be a lot of bonus words. Even mundane pictures can get a lot of interaction. Listen to the show to hear an example of a picture that Joel used that made him realize there's a lot of power in mundane tweets. How Joel uses Twitter today to grow his platform  Joel has started to check out more of what people on his stream have to say and then reshares their content. He does this more than tweeting his own original content. It's the giver mentality. A couple of Twitter's strengths are the retweet and the favorite. They're great opportunities to focus on the value that others bring. There are days when Joel doesn't tweet at all. Other days, he can get 5 or 6 tweets in. It all depends on what's happening that particular day. You should never just tweet for the sake of tweeting. When it comes to a tweeting strategy, you'll discover why it's important to be true to yourself and be aware of the types of businesses Twitter works best for. Listen to the show to find out why Joel generally uses the standard retweet over a customized retweet. How to grow a quality Twitter following Joel advises starting with absolutely nothing. If you are new on Twitter and don't know where to begin, Joel recommends you start with a hashtag that is in an area of interest. The next step is to discover people who are talking about your personal or business interests. As entrepreneurs, there is typically an overlap of the two. Once you start to follow people,

How to Delete a Review You Wrote on Google

by Imprezzio Marketing @ Imprezzio Marketing

I cannot believe I am writing this article but after 2 different people asked me this question in the last 24 hours, I attempted to delete a review I wrote and realized why people got confused. Like many things, this process should be simple but apparently is not. Here is what you need to do. [...]

The post How to Delete a Review You Wrote on Google appeared first on Imprezzio Marketing.

Does Your Small Business Need Search Engine Optimization?

by Nick Leffler @ Exprance

If the question of whether or not you need search engine optimization lingers in the back of your mind, here's your answer. Yes, if you want visitors to your website then you do need SEO.

The post Does Your Small Business Need Search Engine Optimization? appeared first on Exprance.

Building Business Ideas That Succeed: How to Preflight Your Ideas

Building Business Ideas That Succeed: How to Preflight Your Ideas

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a great idea for a business? Is there a new product you want to create? To discover how to improve your chances for success, I interview Pat Flynn. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Pat Flynn, the host of the Smart Passive Income Podcast, who blogs at smartpassiveincome.com and helps hundreds of thousands of entrepreneurs and aspiring entrepreneurs build their dream businesses. His latest book is called Will it Fly? How to Test Your Next Business Idea So You Don't Waste Your Time and Money. Pat will explore how to increase the likelihood that your next product idea is successful. You'll discover ways to test and validate your ideas. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Building Business Ideas That Succeed How Pat's architect background has helped him in business When Pat started in online business, he taught architects how to take the lead exam. He shares that people reached out to him and thanked him for helping them in their careers, and he says that feeling was different from anything he experienced in the world of architecture. Pat talks about what he did and didn't like about working as an architect, and how the long-term process of breaking a giant project down into chunks helped him when he started in entrepreneurship. He says the process of working hard on a building, planning ahead, and not knowing what it will be like until people are actually using it all translate to building and launching product. Architects and entrepreneurs go through similar processes, Pat says. Each of them are building a solution for a client's problem. As you build it, you make changes, you pivot and you learn as you go. To be successful in any business you need to learn how to adapt and solve other people's problems. Listen to the show to learn what software skill Pat used in architecture that he still uses in business. Why Pat wrote a book about the pre-launch phase In addition to Pat's weekly Smart Passive Income podcast, he does a show called AskPat, during which he answers a voice mail question submitted from his audience via SpeakPipe. One of the most common questions asked is "How do I know if this idea I am working on is worth spending the time?" He tried to answer this question on both shows and found there wasn't enough time for him to cover the topic. The topic was validated through an audience survey (Pat uses SurveyMonkey) in early 2015, when he segmented the people who said they had yet to start a business. By far, their number one concern was not wanting to waste time on something that might not be successful. That's when Pat decided he needed to write a book to people with amazing ideas, that might be life-changing products or services, move forward. Listen to the show to hear the reason behind the title of Pat's new book. Making mistakes Assumptions are great because they are ideas, Pat explains. However, if you act on those assumptions without knowing whether it's something people would actually pay for, that's when you have an issue. Pat shares how a couple of WordPress plugin ideas he had turned into a $15,000 mistake. He didn't discuss the ideas with anybody because it was such a good idea, he didn't want to share it. Plus, he wanted to keep it a secret in order to have an awesome reveal on launch day. Had he simply discussed these ideas with his target audience and people in his mastermind groups, it would have been clear that the idea was merely a starting point. He could have gotten feedback and turned it into something that would actually wo...

Your Guide to Finding – and Responding to – Online Customer Reviews

by Lakeshore Branding @ Lakeshore Branding

Somewhere out there, a person is talking about you. Your business. Your brand. Of course, you’ll want to listen and join the conversation. You have to, right? The Internet, though, is a pretty big place. If before, the reviews and comments of your customers only came in literally by word of mouth – well, today that’s no longer the case. A bad review on a site like Yelp or Google Places, a nasty blog entry by a vindictive, loud-mouthed critic, an unflattering picture of your establishment posted online, or even just a single unfavorable tweet: it can undo your life’s work. It can offset all the great things that you, your employees, your brand managers, your publicist, and your ad agency have been doing. And it can keep tons of potential customers from walking through your door. (One study even says that a single bad review can cost you 30 customers!) No matter how big the Internet is – and - Read the full article

Mobile Marketing: How to Get Started

Mobile Marketing: How to Get Started

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use mobile marketing for business? Are you wondering how to get started? To learn how mobile marketing and social connect, I interview Jamie Turner for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jamie Turner, co-author of the book Go Mobile. His blog, the 60 Second Marketer is ranked as one of the top 10 marketing blogs by Social Media Examiner. He also runs a social media and mobile marketing agency called 60 Second Communications. Jamie shares how to start with mobile marketing and why you should pay more attention to mobile customers. You'll learn what tools to use and the difference between mobile websites and mobile apps. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Mobile Marketing Why marketers should pay more attention to mobile customers Jamie states that 15-50% of the people who visit your website come in from a mobile device and this number will continue to grow. When consumers visit your website from a mobile device, you need to be there to meet them, understand mobile marketing and know how to connect with customers on mobile. You'll have to learn how to use mobile, as it's a way to build a bridge between you and your customer. You'll discover how more people check prices on their mobile devices while shopping and what you need to provide them to make sure they buy from you. And you'll hear that when people buy a product on mobile devices, particularly tablet computers, their total ticket price is typically higher than it is via a desktop computer. It's important to be mobile-ready—not only for B2C but for B2B too. Listen to the show to find out how many people bought a virtual ticket on a smartphone while attending Social Media Marketing World. Is there a social media connection when it comes to mobile marketing? Jamie sees email as a social media tool. Sixty-seven percent of all "C-level" executives check their emails from their mobile devices. The better-known tools being LinkedIn, Facebook, Twitter and YouTube. We all need mobile websites. Remember when consumers visit your site, one of the prominent things you want to do is give them the ability to connect with you on social media platforms from their mobile device. You'll hear Jamie give a great example of how you can use LinkedIn on a mobile device in a business environment. Photography is easy on a smartphone. Look at how well Twitter and Facebook have integrated photos into their mobile apps. It's a great opportunity to grab customers. You'll find out how Ramon De Leon, a regional Domino's pizza guy in Chicago, evangelizes his business with the use of Twitter. Jamie explains what mobile websites mean and the difference between a mobile website and a mobile app. You'll discover what you need to do to make your website mobile and why the WPtouch plugin for WordPress is an awesome tool to have. Listen to the show to find out why social is mobile. The most common types of marketing when dealing with mobile users Jamie lists 7 things businesses have to think about when it comes to mobile marketing. Mobile websites SMS Mobile display ads/banner ads Mobile paid search Location-based marketing Apps QR codes These are the primary tools out there. Jamie's advice is to make sure you always start with a mobile website and then move into paid search or QR codes. You'll hear Jamie give an example of how a restaurant can use SMS to drive more foot traffic to their business.

Immerse Website Visitors With Full-Width Images That Capture Attention

by Nick Leffler @ Exprance

Website visitors are quick to judge a business website. This quick judgment will determine if they stay or if they leave. You can immerse website visitors with full-width images and capture visitor's attention. The better you are at showing visitors the benefits of your business faster the better off you are. Immersive full-width images help you accomplish this.

The post Immerse Website Visitors With Full-Width Images That Capture Attention appeared first on Exprance.

4 Tools to Build a Social Media Content Calendar

4 Tools to Build a Social Media Content Calendar

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you struggle to keep track of your social media content? Are you looking for tools to help? Creating a social media content calendar doesn't need to be complicated or require a whole new platform. In this article you'll find four ways to build a social media content calendar with tools you may already use. Why Use a Social Media Calendar Individuals and businesses use social media for community engagement, content promotion, customer support, promoting the latest offers and more. Managing many moving parts involves multiple people, multiple strategies, and if not handled correctly, multiple problems. Listen to this article: When you keep all of your social media content plans in a central location, you let everyone know what everyone else is doing, they can see the latest changes and updates and can plan their own content accordingly. Use your calendar to track a variety of items, including publish date and time, post text, attached link, image or images, post type (image, link, text, etc.), campaign and post category or goal (engagement, content promotion, etc.). Once you've determined what to add to your calendar, it's time to create it. Here's how. #1: List It in Google Sheets Since Google Drive is a staple for many businesses, calendars managed in Google Sheets are familiar and accessible. It's easy for anyone comfortable with spreadsheets to use. Plus, when you implement such a familiar tool, you can dive right into planning. The collaboration features prevent confusion over outdated versions. Furthermore, the spreadsheet can be even more useful if your scheduling tool allows bulk uploading via CSV. To set up your calendar, either start with a "blank page" or search for social media calendar templates online. If you want, add a tab for each social network to keep everything separate. Even when you use a template, you still want to customize it a bit. Add all of the info your team needs to know, and leave out whatever they don't. For instance, if it's important to track who's responsible for each update, add a column for that. If most of your posts don't have links, delete that column. Keep in mind, not all information needs to be written out in the spreadsheet. Use color-coding, team member initials and other shortcuts to further organize the calendar. #2: Map It in Google Calendar Google Calendar, which a lot of people use already, has a slightly more rigid structure. However, nothing beats an actual calendar for keeping track of due dates and responsibilities. Keep all of your social content laid out in an actual calendar view. Those who prefer a list format are able to switch to agenda view. Create different calendars for each team member, client or social network to make it easy to segment your content. That way you'll get a calendar view of not just what's being posted, but who's responsible for it or what content category it falls under. Decide how you want to set up your calendar system (I color-code them either by network or content type), and create your multiple calendars. Then create an event for each post. Organize the details as you'd like. For example, use the location field to note who's writing which post. Then use the description for compiling additional details such as post link once it's published. #3: Visualize It in Trello Trello, which is organized by boards, lists and cards, is a tool a lot of people already use for brainstorming and collaboration. Like spreadsheets, Trello is flexible enough for anything. However, it looks and feels the opposite of a spreadsheet. If you're a visual person, or if you like organizing your content by progress stage, try Trello. When you first set up your Trello social media calendar, decide how to organize it. Make lists for different progress stages, social networks or marketing campaigns. Trello also has a calendar view for due dates, which makes it possible to build a plan with t...

Social Strategy: How to Build a Sustainable Social Media Marketing Plan

Social Strategy: How to Build a Sustainable Social Media Marketing Plan

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a social media plan? Are you wondering how to build a social media strategy for your business? To learn about the importance of a social media strategy, I interview Neal Schaffer for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Neal Schaffer, author of Maximizing LinkedIn for Sales and Social Media Marketing. He's a social media consultant and coach. His newest book is Maximize Your Social: A One-Stop Guide to Building a Social Media Strategy for Marketing and Business Success. Neal shares the unique insights he gained while working overseas with companies that had to build their sales organizations from scratch. You'll learn the core elements your social strategy needs to be successful and sustainable. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Media Marketing Plan Many marketers are solely focused on the 'how' rather than the 'why' of social media Neal states that you should operate with a plan. The most precious resource for a marketer is time. Social media can drain your time, especially with the emergence of new platforms. You need to have a plan—and more importantly, an objective—and be able to measure what you are doing. For a small business it's one thing, but if you are doing it on behalf of a client or a brand/company, they want to know what they will get out of their social media budget. As social media becomes a mass skill, Neal thinks we'll see a lot more corporate oversight into what people do in social media. If you concentrate on the tactics alone, then the value of a Facebook like is meaningless. It might be a secondary metric, but at the end of the day, you need to know how it affects your business objectives. If you just look at the tactics, you completely miss the whole business picture. As a small business owner, it's easy to get caught up in the numbers. There is more focus on the 'how,' because you can be too concerned about trying to keep up with everyone else. You'll hear Neal give an example of a hotel client's Facebook strategy and how it's not all about the number of likes you have compared to your competitors. Likes are important to companies that want to get brand recognition in the marketplace—although it's not a business objective, it's more brand awareness. Listen to the show to find out why the number of likes is only one indicator in comparing yourself to your competition. How working abroad helped Neal in the new world of social media After graduating from college, Neal moved to Japan, where he helped three companies in the high-tech industry. Neal says it provided him with a lot of extremely holistic business experience. He had to launch their sales organizations from scratch and had to figure out how to get brand recognition across different countries in markets where they weren't known. These jobs included sales and marketing, attending conferences, hiring people, dealing with legal issues and offering customer support. All of these roles led Neal to a very holistic view of social media in terms of not just using it for marketing but throughout the enterprise. You'll hear why storytelling helped strengthen these Chinese brands and Japanese technology. Neal gained unique insights while working with these companies and it has given him a way to look at things in a practical, rational and actionable way. Listen to the show to find out about the analogy of thinking about a social network like a country.

Social Sharing: How to Get More People to Share Your Content

Social Sharing: How to Get More People to Share Your Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you publish content online? Want more people to share your content? To learn how to get more people to share your content, I interview Mark Schaefer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Mark Schaefer, author of The Tao of Twitter and Social Media Explained. His blog Grow was awarded #2 on our top 10 blogs of 2015. Mark also co-hosts the Marketing Companion podcast. His latest book is called The Content Code: Six Essential Strategies for Igniting Your Content, Your Marketing, and Your Business. In this episode Mark will explore why people share via social media. You'll discover what you can do to improve your chances that people will share your content. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Sharing How Mark got into content and blogging Around 2008, Mark started his own business doing consulting and teaching. He realized if he was going to talk about Twitter, blogging and Facebook, he had to use them. So he started a blog as an experiment. It took him about 9 months to find his voice, Mark recalls. It dawned on him that all of his contacts and business were coming through his blog, so he needed to pay attention to it. The blog really started kicking in around 2010, and has been building ever since. The turning point happened when Mark started to write posts that were more authentic and had personality. Instead of finding his audience, Mark's audience found him. Mark tells new bloggers "To stand out, you need to be original. And to be original, you need to have the courage to tell your own story and have your own voice." In 2009 Mark wrote a post that was a little bit controversial, called The Social Media Country Club. As a new blogger, Mark felt like an outsider. He says it seemed like all of the influential bloggers were in this club, where they never said anything negative about each other. Mark was thinking, "How are we going to grow if we don't challenge each other?" Coming from 27 years of marketing experience, Mark expected any channel used for business to be measurable, while others felt it was all about the conversation. Though nervous, Mark started speaking his mind. The reaction was supportive and positive. His audience was grateful somebody finally said it. Listen to the show to discover what Mark blogged about at first and how he felt about it. Why marketing with content is so difficult today Whether you're an individual blogger, working in a business or working for a brand, many niches are getting crowded with content and social media activity. This makes it very difficult to compete. Mark feels this was predictable. He says when the Internet first started, everyone needed a website. If you were the first one with a website, you had an advantage. Then you needed to be found. If you were the first one to figure out search engine optimization, you had an advantage, because you're going to be at the top of the search rankings. However, after your competitors figured it out, it got harder and more expensive to be in marketing. He says it's the same thing with blogging. It's hard to be seen, because people are figuring it out. People are trying to stand out, but creating more or better content isn't necessarily the answer. For the last year, Mark has been obsessed with figuring out how to maneuver in this very crowded world. And that's why he wrote The Content Code. Listen to the show to hear my Times Square analogy. Mark's code for success Mark explains how all conversations are about content: creating more,

8 Social Tools to Listen and Interact With Customers

8 Social Tools to Listen and Interact With Customers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you engage with customers online? Are you looking for tools to help manage and monitor customer relationships? From product discovery to purchase and support, tools have emerged to help your business manage the social customer experience on whichever channel your customers prefer. In this article you'll discover eight tools to help your business provide a seamless social customer experience. The Evolution of Customer Experience Social customer experience is not built purely on old foundations such as ticketing systems. Nor is it designed only to support customers on Facebook, Twitter, and other social media platforms. Today, social customer experience is a hybrid of the two. What started off with a simple model of customer support ("Email us and we'll help.") has since evolved to include ticketing systems, live chat, and social media. Listen to this article: For a while, there were no tools available to support the customer experience, so companies responded directly to customers on each social network. However, that made tracking a challenge. Fortunately, a number of social listening tools have cropped up to meet this need. While social is still where customers feel they're being heard most (especially when reaching out to companies that haven't humanized their culture outside of a social media platform), not everyone wants to seek support publicly on Twitter or Facebook. This fact gave rise to a newer social customer experience phenomenon: in-app messaging for websites and blogs. Read on to explore both types of tools and find out which ones can help you deliver a solidly social customer experience. Tools for Social Listening So what are the social tools catering to this great evolution in the customer experience? Here's a hint: They're not necessarily the tools you'd think to use, especially if you come from a marketer's school of thought. The idea behind these tools is engagement, follow-up, and (truth be told) reactivity. Let's take a look at some of the social listening tools that might work for your business. #1: Sparkcentral Sparkcentral is a customer service tool that lets you communicate with your customers across Twitter, Facebook, and Instagram in real time, supporting needs as they arise. The company calls itself a channel-agnostic customer engagement platform because it can focus on social media while also supporting in-app messaging for team members. Although Sparkcentral is similar to many of the other tools in this article, it's geared toward the enterprise and priced accordingly. #2: Sprout Social While Sprout Social is touted as a tool for social media marketing, it also has a deeply involved component for social customer service. You can see Tweets and Facebook posts on a dashboard where team members can respond to them. It will also allow service teams to access data such as customer history and their involvement. Think of these support issues like "tickets," which can be hidden away once they're acted on. Real-time tracking and a beautiful interface for reporting ensures that everyone is accountable and on the same page. #3: Respond Respond by Buffer is possibly the simplest user tool exclusively for social customer service, and focuses only on Twitter. You can respond to customers, review previous chat history, and follow/block users. It has an easy-to-use interface for teams and lots of accountability. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yiAiOFjnG2U If you've used Hootsuite (typically the first step in the social media customer service game, discussed below), Respond is the next step up to give you an edge on your social customer service. It can support both small and large teams looking for simplicity and no other frills. Pricing is also more accessible to smaller businesses. #4: Lithium Like many of the other tools on this list, Lithium is intended for managing customer service at scale. It will allow your representatives to respond di...

Small Businesses Struggle to Prove Facebook ROI: New Research

Small Businesses Struggle to Prove Facebook ROI: New Research

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Facebook to acquire customers for your small business? Do you struggle to measure the return on your social media marketing investment? Despite a lack of concrete proof of sales, small businesses are devoting time and dollars to Facebook marketing. In this article you'll discover findings from recent studies focused on Facebook marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Most Small Businesses Don't See a Return From Their Social Media Efforts In April 2015, small business directory Manta surveyed 540 small business owners for their insights on social media return on investment (ROI). Fifty-nine percent report that they did not see ROI from their social media activities. Because the vast majority of small businesses puts most, if not the entire, social media budget into Facebook, this article focuses on that channel. Of the remaining 41% reporting that they did see returns, 17% received less than $100, and 57% received less than $1,000 for their energy and budget. One-third of that 41% (63 individuals) report outearning their social media marketing spend by more than $2,000. Social Media Examiner's 2015 Social Media Marketing Industry Report findings echo those in the Manta study. When the team asked 3,720 marketers whether their Facebook marketing is effective (which we can interpret as driving return to some extent), only 45% reported that it is. (Read here about how 60% of the respondents for the report were small business owners or executives. They either worked in companies with 2 to 10 employees or self-identified as solopreneurs.) The report also reveals that just 33% of the self-employed described Facebook marketing efforts as effective. Larger businesses have a slightly higher regard for their Facebook marketing efforts, with 50% pleased with their Facebook returns. B2C marketers also have a more positive take than B2B, with 51% of B2C marketers finding Facebook effective, compared to just 36% of B2B respondents. Key Takeaways: The significant 35% of respondents who are uncertain about whether their Facebook presence helps their business is telling. With barely enough time to keep up their Facebook page, small businesses typically lack the time and resources to gather the data needed to determine whether their Facebook efforts work. Gathering data requires that either the business owner or staff member learns or understands Google Analytics and Facebook Insights. Both of these tools require time and effort. Further, as Facebook's former Global Head of SMB Marketing Chris Luo explains in his March 2015 Fast Company article, effective Facebook advertising is moving away from the simple updates and boosting that small businesses could master easily: "Facebook has also introduced new, more sophisticated, advertising tools to directly target any user on Facebook in their newsfeed, but for the most part, these tools are used by savvy direct marketers at mid-sized or larger companies and not small businesses." #2: Small Businesses Are Reluctant to Invest Money in Social Media Small business owners are indicating their suspicion of social media marketing with their dollars. The Manta study mentioned above found that 47% of respondents invest less than $100 per month, and 40% spend between $100 and $1,000 monthly. Low spending numbers like these are surprising, given the hype Facebook marketing receives in the media. In a seeming contradiction, a recent poll of 547 small- and medium-sized business owners conducted by BIA/Kelsey and reported in The Wall Street Journal claims that social media marketing gets the majority of small businesses' ad budgets at 21.4% of total dollars. Further investigation, however, reveals that small businesses don't spend very much on marketing at all. A January 2015 BrightLocal survey of 736 small businesses revealed that 70% spend $500 or less per month on marketing. Fifty percent spend less than $300 per month.

How To Create a Brand Ambassador Program for Employees Using Social Media

How To Create a Brand Ambassador Program for Employees Using Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you looking for brand ambassadors? Have you considered recruiting your employees to help? When you empower your employees to talk about your company on social media, they’ll share a human perspective people naturally gravitate to. In this article you’ll discover how to set up a successful employee brand ambassador program to enhance your social media marketing. #1: Assign a Community Leader The first step is to designate a captain, someone who is able to take the reins. However, don't think of this person as someone who will bark orders. Instead, choose a person who can guide a group of people who already know the ropes. Listen to this article: Your community leader will: Provide a common voice and/or vision for the team Coach employees on responsible social media strategies Oversee and approve social media content Collaborate with co-workers to come up with new methods, stories and ideas for campaigns Lead the measurement and analysis of social media efforts You'll want to be sure your community leader is also capable of handling crisis situations. Your company will undoubtedly stumble into a social media mistake at some point, and you'll need a leader who can think fast on his or her feet. We're all aware how small things become magnified online – no matter how silly they seem to be. Starbucks' latest controversy about their holiday cups is a great example. The coffee chain didn't withdraw their original design. Rather, they made a statement in their official blog and stuck by it. #2: Communicate Your Vision The second step is to impart a single vision to everyone based on your company's mission – why your business exists. Starbucks' vision is to "inspire and nurture the human spirit – one person, one cup and one neighborhood at a time." The coffee chain embodies this concept in everything they do, including how they encourage employees to showcase inspiring ideas through social media. Thanks to their official pages on Facebook and Instagram, which are open to public view, Starbucks employees can quickly exchange ideas even if they're oceans apart. Adapting the tactic for your business will make your employees feel empowered, and at the same time encourage them to promote your company in their own circles. #3: Share Your Expectations No campaign can be successful without guidelines. Although you encourage active participation and uniqueness, your employees still need a set of rules so content remains consistent. Adobe does a great job of educating employees to act as brand ambassadors through their Social Shift program. Here's an image from a short presentation, which shows how they divide their strategy into different courses. During their training, employees are made aware of certain rules of engagement and protocols so their social media posts are consistent with the company's vision. To get a good example of how these guidelines work, take a look at the Adobe stream on Twitter. You can make your rules as detailed or as simple as you want, but you should ensure everyone agrees to them before they post. Here's a glimpse of how #AdobeLife tweets reflect a productive, fun and enriching work experience. https://twitter.com/bossjones/status/675107939921887232 According to Talent Cove, 78% of workers who feel recognized are more motivated to perform their tasks. Head of Adobe Employment Branding Natalie Kessler and her team like to reward employees with the best social media posts using #AdobeLife. Every week, they choose from compiled photos and messages online and then highlight them in Adobe offices. This shows employees how important their efforts are to the company. If you want to boost productivity and amp up your social media presence, make sure you're providing the right rewards for your brand ambassadors. You can arrange a small party or even offer giveaways or exclusive items.

Stop the Marketing Killjoy: 5 Ways You’re Turning off Audiences with Bad Video

by Amy Higgins @ Online Marketing Blog – TopRank®

It might only be 1pm in the afternoon, but it’s five o’clock somewhere – a perfect time for a great dry martini. Research “how to make the perfect dry martini”, and you’ll get over 1,560,000 results. Ask a content marketer “how to tell a good story”, and you’ll get about the same quality of results [...]

The post Stop the Marketing Killjoy: 5 Ways You’re Turning off Audiences with Bad Video appeared first on Online Marketing Blog - TopRank®.

Facebook Advertising 101: How to Get Started With Facebook Ads

Facebook Advertising 101: How to Get Started With Facebook Ads

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you considering running Facebook ads? Have you tried Facebook ads but have had little success? To discover how to run successful Facebook ad campaigns, I interview Amy Porterfield. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Amy Porterfield, co-author of Facebook Marketing All-in-One for Dummies and host of the Online Marketing Made Easy podcast. She's also the former Facebook community manager for Social Media Examiner. Amy will explore what you need to know to get started with Facebook ads, plus you'll discover the benefits of running Facebook ad campaigns. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Advertising 101 How Amy got started in social media and Facebook Amy became interested in social media when she was still in the corporate world. She worked for Tony Robbins for about six and a half years as director of content development. In that last year Tony got heavily into social media (he did his own Twitter), and Amy worked on Tony's Facebook page. Amy got the entrepreneurial bug, and knew she wanted to go out on her own. She fell in love with social media and she knew that was the area to pursue. While still in the corporate sphere, Amy started educating herself. She asked to be involved with anything related to online marketing and social media. About a year later, she took the leap and left the corporate world. Amy started by doing social media consulting, but eventually built a business around online training courses related to social media marketing. Listen to the show to discover how Amy and I first connected, and our first experience at Blog World. Why use Facebook ads? Facebook does a lot to help marketers find their ideal audience online. Amy believes the targeting capabilities on Facebook are far more advanced than any other social media platform. Facebook allows people to get in front of their perfect audience on a regular basis. Amy breaks down the Facebook targeting options. If you've built up a Facebook business page and have a few thousand fans, start with targeting them. It's the cheapest way to target on Facebook, since you don't pay as much when you target your own fans versus a cold audience. The next thing to do is create a lookalike audience of your own fan base. You tell Facebook that you have these fans, and you want to target people who are similar in likes, interests, activities and behavior. Facebook will give you an audience that's very similar to the one you've already attracted. Then upload your email list to Facebook. Facebook will compare it to their database, and when they find a match, they put the contact in a bucket. This allows you to target people who are already on your email list with a new opportunity. Also, take that email list and ask Facebook to find a lookalike audience. Amy adds a couple of other targeting options to the mix. Target fans of other Facebook pages, such as your competitors or people who are aligned with your business. Amy says the reason she mentioned the other options first is that sometimes when people are first starting out and go to look for similar interests, they struggle to find Facebook pages to pop up. For example, when you put together your ad, if you type "Amy Porterfield" in interests, her page will likely pop up, and you can target her fans. But a lot of pages won't populate, Amy explains. Facebook says it has to do with trending, activity, engagement and how many fans you have. Amy suggests trying to find five pages and target their fans. Another one of Amy's favorite techniques is to re...

Creating Persuasive Videos: How to Move Viewers to Action

Creating Persuasive Videos: How to Move Viewers to Action

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create marketing videos? Are you wondering how to get people to go from passive observers to active participants? To learn how to create videos that people want to watch and get them to take action, I interview James Wedmore for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview James Wedmore, author of The YouTube Marketing Book, founder of Video Traffic Academy and--in my opinion--one of the smartest video marketers on the planet. James shares his knowledge and experience on video creation and taking your viewers to the next level. You'll learn the 5 important elements of what goes into persuasive video. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Persuasive Video Creation Why video is so important for marketers James describes how he has always considered video as a communication tool. A video can be simple, quick and efficient and can be used in an unlimited number of ways. Coming from a film background, James realised he could plug in video to everything people teach  him. You'll learn the different uses for video on your website and the benefits to your audience. James says YouTube is the most shared website and form of content inside of Facebook. You'll learn about the full potential and power of video and discover why James encourages people to get in front of the camera. Listen to the show to find out how we use video at Social Media Examiner. A 5-part YouTube video guide designed to move people to take action James explains that although the equipment you use is important, it's strategy that comes first. It's about the way the video can be executed and make it original. You'll find out the real strategy behind his videos and why he tries to share content once a week with a video on YouTube. Every video James makes is based off his 5-part template below. The 5 parts of the YouTube video template are: Attention Grabber Intro Bumper The Content Outro Bumper Outtakes You'll learn why you need to keep your YouTube videos as succinct as possible. And you'll discover what James did with his videos to have more success, great results and higher audience attention rates. Below is James' YouTube Tutorial on How to Create a Video. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-ZKbSWjvE7M 1. Attention Grabber. You don't need to spend time introducing yourself. You need to say what you are going to talk about in the video or ask a question. By 8 seconds into the video, you should have a good idea of what you are going to be talking about for the next 5 minutes of the video. James describes why it's so important in the first few seconds to make sure you tell the person watching the video what they will gain. You have to provide value for your audience. YouTube is not a place for commercials. You'll get the views by answering the questions they will have. James calls it a mini transformation. You'll find out why being able to keep their attention, allows for stronger engagement. 2. Intro Bumper. This is the time when you can throw in a little commercial. It's the best way to brand your show. It adds a level of professionalism and legitimises you. For this part of the video, which needs to be less than 6 seconds long, James explains how he used software called VideoScribetv. It's a great place to put your logo, a picture of yourself, your tag line and a tune. These can be made at a low cost at Videohive. You can then hire someone on Fiverr,

Crowdfunding: What You Need to Know to Succeed With Crowdfunding

Crowdfunding: What You Need to Know to Succeed With Crowdfunding

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you plan to launch a product, project or business? Want to learn how to use crowdfunding to support your next venture? To learn how to succeed with crowdfunding, I interview Emily Best. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Emily Best, filmmaker, publisher of Bright Ideas magazine and founder of Seed&Spark, a crowdfunding solution for the independent film industry. Emily shares how she stumbled into crowdfunding and what it could mean for your business. You'll discover what you need to know about crowdfunding campaigns, including how to get started and crowdfunding platforms. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Crowdfunding What led Emily to become an independent filmmaker Emily says she was "tricked into being a filmmaker." She was happily making no money as an actor and theater producer in NYC before she took the plunge. Caitlin FitzGerald (who is now on Masters of Sex) played the lead in Hedda Gabler, a play Emily co-produced. She would come to the set with scripts for big indie films that had embarrassing and dismal parts for women. The largely female production group for the play would have drinks after the show, "rage against the state of women in cinema" and discuss doing something about it. At the time, Caitlin was making a movie called Newlyweds with well-known DIY filmmaker Ed Burns. Ed shot Newlyweds with a scaled-down crew for $9,000, made possible by the video capacity of D-SLR cameras. Emily recalls during one of their rage sessions in late 2010, Caitlin said, "Guys, we should make a movie. It's so easy. And I'll prove it to you." That was the beginning. Listen to the show to hear what happened when Emily visited Caitlin on the Newlyweds set. How Emily crowdfunded her film Caitlin and Caroline von Kuhn, who wrote the script for their film Like the Water, did not write a mockumentary shot in downtown Manhattan like Newlyweds. They wrote a slow, contemplative indie drama about grief and friendship set in Maine in the summer. Since Emily's film was an entirely different scope, she learned quickly that it couldn't be shot for $9,000; their shooting budget was $85,000. Emily says they had raised $65,000 from a group they affectionately referred to as "friends, family and fools" and were looking at a $20,000 shortfall in spring 2011. httpv://youtu.be/PFDjGcLQaVk Most independent films are made by a group of friends getting together when everyone's schedules line up. This was also the case with Emily's film, so they had a very short window to find the rest of their funding. Pre-production through shooting was planned to take place from the middle of June to the beginning of August. It was May, and they had to find a way to communicate the importance of the film to their community and get the rest of the funding. Emily says it didn't take long for a bunch of women to land on a familiar message for people seeking to crowdfund projects: a wedding registry. At the time, Kickstarter and Indiegogo were new. They made a list of everything they needed: cameras, car rentals, bug spray, sunscreen, wardrobe, food, coffee and more. Emily typed it into a WordPress blog and put a PayPal link at the bottom. Then, the six of them sent it to everyone they knew. In 30 days, they'd raised $23,000 in cash and hundreds of thousands of dollars in loans and gifts of locations, goods and services. And then they went off to make the film. The community involvement for this type of crowdfunding offered numerous benefits.

Gmail Tabs: A Game Plan for Marketers

Gmail Tabs: A Game Plan for Marketers

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Does your business rely on email? Are you wondering how Gmail tabs will impact your marketing? If email is a part of your business, you’ll want to pay close attention. In this article I’ll provide a simple 5-step plan that any marketer can use in response to Gmail tabs. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, you'll learn what the new Gmail tabs mean for your business. You'll also pick up some tips on what you can do and I'll talk about my concerns for the future. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Why should marketers pay attention? Chances are that email plays some role in your marketing. Maybe you email your subscribers when you have a new blog post or newsletter. Perhaps you have some sort of online form (for lead generation or just a simple contact form). Email indeed plays an important role for most businesses. Gmail is auto-filtering all emails for all users. This means your marketing newsletters and emails will get stuck in a slightly hidden folder, no matter what you do. In that very same folder, Gmail is posting unsolicited ads that look like emails. The bottom line with regards to these new Gmail tabs is that you will likely see a drop in your email marketing effectiveness unless you take action. In 2012, there were 425 million Gmail users. That's a huge number! Social Media Examiner has 75,000+ Gmail users. Yes, 34% of our readers subscribe through a Gmail account! There's a pretty good likelihood you have more Gmail users than you realize. What are Gmail tabs? Gmail is rolling out tabs that organize your mail. There are three default tabs: Primary, Social and Promotions (shown below). If you haven't already received this update on Gmail, it will likely come soon. Your emails are likely going into the Promotions tab. Tabs default "on" for all Gmail users unless your subscribers change this setting. If your subscribers don't know how to change it, this is how they will be finding your emails. At the time of this post, not all subscribers have tabs, but it is rolling out very quickly. What are the marketing implications? Gmail is becoming like Facebook. If you use it, you use it by their rules. I'm also concerned by the possibility that other email providers may follow Google's lead. This may be the beginning of the end of email as the one platform you can at least get delivery into. With social media platforms such as Facebook, Twitter and LinkedIn, you can never be sure that your messages get in front of your audience. Email has always been the one way that you could be certain of getting in front of your audience, assuming subscribers gave you permission to send them emails. Will this change with Gmail tabs? I think so. The updates in the Promotions tab reset each time you visit Gmail, meaning it is very easy for a Gmail user to never realize there is mail waiting in the Promotions tab. Other email providers may follow suit. There could come a time when marketers will have to pay to play. Your 5-step plan for dealing with Gmail tabs Here are tips you can move on right now to help educate your Gmail readers. These are all proactive steps we have taken at Social Media Examiner. 1. Make a video educating your Gmail users. First, educate your subscribers by making a video like the one below I made for our audience. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5Elz_1KQnmA In this video, you'll learn how your readers can make sure your emails show up in their Primary box.

How to Use Hashtags on Instagram to Grow Your Reach

How to Use Hashtags on Instagram to Grow Your Reach

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more people to see your Instagram content? Are you using Instagram hashtags? Using the right hashtags makes it easier for people to find your Instagram posts and grows your reach. In this article you'll discover how to use Instagram hashtags to connect with new people on Instagram. Why Hashtags Matter on Instagram Instagram is a powerful social channel. With over 400 million users, an average of 80 million photos posted each day and 3.5 billion likes on any given day, it's a valuable platform to include in your social media marketing mix. But how can you get some of those 3.5 billion likes for your business? That's simple: Use hashtags. Listen to this article: Instagram is a social channel where hashtags are particularly valuable. According to Buffer, accounts with fewer than 1,000 followers that use 11 hashtags with their photos get an average of 77.66 interactions per post. With hashtags, you can reach a wider audience and increase your followers. You can also do market research on your competitors and connect with people who have specific interests. Now that it's clear hashtags are an important part of any Instagram strategy, here are some ways to use them for your business. #1: Leverage Established Trends Popular (or trending) hashtags are a great way to develop an Instagram presence and build brand awareness. There are many popular hashtags you can use, including: #photooftheday: Choose a behind-the-scenes photo of your company and share it as your photo of the day. #selfie: Take a selfie while you're working (or have your employees do it) and share the selfie on your Instagram account. #instalike: Don't just use this hashtag, also go through other posts that use it and interact with those users. #2: Tap Into a Popular Theme Themes can be a lot of fun, and Instagram has some popular themed hashtags that you can use with your Instagram posts. Here are a few to consider for your business: #TBT or #throwbackthursday: Throwback Thursday is a great way to reminisce about your company. On Thursdays, share your first dollar made or photos from a special event. You can even include cute or hilarious high school photos. #motivationalmonday: Add some positivity to your feed by participating in Motivational Monday. Share quotes or life lessons from your professional life. #followfriday: Showcase photos from other users and encourage your followers to follow them with this hashtag. You might even get a reciprocal #followfriday tag from those users. This is also a great way to say thank you to your client base. #3: Share an Inspirational Quote Quotes are a great way to get traction and interaction for visual content, and they work as well on Instagram as on your other social channels. Use image tools like Canva to create high-quality image quotes to share. Here are some hashtags to use with them: #instaquote: Use this hashtag with your quote posts. Also look through other tagged posts to boost your client engagement and share something interesting with other users. #quoteoftheday: Whether you use #quoteoftheday or #qotd, you can get some traction from other Instagram users. Consider creating an editorial calendar and plan quotes to share throughout the week using this hashtag. Share quotes from authors and industry leaders, as well as from your blog posts. Quotes that reflect your brand and goal are typically good choices. #4: Tell People What You're Doing Now Telling people what you're doing now is a great way to make your Instagram account fresh and inspiring to users. Plus, balancing business with fun is a great way to create a following on Instagram. Try these hashtags: #amreading: Are you reading an interesting book about your industry? Or the latest Stephen King bestseller? Share it with your audience to spark conversation and make new connections. #amwriting: Whether you're an author or simply writing a blog post,

Twitter Quality Score for Ads: What Marketers Need to Know

Twitter Quality Score for Ads: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Twitter ads? Do you want a better return on your investment? Twitter uses its ads quality score to determine how your ads are displayed, and how much you pay if people engage with them. In this article I'll share how to create Twitter content that raises your Twitter ads quality to maximize the ROI on your Twitter ads. Listen to this article: Why Your Twitter Ads Quality Score Matters The Google AdWords’ quality score rewards advertisers who create engaging ads with much lower cost per click and more prominent ad placement. This year, Facebook introduced a quality score of its own, called relevance score, which determines your ad cost and placement on that social network. Now Twitter has jumped on board with a similar algorithm to reward the most engaging ads and penalize low-performing ads on their platform. Although there was no formal announcement, Twitter recently confirmed in a new section in the Twitter Ads Help documentation that they use it. (A few months ago, this section of the guide didn't exist.) So what does Twitter ads quality score actually do and how do you find out if your quality scores are any good? For starters, you can't actually see your quality adjusted bid in your Twitter Ads Manager. It remains a hidden internal metric for now. Regardless, Twitter's quality adjusted bids algorithm isn't some arbitrary metric you can ignore. As with Google AdWords, increasing the quality score on your Twitter ads actually earns you a huge click discount. In fact, on average, when you gain one point in the engagement rates on your ads, you see a 5% decrease in cost per engagement. Therefore, regarding Twitter ads campaigns, if you can get engagement rates up to 60% or so, the cost per engagement becomes one cent. If you can get it to 36%, it's two cents. On the other hand, if your engagement rate (and therefore your quality score) falls to 7%, the cost per click will go up to about eight cents per click. That's an 800% increase. Plus, really low engagement gets even worse (meaning more costly). If your engagement is something like 0.14%, you will end up paying a whopping $2.50 per engagement. That's more than 250 times more expensive than promoting a high-engagement ad. It's unnecessary to overpay for your ads like that when you can just as easily boost your Twitter quality scores and get substantially better rates. Here's how to master the Twitter ads quality score algorithm to get better engagement and rates on your Twitter ad campaigns. #1: Keep Twitter Ads Fresh to Retain High Impressions Twitter wants to show users the freshest content, so tweet new material regularly. No matter how good the ad, the number of impressions per day declines over time. And, as time goes on, Twitter is less likely to show older tweets. The solution is to create different variations of each ad. It will be much more effective, and have much higher visibility and engagement, than running the same ads for lengthy periods of time. #2: Build on Existing Engagement to Pay Less Rather than paying more than $2 per click to promote low-engagement (and poor) content, promote tweets that are already doing well. For example, the tweet below got 1,500 retweets. Plus, that piece of content received 100,000 visits referred from Twitter. And all for $250. When you pay to promote high-engagement tweets, it will often give your organic performance a boost. People will want to share popular tweets they see on their own networks. Besides, you don't pay for those additional retweets and engagement. Remember, though, if you promote content no one wants to engage with or share, you pay more for each click. Furthermore, you will see little (if any) free organic engagement. My strategy is not to promote every tweet. I only promote the top 1% to 3% of status updates with 15% or greater engagement rates. When I do,

How to Use Native Ads to Support Your Social Media Marketing

How to Use Native Ads to Support Your Social Media Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you looking for ways to supercharge your social media efforts? Have you considered native ads? Native ads not only help build your social followers and boost social engagement, they also drive high-quality consumers to your branded content. In this article you'll discover what native ads are and how to integrate them into your social media marketing. Listen to this article: What Are Native Ads? The Content Marketing Institute defines native advertising as paid marketing that delivers useful, interesting and targeted information to your audience in a form that looks like the site's native, or non-ad, content. The different forms that native ads can take vary greatly. They can be Google paid search results, promoted listings on Twitter, sponsored updates on LinkedIn, Facebook promoted or sponsored posts or even articles on sites like Forbes, BuzzFeed, The Huffington Post and The New York Times. Native ads can also appear as content-recommendation engines at the end of articles. Here's how to start integrating native ads into your social media marketing. #1: Define Your Goal Whatever the form, native ads offer many potential benefits to your business. Joe Pulizzi of the Content Marketing Institute says native ads can help you build brand awareness and trust, plus help bring subscribers to your content. And keep in mind that your content doesn't always have to be new. Native ads can be a great way to attract new audiences to previously published posts. Additional benefits of native ads include SEO and social proof. Promoted posts on a strong social media site get your message in front of a larger audience and can drive traffic back to your website or blog. Native ads can be especially helpful if you have a new site and haven't had time to build up strong SEO. Unlike other forms of digital marketing such as banner ads, native ads on social media can collect social proof such as likes, comments and shares. This increases the credibility of your message and viral opportunities for your brand. More awareness can equal more authority in the form of links and social signals, which can produce better rankings. Native ads can also help you build social media audiences. A sponsored post on Facebook or Twitter can attract new users to follow you, and sponsored stories can grow likes and followers, but only when the content resonates with users. A sponsored post with little organic traction will do poorly. Promote social media content that is already popular for further exposure to a wider audience. #2: Develop Quality Ad Content To get the most from your native ad investment, focus on creating content that is helpful and interesting, attracts attention and provides value. And fight the urge to sell. Additionally, Zoe Robinson of Add3 suggests these best practices for native ads: Publish the content that the ad is promoting on your own site. If your article features an infographic, chart or graph, be sure it appears on your site first with its own URL. Include a call to action that links to your blog or other social channels. Quality content is key. Go beyond marketing and break down departmental silos to leverage the expertise of others in your company. Create content your audience will find less disruptive and more engaging through segmentation with tools like geo-targeting, demographics and interests. Zoe also recommends measuring metrics beyond traditional click-through rates. Consider metrics such as brand affinity or purchase intent to determine native ad success. #3: Use Native Ad Targeting PR software and services company Cision suggests targeting sponsored content to Facebook users who are already customers or lookalike audiences that share characteristics with existing fans. You can also retarget native ads to people who have come to your website to view a product or service or deliver native ads based on search interest.

LinkedIn Prospecting: How to Find Your Next Customer on LinkedIn

LinkedIn Prospecting: How to Find Your Next Customer on LinkedIn

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use LinkedIn for your business? Are you wondering how to use LinkedIn to find prospects and customers? To learn about how to build strategic relationships through LinkedIn, I interview Viveka von Rosen for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Viveka von Rosen, author of LinkedIn Marketing: An Hour a Day and founder of Linked Into Business. Viveka shares how she prospects on LinkedIn for her business. You'll learn about the tools available to make prospecting easy and what you need to do to get started. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: LinkedIn Prospecting What is prospecting? Viveka explains that a prospect is someone whom you either find or attract to you who's in a company, business, industry or organization that has a need for your product or service. Before social media, prospecting was done through very expensive outbound sales. However, social media and LinkedIn in particular have changed this. You'll hear why Viveka loves prospecting. Social media has changed us from the age of the seller to the age of the consumer. Consumers now tell us want they want. A large part of prospecting is to know who your ideal clients are and know their needs. Facebook, Yelp, LinkedIn and Twitter make the research a lot easier. As a seller, it's also a lot easier and cheaper to get out there and position yourself as a thought leader. This engenders the feeling of "know, like and trust" in a client or prospect with whom you may not have had direct interaction. It makes it easier to close the sale. In Jill Konrath's book, Selling to BIG Companies, she talks about how you have to know whom to sell to. This is why LinkedIn is so important—it tells you who works at the companies, their positions and whom they interact with. It enables you to reach out to the right person. Listen to the show to find out why groups can be so powerful. LinkedIn for prospecting Viveka explains the two aspects of prospecting—inbound and outbound. Actively prospecting is just a matter of research. With a combination of keywords, titles, company name and location, you can use the Advanced Search on LinkedIn to discover the people you want to interact with. These are your prospects. You'll hear about some of the great benefits of LinkedIn and also some of its limitations. One of the most powerful search categories is Location. Not only can you see who lives in your town, but also when you attend trade shows or conferences, it's a great way to connect with people before the event. A really cool app that you can use for conferences is Bizzabo, which has a LinkedIn API interface. There are thousands of events in there and you can see who will be at the event. It shows you their LinkedIn profile. In the show, you'll also discover another app which can be used for prospecting. If you want to meet prospects face to face before an event, a cool new app called Trendr will set up a live meeting place. Listen to the show to find out how you can discover if a prospect is active in a particular LinkedIn group. Viveka's experience on LinkedIn Viveka is extremely active on LinkedIn, either prospecting or inbound. She says that 70-80% of her business comes through LinkedIn and the remainder through things that she markets on Twitter. When you own a LinkedIn group, it allows you to position yourself as a thought leader. Viveka owns quite a few groups.

Social Media Evolution: What Does the Future of Social Marketing Look Like?

Social Media Evolution: What Does the Future of Social Marketing Look Like?

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you amazed at how much social media has changed over the last few years? Want to discover what's next? To explore the evolution of social media, I interview Brian Solis. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Brian Solis, a principal analyst at the Altimeter Group. He's written eight books, including Engage and What's the Future of Business? His newest book is called X: The Experience When Business Meets Design. Brian will explore how social media has changed and how it continues to evolve. You'll discover how marketers can use moments of truth to engage their customers. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Media Evolution From Engage until now Brian recalls that in the late 90s and early 2000s, he helped with development around what became social media and realized that two-way digital marketing aspect was going to be phenomenal. He says his book Engage was the culmination of all that work put into a book designed to help anyone in marketing or business really understand how to become social. After Engage, Brian says, the world started to change and technology started to accelerate. This is something he studies as both an analyst and an anthropologist. Brian has continued to write books, do research and speak on how to bridge the world of brand or business with technology and people. He says social has become part of that process, as has mobile and digital transformation, wearables, etc. When asked about major changes in social media that have taken place between his first book and today, Brian talks about creating an infographic called The Wheel of Disruption while he was writing What's the Future of Business? The infographic showed all of the things that were disrupting industries, with an emphasis on brand, marketing and engagement. He explains that then and now, the three things Fred Wilson once called The Golden Triangle are at the core of everything. Brian goes on to discuss how wearables, augmented reality and services like Uber, Instacart, Postmates, Amazon, Drone Delivery and Google Express are creating disruption not only on technology fronts, but also on behavioral and expectation fronts at a human level. Listen to the show to hear Brian explain how the disruption happening today has grand implications for every business in every industry. The importance of experience Brian shares that while many marketers, brand strategists and executives say experience is one of the most important things to deliver, that means different things to different people. From great customer service to great product design, it's all over the map. Brian believes that everything that happens when you buy, use, shop for or have a problem with something are moments that contribute to the overall experience. Brian shares why he thinks we should be able to define and design experiences as part of business and branding to build better relationships, and why he believes experience is the next competitive advantage. He says that while some savvy organizations have introduced efforts to define a brand experience (BX), a customer experience (CX) and a user experience (UX), all of these efforts are disparate. Thus, by default or by design, the experience is disconnected. Listen to the show to hear why Brian wants to bring all experiences under one banner of X, where everything works together. Businesses doing a great job with experience Brian explains that he chose the companies he talks about in his book not because they are examples of holistic experiences,

Google Maps Marketing & Optimization | Google Maps SEO

Google Maps Marketing & Optimization | Google Maps SEO


Captivate Local

When you need Google Maps marketing and optimization, our Google Maps SEO and advertising services are designed to maximize local search visibility.

How to Grow a Business Using YouTube

How to Grow a Business Using YouTube

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to use YouTube for business? Want to learn how to script and produce YouTube videos for your business? To find out how marketers can develop a business channel on YouTube, I interview Sunny Lenarduzzi. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Sunny Lenarduzzi, a video marketing expert. Previously she was a TV news reporter and the host of the Social Update from Hootsuite. Now she produces regular videos focused on social media, creates online courses, and helps her clients find success with YouTube. Sunny Lenarduzzi shares insights from creating her own business on YouTube. You'll discover how to use social media to drive traffic to your YouTube channel. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How to Grow a Business With YouTube Sunny's Story Sunny has a background in traditional media (broadcasting, television, and radio), but fell in love with social media in the early days of Facebook and Twitter. She started an online magazine and after building the brand organically using YouTube and other social media platforms, she ended up with a social media consulting business. When Sunny noticed she was routinely getting the same questions from her clients (such as how to build a Twitter following or how to use Instagram video), she started using YouTube FAQ to record and send the answers to clients. Her first video tutorial now has almost 80,000 views. Today, her channel (started in March 2015) has amassed over 60,000 subscribers and 3.8 million video views. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9D7qmseGz6o Listen to the show to learn more about how Sunny came to partner with Hootsuite on the Social Update. The Path Between YouTube Videos and Business It's all the about email addresses. The biggest thing to remember, Sunny says, is that YouTube is a social media platform. She reminds listeners that social media algorithms change and you can't always rely on social media reach to get your message out. That's where an email list comes in, and she notes that YouTube is vital to growing your email list. For example, Sunny created a tutorial on How to Get More Views on YouTube, in which she offers a free YouTube SEO checklist. Every week, she gains about 200 email subscribers from that one video. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=LokwDpM1wnc Sunny explains the importance of helping your videos rank on page one of Google and YouTube search, and shares that the first 24 hours of a video's life are vital in determining where the video will rank. For this reason, when she has a new video, she spends that first day driving people directly to the video on YouTube. Sunny credits getting ranked on the first page of Google or YouTube search results with the growth of her business over the past year. People found her videos when they were searching for help on certain topics such as how to use Snapchat, Twitter, YouTube, etc. Answering questions related to these topics introduces her to potentially thousands of new people a day, and capturing the email addresses of those people grows her potential customer database. Sunny shares that she uses a customized Leadpages link, designed in the same branding as her website, to collect her leads. Sunny says to create your freebie based on what you eventually want to sell. Make it a guide, a checklist, or an ebook. If writing isn't your strong suit, there are other options to use for the freebie, such as audio training or short video courses. For example, Kimra Luna offers a two-day video mini-series for her Rock-It With Webinars.

Instagram Contests: Tools and Tips for Marketers

Instagram Contests: Tools and Tips for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to increase engagement on Instagram? Have you thought about Instagram contests? Instagram contests are a great way to get people talking about your business and increase your followers. In this article you'll discover tools and tips to help marketers run a successful Instagram contest. #1: Follow Contest Rules When you're hosting or promoting any kind of contest, you have to follow certain rules. Here are the guidelines for running an Instagram contest: Listen to this article: Don't inaccurately tag content or users, and don't encourage participants to inaccurately tag content or other users. For example, don't ask users to tag themselves in photos if they aren't actually in the photos. Acknowledge that your contest isn't associated with or supported by Instagram. You don't need a neon sign stating this. Just be sure you're not inadvertently making it seem like Instagram is endorsing your promotion. Follow proper eligibility requirements. Some businesses feature products or offer prizes that have age or residency restrictions. If you're a winery, for example, clarify that users must be 21 and older to participate. While most of these guidelines fall under the umbrella of common sense, it's important to make note of them. It's easy to forget about audience restrictions or forget to state them. #2: Pick a Contest Type If you're planning to run a promotion or contest on Instagram, you'll have to decide what type of contest to run, how it will operate and how users can participate. Here are some different types of Instagram contests to consider. Comment on the Post Contests This is a popular type of Instagram contest where you ask users to comment on your post. For example, you might ask fans what their favorite flavor of ice cream is. Asking a question generates engagement because users have to engage beyond simply liking the post. Beauty by Earth asked fans to like and comment on their Instagram post for a chance to win a free exfoliating sponge set. To follow up with contest winners, the company tagged the winners in an Instagram post with a request to privately send their contact information. Like the Post Contests Another type of Instagram contest is to ask fans to like the post that's advertising the contest. While this tactic can generate some engagement, and fans are likely to participate because it's easy to do, many businesses would rather see a more deliberate interaction like commenting. Post Your Own Photo Contests For this type of contest, you ask fans to post their own Instagram images along with the contest hashtag. Make it clear to fans which hashtag they should use to participate. That makes it easy for you to find them and lets you know who's entering the contest. Starbucks' Red Cup Contest generates a ton of engagement and attention each year. Fans are asked to post photos of their red cup moments with the hashtag #redcupcontest. Combine Contests You can also combine several of these contest types. For example, you might ask users to like your post and comment, or follow your brand and upload their own posts with a certain hashtag. Keep in mind that you don't want to ask users only to follow you, because you can't track this action effectively or reliably. #3: Choose a Tool to Manage Your Contest You'll find a number of great tools to set up, run and manage your Instagram contests. Because Instagram has made it clear that they won't be associated with or help support any contests on the platform, all of the tools available for managing contests are from third-party companies. Here are three to consider: Gleam Gleam's contest platform makes it easy to host a contest on Instagram, and comes with a slew of helpful features. The company boasts an average of four actions per user in their competitions. The interface is easy to use and straightforward, featuring a dashboard with current and scheduled competitio...

5 Lesser Known Facebook Page Features for Marketers

5 Lesser Known Facebook Page Features for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you manage a Facebook page for your business? Interested in ways to improve your marketing? In addition to the Facebook features you use for business every day, there are some handy ones you may have overlooked. In this article you'll discover five lesser known Facebook Page features for marketers. Listen to this article: #1: Free Images for Ads When creating a Facebook ad, you can choose from a searchable database of thousands of free stock images from within the Facebook image library. This takes an extra step out of the ad creation process. This image library is powered by Shutterstock, but there's one important caveat: Not all of the images meet Facebook's advertising guidelines. For this reason, it's important to familiarize yourself with the guidelines and choose your images carefully. You don't want your ads getting rejected over some minor technicality such as the 20% text rule on ad images. #2: Ad Relevance Scores The ad relevance score is basically Facebook's answer to Google's quality score for AdWords. The relevance score guides how often your Facebook ad will be displayed and how much you'll pay for each ad engagement. Facebook considers a lot of different factors when calculating your relevance score, including positive and negative feedback via video views, clicks, comments, likes and other ad interactions. If people report your ad or tell Facebook they don't want to see it anymore, those actions count against you. Keeping an eye on your ad relevance score can help you determine if your ad needs work. Oddly enough, this setting is unchecked by default. To enable ad relevance scoring, open the ad or ad set in your Ads Manager and navigate to Customize Columns. From the list of available columns, find and select the Relevance Score check box. Enabling this option adds a Relevance Score column to your ads reports so you can keep an eye on this metric. #3: Email Contact Import A great way to grow your audience is to invite the people in your email address book to like your Facebook business page. To do that, go to your Facebook business page, click on the ellipsis (…) button (next to the Share button on your cover image) and then select Invite Email Contacts from the drop-down menu. Next, you see a pop-up box that lists all of the different integration options you can use to import your contacts. Identify the contact list you want to import and click the Invite Contacts link to the right. After you upload your list, a dialog box appears where you can select which contacts to invite. You have the option to select individual contacts or the group as a whole. After you select your contacts, click Preview Invitation. On the next page, review the invitation, select the check box that you're authorized to send invitations and click Send. There are a couple of points to keep in mind when sending invitations. You can upload up to 5,000 contacts per day, so if you have large customer or subscriber lists, you'll have to send invitations in batches. Remember, your page may already be suggested to your contacts who use Facebook, so you can decide whether to email them as well. If you're already showing up in their recommended pages, it's just free advertising for you. #4: Facebook Post Scheduling The ability to schedule Facebook posts is pretty handy, especially if you're using promoted posts. The good news is that you don't need Hootsuite or Buffer to do it. You can schedule future posts right in Facebook. You can even backdate posts so that they appear earlier in your timeline. To access this feature, go the Publishing Tools tab, select Scheduled Posts and click the Create button. Compose your post and then select Schedule from the Publish drop-down menu. Select the date and time to schedule your post. When you're finished, click Schedule. Scheduling posts can be especially useful for larger teams where you have different ...

How to Republish, Repurpose and Reinvent Your Content Using LinkedIn Publisher

How to Republish, Repurpose and Reinvent Your Content Using LinkedIn Publisher

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to give existing content new life and greater visibility? Looking for a way to publish more often without much extra work? Use LinkedIn Publisher to consistently provide useful content for your audience, gain visibility and build your professional identity without writing anything new! In this article you’ll discover three ways to give existing content new life using LinkedIn Publisher. Listen to this article: #1: Republish Blog Posts One of the fastest ways to get started on LinkedIn is to copy and paste your complete content posts from other blogs. If you decide to go this route, there are a couple of things to keep in mind. It's important to understand how Google views duplicate content. You should wait at least two weeks after the post publishes before you republish it to LinkedIn. That gives the bots from search engines enough time to index and understand which post is the original, and rank it higher than republished content. Barry Feldman posted an article on LinkedIn a month after it originally appeared on his blog. To let readers know where to find the original post, include a sentence at the beginning or end that directs readers to the original version. This is especially important when you republish your guest post from another company's blog and it's a nice rule of thumb to adopt when you republish your own content. Readers will know where they can find more of your articles. Plus, they'll see you're honest about republishing your post. Take the time to craft a headline that's a little different and specific to the LinkedIn platform. For example, when Guillaume Decugis republishes content on LinkedIn, Medium and other syndication sites, he changes the title of each post to distinguish and optimize it. Then readers who search for the keyword will see multiple versions of the headline on the first page of search engine results. Remember, treat LinkedIn Publisher as a distribution channel, where the goal is to increase visibility and grow your audience. Send people back to your blog, so they can get to know more about you and your business. #2: Repurpose Long-Form Content Do you have robust ebooks, case studies and speeches that are too long for LinkedIn? No worries. It's easy to optimize your existing long-form blog content for LinkedIn Publisher. Take your long-form blog posts or ebooks and break them down into multiple individual posts. Include additional images and subheads too. You can even take old speeches and write them as LinkedIn posts. For example, Ann Handley (who does an excellent job of mixing new content and repurposed content into her LinkedIn Publisher posts) recently reimagined a speech published on her blog in 2013 for a LinkedIn Publisher post in 2015. #3: Use Previous Content to Inspire New Posts If you don't want to republish the same content (or even parts of it) from your blog, there are a few other options to avoid starting completely from scratch. Take a look at the analytics from your published content to see which articles performed best. Look at traffic, social media shares and any other metrics you monitor for performance. Then try to figure out what made that content so successful. One way to do this is to ask yourself questions about each post. Once you determine the source of that success, write a new article for LinkedIn that's similar. You can also go through your blog and find articles with similar themes. Then pick the big ideas from each post and turn it into a list post on LinkedIn. Include a summary paragraph or two from each post, as well as a link back to the original. Tips for LinkedIn Publisher Engagement and Visibility Whether you republish existing content verbatim or revise it, there are a few things to do to optimize it for LinkedIn. OkDork analyzed 3,000 of the most successful LinkedIn Publishing posts to come up with these helpful takeaways:

Visual Content: How to Create Shareable Images People Love

Visual Content: How to Create Shareable Images People Love

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use images in your social media marketing? Are you interested in finding ways to create more shareable visual content quickly and easily? To learn how to create shareable images that enhance your social media marketing, I interview Kim Garst. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Kim Garst, CEO of Boom Social, a social media marketing consultancy. Kim's also an expert in using visuals for social media marketing. She's the author of a new book, Will the Real You Please Stand Up: Show Up, Be Authentic, and Prosper in Social Media. Kim explores visual content and how it can enhance your social media marketing. You'll discover the importance of using visual content in your social media marketing; the different types of visual content you can create for your brand or business; and the best tools, apps and resources for creating visual content at your desktop or on the go. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Visual Content Marketing What is visual content marketing? Visual content marketing is a way to use images, rather than words, to communicate a message about your business, product or service. Visuals are a snackable way to express ideas. Visuals are a huge part of social media and they continue to evolve. People are so busy today. Images catch their attention and are quicker and easier to process than text as they scroll through a social media feed. Beyond leveraging social media platforms typically known to be visual (Pinterest and Instagram), Kim also looks for ways to implement visuals and eye-popping graphics in her Twitter content strategy and on her blog. Listen to the show to discover more ways to leverage visual content in your social media marketing.  The importance of visuals for social media marketing  From a social media marketing standpoint, the old saying that "a picture's worth a thousand words" holds so much value today. As marketers, we all need to be or become storytellers. A great photo or graphic tells a story in one hot second. We live in such an information-overloaded space right now and attention spans are so short. Text-based marketing alone has become less and less effective. The brain processes visuals 60,000 times faster than text. A good image can connect an idea or message much quicker and stronger than text-only content. Listen to the show to find out other amazing stats for the effectiveness of visual content on what your audience will process, learn and retain.  Different types of visuals you can create  There are five primary types of visual content you can create for social media: videos, photos, creative images, infographics and slide shows. Kim explains that comics, memes and infographics tend to be hugely popular on social media. Comics and memes are a way to showcase humor. They're fun and relatable, so people are eager to share them with their friends and family. According to Kim, businesses that use infographics probably have a 12% higher growth rate than companies that don't. Infographics offer a visual way to share a lot of interesting content in one image. People love them too. The most popular place to get more bang from your infographics is on Pinterest. People share them there like mad. Another great place to leverage infographics is on blogs. An infographic doesn't necessarily have to be complex to be appealing and effective. For example, if you have a blog post that's about 10 ways to do something, then you could repurpose your blog content and very easily make an infographic on those 10 ways.

Writing and Social: Why the Written Word Is Your Marketing Advantage

Writing and Social: Why the Written Word Is Your Marketing Advantage

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you write content for your business? Are you looking to improve the quality of your writing and your storytelling skills? To explore why the written word matters in social media, I interview Ann Handley for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Ann Handley, the co-author of Content Rules and chief content officer at MarketingProfs—providing training and education to empower both large and small business marketers. Her newest book is called Everybody Writes: Your Go-To Guide to Creating Ridiculously Good Content. Ann shares why she decided to write a book for marketers about writing. You'll discover how to improve your writing for social media. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Writing and Social What led Ann to write this book Ann explains that she wrote Everybody Writes because she looked for that book, and it didn't exist. She wanted a book that was part writing guide geared toward marketers, part handbook on good sportsmanship in content marketing and part reliable desk companion for people creating content on behalf of brands and companies. So she wrote it! Ann wrote her first book, Content Rules, four years ago with C.C. Chapman. That was the beginning of the conversation about content marketing. These days, she explains, being able to write well is a necessity. Everybody Writes came out of Ann’s love for good writing and her desire to see marketers do a better job with their content. Listen to the show to learn more about Ann's first book, Content Rules. Why the written word is so important to marketers Ann explains that since we're all publishers in this age of technology, our words become our ambassadors. Our writing conveys a lot of things about us. It can make us seem warm, fun, competent and trustworthy. But it can also make us seem boring, humdrum and confused. Choosing the right words to tell our story is really important, especially when you want to connect with your customers. In a world where we all have a platform, whether it's a blog or a website, words matter now more than ever. Listen to the show to hear what people said to Ann when she told them she was writing a book on writing. What non-writers need to know about writing Ann believes we are all writers. If you have a website, work in marketing or post on social media, you're a writer. To learn to craft better content, just develop the necessary writing muscles. Ann talks about a story she tells in the book. As a non-athlete, she could never do a pull-up or a push-up. About a year ago, Ann started working with a personal trainer and then four months ago, she did a push-up. It's just like writing. If you want to get better at writing, or at push-ups, you just need practice. Everyone is capable of becoming a better writer. Listen to the show to learn what keeps people from believing they can write. How to develop writing muscles To get better at writing, you need to make it a priority. One tip Ann emphasizes is to give yourself permission to write badly and then fix what you've written. The main thing with writing content is to start somewhere. Write anything, and then edit it well. Listen to the show to discover what voice-to-text tools you can use to create early drafts of your content. Why stories are important and how to tell good ones All humans like a good story. The way you can tell if your story is good, Ann says, is as soon as you get into telling it,

How to Develop a Social Media Reporting System

How to Develop a Social Media Reporting System

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you responsible for reporting your social media results? Do you need to develop a reporting system? Knowing who you report to and what metrics they need will help you streamline the process and ensure you're delivering reports on time. In this article you'll discover how to develop a social media reporting system for your business. Listen to this article: #1: Identify Stakeholders and Goals The first step is to do a quick audit of your current reporting process and find out which stakeholders receive your reports. If you know whom you're reporting to and why, you can ensure your reports will be useful to everyone involved. Find out who receives the social media data in your organization. You may send reports to one person, but that person may then forward them on to others. Also, different teams have different needs. For example, a PR team may have different expectations than a community management team. Next, discover what actions your reports support so you don't waste time reporting on metrics no one uses. Talk to the people you report to, find out their needs (and wants) and see what you can learn about the current state of your social media reporting. You'll likely find some overlapping goals and be able to identify areas of commonality. If you're the sole owner and consumer of social media reporting in your company, identify what you need to know about your performance and what you'll do with this information. Try to distill it to a few clear goals, which will make everything easier in later steps. #2: Decide What Metrics to Track When deciding what to include in your reports, find metrics you can use in multiple situations and have some business benefit for your stakeholders. Just because you can report on something doesn't mean you should. And the more metrics you include in your reports now, the more metrics you'll have to keep supporting in the future. Here's an overview of the metrics that really matter: Reach or exposure: Measure the size of your potential audience. Volume: Track the conversation size and number of brand mentions. Engagement: Analyze the quantity and type of engagement your accounts and posts get. Audience: Learn who participates in a conversation, along with the most active users and influencers. Content: Monitor your top-performing (and worst-performing) posts. The metrics you use will depend on your needs and the social networks you're measuring, but these core concepts are a great start. In addition to the general metrics above, you'll probably have a few specific needs or requests from stakeholders you need to support. That's great, because the more relevant and targeted your reports, the more useful they'll be for your business. However, avoid creating custom metrics or anything you'll need to calculate manually, unless they're really important. You'll likely regret this later. It can take a long time to handcraft special calculations, especially if you're not entirely sure how you did it the last time. Above all, be consistent. Make sure you're reporting the same metrics in the same way each time. Add in percentage changes and other benchmarks to make it easy for your audience to interpret the results. #3: Choose the Right Tools There are many social media measurement and analytics tools you can choose from. However, only a few tools will help you get the precise information you need. Keep in mind that no tool is going to be exactly what you're looking for. There are so many ways to analyze social media that every tool has a different perspective. Plus, social data is far from perfect and the kind of information that you can pull from a particular social media channel will vary depending on the channel. However, there is a product out there for you. Ask these questions when you're researching a new tool: Where does it get its social data? What kind of relationship does it have with the social ne...

(Answer) – Where is the IP Exclusion feature in Google AdWords?

by Mike Poserina @ Engine Ready is an innovative industry leader in SEO and PPC

...how do I access this IP exclusion feature?

The post (Answer) – Where is the IP Exclusion feature in Google AdWords? appeared first on Engine Ready is an innovative industry leader in SEO and PPC.

Write A Human-Friendly SEO Title For Every Web Page

by Nick Leffler @ Exprance

Search engine optimization is based off a lot of bits and pieces but it all comes down to a human-friendly SEO title. The first thing people searching see is the title which determines their interest in your listing. Focus on creating a title that's interesting and accurate.

The post Write A Human-Friendly SEO Title For Every Web Page appeared first on Exprance.

PBN Mistakes: 5 Mistakes That Will Get Your PBN De-Indexed

by admin @ SEO Brothers

If you ask 10 SEO Professionals what the hottest trend is in SEO over the last five years 8 of them will likely say PBNs. For good reason as well, they are one of the easiest ways to create high value links for your websites. However, they don’t come without risk and there are many…

The post PBN Mistakes: 5 Mistakes That Will Get Your PBN De-Indexed appeared first on SEO Brothers.

Marketing Reboot? Are You Ready to Change?

Marketing Reboot? Are You Ready to Change?

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is your business ready to face the technological and sociological changes that are happening right now? To learn why you need to consider rebooting the way you market in this rapidly changing world, I interview Mitch Joel for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Mitch Joel, author of the book Six Pixels of Separation and the podcast with the same name. His newest book is Ctrl Alt Delete: Reboot Your Business. Reboot Your Life. Your Future Depends on It. Mitch shares how technology will change the way we market our businesses in the future. You'll learn the most important trends and how they will impact your marketing. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Marketing Reboot What's the business world going to look like for our young children, when they enter the workforce? Mitch shares how the iPad has only been around for the last three and a half years, and so for us to even think about what life will be like in a decade is unfathomable. He believes that in current business, with the catalyst of technology, we've gone through exponential growth. Mitch says that as human beings we find it difficult to understand this dramatic shift. Since the iPad has come along, it has imploded the PC market. Our children will know nothing but technology. It's changing the lives of people and the state of business. Listen to the show to find out why Mitch questions why anyone would download content and keep it on a hard drive. Why we need a reboot In the preface to Mitch's new book, Ctrl Alt Delete, he says, "during this state of purgatory, many businesses will die and many jobs will disappear, but in the same breadth many businesses will thrive, many new businesses will be created, and many new jobs will be invented." Mitch shares his story of when his agency, Twist Image, first started out in 2000. The idea was to create a modern marketing agency focused on technology and connectivity. You'll discover what type of people they now hire compared to back then and see how the acceleration has kicked in over the last 5 years. As far as education goes, Mitch feels that we're not educating young people properly. He believes that we're not setting up an infrastructure for the world as it exists. As a professional marketer, you'll need to look at how we connect with things, engage with brands and engage in our lives. Mitch explains what he means by reboot and how marketing professionals are not grasping it. They tend to still hold onto the old ways in which they buy, sell, create and engage with media. You'll discover why Mitch believes the book is a wake-up call and why it's not forward-looking. Listen to the show to hear the five movements that have already happened that have shaped business and changed the way we work. How has the seemingly ubiquitous adoption of social media led to the need for businesses and marketers to change? Mitch feels the most important element is the intrinsic connection we now have. For example, when you see two young people shopping in a mall, they aren't just two good prospects for your store—they're more like 1,002 prospects. Young people today have about 500 connections on Facebook, where they chat, share and text. They create a connected society that we've never had before. Mitch feels that social media, a platform of connectivity, has been a major factor. The adoption has been so intense that he's not sure if marketers or even the peopl...

How Google rankings affect your business’s success

How Google rankings affect your business’s success


Garage

Download our 3-step SEO checklist to start making improvements to your website that can boost your Google rankings and your business's bottom line.

14 Video Tools for Social Media Marketers

14 Video Tools for Social Media Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to add video to your social media marketing? Are you looking for tools to simplify your video production? Today's tools make it easy to record and edit videos for social media marketing and ad campaigns. In this article I'll share 14 tools marketers can use to create screencasts, montages and slideshows. Why Video for Ads? Facebook gives priority to native videos (as opposed to video links to external sources) to encourage this type of content. Videos that are directly uploaded to Facebook perform better and provide a better experience. They receive 30% more video views than videos posted from other websites, and have images up to 11 times larger in the news feed. Listen to this article: According to Facebook's Q3 2015 earnings report, there are now 8 billion daily video views on Facebook, double the video views in April 2015. Plus, with the launch of 30-second Instagram video ads, it's easier than ever to create video ads to use for both platforms. There is a perceived high barrier to creating video, however. People who appear on camera want to look and sound their best, and they want to use the best technology to record audio and video. Plus, many women in business (myself included) want to spend time on hair and makeup before hitting the record button. Fortunately, there are easy ways to create video, some of which don't even require showing your face on-screen. You can use screen captures, images and video clips to create video ads for your business. Here are some excellent desktop and mobile tools you can use to create Facebook and Instagram videos. Record Screencasts A screencast is a digital recording of the action taking place on your computer screen. It's the perfect solution for creating technical how-to explainer videos, narrate slides about a specific topic, give a guided tour of your website or create a tutorial or demo for your product. You can record and edit screencasts using the following tools. Camtasia Studio Camtasia Studio, available for both PC and Mac, is an advanced video recorder and editor. It allows you to smoothly record whatever part of the screen you need to show, down to the pixel. One very useful feature is SmartFocus, which allows you to zoom in and out, as well as pan. Zooming in is especially important for videos, since more than 80% of people consume their Facebook news feeds on their mobile devices. Remember, ensure your text is large and clear enough for people who are watching on the go. ScreenFlow ScreenFlow is easy-to-use screen recording and editing software for Mac and my personal favorite. ScreenFlow allows you to record your entire screen while also capturing your video camera, iOS device, microphone and computer audio. . Add text to overlay and a watermark to brand your videos. Use pan and zoom, add transitions and import other media to make your videos look as professional as possible. Snagit While Snagit has video recording and screen-capture ability, it doesn't have the extensive editing features of other software. If you're looking for an easy, lower-cost solution, this is an excellent option. Snagit has customizable arrows, blur, colorful speech bubbles and other mark-up options, as well as video trimming, special effects and more. If your screencast software doesn't already have mirroring for your mobile device or you simply want an easy way to send images and video between devices, you can add that functionality with one of the following two applications. Fuse TechSmith Fuse works with Camtasia Studio and Snagit. Capture the images and videos on your mobile device and send them to your desktop to use in your videos. Reflector Reflector by Squirrels allows you to do wireless mirroring, so you can display your smartphone screen (Android or iOS) on your desktop. Connect your mobile device wirelessly to your desktop, hit Record on your screencast software and create your vi...

Get Your Website Ready for Google’s New SEO Update

by BMM @ BlueMatrix Media

For quite some time, Google has been the established “Big Brother” of the Internet. Changes in Google search algorithms can have a serious impact on how easily your website can (or cannot) be found. That’s why their recent update has so many website owners in a tizzy — because as of April 21, Google’s newest […]

The post Get Your Website Ready for Google’s New SEO Update appeared first on BlueMatrix Media.

Google My Business & Maps Optimization

by Brad Broekema @ Google My Business & Maps Optimization – Minneapolis SEO by Growth Marketing LLC | Digital Marketing Services

If you own a business with a physical location, it is vital that people searching in your area can find you. It’s not just about SEO anymore you must be listed in Google My Business (formerly Google Maps/Local), Yelp, and other local directories. Considering a large chunk of the searches on Google are being done […]

This post appeared first on Minneapolis SEO by Growth Marketing LLC | Digital Marketing Services. Connect with us on Facebook, Google+ or Yelp.

How to Use Promoted Pins on Pinterest

How to Use Promoted Pins on Pinterest

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to get your pins in front of customers? Have you considered using promoted pins? Pinterest promoted pins can help you drive referral traffic and increase sales. In this article you'll discover how to create promoted pins on Pinterest. Listen to this article: Why Promoted Pins? Pinterest's promoted pins, which are now available to all businesses, are designed to increase visibility to a targeted audience. They help you get your products or location in front of people who are far along in the buying process and ready to make a purchase. Promoted pins are searchable, so you can add keywords to connect with users who are searching for content like yours. With promoted pins, you're paying to have your pins placed where users are most likely to notice and interact with them. The promoted pins that users see are based on their interests and activity on the site. Users can't turn off promoted pins, but they can hide specific promoted pins that they don't like. Here's how to get started with promoted pins for your business. #1: Understand Campaign Objectives Just like with other types of social media ads, you can run promoted pin campaigns based on specific goals and objectives. There are three objectives you can choose from: Engagement: Get engagement on your pins, such as repins, clicks, and close-up views of your pins. You pay per action taken. Traffic: Send traffic to your website when users click through your pins. In this case, you pay per click to your site. Awareness: Use promoted pins to introduce and expose your brand to a relevant audience. Awareness pins are currently available only to Fortune 500 companies who have a minimum monthly ad spend, but that may change in the future. Promoted pins, like other social media ads, work on a bid system, so keep this in mind when setting your budget. #2: Create a Promoted Pin To create and use Pinterest's promoted pins, you need to have a business account. If you don't already have one, you can either create a new account or convert your current Pinterest profile to a business account. Once your account is set up and ready to go, hover over Ads at the top left of the Pinterest home page and select Overview. You see an ads dashboard similar to Facebook's Ads Manager, where you can review and create new Pinterest ad campaigns. This article walks you through how to create an engagement promoted pin, but traffic promoted pins work exactly the same way. From the Ads Manager, click on the Promote button next to Engagement Campaigns. Next, select Boost Engagement With Your Pins. If you want a traffic campaign, you'd choose Get Traffic to Your Website. On the next page, name your campaign, select a start and end date (the end date is optional), and choose a daily budget. I recommend setting an end date, since you can only have daily budgets instead of lifetime budgets. If you don't set an end date, make sure you keep an eye on the campaign so you don't spend more than you intended. After you click Pick a Pin, you'll see a list of your pins. Select the pin you want to use for your campaign. If you want, you can search for a pin using the search box, or view the pin that's been most clicked or the most repinned in the past 30 days. After you select your pin, enter a name for your promoted pin and set a destination URL. Make sure that the URL goes to the specific page where you want users to land, not a generic homepage. In the next section, select relevant topics that will help you reach your target audience in their home feeds. You want your pin to be placed in the right Pinterest categories so users come across it while browsing. Make sure to choose only relevant interests for your pin, not random interests your audience might have (as you might do on Facebook). This step is about pin placement, so it needs to be accurate. Next,

5 Key Roles Social Media Plays in SEO

by Propel Marketing & Design, Inc. @ Propel Marketing & Design, Inc.

The post 5 Key Roles Social Media Plays in SEO appeared first on Propel Marketing & Design, Inc..

Am I on the Right Digital Advertising Platform?

by Chris Scala @ Driven Local

With so many digital advertising options in 2017, it is easy to choose the wrong platform, or not choose one at all. From Google to Facebook to Snapchat, you may be asking yourself — “Do I really need to be on every online advertising platform?” The answer will surprise you. Your customers spend their free […]

The post Am I on the Right Digital Advertising Platform? appeared first on Driven Local.

Local Map Optimization: How to Rank Your Business Higher in Google

by Ray Kirsch @ Dynamics Online

Guide to Improve Google Maps Rankings What Is Local Search Engine Optimization? Local SEO focuses on improving search result rankings within specific geographic locations. If I do a Google search for “Ice cream in Cleveland,” Google serves me specific results based on my geographic location. The prime local search ranking […]

6 Browser Extensions for Busy Social Media Marketers

6 Browser Extensions for Busy Social Media Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you need to increase your productivity? Looking for browser extensions that simplify your marketing? In this article, you'll discover six browser extensions to help busy marketers. #1: Group Multiple Tabs Into a Single Tab With OneTab Some of the best tools are the simplest ones, and you can't get much simpler than OneTab. When you click the toolbar icon, the tool will pull all of your browser tabs into a simple list under a single tab. You can then organize, sort, and save that tab for later. Listen to this article: This free tool can be especially helpful when you're doing article research online. It's easy to get lost when you're reading article after article and following link after link. With OneTab, just click the toolbar icon when you're done and you can comb back through your tabs days or weeks later. The tool also gives you the option to save your newly formed list as a web page that others can view. #2: Save Web Pages With Evernote Web Clipper The Evernote Web Clipper is a fantastic free tool from the Evernote team. It lets you clip a web page and save it as an article, simplified article, full page, bookmark, or screenshot. After you clip it, you can add tags or comments and drop it into a folder in your Evernote account. You can then share that article with whomever you like right from the Web Clipper dialog box. #3: Edit Your Content With Grammarly Grammarly is a free, simple, powerful editing app that hides on your browser toolbar and edits your work as you write. As with many of these apps, there are both free and paid versions available. The free version offers a more advanced spelling, punctuation, and grammar check than Microsoft Word. You can paste your copy into the editor on the Grammarly website, upload a document, or just let the extension edit as you create social media posts in whatever program you're using. The app runs in the background, and if your copy is clean, you'll see a green icon. If your copy needs work, you'll see a red icon along with suggestions. If you opt for the paid version, you get more robust features like style and sentence structure suggestions, vocabulary enhancement tips, and a plagiarism detector. You also have the option to submit your work to one of their professional proofreaders. #4: Schedule Social Posts With Hootlet Hootsuite is a powerful social media management tool, and their Hootlet extension offers an easy way to create and schedule social media posts from within your browser. Cruise to a website article that you want to share and click the Hootlet icon to make the magic happen. You can then choose which social media account you want to post it to, edit the post, and post it now or schedule it for later. #5: Research Hashtags With RiteTag RiteTag is a great tool for researching relevant and trending hashtags. To access the free version, you need to use RiteTag's website. Just enter your keyword or topic in the search box. You can get access to the browser extension at the paid level (starting at $11 per month). This allows you to enhance your social media posts with hashtags related to the topic you're writing about. RiteTag's extension lets you upload images to your post, add emojis, edit calls to action in your links, and see your saved tag sets. You can even search for free images or GIFs to add to your posts. #6: Track Email Opens With RocketBolt RocketBolt works a little differently from other extensions. The extension itself doesn't do anything when you click it; but you need to have it installed to unlock its functionality. When used in conjunction with Gmail, RocketBolt lets you track individual email open and click-through rates. Marketers are used to this in programs like MailChimp and Emma, but those programs don't give you that information on the individual level. Why does this matter? Because you can see if a specific person is reading your email.

How to Repurpose Your Facebook Live Videos

How to Repurpose Your Facebook Live Videos

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Facebook Live? Do you want more mileage out of your broadcasts? Reusing your Facebook Live video can help improve your impact and visibility. In this article, you'll discover how to download and repurpose your Facebook Live videos on other social media platforms. Listen to this article: #1: Download From Your Facebook Profile Facebook Live lets you broadcast a live-stream video from your phone. If you've live-streamed a great video you'd like to keep, follow these steps to download the video file from your Facebook: First, log into Facebook.com and go to your profile. Next, locate the Videos tab below your profile's cover photo (along the bottom of the image or in the More drop-down). Now, click on Videos to see a list of videos you've posted to your profile. Next, click on the thumbnail of the Facebook Live video. After the video opens, click on Options (along the bottom of the video) to reveal the menu to download it. Once you click the Download option, your stand-alone video will open. Right-click on the video and select Save Video As to save the video as an MP4 file to your computer. #2: Download From Your Facebook Page If your Facebook page is lively, the steps below are your best route to download your Facebook Live video from your page. Note: You must be an authorized manager on the page to access the options below. Let's get started! Once you complete a Facebook Live video from your page, you have a few optimization options to increase the reach and purpose of your post. (The options below are presently only available for Facebook Live videos streamed from a Facebook page.) First, log into the Facebook page you used for your Facebook Live post. Next, click on the Publishing Tools tab along the top. In the left-hand column of tabs, click on Videos to see a list of your page's posted videos. Find and click on the Facebook Live video you wish to download. Look for the Video Details pop-up window. Along the bottom, you'll see any posts related to your video. Click on the post link to uncover additional optimization and download options for your video. In the bottom-right corner of the Post Details pop-up window, find and click on the Edit Post button. To optimize your Facebook Live video from the Basic tab, add titles, tags, and custom thumbnail images. From the Advanced Tab, you can also choose to allow or prevent your video from being embedded in an external website. In addition, you can upload a Closed Captioning file to your video for access by the hearing-impaired. Next, look for the gear icon above the top-right corner of your video's image. Click the gear icon and select which version you want to download. If you just went live from your page in the last day or two, there's a slightly faster way to find the download option. This brief video will show you how to quickly download your most recent live video. #3: Repurpose Your Facebook Live Videos The show doesn't stop once you click Finish and Post in your Facebook Live broadcast. While your video post can reach far and wide on Facebook, you can push that reach even further after the video has wrapped up. Upload Your Live Video to YouTube or Vimeo Once you've downloaded your Facebook Live video, you can upload your video to other video hosting sites or channels to reach a wider audience. If you upload it to YouTube, you can even use YouTube's simple video editing tools to trim your video down to the moment(s) you want to keep and share. Don't forget to use YouTube's features to add a branded watermark, action cards, a description, and tags. Share Your Live Video With Newsletter Subscribers If your email newsletter could use a shot in the arm, add your Facebook Live video into your next issue. Personify Leadership shot partner interviews at an international conference and later used the Facebook Live videos to inform newsletter subscribers.

Implementing Digital Marketing for Your Business

by SearchEngineOptimization @ Simply Design

As computers and smartphones become more and more accessible, their presence in our lives continues to change many aspects of society, including marketing. Promoters and advertisers used to solely rely on the use of television ads, promos in newspapers, and other strategies of spreading the word about their products and services. However, it’s plain to […]

The post Implementing Digital Marketing for Your Business appeared first on Simply Design.

4 Ways to Promote Your Event With Social Media

4 Ways to Promote Your Event With Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you have an upcoming event? Want to get the word out about dates and ticket sales? Promoting your event with social media lets you create awareness, visibility and community. In this article you'll discover four ways to promote your event on social media. Listen to this article: #1: Use Double-Side Referral Programs to Offer Discounts Companies like Uber, Dropbox and Airbnb use double-sided referral programs that connect to social media, turning their customers into promoters. You can harness the power of similar social referral programs to sell tickets for your event. To put this strategy to work, provide ticket buyers with a trackable link to share with their social media followers and email contacts. Event attendees know who is most likely to buy a ticket within their network of contacts, and can target those people organically through social media or via a direct channel like email or text. If someone they shared the link with ends up buying a ticket, both parties will receive a small discount. Double-sided referral programs are one of the best ways to incentivize attendees to promote your event, and in doing so, attendees will be expanding your event's social media reach as well. There are a few platforms that can make it easy to implement a double-sided referral program. For example, Genius Referrals is a great tool for constructing such a program. Bizzabo also offers a social media referral system tool called Ticket Boost that is specifically designed to help event organizers sell more tickets via a double-sided referral system. #2: Create Community on LinkedIn Create an industry-specific community for your event on LinkedIn. Not only does a community provide valuable insights for you, but it can also be a value-added resource for event attendees. LinkedIn is a great platform for creating powerful networking groups, since attendees likely already use the social network to expand business connections and learn work-related best practices. LinkedIn groups can also help you sell tickets. Consider making the group public and invite past event attendees along with qualified prospects to join your new group. By doing this, you can turn past event attendees into a marketing asset. They can discuss their experiences at previous events and help convert potential ticket buyers. To further promote an event-specific group, be sure to post an announcement to existing LinkedIn groups that are comprised of members who might benefit from joining. Consider inviting event attendees to the next year's LinkedIn group right after your event ends. Attendees who have your event fresh in their minds are more likely to join next year's community than if you were to wait a year to promote it. #3: Maintain a Industry-Specific Blog Good content has the power to keep past attendees engaged with your event, and at the same time, attract new attendees who discover your content via search engines or social media channels. Create an event blog with tips and tricks about topics in your industry. Providing valuable content will help increase your social media reach and bring qualified visitors to the event website. Sales Hacker hosts a series of conferences for salespeople. While operating these events throughout the year, the company also maintains an excellent blog with resources to benefit past or current attendees and attract new attendees. Sales Hacker's consistently helpful blog content motivates loyal readers to sign up for email updates. That makes it easier for the company to promote upcoming events, since they likely have a large number of engaged email subscribers to reach out to. As an added benefit, creating original content for a blog provides you with excellent resources to share on the social media platforms you're using to promote your event. By providing helpful resources, you'll build a base of loyal followers who will be receptive to learning more about ...

How to Ensure Your Social Media Content Meets FTC, FDA and Google Requirements

How to Ensure Your Social Media Content Meets FTC, FDA and Google Requirements

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you involved with influencer marketing campaigns? Do you know how to meet disclosure and compliance requirements? By following a few simple guidelines, you can maintain transparency while producing brand-sponsored content that engages consumers. In this article you'll discover how to make sure your content meets Federal Trade Commission (FTC), Food and Drug Administration (FDA) and Google requirements. What Compliance Means for You In September 2014 the FTC sent warning letters to more than 60 companies as part of what it called Operation Full Disclosure. While the warnings focused on print and broadcast advertisements, the move signaled that the commission may start regulating more companies on all media that it finds to be out of compliance with accepted standards and practices. Listen to this article: Take note of this positioning, especially when it comes to your digital advertising on social channels. The FTC issued updated guidance on .com Disclosures in March 2013, and gave its clearest direction yet in June 2015 for endorsement disclosures in its What People Are Asking FAQ page. Many see this as a necessary step of enforcement by the commission. While the FTC monitors compliance with truth-in-advertising laws, your company must also work to stay abreast of regulations from other agencies and organizations (such as the FDA and Google) when producing compensated content. Compliance with these regulations ultimately falls on the sponsor rather than the content producer. Consequently, if you're working with bloggers or YouTube video bloggers, you must have audit mechanisms in place to ensure those producing content on your behalf maintain compliance. Compliance, however, is not as difficult as it might seem. The following simple tips will help you keep your content compliant without making it stiff or unappealing to the consumer. #1: FTC: Disclose Clearly and Conspicuously The FTC really has only one guideline when it comes to disclosure: Disclose early, clearly and conspicuously. When you publish blog posts, you should include a simple, clear and easy-to-find disclosure near the top of the post right below the title, as seen in this Almost Supermom post. If you record or broadcast video content, it should at minimum have a clear and conspicuous disclosure right at the beginning. While not mandated, the FTC says disclosures that appear regularly throughout the video would be even better. While the FTC also does not mandate specific wording of disclosures, it still requires disclosures, even in the shortest form of media. On Twitter, for example, include #ad in a tweet or "Ad:" at the beginning of your tweet. It's the safest way to comply when using short-form content. While some companies worry that these disclosures will impact their content's authenticity, disclosure statements actually have the opposite effect. Used appropriately, disclosures note the influence that compensation may have on the person producing the content. However, savvy readers recognize that compensated content is an effective way for creators to fund the creation of content. And ethical bloggers will only accept compensation for content their readers want to consume in the first place. #2: Google: Use NoFollow Tags for Links in Sponsored Posts Google, the arbiter of all things search, has worked for years to keep compensated content from unduly affecting search rankings. To that end, you should ensure all of the links in a compensated blog post contain NoFollow tags. This designation tells Google's algorithm to ignore those links when calculating page rank for the links' target pages. You can insert this link manually by adding rel="nofollow" in the HTML code. The result looks like this: Many online publishing systems make this easier with plugins that manage the tagging process automatically. A search for "NoFollow" in the WordPress plugin library yielded 298 results.

How to Curate Your Social Content With Reddit

How to Curate Your Social Content With Reddit

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you looking for new content to share to your fans and followers? Have you considered Reddit as a source for valuable content? Using Reddit will reveal unique and interesting content that helps you stand out from the crowd. In this post you'll discover how to use Reddit for content curation and inspiration. Listen to this article: #1: Find Subreddits in Your Niche Many marketers already know Reddit is useful for discovering content, but browsing its individual communities, called subreddits, can be time-consuming. Fortunately, you can make that task easier if you create a multireddit, which is a custom dashboard of content around a particular topic. First, you need to find subreddits you want to include in your multireddit, and compile a master list of subreddit names, organized by topic. Discover Relevant Subreddits There are thousands of active subreddits, so it's important to find those that share the best content in your niche. Here are some easy ways to search for relevant subreddits: The subreddit search box lets you search for all subreddits related to a keyword (for example, fitness). Use the Reddit site search to find site-wide mentions of your keyword, plus a list of subreddits where the term appears most frequently. You can use advanced search operators to focus your search. You can also combine advanced operators. For example, I did a search for posts with "paleo" in the title on the r/xxfitness subreddit. I then sorted the results by New to see the most recent posts. To perform granular searches, use the Boolean operators AND, OR and NOT (or the minus symbol). You can also group keywords with parentheses. Along with search features on Reddit, you can use metareddit to find subreddits. This third-party directory allows you to filter results by number of subscribers and last post, as in the example here. The results are displayed in a word cloud, where the size of the words correlates to the number of subscribers. Make a List of Subreddits To keep track of the subreddits you find, create a spreadsheet of subreddit names organized by topic. As you find subreddits you want to add to your multireddit, note the subreddit's name after the r/ in its URL (for example, http://www.reddit.com/r/HealthyFood). Here's a list you might create for health and fitness subreddits. #2: Create a Multireddit Once you've found a group of relevant subreddits, organize them as a multireddit. You can include all of the subreddits you found in one big multireddit or create a handful of more specific multireddits. After you log into the site, go to the Reddit front page, and click on the dotted line on the left side. Click the Create button, and type in a name for your multireddit. (Note that you can't use spaces or symbols in the multireddit name.) When you're finished, click Create again. Now that you've created your multireddit, you can begin adding subreddits to it in the upper-right corner of the screen. Type a subreddit name into the Add Subreddit box and click the plus sign (or press Enter) to add it to your multireddit. You can also add a description for the multireddit and choose whether it's public (other redditors can find it) or private (only you can view it). Open the sidebar from the front page to access any multireddits you've created. You can filter the content in your multireddit using the tabs at the top of the page: Hot: Posts that receive the highest engagement (upvotes/comments) New: The most recent posts Rising: Posts that are gaining popularity Controversial: Posts that receive an equal mix of upvotes and downvotes Top: The most popular posts of all time Gilded: Posts that received reddit gold Promoted: Sponsored content You can also search for keywords within your multireddit. For example, if you're looking for healthy recipes to share on your social channels,

Monetize Your Platform: How to Grow Sales With Your Online Platform

Monetize Your Platform: How to Grow Sales With Your Online Platform

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you built your own platform? Are you wondering how to monetize it? To learn how you can use your platform to generate real revenue for your business, I interview David Siteman Garland for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview David Siteman Garland, who is the host of The Rise To The Top podcast. His video and audio podcasts are focused on equipping bloggers, podcasters and YouTubers to grow a sustainable business with their platforms. He also wrote the book Smarter, Faster, Cheaper: Non-Boring, Fluff-Free Strategies for Marketing and Promoting Your Business. David shares how he grew his platform and the various ways he has monetized it. You'll learn how to get started generating revenue and the price points you need to look at. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Platform Monetization Why people struggle to make money with their platform David says it's a classic problem for most people. The platform space falls into two different categories. The first one is when it's a hobby. Here people have great content but don't know what to do with it. The second one is where you have the classic "Internet marketers" who have figured out how to make money but their content isn't great. David's advice to those who have great content but struggle to make money is you have to remember that you're positioned extremely well. If you have great content that's a side hobby, you can turn it into a legitimate six-figure–plus business. David started out the exact same way. What he and his friends have achieved shows that it's very attainable. You'll discover why it's a good position to be in if you're a blogger, podcaster or YouTuber. A lot of the time, people lack strategy on how to generate revenue. In David's eyes, the hard part is building your audience, community and trust. Once you have all this in place, the monetization angle can be brought in pretty easily. The hardest challenge is to start with no platform and no product. If you already have the platform, then you are 50% of the way there. Listen to the show to find out how you can use technology to accomplish what traditionally businesses had to pay a lot of money for. What is the platform you have built?  David started his platform The Rise To The Top in 2008, when it was a simple interview show for entrepreneurs. His show now focuses primarily on what he calls mediapreneurs, who are people with a platform. He currently has over 7 million community members. When David was on the journey of building his platform, he realized he was pretty good at creating content, building his audience and getting out there. The main struggle for him was how to turn it into a sustainable, long-term business. There are many ways to monetize a platform. It doesn't come down to which one will be best, it's more about which one you are really excited about and want to do. You have to feel comfortable with it. You'll discover the many ways you can monetize your platform. From a content perspective, David publishes two brand-new shows every week on his platform. One is an interview and the other is a video for his The Rise To The Top and DSG TV YouTube channel. You'll discover what both of these involve and the areas he focuses on and why. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jDv4DsRy_ys Listen to the show to find out how David discovered the options he went with. What you should do before you monetize your platform

Twitter Traffic: How to Double Your Traffic to Your Content

Twitter Traffic: How to Double Your Traffic to Your Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Twitter for business? Are you wondering how to use Twitter to increase traffic to your blog? To learn how to use Twitter to grow your business, I interview Kim Garst for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Kim Garst, CEO of Boom Social, a company and blog that specializes in social media marketing. One of Kim's areas of topical expertise is Twitter marketing. Kim shares how she uses Twitter to promote her content and offers. You'll learn about what type of content works best and how frequently you should share it. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter for Business How do you use Twitter to help your business? Kim describes many ways to leverage Twitter to help grow your business. One way is to use news updates. Kim refers to Twitter as the "info superhighway." A lot of people don't use Twitter search in the same context as they would with Google. In many cases, the news hits Twitter before it hits the major news channels. There are real people out there who share real information in real time. With Twitter, you can leverage the search function as a way to keep track of your competition. You can search for keywords and find conversations in real time. It's a great way to pay attention to trending topics. You'll hear an example of a news story where 85% of the people polled said they found out about an incident on Twitter before the traditional news got the information. One of the biggest values that Kim has found for Twitter is to drive traffic. It's the most responsive targeted traffic source that you can have at your fingertips. Listen to the show to find out how Kim uses Twitter to drive traffic to her Facebook Page. How Twitter can drive more traffic to a website Kim describes the free offers on built-in tabs on her Facebook Page and why she tests them first on Facebook. Twitter is unique in that you can share your free offer 2-3 times a day; whereas on your Facebook Page it would be considered overkill. A tweet has a lifespan of about 30 seconds, so you can share your free offers multiple times a day and it's seen as acceptable. Different viewers see them as they come through their news feeds. Kim explains the strategy behind sharing the same link multiple times a day and why you shouldn't use the same tweet throughout the day. You'll want to switch them up and test different wording to see what people respond to the most. Kim uses HootSuite to schedule her tweets. You'll find out why it's the number-one opt-in source for leveraging her Twitter traffic to her Facebook Page. Kim shares how she monitors and keeps track of each tweet's performance and why you should only run 2 or 3 at a time, otherwise it's overwhelming. You'll hear what type of content Kim shares from her own articles and how frequently she schedules them. Twitter is Kim's number-one traffic source. She has leveraged the same concept for her clients and increased their traffic by 100-400%. Kim highly recommends that you share content that is still relevant and holds value. You'll hear an example of how to use a hashtag when promoting a blog article and why hashtag content has more relevance. Listen to the show to find out what is one of Kim's top converters. Common mistakes businesses make on Twitter Kim says the mistake people make with their Twitter account is to remain inactive. You need to be consistent regardless of which platform you use,

3.3 Ways To Get Blog Ideas

by Will Paccione @ Dot Xero

Are you getting enough traffic to your website? There’s a good chance that your 7 page website (with no blog) just isn’t cutting it. In order to gain traffic and come up in searches, you need to add industry relevant content on a continual basis (not only to your website, but to the Internet in […]

The post 3.3 Ways To Get Blog Ideas appeared first on Dot Xero.

How to Choose the Best Comment System for Your Blog

How to Choose the Best Comment System for Your Blog

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Does your business have a blog? Do you allow comments? One of a blogger's toughest tasks is managing the discussions around posts, and determining which comments are valuable and which are spam. In this article I'll explore top blog commenting systems and the features that make them a great choice for your blog. Comment Moderation and Spam Whenever you post content, it is almost guaranteed you will receive some spam in your blog comments. People will submit comments that are completely irrelevant to the discussion to get exposure for themselves or drop a link to their website. Listen to this article: Remember, there is no comment system, plugin or tactic that will fully eliminate spam. Even if you require registration, people who want to leave spam will simply register and then leave spam comments. Requiring registration or using advanced commenting systems will reduce the amount of spam you receive. However, it may also lower the overall number of comments you receive. This is something to consider when you choose a blog comment system and configure your settings. #1: Base Comment Systems Offer Ease of Use Most blogging platforms such as WordPress, Blogger and Tumblr have a built-in commenting component. With Drupal, the default comment module must be enabled. Depending on your platform, the base comment system will allow you to configure options, such as whether people need to register for your website to comment or they can freely comment with their name, email and website address. The main reason to use the base comment system is that it doesn't involve any additions to your website. It is usually ready to go when you set up your website. The second reason is speed. A past study by Pingdom revealed that the base comment system on WordPress is faster than the top third-party comment systems. The downside of the base comment system on any blogging platform is that it will only have basic features. Advanced moderation functionality and spam-handling involves adding plugins to your website. For WordPress self-hosted websites, you can install plugins like Akismet, which uses algorithms to detect and automatically filter out spam. WordPress and Drupal users can also try Mollom, which works similarly to Akismet to help combat spam. Akismet is the more popular of the two, as it comes installed on most WordPress blogs. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-Fw0a3qHrf4 Most people will be familiar with the base commenting system from any of the top platforms. The only missing element for some comment authors on these systems are their photos, as only other bloggers will have images linked to their emails or accounts. #2: Facebook Comments Allow Direct Facebook Shares The second most-used commenting system is Facebook Comments, which is mostly due to the fact that Facebook is the most popular social media network. With 968 million daily active users, you can be assured that people who visit your blog will not only have a Facebook account, but will also be logged into it. Blog visitors can either choose to comment with a personal profile or use the drop-down menu by the Post button to use a Facebook business page instead. They will get notifications when their comment receives likes or replies through Facebook. This system will help you, as a blog owner and content creator, get to know the people who read and comment on your posts. Depending on the comment author's privacy settings, you will see the commenter's location, job title, school and other relevant information. Plus, there's a built-in social sharing option. Commenters can check a box to also post on Facebook, which allows them to quickly share your post to their Facebook audience while commenting. Facebook Comments are great for blogs where people won't mind being publicly linked to their comments. On the other hand, people may be less likely to comment with their photo and profile link on blogs that cover mo...

Search Engine Optimization for Photographers - SEO Basics

Search Engine Optimization for Photographers - SEO Basics


Photography Spark

SEO is the stuff you do to rank high in Google. Yeah, you can do cool stuff to influence rank. Photographers keep these as trade secrets. I spill the beans.

How Long Does It Take To Index A New Website On Google

by Matthew Connolly @ Search Engine Optimization – Driven Local

On average, it can take anywhere from two days to three months to rank a new website on Google. There are however certain measures that can be taken during the website launch process to expedite this process. Check Your Code – When launching a new website, always make sure to double check that there are no […]

The post How Long Does It Take To Index A New Website On Google appeared first on Driven Local.

5 Creative Ways to Use Snapchat Geofilters for Business

5 Creative Ways to Use Snapchat Geofilters for Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Looking for new ways to increase your Snapchat visibility? Have you thought about using Snapchat geofilters? When applied creatively, Snapchat geofilters can help you increase brand awareness, engage your community, and reach new audiences. In this article, you'll discover five unique ways to use Snapchat geofilters for business. Listen to this article: Why Geofilters? Snapchat's rise has been meteoric. Over 100 million users watch 10 billion video clips daily. The platform has transformed video storytelling, and its native tools have incredible social media marketing value. Now, you can create your own specific geofilters and use them to advertise to your audience. Snapchat geofilters are the perfect way to harness your audience's attention, because they're already digesting your content. Geofilters make it easier for your audience to engage and promote your product or brand organically. Here are some ways to use Snapchat geofilters for your business. #1: Announce New Product Launches When launching a new product, you want to encourage your community to find out more about it and ultimately make a purchase. By using a Snapchat geofilter, you're showing your audience that your products are important and worthy of branded filters. You're also adding a marketing element that connects the audience emotionally to the brand. Everlane's Elevate Summer used branded geofilters for its summer collection. The company also partnered with magazine editors for Snapchat takeovers. On the Everlane Snapchat account, the editors gave their opinions on collection favorites. With this approach, you can showcase the importance of a new product line and give real-time insights to your community on what products to check out. When you want to catch the eye of your audience for new products, create a Snapchat geofilter. #2: Share Company Culture To promote company culture and your business offerings, you can create a Snapchat geofilter for your office. Employees could become your biggest digital advocates as they use the geofilter to share with their communities. You can encourage employees to share behind-the-scenes events at your company or interview colleagues about their favorite parts of their job. This one-to-many sharing can impact your company in a positive way and your reach will be exponential. Sharing your company's strengths to a larger audience will encourage top talent to want to join the team. For Partner Day, HubSpot created a special geofilter using their signature orange hue. Employees and partners used the geofilter to highlight the best moments of the day. To encourage sharing, design a geofilter as a digital name tag that will allow users to insert text about who they are and what they do. Empower your employees to engage on Snapchat with a branded geofilter. It will help boost company morale and audience reach. #3: Promote Charity Events Using geofilters for live events creates an inclusive element that bonds the community. For charity events, they can help build awareness for a cause. Creating Snapchat geofilters for events will add an element of surprise and delight for your guests and will allow people to share the event in real time. They can also increase visibility and messaging in a fun and effective way. Imprint.City, a non-profit focusing on cultivating community through art, hosted a masquerade charity event to raise awareness. Because the attendees were already going to use social media at the event, organizers created a Snapchat filter to make the event more digitally accessible. Many community influencers used the filter, which helped spread the word about the organization and its cause. You can also use the snaps taken by your guests for future marketing materials. Promote them on other social networks or in pamphlets for fundraising efforts. #4: Support Your Presence at Trade Shows Getting prospects to your booth at trade shows can be a str...

9 Ways to Calculate ROI on Local SEO

by skyler malley @ Firestarter Search Engine Optimization

9 Ways to Calculate ROI on Local SEO Local SEO is how Denver area businesses can reach their prospective customers.…

The post 9 Ways to Calculate ROI on Local SEO appeared first on Firestarter Search Engine Optimization.

4 Ways to Use Dark Facebook Posts for Business

4 Ways to Use Dark Facebook Posts for Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to target a segment of your Facebook audience? Have you considered dark Facebook posts? Dark (unpublished) posts are a great way to tailor different messages to various audiences without posting multiple messages to your page timeline. In this article you'll discover four ways to use dark Facebook posts for your business. Why Dark Posts Before getting into how to use dark Facebook posts, it's important to understand what dark posts really are, and just as importantly, what they are not. Dark posts (also known as unpublished posts) are not the same thing as targeted posts, but they do have much in common. They both allow you to promote posts to specific fans of your page. However, there are two main differences. Listen to this article: First, targeted posts allow you to target an audience based only on parameters such as gender, relationship status, educational status and so on. With targeted posts, you can base your targeting on a variety of parameters. Dark posts, on the other hand, allow you to use keywords (for example, specific job titles) for targeting. The second, and biggest, differentiator is that while both types of posts will show up in the targeted fans' news feeds, dark posts publish without showing up on your page's wall itself. How to Create Dark Posts in Power Editor 1. Log in to Power Editor, and choose Manage Pages from the drop-down menu in the top-left corner. 2. In the left column, select the page for which you're creating the post. 3. In the main area of Power Editor, click the Create Post button. Next, you'll see the Create Unpublished Page Post dialog box. 4. In the top right of the dialog box, choose the post type (Link, Photo, Video, Status or Offer), and then fill in the details for your post. Make sure to select This Post Will Only Be Used as an Ad (in the lower-left corner) so the post won't appear on your Facebook page. 5. Next, choose interest categories and/or add keywords for specific interests. Then click Create Post. The post is saved to your list of posts, and a half-moon symbol appears to the left of the saved post, indicating it hasn't been published yet. 6. When you're ready to publish your post, select it from the list and click Create Post. The key point to remember with dark posts is that you can target specific fans, but you aren't crowding your wall with multiple posts. Hence, these posts are "dark." Now that you understand what dark posts are and how to create them, here are some tips for making the most of them. #1: Reach Fan Segments by Targeting Interests There are distinct interest groups that your community members will fall into and with which they will identify. If you target these groups using text that highlights their interests, your community members will feel like you're speaking directly to them. Suppose that you manage a pizza parlor and you plan to introduce a brand-new pizza next month. Different aspects of that new pizza (for example, the price, the gluten-free crust, Thai seasonings, etc.) will appeal to different segments of your audience. In this case you might create several variations of a post to target different attributes. Because you don't want a bunch of similar posts showing up on your wall, your best option is to use dark posts to target segments of fans. Once the posts are out there, you're able to gather data on engagement rates. Use the data to decide which particular post is worth sharing. You can then promote it on your wall for all of your fans to see. #2: Run Micro-Campaigns A solid social strategy requires big-picture thinking and thoughtful adherence to the core values you want associated with your brand. But this strategy can sometimes be too restrictive if you want to promote specific products to targeted segments. Suppose that you own an online shoe store. You have four new product lines to launch that appeal to four different segments: women...

What is Google Search Console?

by admin @ SEO Company India, SEO Services, Digital Marketing Company SEO India – WebMatriks Technology

Google Search Console – What is it? Google Search Console is a free Google service, which lets people gauge their […]

The post What is Google Search Console? appeared first on SEO Company India, SEO Services, Digital Marketing Company SEO India - WebMatriks Technology.

Relationship Marketing: How to Build Meaningful Connections that Lead to Business

Relationship Marketing: How to Build Meaningful Connections that Lead to Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to develop relationships that will lead to business? Are you wondering how you can use social media to build valuable connections? To learn about the importance of relationships in business, I interview Ted Rubin for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Ted Rubin, co-author of Return on Relationship. He's also the former chief social marketing officer for Collective Bias and OpenSky. Prior to that, Ted was the CMO for e.l.f. Cosmetics. Ted shares the best ways to start to grow your online connections via social media. You'll learn what you need to include in your profile and why return on relationship is the most important thing for a business or brand. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Relationship Marketing Recently I attended New Media Expo (NMX) in Las Vegas, where I was not only embraced by fellow podcasters, I was overwhelmed by the number of people who came up to me to thank me for this show. I'd like to take this opportunity to thank each and every one of you. Since I had a mission for this conference, I didn't announce that I would be attending. My hope is that you will be inspired by the story of why I did this, and that you will try it for yourself. How to build relationships in person, that often start online In my second book, Launch, I talk about the power of other people. I coined the phrase "Elevation Principle," which consists of great content plus other people minus marketing messages equals growth. For podcasters, the "other people" include listeners—a segment of whom I call "power users," or people with extreme influence. Without them, it's really hard to grow your business. I went to NMX with two purposes. I wanted to build relationships with the podcasting community and the parenting community, since I'm a newbie in both of these spaces. You'll discover why I only attended a few sessions, and made it a priority to hang around at the end of each session. One of the best places to meet the speakers is out in the halls, or where the speakers gather to network with each other. They don't seem to attend any sessions other than their own. It's an opportunity to have amazing conversations with influential people. You'll hear the types of questions I asked to get people engaged, which can develop into real relationships. This is one of the secrets to the success of my business, and it can be for you too. My take-home lesson is to get involved in real life through face-to-face encounters. One of the best places to do this is at a conference. Our upcoming conference, Social Media Marketing World, is a great place to start. Are relationships still important AND achievable with social media? Ted Rubin likes to say that "relationships are the new currency." With all of the different social media channels available, you can reach the world 24/7, without ever leaving your home. It used to be that you had to wait until you were at a company meeting or an event to meet people. The problem today is that when people click your name or check a box to follow you, they immediately think they have a real relationship with you or your brand. A lot of brands believe that they need to get as many likes and followers as possible so they can broadcast to them. It's not about broadcasting, though—it's about building relationships. Listen to the show to find out why building a relationship online is no different to a regular relationship offline.

Creating Advanced Facebook Custom Audiences Using Google Tag Manager

Creating Advanced Facebook Custom Audiences Using Google Tag Manager

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you looking for advanced ways to build Facebook audiences for retargeting? Do you know you can combine Google Tag Manager with Facebook Pixel Events? To explore the value of using these tools together, I interview Chris Mercer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Chris Mercer, an analytics expert who specializes in helping marketers measure and optimize their marketing. His course is called Master the Fundamentals of Google Tag Manager. You can find him at MeasurementMarketing.io. Chris explores how to use Google Tag Manager to take your Facebook retargeting to the next level. You'll discover how to create and use Facebook Pixel Events in your Facebook marketing. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Pixel Events and Google Tag Manager Chris's Story Chris, who has a background in sales and marketing, left corporate America to investigate online business. Five or six years ago, he started a site called WP Training Videos. The site was designed to help people understand and learn WordPress, but after customers requested help with building websites, the company's business model changed. To learn about analytics, Chris installed Google Analytics and set up tracking on opt-in and lead generation forms. When he showed his analytics to a client, the client stopped asking about changing the website design and wanted to learn more about tracking results. Chris soon had more clients who were interested in analytics, and about four or five years ago, the business pivoted again. Chris's business became Measurement Marketing, which is dedicated to making Google Analytics more accessible to the masses. His clients were often people who installed Google Analytics but didn't know how to use it. Today, Chris works with marketers, marketing teams, and agencies. He shows them what's important to measure, helps them build measurement machines, and shares what to do with the data they collect. Listen to the show to discover one of the biggest struggles for marketers. What Is Google Tag Manager? Google Tag Manager is a tool that was designed to solve an enterprise-level problem. The problem arose about 10 years ago when this new upstart, Facebook, started putting out pixels (snippets of code to copy and paste on a site) that enabled marketers to track things online. It was revolutionary at the time. After the Facebook pixel arrived, large businesses had to figure out how to bridge the gap between marketing and IT. To add the code to web pages, marketing had to submit IT help desk tickets, because IT developers were the only people allowed to mess with the website. As a result, IT departments developed bottlenecks and couldn't focus on the right projects, and marketing teams couldn't get the pixels on the pages fast enough. By the time IT added a pixel to a page, the campaign that marketing wanted to measure had been over for eight weeks. Tag Manager was created to solve that problem. Marketing teams can use it to put out individual snippets of tracking code (for instance, a Facebook remarketing or conversion pixel) that they can use at any point without having to involve developers. Tag Manager gives marketers granular control over their measurement and tracking. I ask about the difference between Google Tag Manager and Google Analytics, and Chris explains Google Analytics does three main things. It collects its data, stores the data, and builds reports based on the data. Google Tag Manager replaces Google Analytics' ability to collect its own data. Tag Manager collects the data and sends it to Google Analytics so it can stor...

Google Analytics: How to Analyze the Behavior of Your Site Visitors

Google Analytics: How to Analyze the Behavior of Your Site Visitors

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to learn more about how people use your website? Wondering how the Behavior reports in Google Analytics can help? To explore how to navigate the Behavior section of Google Analytics, I interview Andy Crestodina. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Andy Crestodina, author of Content Chemistry and co-founder of Orbit Media. Andy specializes in content marketing and Google Analytics. Andy explains how to analyze the behavior of your website visitors. You'll discover a few Google Analytics tricks to employ immediately. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Google Analytics Why Marketers Should Care About the Behavior Category In Google Analytics, the Behavior category is one of five main categories that you find on the left-hand sidebar. Andy says the categories are organized from the top of the funnel down to the bottom. The first category is Real-Time, or people on your website at the moment. Real-Time is followed by Audience (who those people are), Acquisition (where they came from), Behavior (what they did), and Conversions (who took which successful profitable action). People dedicate a lot of time to the Behavior category because the reports show what's happening on each URL and how people flow through your website. Andy says you can see where people go, how much time they spend on pages, bounce rate, percentage of people who leave after seeing just one page, number of pages per visit, and so on. The Behavior category is the core of Google Analytics reporting. What you find through Behavior reports is often surprising, Andy continues. Although a website is designed to encourage visitors to navigate through it in certain ways, the Behavior reports show how visitors actually move through your site. Listen to the show to hear an explanation of the value of behavior analytics with a restaurant analogy. Behavior Flow Report Andy believes Behavior Flow is an interesting and sometimes confusing report because it mashes up data from other reports. The Behavior Flow report looks almost like an infographic. It shows how many people are on your website, where they move as they navigate from page to page, and the page where they leave your site. After the starting page, the next column is first interaction, the column after that is second interaction, and so on. Behavior Flow shows the most popular path through your website, which is important. Knowing the most common path helps you prioritize changes to your website. For example, if you have only 10 minutes to work on your website this week, you need to spend that time on the pages people visit most often. Even if your website has thousands of pages, a small percentage of those pages receive the most traction and traffic. Therefore, when you have a great piece of content such as a beautiful testimonial or a compelling visual, you want to put it where people are more likely to see it. If your website was a city with a highway flowing through it, you'd put your billboards on the highways, not on little backstreets. In the Behavior Flow report, the first column is the Landing Page option, which reflects where your website traffic comes from. You can change the default Landing Page option to see the website traffic from a specific source. For example, you can select social options to see how people coming from different social networks move through your site. Next, you see the Starting Pages column. Andy says this column lists only the top pages. (For analysis of a specific page,

7 Ways to Use Facebook Native Video to Better Connect With Your Fans

7 Ways to Use Facebook Native Video to Better Connect With Your Fans

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you create videos to connect with your audience? Are you using Facebook native video? When you publish videos to Facebook, the result is high visibility and a greater likelihood of engagement. In this article I'll share seven ways to connect with your audience using Facebook native video. Listen to this article: #1: Preview Long-Form Content An effective use of Facebook native video is long-form content previews. If you have a long video you plan to share, choose a highlight to use as a preview to post on Facebook. This little chunk of video gives your audience a taste of what they'll get in the complete video.   A 10- to 15-minute video is too long to capture the attention of the average Facebook user. A 1- to 2-minute preview video is the perfect length for Facebook consumption. If viewers are intrigued, they're directed to your YouTube channel to watch the full video. #2: Share Daily Tips, Tactics and Advice When building an audience, consistency is incredibly important. Your audience appreciates your perspective, experience and expertise. The more often you can deliver value to your audience, the more often you'll get value back from them.   Since engagement with a Facebook page is often cited as a relevancy factor in Facebook's EdgeRank algorithm, daily videos that inspire interaction from fans can drastically improve audience reach. Remember, however, that value is the most important factor. #3: Record Videos on Location The ability to easily upload and share videos from a smartphone to Facebook leads to an incredible opportunity. Record and share reports, news and updates from conferences and other events instantly with your Facebook audience. While Facebook native video doesn't have the streaming capabilities of Periscope and Meerkat, the ease of capture, upload and distribution from your smartphone makes Facebook video nearly real-time.   Immediately publishing conference interviews, on-location tours or other behind-the-scenes content to Facebook also gives your non-attendees an experience that's the next best thing to being there. #4: Answer Audience Questions Create a more engaging experience for your Facebook audience by answering their questions in a video and posting it directly to Facebook. Fans and customers frequently reach out to you as an industry expert. Sometimes a video is a more effective way to communicate than a blog post, especially if it's a question you get asked over and over again.   Answering the question in video takes less time than writing a blog post and allows you to explain in a clear, direct manner. Using video also provides a personal and thoughtful touch that a few sentences of text never could. #5: Create Brief Explainer Videos Short videos work well on Facebook. Think of how average Facebook users consume content on the platform. They keep scrolling until something interesting gets them to stop. Even then, viewers want something quick and easy to consume before they move on to the next thing. A 45- to 90-second explainer video is a great piece of content to attract attention and awareness to your brand without detracting from the Facebook experience. Don't expect Facebook users to take direct action from an explainer video they consume in their news feed. But that's not really the point. This is just one more branded touch point on the path to conversion that cuts down on time during the sales cycle. #6: Create Video Ads The Facebook advertising platform provides marketers the ability to generate ads with Video Views as the goal. Using Facebook’s Power Editor, marketers can build entire ad campaigns using video and optimize the advertising spend for increased video views. Video ads can include a direct call to action (CTA) such as Shop Now, Learn More and Sign Up. As a best practice, make your CTA relevant to the experience they'll get after clicking the button. For example,

Instagram Images: How to Stand Out on Instagram

Instagram Images: How to Stand Out on Instagram

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is your business on Instagram? Are you curious about what to post? To discover how to use images on Instagram, I interview Peg Fitzpatrick. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Peg Fitzpatrick, the co-author of The Art of Social Media: Power Tips for Power Users, which she wrote with Guy Kawasaki. She is also a social media strategist and an expert in visual marketing. Her clients include Motorola, Audi, Google, Virgin and others. Peg will explore Instagram marketing ideas that are easy to put to use right away. You'll discover tools to use for your Instagram images. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Instagram Images How Peg got started on Instagram Peg first discovered Instagram when looking for apps for her iPad. This was shortly after the iPad first came out. She loaded Instagram and loved it, but no one she knew was on it. Then, when Pinterest came out, Peg, like a lot of people, thought Pinterest and Instagram were the same, because they were both about images. Although she initially chose to focus on Pinterest, after she learned more about both platforms, Peg discovered how different the two were. When Peg went back to Instagram, she saw it was a great place for people to have conversations. Even if you know lots of people on Facebook, Peg believes Instagram is where you can build a community. As a blogger or entrepreneur, it's the kind of place you want to go to meet new people. Listen to the show to learn about why more people didn't get on Instagram immediately. Instagram challenges for marketers Peg believes social media is challenging for marketers because they want to look at things in a more traditional way: how to get people to do x, y and z. The newer platforms, like Snapchat and Instagram, are even more challenging. It's not easy to write a viral blog post or post a YouTube video that goes viral. Instagram is limited, Peg says, because you just get that one link in your bio and there are no links in the comments. While a blogger might not see the value in Instagram ("Why should my blog be on Instagram if there's no link for people to click every day?"), brands are getting more engagement on Instagram than any other social platform. It creates brand awareness that leads more people to your business, events and products. The biggest mistake marketers make, Peg says, is they aren't posting enough. On a recent panel, Peg heard Instagram people who have 500,000+ followers say they post multiple times per day. One of them posts 8 or 10 times per day. And they post excellent content. It takes more time to create an Instagram post. Although you can share a blog post immediately, with Instagram you have to create the image, write the text and figure out all of the things that go with it. On Facebook, people don't post enough either. On Martha Stewart's Facebook page they post every hour. Of course she probably has the biggest backlog of content of any person ever, Peg adds. Listen to the show to discover why Social Media Examiner doesn't do much on Instagram. Ideas for what to post Peg says there are basic things to post on Instagram, such as pictures of what you're doing or where you are. If you're at an event, it's fun to post pictures of people you meet or do selfies. You can post a day in the life at your blog or business, pictures of your team or behind the scenes at your company. Show pictures of wherever you happen to be to give more of a human connection with your company. For example,

Thought Leadership: How to Remain Top of Mind in Your Industry

Thought Leadership: How to Remain Top of Mind in Your Industry

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you consider yourself a thought leader? Want to know what it takes to become a guest on a major podcast or a speaker at large events? In this episode I go behind the scenes at Social Media Examiner with Phil Mershon. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Phil Mershon, director of events at Social Media Examiner. This show is the official third anniversary of the Social Media Marketing podcast. Phil and I will explore how we pick the thought leaders in our industry for our conferences and podcast. You'll discover how to become a thought leader in any industry. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Thought Leadership What thought leadership means Phil talks about the two parts that go into being a thought leader. First, there's the "thought" element. It starts with people who have excellent forward thinking, stay on the cutting edge and push boundaries, understand deeply how things work and are able to articulate it. And second, they must be a "leader," someone whom others listen to and follow. A thought leader does those things over time, consistently producing material that people will listen to month in and month out. Before I started Social Media Examiner, I was called one of the leading authorities in the white paper world. To earn that, I constantly wrote articles, started a blog, did training, wrote a book, summarized industry research and had a monthly newsletter. Establishing yourself as a thought leader is a lot of work. Even harder is maintaining it. Mari Smith is an excellent example of someone who chose to own her title of "Facebook Expert," and is having great results. Listen to the show to discover how long Phil and I have been working together and what we did before Social Media Examiner. How we decide who should be on the podcast and on our stages When deciding on our content, we ask two questions: "What should people speak about?" and "Who should speak about those subjects?" To determine what people will speak about, we look very carefully at the data, Phil explains. We study our annual Social Media Marketing Industry Report, which is based on the subjects our readers tell us they do and do not care about. It influences decisions about the kinds of speakers we need to find, which sometimes means we need to seek out experts we don't know yet. If you want to pitch yourself to a conference or podcast, it's important to first study it. Look at the organization's typical lineup to see what kinds of things people are speaking about, and determine if you're a fit. Not every thought leader is appropriate for every situation. We get inquires all the time from people who pitch us things that aren't appropriate. Listen to the show to hear how booking speakers is like programming for television. What we look for in our speakers Phil and I share the four criteria we look for in a speaker. 1. Are they a great communicator? We're not just looking for inspirational communicators, we are looking for people who can explain or teach at a very deep level how to use the different social media platforms. A lot of people think they're great communicators, but a lot of people also think they're good drivers. I share how when Sally Hogshead was keynoting at Social Media Marketing World, she said "Raise your hand if you think you are a good driver." About 95% of the hands went up in the room. Then she says, "Interestingly enough, research shows that only 55% of people are good drivers, so that means that about 40% of you are kidding your...

Storytelling: Why Stories Attract More Customers

Storytelling: Why Stories Attract More Customers

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

What's the story of your business? Are you wondering how storytelling can help your marketing and sales? To learn about the power of storytelling, I interview Dave Kerpen for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Dave Kerpen, author of  Likeable Social Media. He's also the co-founder of Likeable, an INC 500 social media marketing firm. His newest book is Likeable Business: Why Today's Consumers Demand More and How Leaders Can Deliver. Dave shares his story of how a creative idea for his wedding turned into a successful business. You'll learn how your story can help your business connect with people, both prospects and customers. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Business and Storytelling Dave's story Dave shares his story of how the creative idea he and his wife had for their wedding led them into starting a business. Both Dave and his wife have a traditional sales and marketing background and both were working in radio sales and sales management at the time. They decided to have their wedding at a baseball game. So they pitched their idea to a minor league baseball team, the Brooklyn Cyclones, an affiliate of the New York Mets. The deal was that they would take over the inventory from the game and do sponsorships in exchange for being able to get married at the end of the game and create the promotion. They created a promotion called Our Field of Dreams. Just from getting sponsors for the event, a total of $100,000 was raised in goods and services and $20,000 for charity. The advantage for the sponsors was they received a large amount of media attention. Not only did the sponsors get in front of 8,000 people at the game, they also were featured in CBS The Early Show, ABC World News Tonight and CNBC, plus thousands of blogs. One of the sponsors, 1-800-Flowers, was then featured on 86 television stations, all from a $6,000 trade sponsorship. Dave and his wife generated $20 million worth of earned media for their sponsors. It wasn't until 1-800-Flowers contacted Dave afterward and asked what he was doing next that he and his wife decided to start a company. Dave believes that telling their story showed their prospects that it's not just about understanding the tools, it's about understanding how to be creative and think outside of the box. Just because you understand the tools of social media, radio or television doesn't mean the idea isn't just as important. You still have to do marketing. By being able to tell a story, you're able to bring some real personality to what it is you do, and at the same time, convince people that you know what you are doing. Listen to the show to hear how they worked all their sponsors into the game so the wedding itself could be sponsor-free. Why should your businesses care about storytelling? Dave believes that storytelling is important because people don't care about you. It's really important to truly listen because people would rather talk about themselves. Storytelling is much more effective than going through data or any kind of sales pitch. It connects people, and gets people engaged and interested. The reason why people love going to the movies and reading books is because we love to be engaged by stories. Whether you are at a boardroom talking to your staff, or pitching to a prospect or putting content out there to the world, storytelling can bring your business alive. It can help you connect with your audience.

Importance of Google My Business for Local Search Engine Optimization

by Kevin Hill @ Motor Vehicle Network

Research shows that Google My Business for local Search Engine Optimization (SEO) is essential, enabling businesses to appear in local search results for queries specific to products/services. SEO experts* provide the following insights to optimize Google local listings and improve visibility: Update business name, address, phone number (NAP), hours, etc. Ensure phone numbers are local...

The post Importance of Google My Business for Local Search Engine Optimization appeared first on Motor Vehicle Network.

Search and Social: What Marketers Need to Know About the Changing Landscape

Search and Social: What Marketers Need to Know About the Changing Landscape

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use social media and search to promote your business? Are you wondering how the landscape of search and social is changing, and how to benefit from it? To learn about the key changes in search and social, and how they impact your marketing, I interview Lee Odden for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Lee Odden, author of the book Optimize: How to Attract and Engage More Customers by Integrating SEO, Social Media and Content Marketing. He's the CEO of TopRank Online Marketing and the editor of Marketing Blog. Plus there is a killer SlideShare tip you'll want to pay attention to. Lee shares his insights into the world of SEO and content marketing, and the elements of his strategy that have contributed to his success. You'll learn about the four categories of content that you must create for your sites, and tips for getting the most out of them. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Search and Social Graph Search and what Facebook is doing Lee believes that Facebook is always going to progress towards having a more robust search engine. Right now they are collecting a lot of data, and as Graph Search continues to roll out to more people, they will refine and optimize how it works. It's not just about providing a better user experience, there is ad play too. Lee feels that this is the driver. Lee believes that Facebook will move towards providing marketers opportunities to get in front of people and offer contextual advertising in the way that Google does. Before implementation of Graph Search, when you did a search on Facebook, the results would come from Facebook's own data set such as Fan Pages, Profiles, Groups, etc. If Facebook couldn't find what you were looking for, they would provide search results from Bing. Facebook is still working with Bing, but the search result set they offer is a lot different. The filtering options are more robust. However, today when we want to find something specific, we still use Google. As a marketer, Lee feels that it's important to understand the customer's journey and experiences. Often an idea surfaces on Facebook, and to validate the idea, people go over to Google expecting to find something that they can act on. Listen to the show to find out how the Facebook search capability is similar to what they have allowed to advertisers. How Google is using Google+ to impact the results consumers see Marketers need to consider the public social content crawled by Google Bot, the integration of Google+ and authorship, and the association between Google+ profiles and associated content in search results. Lee believes that it's virtually impossible to employ a successful organic search optimization effort without robust social content or social presence. These social signals have eclipsed signals like links. When you look at simplifying SEO best practices, we are not just talking about content, keywords and links. We have to equally include the importance of social content and social signals. Marketers really need to understand the search results landscape for their key search terms, and to what degree social content competes with you. Lee gives an example of how social is impacting search results. Every search experience result could be unique because of geography, and whether you are logged in or not. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8Z9TTBxarbs As marketers, we still have to execute standard SEO best practices.

Chiromatrix Dirty Tricks

by inception @ Inception Websites

Chiromatrix Dirty Tricks We had a client start with us this week that told us an interesting story. While trying to contact us they searched "Inception Websites", and clicked on an ad that appeared at the top of the results. The ad said the following: "Chiro Website Inception - Experts in Chiropractic Marketing" The domain…

The post Chiromatrix Dirty Tricks appeared first on Inception Websites.

Marketing Essentials: Colorado Springs Small Business

by Craig Mount @ Classy Brain

Marketing has become colossal in scope. You know this because, as a small business owner, you are likely pestered every day by companies from the US and abroad that promise to help you with your digital marketing (I know I...

The post Marketing Essentials: Colorado Springs Small Business appeared first on Classy Brain.

How to Successfully Target a Niche Facebook Audience

How to Successfully Target a Niche Facebook Audience

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to reach new audiences on Facebook? Have you considered targeting niche audiences? Targeting niche groups of people on Facebook, in addition to your primary audience, will help you create new channels of traffic and revenue. In this article, you'll discover how to find and reach niche audiences on Facebook. Listen to this article: Uncover Your Niche Audience Sometimes, all it takes is a little brainstorming to yield an immediate option for a secondary audience. Think of your product or service as if you initially created it for people other than your primary audience to identify new shades of its features that will interest additional customer segments. For example if Dollar Shave Club's primary audience is men who use razors, it's easy to see how they would choose women who use razors as a great secondary target. Alternatively, you can go deep into Facebook's Audience Insights to learn more about your primary audience's quirks. Use any shared similarities you find to identify secondary groups of people who might qualify as a viable audience for you. Target Your Niche Audience When you've decided which audience group you want to target on Facebook, you can take advantage of Audience Optimization to ensure your post will be seen by users who are most likely to engage with it. Now that you know how to find and reach your niche audience, here are three tips to help you make the most of that exposure and visibility. #1: Speak Their Language Many niche groups use specific words, slang, or non-typical word expressions that differentiate them from others. Whether you're trying to connect with introverts, hipsters, or healthy lifestyle fans, it's important to speak the same language they do. To examine the specific language of a group, you can use Google to query phrases such as 'hipster slang.' A large gym that wants to attract a niche audience of CrossFit enthusiasts can search Google for slang that audience might use. You can also use Online Slang Dictionary or Urban Dictionary to learn the meaning of words that are unfamiliar to you. Make a list of the words used by the group you want to target and use them to construct Facebook posts that reflect a particular mood and style that will appeal to the social group you're targeting. After you publish your posts, you can increase the rate of engagement and conversion by responding to comments and questions with the same words your visitors use. #2: Reinforce Their Mood and Interests Posting pictures and quotes that appeal to the unique mindset of your niche audience can be especially effective because they're attractive and shareable. To mitigate the risk of alienating your primary audience with this tactic, make sure the images and quotes you use are relevant to your existing audience as well. Otherwise, you may not get any engagement at all. For example, this post by Nike could easily attract the notice of people interested in philology but stays faithful to the interests of their primary audience of athletes and healthy lifestyle fans. Even if you don't directly address a Facebook post to a specific niche audience, you can appeal to their interests indirectly. For example, this Walt Disney World post is equally interesting for three distinct and possibly overlapping audiences: those who are interested in Disney, in Star Wars or in food. You can take this a step further by including a question that helps your niche audience understand their opinion is important to you, thereby increasing your chances of engaging members of that audience in a conversation. #3: Support Their Social Stance If your business openly aligns with a niche audience on an issue or controversial subject, you can publish posts that make a clear statement to signify your support. For example, this post could be shared to appeal to and attract people who are interested in and support strong female role m...

Integrate Google Search Console With Unamo SEO

by Adam Coombs @ Unamo Blog

Now you can integrate your Google Search Console properties with your Unamo SEO Campaign with GSC data storage for up to 2 years! ​​ You’ll have all of your relevant SEO data on one platform to expedite your analytics and decision making processes. ​ The integration will pull all of your data from GSC into […]

Search engine optimization (SEO) for small business websites - Just Add Content

Search engine optimization (SEO) for small business websites - Just Add Content


Just Add Content

Search engine optimization (SEO) increases your chances of being found when customers search for a product or service like yours with search engines.

9 Instagram Tips and Tools for Marketers

9 Instagram Tips and Tools for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Instagram for your business? Want to get more from your marketing efforts? Improving your Instagram content and boosting engagement can be as simple as adding a few tactics and tools to your marketing routine. In this article you'll discover nine tips and tools to improve your Instagram marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Tailor Images to Your Audience On your Instagram account, post the kinds of photos that your audience is already sharing and liking. For example, take a picture that shows the inside of your office, the team heading out to lunch or you holding up your favorite afternoon snack. MaybellineAU took a cue from the fashion bloggers dominating Instagram with their facial close-ups and instructional pictures. In this post the brand shows one aspect of a woman's makeup routine: defining the eyebrows. The style and focus on the eyebrow in this photo contributed to a 2.4x increase in sales of Maybelline's Brow Drama mascara. #2: Enhance Your Photos You'll get the most out of every photo you share if they are the best they can be. Here are some quick and easy ways to improve even the most basic photo. Make use of an app like VSCO Cam (available for iOS and Android) to brighten and enhance your photos. The app offers editing tools and preset filters to make your photos more visually appealing and interesting. Although Instagram now supports non-square photos, the square shape still performs best. When you use the tool InstaSize (available for iOS and Android), you can choose a photo and scale it exactly how you want within the square shape. The app adds a white or colored border around the edges of your photo so that it keeps its original shape in the square box. #3: Use Text Overlays on Images Sharing generic content that doesn't connect to your brand is a missed opportunity on Instagram. Many marketers opt for generic content because their product or service isn't inherently visual. How many photos can you really share of your team sitting around a conference table? Not many. Instead, create messages, graphics and designs that tell users something valuable. This could be a quote connected to your brand, or an announcement about a new product, contest or sale. For example, the Huffington Post Instagram account uses graphics to share a quote from a story or to start a conversation. In this example, the graphic asks an engaging question and promotes a hashtag. The question started a long conversation in the comments and led to broader use of the hashtag. There's no need to reinvent the wheel with every graphic either. Consistency wins on Instagram. Keep your template and change the text or background to share a new graphic each week. #4: Tell a Story With the Caption Yes, Instagram is a photo-sharing app, but writing is also a key component to your success. The most engaging brands on Instagram use microblogging to tell a story in the caption. As a result, they see stronger engagement and create deeper connections with their audience. This leads to more sharing, commenting and loyalty. Hey, Sweet Pea writes long stories that are like personal letters to their audience. In fact, they use them to tease what users can expect from attending their classes. Then they plug the classes in the caption and with a link in their profile. Use an app like Hemingway to help you improve your caption writing. This tool marks adverbs, passive voice, overly long sentences and more. Paste your text in the editor to make sure that your writing is active and easy to read before you hit publish. #5: Leverage Trending Hashtags Make your brand known and your voice heard in the top (and relevant) Instagram conversations of the day. With the right hashtag and location tags, you can extend the reach of your content and brand. Instagram's Search and Explore feature shows you the trending hashtags of the day.

Mobile Marketing: Are You Ready for the Revolution?

Mobile Marketing: Are You Ready for the Revolution?

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a mobile strategy for your business? Are you interested in discovering what the future of mobile marketing has in store? To learn how to market your business with mobile, I interview Tom Webster. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Tom Webster, the Vice President of Strategy and Marketing at Edison Research. He's authored studies such as The Social Habit and Twitter Users in America. He's co-authored a new book with Tim Hayden called The Mobile Commerce Revolution: Business Success in a Wireless World. Tom explores how mobile marketing impacts your business. You'll discover why successfully mobile marketing goes beyond technology, how consumer behavior is already being shaped by mobile, and how to respond to the mobile commerce revolution. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Mobile Marketing Why Tom wrote his new book  Working in consumer behavior and market research, Tom has tracked human behavior for decades. He helps brands figure out why humans do what they do. His particular area of interest is to capture the opinions and study the behavior of people out of their homes and on the go. For Tom, understanding mobile marketing goes beyond the technology. It's about being able to understand people's needs, wants, and desires while they are in transition, out and about, and away from home. This idea was the impetus behind his new book, The Mobile Commerce Revolution: Business Success in a Wireless World Listen to the show to learn how it's been possible for Tom's company, Edison Research, to study mobile behavior for decades.  What is the mobile commerce revolution Every year, experts in various trades are asked if this is going to be the year of mobile when, in fact, the year of mobile has already happened. According to Tom, the mobile commerce revolution is already upon us. You'll hear Tom describe the Starbucks mobile app as an example of how much consumer behavior has already been shaped by mobile. There's no special technology to the Starbucks mobile app. It's nothing more than a bar code on your phone that's tied to a method of payment. Yet it's eliminated the need for a wallet and made it simpler to purchase items using something Starbucks customers already have in hand: their smartphones. The use of this smartphone app has become such default behavior that it’s prompted customers to make a purchase at Starbucks when they otherwise might not have. If you base your mobile strategy on the technology, then you will not make it. Mobile isn't about technology. It's about being able to understand and enable human behavior. Listen to the show to hear what companies with successful mobile strategies are doing that others aren't. How marketers should respond to the mobile explosion  It's easy to be lulled into thinking that big data and clickstream analytics will give you everything you need to know to develop your mobile strategy. However, the first step when you develop a successful mobile strategy is to examine human behavior. Tom describes the mobile web as having three distinct eras. We've moved past the first two eras of optimizing for mobile and responsive design. We are now moving towards a new era of contextually relevant experiences based on a customer's unique needs and wants in the context of their specific location. Mobility enables this capability to happen. There is a serious measurement gap between the online and the offline interactions because our focus has either been on search or on purely technology solutions.

How to Harness AdWords’ New Quality Score Data

by Taylor Hall @ Qiigo

In terms of driving clicks to your business, Google AdWords is one of the most cost-effective tools on the market. But like all Google products, you only have access to the AdWords data that Google decides to give you. This data can sometimes be frustratingly limited or tough to analyze at scale. So, you can [...]

YouTube Ads: What Marketers Need to Know About YouTube Advertising

YouTube Ads: What Marketers Need to Know About YouTube Advertising

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you post videos on YouTube? Want to know what makes a video ad successful? To discover how YouTube video ads work, I interview Derral Eves. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Derral Eves, an expert in YouTube and video marketing. He's YouTube-certified in Audience Growth, AdWords, Google Analytics and Video Advertising. He's helped big and small businesses bring in more than 1 billion views collectively. Derral will explore YouTube ads and what marketers need to know. You'll discover the formula for creating great video ads. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: YouTube Ads How Derral got into YouTube In 2006, Derral was doing a lot of search engine optimization work with local businesses when he found their videos ranked easily on Google (this is back when Google had Google Video). Late in 2006, Google purchased YouTube and it became a lot easier to find something on YouTube through Google. Derral realized it was a great way for small shops to share their message and get easy ranking and visibility. Derral shares how a video that cost $99 to make in 2006 received over 385,000 views on YouTube and has sold more couches for a furniture store than any of their other advertising. A couple of years ago, Derral started doing his own videos to help clients get answers to common questions. He created a plan of execution, tried to figure out the best trending videos to make and so on. His goal was to get 10,000 subscribers and a million views in that first year. He reached his goal in three months. In six months, he was number-one for training on how to use YouTube on YouTube. Today, Derral consults with and helps businesses, brands and YouTube channels get exposure, develop an audience and monetize. Listen to the show to discover what originally led Derral to YouTube. Why create video ads? Because video ads convert at a very high level, Derral believes video marketing is a great way to deliver, engage and excite. He says video is powerful if it's done right, but can be negative if it's done wrong. Derral talks about working on the video ad for the Squatty Potty, which appeared on Shark Tank. As of this recording, the video has 43 million combined video views from Facebook, YouTube and some freebooted video. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=YbYWhdLO43Q Although Derral found that Facebook video is good for branding and engagement, he says the video got better conversions with YouTube. Listen to the show to discover the benefit of Facebook video versus YouTube. The process for making video ads Derral says you need to start by determining what you want to accomplish with your video ad. He cautions that if you have 80, 10 or even 3 things you want to accomplish, then it's never going to work. You need narrow it down to one reason to make the ad. Then everything else will benefit from it. When you know what success looks like, you work backwards to get someone to take the desired action at the end of your video. Derral says you have a short amount of time to accomplish this and walks listeners through the steps he uses to build YouTube video ads: capture attention, talk about the problem and offer a solution. He believes that if you do this correctly, you can repeat it several times throughout the video and you can keep your audience engaged throughout the process. For example, even though the Squatty Potty video is long (2:54 minutes), the audience retention was high and over 80% of the people who click on it watch the whole ad.

R&J Strategic Communications Promotes Maria Bayas to Digital Account Coordinator

by Richard Carufel @ Bulldog Reporter

R&J Strategic Communications, a full service integrated marketing and public relations agency, announced the promotion of Maria Bayas to Digital Account Coordinator. In her new role at R&J, Bayas will be responsible for helping to devise and execute digital marketing plans based on the agency’s clients’ strategic goals. She will target specific channels to maximize audience engagement and use her expertise in social media tools and business capabilities to make a difference for the agency’s clients. Her social initiatives will tap into various industry disciplines including B2B, non-profit, real estate, healthcare and consumer goods for large and mid-sized businesses. After

How to Boost Your Engagement With Visual Content

How to Boost Your Engagement With Visual Content

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more engagement on your social channels? Have you considered using visual content? There are easy-to-use tools and tactics you can use to create visual content that attracts viewers and engages them. In this article you’ll discover how to use visual content to boost engagement. Listen to this article: #1: Create Animated GIFs From YouTube Video Millennials (people reaching young adulthood around the year 2000) are known as Generation GIF. If you check out publications like BuzzFeed, Gawker and Deadspin or browse the front pages of Reddit and Tumblr, you'll see animated GIFs are everywhere. Animated GIFs expand your marketing channels and increase the chances of your content going viral on Tumblr and Reddit. And from there, content is often picked up by major publications and blogs. There are tools that make it easy to create animated GIFs. Here are a couple you might want to try: MakeaGif is a free online tool that lets you create animated GIFs using photos, YouTube videos, uploaded videos and web camera videos. You can also use it to modify an existing GIF. GIFYT allows you to create high-quality GIFs from YouTube videos. With this free tool, you can select what portion of the video to turn into the GIF and add a caption. You can check out some of the GIFs created with GIFYT here. #2: Install On-Hover Sharing Buttons Sometimes readers are inclined to share an image, but they either don't know how or simply forget to do so. A mild mouseover call to action that encourages a share will prompt more visual shares from viewers. Use a plugin like WWM Social Share On Image Hover as an easy way to enable mouseover sharing (Here's how to securely install Wordpress plugins!) With this tool, you can automatically place buttons on all of your images so your viewers can share them in an instant. It's a surprisingly effective way to increase engagement. Here’s a page where you can see mouseover share buttons in action, and here are more plugins that add image-sharing options on mouseover. #3: Play on Emotion Connecting with your audience on an emotional level leaves a long-lasting impact. When something sparks an emotional response, the viewer is more likely to share, comment on and remember it. Visuals are great for this purpose. Humans respond to what they see, more so than any other form of stimulation. If you're connecting emotionally with users, they'll start to associate those feelings with your brand. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2K5trQS3JeA According to Fractl research, the two most engaging emotions (in terms of provoking shares) are positive feelings (such as joy, interest, anticipation and trust) and the element of surprise. #4: Celebrate Unusual Holidays From National Hamburger Day to National Book Lovers' Day, unusual holidays are hard to resist. They're also an awesome source of visual content inspiration. There's an idea for a cool image to create almost daily. Coca-Cola does a great job of using unusual holidays in their social media marketing. They published these images of cute animals to celebrate National Polar Bear Day. To find holidays and observances, you can check these useful lists of unusual holidays and days of the year for inspiration. #5: Ask Viewers to Contribute You don't have to use your own visuals to capture your viewers' attention. Flip the script and ask your viewers to contribute their images. People love seeing their work promoted by a brand, and it makes them feel appreciated and special. On your social channels, ask viewers to submit designs, logos, photographs, drawings or anything else uniquely suited to your product. Facebook, Instagram and Pinterest are fantastic platforms for this style of campaign. Here are two easy-to-implement visual contest ideas to engage your audience and create more visual context around your brand. Caption Contests Publish an interesting image and ask your reader...

Facebook Marketing Plan: How to Grow Your Business With Facebook

Facebook Marketing Plan: How to Grow Your Business With Facebook

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a Facebook marketing plan? Are you wondering how to grow your business with Facebook? To learn about the important elements of a Facebook marketing plan, I interview Amy Porterfield for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Amy Porterfield, co-author of Facebook Marketing All-in-One for Dummies and host of the Online Marketing Made Easy podcast. She was also the very first Facebook community manager we ever had for Social Media Examiner. Amy shares what your Facebook marketing plan needs to succeed. You'll learn why you should create a Facebook business page and the best engagement techniques to grow your audience. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Marketing Plan The benefits of a Facebook business page  Amy states that although a lot of people get good engagement on their personal Facebook profile, she strongly recommends that you set up a Facebook business page. It's only on rare occasions that she advises to stick with your personal profile. If you have a physical or online product, program or service, a Facebook business page can be extremely beneficial. This type of page gives you permission to talk about your business on a regular basis. Once you have the foundation in place and become that go-to authority in your niche, you can talk about your business freely. It's the main reason why you need to have a business page, as well as a personal profile. You'll hear about another benefit when it comes to Facebook ads. Listen to the show to discover the reason why Amy has taken all communication over to her business page but still keeps her personal profile.   Start with a Facebook marketing plan Amy teaches how to put a Facebook marketing plan together in three phases. Attraction Promotion Sales Listen to the show to learn more about these three phases. 1. Attraction First of all, you need to build a Facebook community. It's important to grow a solid fan base so you can generate some great engagement with people. You become the go-to source in your community. In the attraction phase, you need to find different ways to grow your fan base. You need to know your audience. You'll hear why Amy advises creating a persona of your typical Facebook fan. One of the easiest ways to get the word out about your page is to have a Facebook Like button on your website. Once someone clicks the Like button to become a fan, they will remain on your website. You'll get quality fans with the Like button, because these people are already visiting your site. You want them to become Facebook fans, so you can stay top of mind when they're on Facebook. Listen to the show to hear what happened when Amy advised Michael Hyatt to install the Like button on his website. How to use your website or blog to grow a following Amy explains that it doesn't matter if you have a massive email subscriber list, these are people who have taken the time to give you their name and email address. You'll learn about techniques you can use to encourage people to become fans. If you want to attract new people, then Graph Search is very valuable. Amy says it's a hidden treasure that not many people use. You'll hear some great examples of search terms that will help you gain valuable information about your audience. When it comes to promotion, you need to turn your fans into leads. You definitely want to check out this previous podcast with Amy that goes into...

How to Create Facebook Ads With Emails: 5 Creative Ideas

How to Create Facebook Ads With Emails: 5 Creative Ideas

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you have an email list? Are you looking for creative ways to use Facebook ads? With Facebook custom audiences, you can reach your email subscribers with relevant Facebook ads. In this article I'll share five ways to target your email subscribers with Facebook ads. Listen to this article: #1: Serve Ads to All Email Subscribers Since it requires no email list segmentation, the best way to get started is to target all your email subscribers. Simply upload your entire email list right into Facebook as a custom audience. The key is to create a unified message across different channels: email to Facebook to website. Target this audience if you're looking to reach your entire list to get the news out about a big event or a storewide sale, where the message is the same for everyone. Make sure your Facebook ad has a similar look and message or offer as your emails. Amazon uses this tactic to remind customers about their Deal of the Day. The idea is to share engaging content, so your email audience will help spread your message by interacting with your ads, acting as brand ambassadors. Since this audience is already familiar with your brand, analyze engagement metrics (likes, shares, comments) to measure the effectiveness of these ads. Their interaction validates how well the ad resonates with them, which results in a higher relevancy score, more social proof and free organic reach. #2: Target Ad Delivery by Opens and Unopens To employ these next few tactics, it's important you are able to segment your email subscriber list into audiences for remarketing. First, divide your email list into people who have opened your email and those who have not. Then, further segment the open list into those who did and did not take action. Target Subscribers Who Opened Your Email Create a Facebook ad that looks similar to the email you sent for those who only read your email. You want to get this audience to take action, so change up the messages with the ad. For instance, if the goal of the email was to get white paper downloads, then offer the same white paper in your Facebook ad, but write a message or ad copy that differs from your email. If you're an ecommerce store trying to get your customers to take advantage of a weekly 20%-off deal, show subscribers an ad that highlights the promotion and encourages them to take action. Sierra Trading Post created a Facebook offer with the same deal as their email. With this custom audience, exclude people who have already purchased or downloaded an offer. Target Subscribers Who Didn't Open Your Email For the subscribers who didn't even open your email, wait a few days and then target them with a Facebook ad. Since they haven't read the email, show them the same message. This helps your company stay in front of your audience. #3: Segment Subscribers by Purchase If you have an ecommerce website, a great way to increase the lifetime value of a customer is to cross-promote and/or upsell related products. Amazon does this brilliantly. The website is always showing their shoppers similar products, bundled products or other products previous customers bought. Their goal is to get people to buy more products that are relevant to what they are viewing. Utilize Facebook carousel ads to highlight multiple products that provide additional value for previous customers. Show products that fit with items they've already purchased. So if they bought dog treats, then show them dog food or dog toys. Look for creative ways to divide your audience for the purpose of upselling or cross-promoting other products they would find useful. Depending on your business goals, consider segmenting your customers by type of products, purchase amount, purchase date and frequency of purchases. Then target a carousel ad to each audience. #4: Reach Out to Disengaged Audiences Do you have a list of people who haven't opened your emails in quit...

Google Analytics and Social Media: What Marketers Need to Know

Google Analytics and Social Media: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you track the return on your social media activity in Google Analytics? Want to discover some valuable shortcuts? To explore cool hacks for Google Analytics, I interview Annie Cushing. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Annie Cushing, Google Analytics expert and chief data officer at Outspoken Media digital marketing agency. She's a total analytics geek who loves teaching other marketers how to make the most of their analytics data. Annie explores Google Analytics, social reporting, dashboards, and more. You'll discover how to customize Google Analytics reports for yourself. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Google Analytics and Social Media What's New in Google Analytics Starting May 15, 2017, Google Analytics will allow people to do remarketing across multiple devices. Annie explains that if someone visits your site on their mobile device and then comes back to it on their laptop, as long as they're logged into Google in both places, you'll be able to target them across their devices. This new capability is a huge step forward for remarketing audiences because few people shop only on their computer, tablet, or phone. Annie explains that Google previously relied on user IDs to offer remarketing features, but most businesses couldn't implement the technology very easily. Only advanced analysts could set it up for sites where users were highly incentivized to log in. Because most businesses don't have sites like that, this new ability is groundbreaking. Annie says one issue she regularly sees with clients is they seldom use Google Analytics for retargeting. Instead, they use AdWords and DoubleClick. However, Google Analytics enables marketers to get much more granular with targeting. For instance, you can serve an ad to someone who visited a certain page but didn't convert or to someone who put something in a cart but didn't check out. Hopefully, multiple-device retargeting will incentivize more people to take advantage of Google Analytics. Listen to the show to discover how a retargeting ad saved Annie last Christmas. Google Optimize Google recently announced they were releasing Google Optimize, a free tool for A/B testing. For example, say you want to experiment with product page design, such as the placement of the price or Buy button or different font colors or text. In an A/B test, you run two versions of your page and compare how each version performs. Up until this point, Optimizely has been the industry standard. At Social Media Examiner, we use Visual Website Optimizer. Annie believes Google Optimize is perfect for small- to mid-sized or even large businesses. (Google Optimize 360 is the enterprise-level version.) Annie recommends that businesses get what they can from the free version first. Then as your organization develops more sophisticated testing needs (for instance, reducing the bounce rate or increasing the conversion rate), consider paying for more advanced features. Annie also notes that Google Optimize is user-friendly. To move things around, you simply drag and drop. You don't have to ask a developer to customize the page for you. Listen to the show to hear my description of how optimizing tools work. Ad Blockers and Do-not-track Technology Annie explains how ad blockers and do-not-track tools impact your analytics data differently. If you run display ads on AdWords, then ad blockers will impact your overall effectiveness. As people choose to block ads, impressions and conversions will decrease. A lot of publishers,

How to Increase Awareness, Generate Leads and Create Advocacy With Social Media

How to Increase Awareness, Generate Leads and Create Advocacy With Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Have you been tasked with generating more awareness, more leads and more advocates? Need a plan to get you started? In this article you'll discover how your business can use social media to achieve three of the most common marketing goals. #1: Increase Brand Awareness Perhaps your brand isn't a household name and you'd like more prospective customers to know who you are. Social media can help you get there. Here are some ways to jumpstart your brand's presence through social media: Listen to this article: Establish fully fleshed-out profiles on the major social networks. Create company profiles on the big four social channels: LinkedIn, Facebook, Google+ and Twitter. Make sure your company logo and bio are consistent across all of your social sites. Decide which social network you'll spend the most time on. Depending on your market segmentation and customer research, it might make sense to spend more time on one network and less on others. For example, LinkedIn is consistently the best social outlet for B2B lead generation, and Google+ tends to attract professionals in the technology space. Consider advertising. When you first sign onto a social network, you don't have any connections because no one knows you're there. One way to make yourself known is through advertising. Each social network has intriguing ad options (like media-rich Twitter cards and Facebook sponsored posts) that help you target the prospects who will most likely click through and get to know you. Create a content schedule. Consistency is key in social media. Before you start posting, create a content schedule that allows you to develop your brand story one social post at a time. Give content creators access to the calendar so they know what to contribute and when. Make connections with others. Depending on the network, start following others in your industry who have important and insightful things to say. Obviously, you won't follow competitors, but think laterally. Bloggers, thought leaders, academics and companies in related industries might be putting out great content, and be open to socially engaging with you. And that comes with the bonus of a bigger presence for your company. Track important key performance indicators (KPIs). Only by tracking certain metrics can you know if your social efforts are paying off. Decide which metrics you'll evaluate on a regular basis, ranging from the number of likes and shares of your material, to more telling metrics like web traffic, social media conversion rates and reach. Make sure you have the right social media management tool on hand to walk you through your stats. Once you've set up a content calendar, perhaps done some advertising and are ready to track predefined KPIs, you'll have a solid foundation for spreading awareness of your brand. Your audience will then get a chance to see how your products and services can change their business practices. Perhaps they'll see the light through an interesting YouTube video or a report that speaks to a particular problem and your solution for addressing it. However you make your customers' lives better, social media puts you out there and brings your solutions to your prospects' doors. #2: Generate Leads and Engagement Now that people are starting to know you exist, it's time to turn people into leads. As in all content marketing, you'll want to develop social content that speaks to your audience. This is content that your followers will find informative, helpful and even exciting. When you've improved things just a little bit for people, they'll come back to you for more of the same, and that's your chance to qualify them as leads. Here's how to put together social content that turns followers into leads: Create content that inspires conversation. On social media, you can't depend on passive followers to convert themselves. You need to create as many opportunities to engage people as possi...

Story for Business: How to Create Stories That Move People to Act

Story for Business: How to Create Stories That Move People to Act

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use stories to engage your audience? Want to see how powerful stories can be? To discover how to create stories for business that move people to act, I interview Park Howell. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Park Howell, a brand story strategist who helps businesses grow through the power of stories. He also hosts the Business of Story podcast and performs workshops on stories for business. Park will explore the mechanics of storytelling, a craft every marketer should master. You'll discover why this is important to social marketers. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Story for Business Park's story Park, who has been in the advertising and marketing business for 30 years, shares that what always frustrated him was not knowing whether a TV spot or radio commercial was going to work. Story started to bubble up in the advertising world around the same time Park's middle son, Parker, went to Chapman University film school (from 2006 to 2010). He asked Parker to send him his textbooks when he was finished with them because he wanted to see what they were teaching his son to prepare him for Hollywood, the most competitive storytelling place in the universe. One of the screenwriting books was Save the Cat! by Blake Snyder. Blake, who Park says sold more family-oriented screenplays in the 1980s than anybody else, had a prescription for the 15 beats to a story. According to Blake, a screenplay needs to be the same number of pages as the weight of a jockey (110), and Blake could tell you on each page (within a page or two) what needed to happen. Although it sounds formulaic, it worked very well for Blake and many other writers, Park adds, and the approach fascinated him. When Park was introduced to the work of Joseph Campbell, America's foremost mythologist, he noted how Blake had adapted Campbell's The Hero's Journey, or what Joseph called the monomyth, a 17-step process for story structure. During the time Park was reading through The Hero's Journey, he was looking at a brand strategy plan and realized he was already following this story structure with his plan. Park wondered what would happen if he was intentional about it. Park boiled down the steps of the Hero's Journey to 10 steps for business, and used it to guide the creation of content to tell a story that would make a difference. To Park's amazement, it worked, so he fine-tuned it into what he calls the Story Cycle, a process that can be used for everything from high-level brand strategy to the creation of a 30-second TV spot. In the social media world, you just have a small blip of time to communicate a story. Park explains that you can get that story across if you follow the three fundamental principles of the three-act play: start with a setup, introduce conflict, and resolve it. He shares that if you can do it in a 6-second Vine video, you will have connected with the deep reaches of your audience's minds. Listen to the show to learn about Park's background in music, as well as his comparisons between music and story. Why marketers should care about stories Park believes that stories are people's superpowers, and says the brain is hardwired to constantly search for them. Humans can go weeks without eating and days without drinking, but only roughly 35 seconds without their brains scanning the environment to create meaning out of what they see. Park explains how while one son was studying film and Park was studying what Hollywood knows about story structure,

How to Manage a Podcast: Tools and a Checklist for Marketers

How to Manage a Podcast: Tools and a Checklist for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you interested in starting a podcast? Want tips to manage and promote your podcast effectively? Creating a successful podcast doesn't have to be a time-consuming process. Today, tools can help streamline activities such as finding guests, publishing audio, and promoting episodes. In this article you'll discover how to manage your podcast from start to finish. Listen to this article: Why a Podcast? The key to generating a goldmine of compelling and engaging content is to leverage the expertise of others and interview them on your own podcast. A podcast is a win-win platform for your content strategy, because it provides an opportunity for both you and your guest to share your knowledge, feature your respective companies, and build a quality relationship with listeners. Inviting people with knowledge and experience in your industry to share their insights frees you from relying solely on your own knowledge. It also allows you to build a collection of quality content from a network of experts. Here's how to get started with your own podcast. #1: Find Potential Guests The first step is finding potential guests for your podcast. Are you groaning at the thought? Never fear, use a tool like LeadFuze to do the work for you. It's traditionally used by sales teams for B2B lead generation, but it also works well for identifying podcast guests. LeadFuze finds prospective guests by searching LinkedIn for categories such as industry, title, role, and location. It then aggregates all of the prospects' contact information, social media accounts, and domains into a list for you. By automating the prospecting process, LeadFuze saves you the hours of research typically needed to find good guests. #2: Send Out Email Invites Once you have the names and email addresses for guests you want to feature on your show, it's time to send out cold emails. In these emails you make your initial request asking the recipient to be a guest on your podcast. Send the Initial Email There are a number of mass emailing tools out there (such as MailChimp, Infusionsoft, and AWeber), but that's not what you need at this stage in the game. You'll want to send a more personal request with a tool like QuickMail.io. QuickMail.io is unique because it lets you automatically send one-to-one emails at scale through your Gmail account. It sends emails so that they arrive in the recipient's inbox as a personal email. This increases the chances of your emails being opened and not being filtered into a spam folder. QuickMail.io also lets you set up unlimited follow-up emails, which will automatically shut off once the recipient responds. Follow Up With Interested Guests Use FollowUpThen to stay in touch with prospective guests who responded to your initial emails, but haven't yet booked a day/time for your podcast interview. With this tool, you can add a simple email address to the BCC field on any email to remind you to follow up at a later date. You include your desired time frame within the FollowUpThen email address, and the email will then boomerang back into your inbox at that date and time. Once it's back to your inbox, it's up to you to decide if you need to follow up again. #3: Plan the Podcast Once you've lined up guests for your podcast, the next step is to choose a topic and set up a time for the interview. The secret to never running out of creative and compelling content ideas is to allow your guests to choose the topic for their episode. When guests ask you about the topic, say something like this: "We encourage guests to choose the topic for their episode based on their background and experience. Is there a certain topic you'd like to discuss on the show?" Next you need to work out a time for your interview. Unfortunately, we've all experienced the email scheduling dance: "Hi, are you free on Wednesday at 1pm?" "I can't do Wednesday. How does Thursday between 2 and 5pm?"

Dealing With Unhappy Customers: What Social Marketers Need to Know

Dealing With Unhappy Customers: What Social Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Does your business respond to customers via social media? Are you prepared to deal with upset customers? To discover how to turn unhappy customers into happy fans, I interview Jay Baer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Jay Baer, the author of Youtility, co-host of the Social Pros Podcast and founder of Convince & Convert, an agency and blog focused on digital marketing. His newest book is Hug Your Haters: How to Embrace Complaints and Keep Your Customers. Jay will explore how to convert social media haters into raving fans. You'll discover why it's important to hug your haters. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Dealing With Unhappy Customers The backstory of Hug Your Haters The idea of customer service and customer experience has been at the front of Jay's mind for a long time, he explains. His company Convince & Convert helps major brands with their social media and content marketing, and they increasingly get involved in issues with customers. It's not just about being proactive and doing marketing, Jay says. You have to be just as good, if not better, at reactive customer service. Jay found even organizations with a lot of resources were befuddled by everything related to digital customer service and experience in the modern world. Jay shares how conducting a tremendous amount of research with Tom Webster from Edison Research changed the focus of his book. Last year at Social Media Marketing World, Jay did his "Hug Your Haters" presentation for the first time. Although he has taken the Youtility concept all over the world, Jay says the Hug Your Haters book is the best thing he's ever done and the speech is the best speech he has ever given. Listen to the show to learn what Tom Webster said he liked about Hug Your Haters in the forward to the book. What are haters and why do people hate Jay refers to anybody who complains about a business either off stage or on stage as a hater. An off-stage hater is somebody who complains in private: on telephone and email. An on-stage hater is somebody who complains in public: social media, review sites, discussion boards and forums. He shares that historically and even currently, the majority of people complain off stage but that the pendulum is swinging the other way because it's much easier to reach out to a brand on Facebook, Twitter or beyond than it is to send an email or wait on hold. When people complain off stage, they almost always want an answer. They have a problem they want to be fixed, and 90% of the time they expect companies to respond. When people complain on stage, they don't necessarily want an answer; they want an audience. They want people to empathize and engage with them around their experience. If they actually hear back from the company, it's a bonus. Even though only 47% of the people who complain in public actually expect companies to get back to them, Jay says their research proved that if you actually answer the person who had a bad experience and left a review online, it has a meaningful and significant impact on your customer advocacy. Listen to the show to discover how content shock also applies to disgruntled customers. Why engage haters Jay says haters are not the problem, ignoring them is. He believes there are multiple benefits to answering every complaint in every channel every time, instead of what most businesses do today, which is answer some people some of the time in the channels they prefer. First, if you answer somebody, you at least have a chance to turn them around.

Theft: 9 Ways to Protect Yourself From Losing Your Data

Theft: 9 Ways to Protect Yourself From Losing Your Data

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you rely on your computer for business? Is your computer and data secure? To learn more about ways to protect yourself and your business, this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast gives you insight into the subject. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, you'll learn different ways to protect your data and make sure your business is back up and running very quickly if you were ever to lose it. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Computer Security Why secure your computer? There are two main reasons to secure your computer. Peace of mind. If your hard drive was to crash or you had your computer stolen, you need to know that it doesn't spell the end of your business. It allows you to sleep at night. Theft and a hard drive crash are almost the same outcomes. Peace of mind is a big deal. Business continuity. You don't want the loss of your computer to be the end to their business. This is why it's essential to implement security measures. The good news about a lot of this stuff is, it's set and forget. It only takes a small amount of your time, and in certain cases some financial investment, to know that you will be able to continue to operate no matter what happens to your computer. Recently I received a phone call from my office informing me that my two iMacs had been stolen. When the police arrived we were informed that another office within the same building had also been targeted. The alarm system was set, it hadn't been disarmed and even the motion sensors hadn't been triggered. They broke through the office window, taking the computers with them. You'll hear the reason why my office was vulnerable. In total I lost about a day and a half of my time and you'll discover how I got back online within 5 hours. I thought I would share my story with you and hopefully you'll be able to take some notes from it. Here are 9 tips to protect yourself from losing your data. #1: Set-up a remote backup I highly recommend that you have a remote back-up plan in place. I use CrashPlan and for approximately $60 a year have unlimited back-up capabilities. Listen to the show to hear how CrashPlan works and the different account levels they offer. #2: Back-up to an external hard drive You have to make sure that your hard drive is external from your computer. If you put yourself in the minds of the thief, they want to make a quick buck. They don't really care about your hard drive, just your computer. An external hard drive is critical. In my case they left the hard drive behind and I was able to plug it into my new computer. It was the key to everything. For the iMac they have got a really cool thing called Time Machine. Make sure you store your external hard drive somewhere out of sight. Remember the thieves unplug all the cables and just take the computer. Listen to the show to hear how Time Machine works similar to CrashPlan, and how it can get you back up and running very quickly. #3: Secure your browser passwords You should make sure you have a password to log onto your computer. A password can be a deterrent, although when someone does steal your computer, they are likely to reformat the hard drive, rather than try to figure out the password. Make sure you also password protect your web browser. This is really important because we access our banking accounts, merchant systems, blogging tools, email etc from within a web browser. Everything seems to live out in the cloud these days.

Mobile SEO Missteps That Will Come Back to Haunt You

by SearchEngineOptimization @ Simply Design

Mobile users have become just as important, if not more so, than desktop users when it comes to your search engine optimization practices. If you’re not reaching or keeping your mobile users, you’re missing out on a huge possible customer base. Mobile SEO isn’t quite the same as desktop SEO, and it comes with its […]

The post Mobile SEO Missteps That Will Come Back to Haunt You appeared first on Simply Design.

What’s New at Google – May June July 2017

by Ray Sidney-Smith @ Blog – W3 Consulting :: Web and Beyond

In the past few months, Google has been busy! Google added some fancy charting features to Google Sheets, Android Pay partnered with PayPal, Google NoCaptcha reCaptcha arrived, Backup and Sync from Google became available, and easy HIPAA compliance showed up

Why You Need a Mobile Friendly Website

by Search Engine Optimization @ Hearst DMS

Mobile websites are more important than ever, and your business needs to be on board! Our experts weigh in on why, and how this can benefit your business.

The post Why You Need a Mobile Friendly Website appeared first on Hearst DMS.

12 Creative Ways to Use Facebook Cover Images for Business

12 Creative Ways to Use Facebook Cover Images for Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to do more with your Facebook cover image? Wondering how other businesses are using Facebook cover images? Your cover image is the perfect space to tell visitors more about your brand or products or drive home a call to action. In this article, you'll discover 12 creative ways to use your Facebook cover image for business. Listen to this article: #1: Inspire a Purchase You hear a lot about using video to show how people use a product or service. The same opportunities exist with photos. When you show off your product in your Facebook cover image, you're planting ideas with your customers that can inspire them to engage with you. In this cover image, Edible Arrangements puts its product front and center with a "Happy Birthday" message in the background. It's subtle, but you can use this tactic to paint your product in a way that says, "this is something special." It's a clever way to position the colorful display, because we all know someone with a birthday coming up. #2: Share Your Value Proposition Could you define your business in a single second? One of the best and simplest ways to spice up your Facebook cover photo is to challenge yourself to find creative ways to one-line your value proposition and present directly to the people who find your brand on Facebook. That's exactly what EYStudios did with a recent cover photo: a sharp and impactful one-liner that expresses who they are and what they can do. Lee Odden's team at TopRank Marketing shoots for the same impact. #3: Express Your Personality Any kind of visual content is a huge part of marketing, and it's one of the best avenues to show off who you are and the personality behind your business. Your cover photo is a great spot to showcase content that aligns with how you present your brand in other places online. MailChimp uses its cover photo to show off the company's personality, along with some clever use of negative space to fix your attention. #4: Appeal to the Senses Any business in the food industry (restaurants, catering, etc.) has a stellar opportunity to grab attention using enticing photos of their mouth-watering offerings. With seasonal changes that bring about new dishes and menu updates, you can swap out Facebook cover photos to showcase what's new on the menu, along with new promotions. It can be effective to have a call to action to help describe a product and get visitors moving. However, sometimes it doesn't hurt to let the product image speak for itself. Little Caesars takes that route by showing off a close-up of their new stuffed crust deep-dish pizza. In the same vein, Papa John's shows off its product to cater to people who love the look of a mouth-watering pizza. In addition, they saved space to promote a key relationship with Major League Baseball. When customers love a specific thing about your business, especially a certain product, you can leverage that connection in your Facebook cover photo. Olive Garden is confident that their customers are addicted to endless breadsticks and massive salads. So, customer favorites are featured in a zoomed-in shot, which makes you feel like you're sitting right at the table. It's cruel, but effective. #5: Speak to a Niche Audience For product-based businesses, the Facebook cover photo is a perfect way to feature new or seasonal products, along with your newest and grandest promotions. To maximize impact, include compelling copy and information about the products along with release dates and calls to action. Logitech G, a company known for computer accessories, used their cover photo to promote a specific line of products. They've highlighted an affiliation with the ESL (Electronic Sports League) to promote products for gamers. Like the Papa John's cover, this kind of affiliation can improve a business's position with specific customers. #6: Inspire Creativity

Google AdWords Label Update: When Less Green Is More Green

by Ray Kirsch @ Dynamics Online

Google Updates Green Ad Labels…Again Several months ago, I covered Google’s implementation of green ad labels within the paid search results. At the time, Google was replacing yellow labels with solid green ones. The internet speculated that the was move rooted in color psychology. The yellow ad label was more […]

Website Redesign SEO: Avoid awkward client conversations

by admin @ SEO Brothers

You know the conversation we’re talking about. We know you’ve answered that phone call before. You’ve poured your best work into a beautiful, functional, and lead-generating website for your client. The project went well. You got paid. The website launched as expected and it’s a real hit. Everyone loves it. So when you get a…

The post Website Redesign SEO: Avoid awkward client conversations appeared first on SEO Brothers.

Measuring Social Media: How to Determine Your ROI

Measuring Social Media: How to Determine Your ROI

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you trying to measure your social media return on investment (ROI)? Do you need to measure the social performance of your business? To learn how to determine the ROI for social media marketing, I interview Nichole Kelly for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Nichole Kelly, author of How to Measure Social Media and the CEO of Social Media Explorer and SME Digital. Nichole shares why so many businesses struggle to determine the ROI of their social media activities and what's really important in your social media measurement. You'll learn the most important steps that all marketers should take when thinking about social ROI. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Media Return on Investment (ROI) Why so many marketers struggle with measuring social ROI Nichole believes one of the reasons social ROI is a challenge is because marketers have redefined the metrics used to measure social media. Words such as mentions and retweets are similar to what was measured before. But now people have decided that social media is special, and therefore needs to be measured in a special way. Nichole believes this has set us up for failure. When you try to 1) justify what you are doing and 2) measure the return, you can't compare these two things. It then becomes difficult to compare and optimize whatever the return is. People have played with the return on investment phrase in the social realm. For example, you've likely heard of return on influence, return on engagement and return on conversation. The problem with this approach is that at the end of the day, ROI is a financial return. And whether it is the best measure for success of social media doesn't really matter, because it's the measure of success for business. Listen to the show to find out why you need to translate social media into a positive ROI. The backstory that led Nichole to social media ROI Nichole explains how she spent most of her career in corporate marketing and grew up in the boardroom. In June 2011, there was a study that came out from the Fournaise Report that said 73% of CEOs think marketers lack business credibility. The #1 stated reason was because we talk about trends like social media. Whether you agree with this or not, Nichole noticed that marketers were caught in a trap of trying to measure social media differently. And measuring social media ROI isn't as hard as everyone was making it out to be. So she set out to provide how-to information with step-by-step instructions on translating social media into something that can be compared across channels. Nichole wrote ROI-related articles for Social Media Examiner and discovered there was a never-ending appetite for help figuring out social media ROI. Nichole thinks people are still trying to understand it completely, but they are actually ready to measure now. When Nichole first started, a lot of people were talking about measurement in philosophical terms. We are starting to see companies, and marketers in particular, understand that with social media, it doesn't matter how many fans or followers they have. At the end of the day, if you can compare social media to what you spend on pay-per-click advertising and start measuring it with something simple like cost per click on all of the web traffic you are sending to your site, you have something that justifies a budget. Listen to the show to find out why Nichole feels measuring social media...

Networking on LinkedIn: How to Build a Powerful Network Using LinkedIn

Networking on LinkedIn: How to Build a Powerful Network Using LinkedIn

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you active on LinkedIn? Want to use it to connect with potential partners and prospects? To discover how to network on LinkedIn, I interview Stephanie Sammons. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Stephanie Sammons, a social media strategist who specializes in LinkedIn. She's written extensively for Social Media Examiner about LinkedIn. She's also author of the new book, Linked to Influence. Stephanie will explore how to build a network and prospect using LinkedIn. You'll discover how to curate and share content on LinkedIn. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Networking on LinkedIn Stephanie's background Stephanie spent 15 years as a wealth manager at big financial firms. After the financial meltdown in 2008-2009, she ended up taking a package and starting over. Stephanie decided to launch her own business. Initially, she stayed within the financial industry, but then went into the digital marketing space, doing web development and design. For the last five years or so, Stephanie has been writing and speaking about LinkedIn. When she couldn't find a comprehensive resource on LinkedIn, she decided to write one. There were books about your LinkedIn profile and about how to network on LinkedIn, but she wanted one that covered all the bases. Stephanie's book, Linked to Influence, provides a framework for building your own personal brand on LinkedIn, and includes networking and other opportunities as well. Listen to the show to hear why Stephanie says LinkedIn saved her life. Why people use LinkedIn There are almost 400 million members on LinkedIn, 30% are from the United States and 70% are international. Over 60% of LinkedIn members make more than $75,000 a year and 40% of LinkedIn members make $100,000 or more. The users are affluent, well-educated and come to LinkedIn to really connect with others. They want to find or share information, news and knowledge, but also want to build a network, connect with others and make things happen for their businesses. Stephanie likes how LinkedIn does content aggregation. LinkedIn's Pulse app curates news, based on your network. The smarter your network, the more relevant the content and information you see on Pulse. It includes articles from major media outlets, as well as stories from people you're connected to who are publishing content on LinkedIn's platform. The interface on the Pulse app is fantastic, Stephanie says. You can zip through it, save articles, share them and comment. Listen to the show to learn most people's perception of LinkedIn. Benefits of a good network Stephanie refers to cultivating the right LinkedIn community as building a smart network. The smarter your network, the more relevant people and opportunities you attract. Have a valid reason for bringing someone into your network. A smart network has market opportunities unique to you. Everyone's situation is different, Stephanie explains. Look at people in your home and work locations, current and previous industries, your organizations and associations, referral sources, potential business partners, suppliers in your industry, journalists and more. Take a 360-degree view of the people you know and decide who are the most important. Connect with high-quality people and get to know them better. Listen to the show to discover the myth of a large network. How to build your network Stephanie is very strategic about who is in her network. She does not connect with every journalist or every person she meets at an event. However, she says,

Building your Brand in the Web Age

by Kaitlin Adams @ LSEO Digital Marketing Services

In a world of seemingly infinite choice, our purchasing decisions are more often based on the brand affinity of a product than its value or utility. Building a personal or business brand is a tough and time consuming task. Increasing your brand visibility expands your audience reach, increasing your sales in the short-run. Cultivating brand...

The post Building your Brand in the Web Age appeared first on LSEO Digital Marketing Services.

6 Publishing Tools From Facebook for Marketers

6 Publishing Tools From Facebook for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Have you explored the Publishing Tools section of your Facebook page lately? Wondering how the new features make marketing easier? Your page's Publishing Tools section contains a lot of important features including video management, lead generation, and product sales. In this article, you'll discover how to better manage your Facebook marketing with six Facebook publishing tools. Listen to this article: Note: Your page's Publishing Tools may or may not include all six of these features based on what features your page has access to at this time. #1: Collect and Download Leads Do you want to collect leads directly from Facebook using the Facebook Ads Lead Generation marketing objective? If so, you'll need a lead form. You can design lead forms within Publishing Tools. When you first get access to this feature, you'll find a sample lead form to test. You can preview the sample lead form and submit your own information. You can then download the information to see what your leads would look like. To create your own lead form, click the Create button. You'll get the option to create a new form from scratch or duplicate an existing form. Once you click Next, add a name to your form and select the advanced options applicable to you. You can learn more about whether you need to edit your field IDs in this Facebook help document, which has specific instructions for users of Driftrock, InfusionSoft, Marketo, Maropost, Sailthru, and Sparkroom. You can also retrieve leads via the API or use third-party tools like LeadsBridge, which connects to most email marketing and marketing automation platforms. Next, choose what to ask for on your lead form. Note that the more information you ask for, the longer your form will be. Next, add a link to your website's policies and disclaimers, or add a custom disclaimer for your form. Then you'll add a link to your website where you would like your visitors to go after they complete your form. This may be a custom thank-you page, an offer page, or your home page. Note: If you're tracking lead conversions in Google Analytics, you might want to have a custom thank-you page that lets you know that this was a lead conversion from a Facebook lead form to separate it from a lead conversion on your website or other source. Next, you have the option to encourage people to give you their information. For example, add information and custom graphics if you're offering a free ebook or report. Next you'll get to preview your form. If you want to add questions, click the Edit button at the top. You can also click the Next button to see how long your form will be, based on the number of questions you chose to ask your potential lead. You can go back and edit different aspects of your form, or if you're satisfied, click the Create Form button. Note: Any questions you ask will be prefilled if potential leads have entered that information into their Facebook profile. If not, they'll have to enter it into the form manually. Also note that once you've created a form, you can't edit it. You can, however, create a new form based on an existing form and modify the parts you want to change. When you're ready to collect leads, go to your Facebook Ads Manager and choose the Collect Leads for Your Business objective. Once you configure your audience, budget, placements, and ad creative, select the form you created at the very end of the process. Next go back to your Publishing Tools to download your leads, or follow the directions provided based on your CRM or LeadsBridge. #2: Manage Recorded and Live Video Do you post a lot of video to your Facebook page? You can manage all of your videos easily using your Publishing Tools Video Library section. Here you'll find a listing of your current videos, with indicators of whether they were live videos (noted by the person icon) or recorded videos uploaded to your pa...

How Video Marketing is Changing the Web in 2017

by SearchEngineOptimization @ Simply Design

The web is changing, and along with it are businesses all over the world who are looking for newer and better ways to connect with their audience. With the explosion of YouTube in recent years, video marketing has become part of any growing business’s core repertoire. Taking advantage of the best video production Albuquerque has […]

The post How Video Marketing is Changing the Web in 2017 appeared first on Simply Design.

How to Boost Your Influence Using Your LinkedIn Profile

How to Boost Your Influence Using Your LinkedIn Profile

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your LinkedIn profile working for you? Want to build a presence that supports your company role? While many people think of LinkedIn as a place only for jobseekers, salespeople and recruiters, LinkedIn can help employees build influence around any business role. In this article you'll discover three ways to build a LinkedIn presence to boost visibility for both you and your business. #1: Align Your Personal Message With Your Company's Your LinkedIn presence is unique on social media, because while it is your personal profile, the fact that it highlights your professional activities means that it is enmeshed with your employer's online presence. Listen to this article: Many companies fall flat with their social media approach to employees because it's top down (for example, "put this corporate marketing copy in your profile" or "share this status update"). And understandably, people resist. But incorporating your employer's brand message can help you, because part of your value as a professional is the team around you. Plugging into that larger message expands your capability and credibility. Incorporate Company Marketing Copy in Your Profile If you copy and paste wholesale from your employer's website, your profile will look sterile and untrustworthy. But if you pull in key phrases and ideas, you reinforce your message. Companies spend a lot of money figuring out the best way to communicate their message, and you can piggyback onto that. The Summary paragraph above is from a Dell executive's LinkedIn profile. It's a great example of how to mix a personal viewpoint with the overall company focus. Support Your External-Facing Team You may not deal with clients and prospects on a daily basis, but someone in your company does. In the online landscape, your profile is just a click away. Take look at your colleagues' profiles and see what they're talking about to make sure you align with that message. One of the easiest ways to show your teammates some love is with the social tools on LinkedIn. If you want to make coworkers look better to their audiences (and by extension, yours), click the Like and Share buttons on their posts. This will also extend the reach of your colleagues' messages. #2: Clearly Define Your Role Don't assume the people you work with already know what you do, because they likely don't. The bigger your company gets, the harder it is for coworkers to know the experience and skills you bring to the table. Whether it's through your profile or a status update, share your unique perspective so that others know how you can help them. There might not be a direct line between your social media activity and your audience (unless you're a salesperson or recruiter), but your core message needs to be clear. As a professional, you have a unique value that you bring to your work. Think of the people you serve, and share information that is relevant to them. Connect With Your Target Audience Your audience might be internal employees you support, or clients and partners who rely on your work. Be very clear about whom you need to "talk to" online. Use your headline to share information that answers questions people might have about you and how you can help them. Here's an example of effective LinkedIn profile headline from an employee of the company above. Be sure to include keywords throughout your profile that resonate with your audience. Think of it as SEO for humans. For example, if you're the compliance officer for a financial services firm, and help your employees stay on the right side of the law, include that in places like your profile headline and experience. Publish Your Ideas The ability to share long-form content through LinkedIn Publisher is a fantastic opportunity for internal employees to build a following. More importantly, when you post content on LinkedIn, it doesn't pull focus away from your day job (which could happen ...

How to Generate Revenue With Your Content

How to Generate Revenue With Your Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Want to make money from your content? Wondering how a loyal audience can create business opportunities? To explore business models that help publishers generate revenue, I interview Joe Pulizzi. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers, business owners, and creators discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Joe Pulizzi, founder of the Content Marketing Institute and Content Marketing World. He's written five books including Epic Content Marketing and Content Inc. His newest book is called Killing Marketing: How Innovative Businesses Are Turning Marketing Cost Into Profit. Joe explains how high-quality content can transform marketing from a cost center into a profit center. You'll discover the different ways you can monetize your content. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How to Generate Revenue With Your Content Why Joe Wrote Killing Marketing Joe and co-author Robert Rose work mostly with large businesses. They've been seeing a trend where businesses are viewing marketing as a profit center rather than a cost center. Only a few companies are currently doing things this way. However, Joe believes that over the next 5 or 10 years, marketing as a profit center will be the rule, not the exception. The premise of the book (and the philosophy) is to create trusted relationships with your audience and monetize that relationship by doing more than selling products. You can monetize your business in 10 different ways. Joe says the biggest mistake people make with their marketing is they set up their marketing department wrong. They seek opportunities for the sales team and don't see all of the potential in what their companies can be and sell. Any business that has lasted 10 or 15 years has evolved over time. Yes, selling products is important but you can't lead product-first anymore. The only competitive advantage people have today is communication. Everything else can be duplicated. Marketers need to be refocusing on making markets and creating opportunities for organizations; however, many have lost sight of those objectives. When the focus is on people, not necessarily products, companies can sell all kinds of things they never thought about before. Listen to the show to discover how marketers typically view marketing. Companies Embracing This Premise BabyCenter.com, owned by Johnson & Johnson, is one of the largest sites dedicated to mothers. Eight out of 10 mothers use the site, which is a stellar resource for research and development. Johnson & Johnson monetizes the site directly and launches new products from it. Red Bull Media House is judged as a profit center and media company. Although they're the marketing arm of Red Bull (and want to sell more product), their revenue comes from advertising and content syndication. They package and sell their videos to companies like The New York Times and the Wall Street Journal. They also sell subscriptions (The Red Bulletin Magazine has two million subscribers). One of Joe's favorite examples is Arrow Electronics, which is the 118th company on the Fortune 500 list. They're like the Amazon.com for electronics equipment and they target electrical engineers. Two years ago, they went to Hearst and UBM (Content Marketing Institute's parent company) and bought 51 media properties, including EE Product News. Now, Arrow Electronics is the largest media company in the electronics industry. Although the media division is a marketing arm for the company, the media division is also extremely profitable. Plus, it helps the company sell more products and services. In most cases, marketers simply target customers or prospects with the goal of getting t...

How to Automate Your Tweets: 3 Useful Twitter Apps

How to Automate Your Tweets: 3 Useful Twitter Apps

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Does tweeting take up a lot of your time? Do you want to share content automatically? There are tools you can use to automatically tweet your best content when your followers are most active and engaged. In this article you'll discover how to automatically schedule your tweets at optimal times. Why Automate Twitter? Putting together a Twitter content calendar can be a time-consuming task. You've likely experienced times when you've run out of ideas or had trouble finding articles to curate. A great way to keep your posting schedule full is to automate Twitter. You can schedule your posts automatically when the engagement and potential reach are higher. Listen to this article: Keep in mind that only a small portion of your followers will see your content the first time you post it. That's why it's a good idea to share the same content more than once. With smart scheduling and automation, you can reshare your content without being a Twitter spammer. This guide will help you schedule your best content when your followers are most engaged. #1: Find Out When to Tweet With Tweriod Before you start scheduling content on Twitter, take the time to analyze your followers' activity. You want to find out when your audience is most active and engaged on Twitter. This is a necessary step to maximize engagement. There are a number of analytics tools you can use to identify these peak periods. One free and easy-to-use tool is Tweriod. It shows you the intervals when your Twitter followers are most active. To get started, go to Tweriod and sign up with your Twitter account. Note that the time zone is determined according to your Twitter profile's settings, so make sure it's correct. After signing in, go to your dashboard and click on My Analysis to get a free premium analysis. On the results page, you'll see which time periods give you the most exposure on weekends and weekdays. For example, the Twitter account below has the most exposure on weekdays from 5 to 7 PM and 8 to 9 PM. On weekends, this account gets the most exposure from 5 to 6 PM and 8 to 10 PM. On your dashboard, you can also see when your followers are online. The results below show that followers are active between the same time periods on weekdays and weekends. Now you know the peak time periods for your followers on weekdays and weekends. In the next section you'll discover how to schedule tweets for these periods. #2: Set Up a Posting Schedule in Buffer A scheduling tool like Buffer can save you a lot of time with your Twitter account. Here's how to set up your own scheduling plan. After you sign in with your Twitter account, click on the Schedule menu. Make sure the time zone matches the settings of your Twitter account. According to when your followers are most active, set up a posting schedule for weekdays and weekends. It's up to you to decide how often you want to post content. You may want to experiment with different posting schedules to see what works best for you. Buffer has a beta feature that will identify the best times to post during the day by analyzing your past 5,000 interactions (likes, favorites, clicks, etc.) and similar profiles in the same time zone. On the Schedule page, scroll down and click on the Try Our Optimal Timing Tool (Beta) link. You can specify how many times you want to post per day, and the tool will calculate the optimal times for posting. Click on the Submit button. Next, you'll see a list of optimal times for you to post on Twitter, according to Buffer. Pro tip: Revise these peak times regularly, since your audience changes over time. Focus on optimizing your posting schedule by using data from Twitter analytics and Buffer. Before you move on to the next step, spend some time scheduling tweets. Here is a great guide to finding high-quality content to share on Twitter. #3: Fill Your Buffer Queue Using IFTTT

Launch Strategy: A Case Study in How to Move People to Action

Launch Strategy: A Case Study in How to Move People to Action

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you planning to release a book, podcast, or other product? Want to make your launch a success? To discover how he launched his latest bestselling book, I interview Michael Hyatt. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Michael Hyatt, author of Platform and co-author of the new book, Living Forward. He's also the host of the This Is Your Life podcast and he blogs at MichaelHyatt.com. In his prior life, Michael was the CEO and chairman of book publisher Thomas Nelson. Michael explores how he launched his latest Wall Street Journal and USA Today bestseller, Living Forward: A Proven Plan to Stop Drifting and Get the Life You Want. You'll discover how to create a launch plan for any project. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Launch Strategy Why write a physical book in the digital age? Michael has Living Forward available as an audio book, an ebook, and a print book. Since everyone talks about digital books, you'd think physical books are obsolete, Michael says. The truth is ebooks are only 25% of the market; the other 75% are physical books. Publishing only in digital format would mean missing the vast majority of the potential market. Furthermore, as of now, you don't really have a chance to reach any of the major bestsellers lists unless you publish a traditional book, he adds. The New York Times has an ebook bestsellers list, but those are really only for digital editions of physical books. You also don't have much chance of getting any major media unless you publish a physical book, because most of the gatekeepers in traditional media want to see a print book. Finally, an ebook doesn't have the same cultural authority as a traditional hardcover book. There are a lot of reasons to write a book, but Michael doesn't know of anything that can give you more authority in your niche than having a published book. An ebook is better than nothing, but it's not as good as a traditionally published hardcover book, he says. There are other benefits to being a bestselling author. If you're a speaker, you can be introduced with that moniker. It also enables you to increase the prices of whatever you're selling and helps with distribution. There's a limited amount of shelf space in conventional bookstores. They are risk-averse in what they order, because they get stuck with books they can't sell. Even though they can return unsold books to the publisher, it's just a hassle, he says. Once your book gets on the bestsellers list, the retailers that didn't initially order your book have to have it all of a sudden. Listen to the show to learn more about Michael's 35-year background in publishing. About Living Forward Michael says Living Forward is about creating a life plan. Michael wanted to help people stop drifting through life, become intentional, and start designing the outcomes they want. He learned these things when he started working with an executive coach around 2000. After he became a divisional manager at Thomas Nelson, Michael and his team were working like crazy to build up the division. They got to number one in 18 months, but the cost was life balance. When Michael told his friend, author John Maxwell, that he was looking for a coach, John introduced him to Daniel Harkavy, the CEO of Building Champions. Daniel became his coach for a decade, as well as a good friend. One of the first things Daniel taught Michael was how to create a written life plan. His life plan was so transformational that Michael began to write about it on his blog. A while later,

How to Create Social Media Contests That Convert

How to Create Social Media Contests That Convert

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Looking for ways to improve your social media contests? Want to know what works for other businesses? Whether you want to build an email list or grow your follower base, social media contests are a great way to engage your audience and significantly boost conversions. In this article you'll discover how three businesses ran successful social media contests and learn how to incorporate their tactics into your own contests. Listen to this article: 3 Successful Social Media Contests for Inspiration The Prepared Pantry, an Idaho-based specialty grocery store, sells baking mixes, kitchen tools, and gourmet foods. The store ran a smart sweepstakes contest, enticing fans to enter its social media contest by offering a top-of-the-line panini maker. To enter, fans simply had to give their name and email, like the company's Facebook page, and share and tweet out the contest. The Prepared Pantry's campaign received 4,392 impressions and captured 1,972 entries. That's a conversion rate of 44.8%! A conversion rate over 40% is excellent. After this one campaign, the company now has almost 2,000 new email subscribers. TopmaQ is a New Zealand–based company that sells tools, construction equipment, and building products. Fans were offered a chance to win a wheelbarrow full of tools - what a creative incentive! For a chance to win, fans entered their email and liked and shared TopmaQ's Facebook page. TopmaQ's creative giveaway resulted in 8,798 impressions, captured 2,296 email addresses, and finished with a conversion rate of 26%. With the extensive reach and high number of entries, TopmaQ clearly picked a prize that resonated with their target audience. Core Entertainment, an Ontario-based entertainment company, holds over 400 events each year. One lucky winner was offered a private suite for an upcoming concert featuring country music star Garth Brooks. To enter, fans supplied their email and liked and shared the campaign for a chance to win. This social media contest was seen by 3,549 people, captured 1,062 email entries, and resulted in a conversion rate of 29.9%. With impressive reach and over 1,000 new email subscribers, Core Entertainment certainly knocked it out of the park with this campaign. Replicate the Success of These Social Contests for Your Business You've just seen three examples of highly successful social media marketing contests spanning the grocery, hardware, and entertainment industries. Hopefully, you're already considering what prize you might give away for your next social contest, or how you might promote it to your audience. Now here comes the best part. Each of the preceding contests did the same five things to set their campaign up for success. Read on to learn what these steps are and how you can replicate them for your next contest. #1: Make Your Contest Mobile-Friendly Mobile is a must for a successful social contest. Facebook boasts 1.04 billion daily active users, with 934 million of those on mobile. This is a big number, but should come as no surprise. In fact, according to Mary Meeker's 2015 Internet Trends Report, U.S. adults now spend more time every day browsing the Internet from mobile phones than they do from computers. If your social contest isn't mobile-friendly, you're missing out on over half of your potential entries. #2: Promote With Linkshare Posts Creating social contests is great, but how will they help you capture new leads if they can't be found? Promote your contest via email marketing, sharing on social networks, writing a blog post, or even word-of-mouth marketing. Additionally, share your campaign in a linkshare post on Facebook. To promote your campaign in a linkshare post, paste the direct link of your campaign in a Facebook status. As you do, you'll notice that Facebook automatically renders a preview of your campaign, including an image (just like the post for the Prepared Pantry above).

Facebook Reactions: What Marketers Need to Know

Facebook Reactions: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Have you seen the new Facebook reactions? Wondering how they'll affect your Facebook page? Facebook reactions let Facebook users go beyond liking a post by allowing them to choose from six emojis that show different emotions. In this article I'll explore how Facebook reactions work, and how your Facebook page can get the most from them. Listen to this article: Facebook Reactions for Fans The new Facebook reactions work pretty easily for users. When users hover over a post's Like button in the Facebook news feed, a personal profile timeline, or a Facebook page timeline, they will be able to choose from one of the new six Facebook reactions. Everyone can breathe a sigh of relief that Facebook reactions do not include a Dislike button. Hence, people cannot dislike your latest post (product, service, content, etc.). These reactions will simply allow expressions of like, love, laugh, wowed, saddened, or angered by your post. The feature will work similarly for mobile users, but users will hold down the Like button instead of hovering over it. Some mobile app users have noted that you must restart or update your app to get the new feature to work. Others have had to log out of their account and log back in again. Facebook Reactions for Pages From a Facebook page admin perspective, a few things will change. For starters, you'll see in your notifications that people are reacting to your posts instead of just liking them. On the posts themselves, you'll see an array of icons representing the different reactions that people have left on the post. On older posts, you'll see the new icon that represents likes, and on newer posts, you'll see all of the newer icons representing the different reactions that people have. People can also go back to older posts and add new reactions. You can click on the link to see the breakdown of which fans had specific reactions so you can see who likes, loves, and has other feelings about your post. Since page posts are public, it's important to understand that everyone can see the breakdowns of Facebook reactions, including people who are not admins and not even fans of the page. This means that you can go to other pages and see the breakdowns of reactions on their posts as well. This can be useful for competitor research as you can get a good feel for how people will react to specific types of content, status updates, and announcements – especially since you can get a quick summary of the reactions right at the top without having to scroll through the entire list. Note that only Facebook page admins will see the Liked / Invite buttons. If you are not a page admin, you only see Add Friend / Follow buttons next to people's names. So far, Facebook reactions only work on the Like button for the main posts themselves, but not on comments. So don't expect to react to comments anytime soon. In terms of your Facebook page's Insights, you can see the full breakdown of reactions for each of your posts by finding the post and clicking on it. There, you can see the full post details, including the new Facebook reactions counts. From an Insights perspective, Facebook reactions do not count as negative feedback. In other words, an angry reaction isn't categorized in the same area as a Hide Post, Report as Spam, Hide All Post, or Unlike Page. Hence, any reaction can be considered a good one. Now that you know how Facebook reactions work for your fans and for your page, here are some ways to get the most from them. #1: Encourage Fans to Use Reactions People love trying new things. Simply invite your fans to test out the new reactions on your page today. Not only will it teach your fans how to use this feature, but it will also boost your page's overall engagement and organic reach. For example, I initially planned to boost my post to test Facebook reactions, but I ended up canceling the promotion.

SEO Terminology – Making Sense of the Terms You Need to Know When It Comes to SEO

by Element 212 @ Element212

SEO Terminology – don’t let it scare you! So you’re ready to get your website in front of the eyeballs of some of the millions of internet users searching for your products or services. Great! But oh no, what’s your plan for bots, cloaking, favicons, HTTP, naked links, PPC, SSL, CTR, CPA, and the many other

The post SEO Terminology – Making Sense of the Terms You Need to Know When It Comes to SEO appeared first on Element212.

Establishing Trust: How to Build Relationships With Social Media

Establishing Trust: How to Build Relationships With Social Media

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you wondering how to best build a platform with social media? Do you want to learn how to build trusted relationships online? To explore how to establish trust with social media, I interview Chris Brogan for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Chris Brogan, CEO of Human Business Works and author of several books including The Impact Equation. Chris shares his experiences in building trust online, and the importance of having a blog if you want to grow the reach and exposure of your business. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Building Trust, Online How social media has changed Chris talks about his views on how social media has changed over the last 3 years. He shares that when he co-founded an event called Podcamp in 2006, he believed podcasting and video blogging were going to change the world. You'll hear Chris share what matters today in social media and how he feels podcasting has recently made a comeback. He explains that email marketing isn't dead—it's bad email marketing that's dead. Instead we need to be more personable and relationship-minded. Chris describes how platforms have come and gone and why it's community that really matters. Listen to the show to find out why community has stayed the same since Chris started. How to make your social media audiences count Chris talks about why only having a Twitter feed is like living in a hotel room and thinking you've made it. He shares the reasons why we need a place to call our own. Chris explains the importance of having a blog or a website. You need to have a "primary home base," as it's the ultimate centerpiece that you need to use any social platforms. If you don't have one, you're throwing away your opportunity for business and influence. Listen to the show to find out how Chris's blog has attracted business opportunities. How to obtain "reach" Chris shares how the larger structure of The Impact Equation is the idea that if you have really good goals, they will drive unique ideas. Next, you need a platform where people can see those ideas. You need a human element or a network of values. You need people who care about the information you share online. These are the components of social media success. Chris explains his definitions of reach and exposure. He describes ways of achieving audience capture. When you have a basic website but don't have an email newsletter, you have a passive connection to your audience. When you only have a Twitter account, you have a very passive connection with your audience. This is because people don't know how to get back to the "meat" of what you're saying. Listen to the show to find out great ways to increase your reach. How to gain trust online Chris shares the common problems people face when it comes to being human across the web. We are born looking for faces and need to see people on the other side of our communication. You'll hear why your "About" page is relevant and it's not just about logos. Chris explains how historically business was based on face-to-face networking and the difference now that things are moving online. Chris talks about the "comma problem" and how marketers can improve their email pitches. Learn why it's not simply about pressing the +1 on complete strangers. As Guy Kawasaki said, "Nobody is from nowhere." If somebody is of value to you, you find ways to express that and it'll go a lot further than hitting the +1 button.

How to Manage Your Facebook Page Effectively

How to Manage Your Facebook Page Effectively

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you manage at least one Facebook business page? Are you using all the admin features? Facebook pages include many tools to help marketers and business owners get the most out of their business presence. In this article I'll share how to use Facebook's features, tools and settings to manage your business page effectively. Listen to this article: #1: Access Your Facebook Pages There are a few ways to access your Facebook pages. To see all of the pages you are linked to as an administrator, editor, moderator, advertiser or analyst, go to your Pages bookmarks. From there, click on the link to the page you want. To use your Facebook page to like other Facebook pages or comment on posts, click to log in as your page. Plus, select the settings wheel icon to add specific pages to your favorites in the left sidebar of your Facebook screen. Alternatively, access your pages using the drop-down arrow in the menu at the top of your Facebook screen. #2: Navigate Your Page Menu At the top of your Facebook page, there's a menu to direct you to the main features of your page. You should see this menu when logged in as your personal profile or as your page. The first item in the menu, Page, will take you back to your Facebook page from your Messages, Notifications, Insights, Publishing Tools and Settings. Here are the rest of the features. Engage With Users Privately Through Messages If you'd like, enable Messages in your General page settings. This will allow Facebook users to send private messages to your page. Note: You can only reply to messages your page has received. You cannot send messages (as your page) to people who have not messaged you. A great feature in Messages is saved replies. Create a template for common responses you can easily personalize to send through your page's private messaging. Click on any of your messages create a new reply. Check Notifications for Recent Engagement Notifications give you a quick summary of people who have engaged with your page, as well as their interaction. If someone asks for your contact information using a prompt on your Facebook page, like the one shown below, you'll find it in Requests under the Notifications section. See a full timeline of activity related to your page, including when other people or pages mention your page and when others share your page's posts, under the Notifications section in Activity. Review Your Analytics With Insights Insights are your Facebook page's analytics. This is where you'll learn more about your fan page audience growth and engagement. Insights show you which page posts get the most engagement, and whether your fans match your ideal customer base (age ranges, gender and location). Plus, learn how people discover your page by clicking the Visits tab. Schedule and Publish Posts Through Publishing Tools The Publishing Tools feature lets you create Facebook updates to be published immediately, schedule posts to be published at a future time and draft posts to save for later. To publish a status, photo, video, offer, event or milestone immediately, go to the Published Posts section and click the Create button at the top right. To schedule a status, photo or video post, go to the Scheduled Posts section and click the Create button at the top right. Use the drop-down next to the Publish button to get schedule, backdate or draft options. Be sure to review your analytics on the Published Posts tab as well. Search by keyword for specific updates to see their statistics. In addition to reach, it includes the name of the application used to publish the post to your page. Use this data to see which posts have the most engagement, and determine if posts shared through your page have more reach than those shared through third-party tools. #3: Configure Page Settings Your page's settings allow you to control everything from visibi...

LinkedIn Marketing: New Features to Enhance Your LinkedIn Results

LinkedIn Marketing: New Features to Enhance Your LinkedIn Results

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use LinkedIn for your business? Are you wondering how LinkedIn can help your online marketing? To learn more about the new capabilities of LinkedIn and what they mean for marketers, I interview Viveka von Rosen for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Viveka von Rosen, founder of Linked Into Business and author of the new book, LinkedIn Marketing: An Hour a Day. Viveka shares insights into what's new with LinkedIn and how marketers can cash in on all that LinkedIn is doing. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: LinkedIn Marketing How LinkedIn Company Pages Are Evolving Viveka shares how LinkedIn is becoming more autonomous with their Company Pages. Although functionality has not changed much on LinkedIn Company Pages and they still need to build a more dynamic social destination, the look and design have changed recently. Company Pages are more vibrant. There's a new banner photo across the top, which adds to the branding possibilities and the attractiveness of Company Pages. Want to create a banner? Make your photo 646 x 220 pixels in size. This new design means that people will go beyond one-on-one connections and follow Company Pages. Listen to the show to hear how the new Company Page allows you to build a business following that could lead to a personal following. How Targeted Updates Work Viveka explains how LinkedIn has focused more on Targeted Updates. When sharing updates on your Company Page, you can now target the audience you want to reach. For example, you can choose to share specific updates with everyone who is following you or choose a specific industry or location. And LinkedIn also provides companies with statistics on their results when sharing these updates. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4NqapW7FE6I Listen to the show to find out more about the statistics in your company updates. How to Drive Followers With Your Company Page You can put a Company Follow widget on your website to drive people directly to your company profile. Of course, you can also put the link to your Company Page in your email signature. Viveka recommends letting people know why they should follow your Company Page. You need to tell people what they are going to get out of it. You'll discover how content on an active LinkedIn Company Page has a greater propensity to show up in the LinkedIn Today section of the website. Listen to the show to hear how LinkedIn Today can work for you. What Is the Influencer Program? At present on LinkedIn, there are about 152 influencers whom you can follow on LinkedIn. These thought leaders include President Barack Obama, Governor Mitt Romney, Jeff Weiner (CEO of LinkedIn), Guy Kawasaki and Arianna Huffington (Huffington Post). Viveka explains how you get a sense of interaction with these individuals, as the articles they are sharing are more than just updates. One of the advantages of being an influencer is you are able to write longer blog-style articles that get shared. Viveka says that right now, LinkedIn is choosing who gets to be an influencer. It's uncertain when this is going to be available to everyone else. It's LinkedIn's way of trying to create a more content-rich platform (people tend to think of LinkedIn as a "Rolodex on steroids"). It's a great opportunity to get some inside information from these influencers. Listen to the show to find out how you can share this content across other social networks.

5 Useful Tools to Hack Your Social Media Growth

by Christopher Jan Benitez @ GetResponse Blog – Online Marketing Tips

Growth hacking is all the rage nowadays, and with good reason. With the growing demand to generate sales for your online business, not to mention the cutthroat competition that you are up against, you are forced to use everything in your power to make it happen. However, unless you have unlimited funds to spend on […]

The post 5 Useful Tools to Hack Your Social Media Growth appeared first on GetResponse Blog - Online Marketing Tips.

Sign Up For Hostgator

by Edward @ Search Engine Optimization For Business

To sign up for Hostgator:

The post Sign Up For Hostgator appeared first on Search Engine Optimization For Business.

8 Collaboration Tools to Improve Your Content

8 Collaboration Tools to Improve Your Content

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you part of a team that collaborates on content? Want tools to make the collaboration process more efficient? Whether you're working on blog post or creating social media updates, the more people involved, the richer the results can be. Using collaboration tools makes the process smooth and seamless. In this article I'll share eight collaboration tools to improve your productivity. Listen to this article: #1: Map Out Content Using MindMeister MindMeister is an effective brain-mapping tool that allows you to visually break down complex concepts and show how each idea flows into another. It's perhaps the fastest, easiest way to get a point across effectively. MindMeister is browser-based and available on mobile apps. There are a variety of templates and numerous additional features for brainstorming, project plans and more. Map out your content strategy with your team, no matter where they're located. Price: Free plan gives you access to three maps. Note: MindMeister collaboration features are included in the free plan. There are multiple premium plan options, starting at $36 for 6 months with a 30-day free trial. #2: Brainstorm in Real Time With Scribblar Scribblar is an educational tool that can also be used for collaborative brainstorming sessions. Primarily an educational tool, Scribblar is a favorite among students and teachers for its ability to create multiple "rooms" that allow you to collaborate in real time. Plus, you can text and audio chat during the process. While there is an obvious academic tone, Scribblar is a great tool for creative people who excel when they let their ideas flow in a free-form conversation. When working on your content plan, eliminate endless emails and conference calls. Just jump onto Scribblar and work on the same dashboard together. Price: A very limited free plan (2 users, 1 room) and a variety of premium plans that start at $9 a month are available. Note: Chatwoo can be a good free alternative. It's online chat room software which is completely free. You can use it to collaborate with your team (on a private corporate site) or with your site visitors. #3: Compile Research on Cyfe Cyfe is a multi-purpose research and productivity dashboard that lets you collect data, create to-do lists, archive search results and more. It helps you monitor social media mentions and activity too. For companies that need a bit more oomph in their collaborative tools, Cyfe provides a long feature list to help users work together in the cloud. Price: There's a free plan with the option to upgrade to premium ($19 per month; $14 a month if paid annually). #4: Plan Editorial on GatherContent Specifically designed for collaborating, GatherContent is every social media manager's and blog editor's dream. It allows you to create an effective project or editorial calendar that has everything in the same place, and is organized through the same dashboard. This ultra-organized information keeps everyone on the team on the same page. GatherContent is easy to use and minimizes the task of managing workflow, no matter how many people you invite to be a part of the process. Never cross wires or miss deadlines again. Price: $79 per month with a 30-day free trial. Note: Check out CoSchedule as another option. #5: Manage Projects on Trello If you need a simple way to set tasks for everyone on your team, Trello is probably the best project management tool for this purpose. Once you have a plan, create boards and then pin cards with tasks to each one. Then, write either checklists or standard text instructions for what each task entails, and assign those cards to different team members. When the work is done, attach documents to the completed card if you like and list it as complete. Also, @tag team members to quickly get their attention and connect with them. Price: Free. Note: Also check out Wrike for easy project management.

How to Create a Promoted Pin Campaign on a Budget

How to Create a Promoted Pin Campaign on a Budget

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to add Promoted Pins to your marketing mix? Are you wondering how to budget for a Promoted Pin campaign? You don't have to spend a lot of money on Promoted Pins for them to be effective. Because they have long-term visibility, they're a sound addition to your Pinterest marketing. In this article, I'll share how to build an effective, affordable promoted-pin campaign on Pinterest. #1: Start With Effective Pins While promoted pins are an excellent way to get the most visibility for your advertising dollar, it all starts with crafting a great social media image. Based on your business specialty or niche, create images that speak to your audience. Listen to this article: Also, use tall images to make sure your pins get noticed. They stand out better and command the attention of Pinterest users. Give yourself a selection of images and pin them ahead of time, so you have choices if you decide to test out various types of visual content using different small budgets. Once you decide what image you want to use, here's how to craft an ad for your promoted pin. Note: Promoted pins are still rolling out in the United States. If you don't have access yet, join the waitlist. #2: Choose Your Objective Go to your Pinterest profile and click the settings button next to Edit Profile to get to promoted pins in the drop-down menu. Once you click the Promote button, you'll see that Pinterest offers you two choices: Boost Engagement or Get Traffic. To get maximum benefit from your promoted pin ad campaign, choose Get Traffic to Your Website. Keep in mind this is a future strategy that does the promotion backwards. While you tell Pinterest that you want traffic to come to your website, what you really mean is that you want engagement for your pins. #3: Create the Campaign Give your campaign a name and then decide on what date or dates you want your promoted pin to be seen. Since the budget is low, you don't want to stretch it out too long. If it's your first time promoting a pin, use Saturday as your day. The more you use promoted pins, the more likely you'll find the best day for your brand. Keep fine-tuning this aspect of your campaigns. Now, decide how much money you would like to spend each day. I recommend spending $10 for one day or spread $10 over two days ($5 per day). #4: Select Keywords for Visibility The next step is to pick which pin you would like to promote. Then use keywords to tell Pinterest where you would like it to be seen. This is one of the most important things you can do to get your pin noticed. Keywords should include everything that anyone searching for what you have to offer would think of. So make sure you hit all of the right niche-specific terms for your pin. Depending on your niche, you can see an estimate of how many weekly impressions your pin may get. #5: Determine the Cost Per Click After you set your keywords, decide how much money you're willing to spend for each person who clicks on your pin to be directed to your website. This is where you may think you need a large budget to get good traffic. However, we're not after traffic right now. We want the engagement in the form of repins. Come up with a low cost-per-click (CPC) number. I usually offer 15 to 25 cents per click. A low CPC ensures you won't run out of money if people get click-happy. #6: Review Campaign Results Once your campaign is complete, review the results and wait for the resulting traffic. For example, I only spent $5 on the campaign below. It received a lot of engagement and impressions at the time, and I'm still getting traffic from it today. The point of this whole strategy is to turn small amounts of money into traffic generators for your website in the future. The 42 people who repinned this pin will show it to their followers. When their followers repin it, it opens up new reach for you on Pinterest.

Haters: How to Deal With Haters and Trolls of Your Business

Haters: How to Deal With Haters and Trolls of Your Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you ever been publicly criticized or mocked for something that you did? Are you wondering how you can deal with this type of negativity when it happens on social media? To learn about haters and how to deal with them, I interview Marcus Sheridan for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Marcus Sheridan, who blogs at The Sales Lion, is host of The Mad Marketing Podcast and is a partner at River Pools & Spas. Marcus is a consultant and keynote speaker. In fact, he was the closing keynote at Social Media Marketing World and he simply killed it! Marcus shares the various types of critics you might attract and how you can deal with them. You'll discover the differences among haters, trolls and critics and what to do when you are under attack. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Haters in Business Haters are the type of people who seem to get great joy out of saying nasty things about you or your company online. If you haven't dealt with haters yet, the chance of dealing with one in the future is pretty good. I'm going to share a story with you that happened recently to us, and my hope is that it will prepare you for these types of people. If you let them have their way, then they succeed and you fail. This will impede your progress. The story is about an entertainment piece that was made for Social Media Marketing World 2014. Phil Mershon, who is my event director, created an original jingle called "Let's Get Social," which was sung by Mary McCoy from Continuum Marketing Services. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=itvvFfeLh84 The song was performed just before Jay Baer took the stage with a panel, which included Ted Rubin, Nichole Kelly and Jeffrey Rohrs. The panel discussion was entitled "Have We Lost The Social in Social Media?" This particular piece of entertainment was designed to be funny, and was to set the stage for the panel discussion. Even though it was corny, attendees got into it. Although on the video, you can't grasp the audience's reaction. The video was originally released on the event page for Social Media Examiner, on my personal Facebook profile and on Social Media Examiner's Facebook page. It was never intended to be released to the public. The day after it was uploaded, it started to go crazy viral. The first day alone it received 75,000 views on YouTube. The number of negative and nasty comments on YouTube was unbelievable. Phil and I had a discussion as to whether to close off the comments, but I didn't feel that was appropriate. You'll hear the reasons why I kept the comments open, and what I hoped would happen. An article was then published by Gawker called The Devil Is Real, and He Made a Song About Social Media Marketing. Gawker is a gossip blog that has a section called Valley Wag, which covers the social space. This very negative post spurred a lot of the video's views and negative comments on YouTube. Following this blog post, Mashable, Huffington Post, Slate and CNET also covered the story. By the Friday of that week, VH1 created this 90-second comedy piece of the video: httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Sv6byr_JKuk To date, our video has been viewed nearly 500,000 times, with just over a 1,000 comments. At one point it ranked #15 worldwide. Someone has even made an acoustic version of it, which is quite good. Now the plus side of it all is that Social Media Marketing World was referenced or linked back to within all...

How to Improve Response for Your Direct Mail Marketing Efforts

by Lakeshore Branding @ Lakeshore Branding

These days, with email and instant messaging, the only physical mail we get seems to be junk mail. But if you are a business trying to market your goods or services, how do you separate your advertising materials from the rest of the junk mail that people find piled up in front of their doorsteps? In essence, the answer lies in being able to make your marketing materials stand out from the rest. Basically, people should be excited about receiving your advertisement. What can you give potential clients that can make them excited about doing business with your company versus another company? Here is how to improve response for your direct mail marketing efforts. Firstly, your direct mail marketing campaign can’t be bland. Boringness is the best way to kill a direct mail marketing campaign. When someone sees their pile of junk mail after a long day of work, yours should be the one they pull out first and set - Read the full article

Google Analytics: How to Know If Your Marketing is Working

Google Analytics: How to Know If Your Marketing is Working

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Google Analytics? Want to know how data can help improve your marketing? To learn how to measure what's working with Google Analytics, I interview Christopher Penn. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Christopher Penn, the VP of marketing technology at SHIFT Communications (a PR firm). He co-founded PodCamp with Chris Brogan and is co-host of the Marketing Over Coffee podcast. His brand-new book is Marketing Blue Belt: From Data Zero to Marketing Hero. Christopher will talk about how to use Google Analytics to improve your marketing. You'll discover how to set goals, and analyze and measure your data. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Google Analytics How Christopher got into data and analytics Christopher came into the marketing space through working in technology. In 2003 he joined a student loan company startup as the director of technology. In the startup world, you do many different jobs. Christopher explains that in addition to being the CIO and CTO, he ended up doing a lot of the marketing, data collection and reporting to stakeholders. Over time, he realized  he enjoyed the marketing more than running the technology. Listen to the show to hear how Christopher used podcasting and social media to stand out from larger companies. The importance of analytics Christopher believes there's a perception that doing analytics is difficult and requires a math degree. However, he relates analytics to cooking. He says you don't need to be a professional chef to make a decent breakfast—you just need to follow the basic recipe. If you want to be a professional chef, that's a different story. You should have a culinary degree and years of experience. Data and analytics are the same way, Christopher explains. If you want to be able to intelligently report on what you're doing, it's relatively easy to get started. If you want to get super-sophisticated, you'll probably want a statistics background down the road. In terms of what's readily available, particularly for social media, there are four layers of measurement: The media layer with social tools and analytics about audience reach and engagement. The web layer, where after engaging on social media, someone interacts on your website. The middle layer is marketing automation, which is tracking engagement at an individual level. The bottom layer is your sales and CRM. Christopher believes the first step toward strategy is measurement and data. After you analyze the data, which is the art and science of telling what happened, then you need to derive insights from it. Once you determine why certain things happened, then you can figure out what to do next. Listen to the show to learn why and how to use benchmarking on Google Analytics.  Simple things marketers can do with Google Analytics Marketers need to start by defining goals and goal values in their analytics. That changes the application from "what happened" to "how it's impacting your business." For example, choose a goal, like newsletter signups. Then determine what dollar value you put on a newsletter subscriber (what a subscriber spends on your website). Once you do that, you'll start to see things like estimated revenue of traffic. This is the value of traffic coming from social media and search to your site. Before delving into specific features of the platform, Christopher recommends taking the free courses offered by Google Analytics Academy. Do the four courses in this order:

How Video Marketing Creates SEO Results

by Kevin Hill @ Motor Vehicle Network

“No longer just an interesting add-on, video has become an important feature for anyone concerned with SEO, conversion rates, or brand recognition.” – Rob Toledo, Shutterstock Following are four key SEO (Search Engine Optimization) metrics outlining how to boost search engine rankings by using video in your marketing strategy. 1. Videos Rank in SERPs (Search...

The post How Video Marketing Creates SEO Results appeared first on Motor Vehicle Network.

Facebook Marketing for Small Business: What You Need to Know

Facebook Marketing for Small Business: What You Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is your business on Facebook? Are you wondering how a small business can benefit from Facebook marketing? To learn about the opportunities for small businesses, I interview Ramon Ray for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Ramon Ray, the author of The Facebook Guide to Small Business Marketing. He's also the founder of Small Biz Technology and the guy behind a great event called Small Business Summit. Ramon shares his tips and techniques when it comes to Facebook marketing. You'll learn how to grow a larger following on Facebook and turn Facebook engagement into sales. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Marketing The marketing opportunity for small businesses When it comes to business, although Facebook is a great networking tool, Ramon believes that the most important thing any small business should do is start with a website and focus on email marketing. Facebook is the biggest social network out there and it's where your prospects, customers, friends and family are. Not only will Facebook help you find specific people, it also allows you to target these people. Ramon explains how Facebook having access to so much rich information makes it very simple for them to approach you and ask whom you want to advertise to. They are able to narrow it down. With Facebook, you can do this with a good degree of granularity, which works well for many people. Listen to the show to find out how marketing has changed from 10 years ago and how it's a lot more economical now. Some ways to grow a larger following for small business owners on Facebook Ramon lists three things that small businesses should do to grow a larger following on Facebook. Be consistent with your posting Be relevant Be excited about it Remember people aren't necessarily on Facebook to buy, per se. They're there to have fun. Many small business owners on Facebook don't realize the interconnectedness among people. You'll hear an example of how interaction can lead to more of your fans being drawn to your Facebook Page. Ramon believes that there is no other platform that allows you to create deeper engagement than Facebook does. When it comes to advertising a post, there are so many different ways to do it. Small business owners use Facebook as an engagement platform. Listen to the show to find out how Facebook can help you connect not only to individuals but their networks as well. How Facebook groups differ from LinkedIn groups Ramon states that although LinkedIn has some big, powerful groups, he believes the advantage that Facebook has goes back to friends of friends. This is where Facebook might have the edge. For example, with regards to LinkedIn groups, marketers talk about how to build the group and how you get the LinkedIn alerts. However, when you create a group on Facebook, you can make it private or public. In Ramon's opinion, what's nice is that overall, you are still operating in the realm of Facebook. The main differentiator when deciding whether to create a Facebook group or a LinkedIn group is, "What is your audience using?" When it comes to Facebook groups, you have to keep in mind that some are public and some are private. And Facebook has a very powerful search feature. Ramon talks about the rules of engagement for Facebook groups when it comes to business owners looking for opportunities. Don't dive in there and start selling your products.

Video Authenticity: How to Perform On-Camera

Video Authenticity: How to Perform On-Camera

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to connect with your audience via video? Looking for tips to convey confidence and authority? To explore how to improve your on-camera performance, I interview David H. Lawrence XVII. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview David H. Lawrence XVII, an actor and professional voice artist. You may recognize him as the Puppet Master from the TV show Heroes. He specializes in audio and video communication and his course is called Camera Ready U, where he helps actors and marketers with their on-camera performances. David explores ways to be yourself in front of the camera. You'll discover how to prepare for a video performance. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Video Authenticity David's Story David started as a voiceover talent and moved into on-camera work. In both cases, after David found success, people asked him how he achieved that success. At events such as Social Media Marketing World, David talked about simple things people can do on-camera to be authoritative or authentic. For instance, he talks about how to hold your hands, what to do with your eyes, or how to hold your posture. After speaking, David would be mobbed by people asking about his course, so he decided to create one. As David developed his course, he discovered he knew so much more than he realized about his area of expertise. David created an inventory of all of the things he knew and that became the Camera Ready U curriculum. The same thing happened with voiceovers. David started by teaching commercials and ultimately created 36 different classes for VO2GoGo, covering not just the art of voiceover, but also the business and technology aspects. Listen to the show to discover how long David has been in the entertainment industry. Least Important Factors for Video Videos don't have to be perfect. Comb your hair, brush your teeth, put on makeup, wear your cool outfit, and whatever else you need to establish your base. After you do that, the key is not to be a better version of yourself, but your most authentic self with all of your flaws. That's what makes you human. Don't kick yourself if you flub a word or don't remember to turn your shoulder. People will connect with you when you're simply being yourself. And you can't be yourself when you're constantly trying to be that better version of yourself. The notion of perfection gets in the way of being real. Also, your equipment doesn't matter. If you want to get very artsy, you might need a more expensive camera. But you don't even need to buy a camera. You can start vlogging immediately with your smartphone. You may need to add a light, but you can simply set up a table lamp. Plus, you might want to get a $20 lavaliere microphone from Amazon. And that's it. You can do whatever you want with that minimal setup. Listen to the show to hear David and me discuss how people can hold themselves back with an "I can't until I..." mentality. Authenticity On-Camera Have you ever watched a video and thought, "This guy's a bag of wind" or "She's fake"? It's because they've spent too much time trying to present and too little time being themselves. The people viewers connect with most often are those who seem down to earth and genuinely interested in the subject. When you stop worrying about how you look and sound, you can start thinking about the content. And when you can focus on your content, viewers feel you're speaking to them. You make a connection. When you're completely interested, immersed, and can't wait to help people with their needs, your authenticity meter goes through the roof.

26 Tips to Improve Your Pinterest Marketing

26 Tips to Improve Your Pinterest Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Could your Pinterest marketing use a jumpstart? Are you curious about what's working for other businesses? Tweaking techniques that have been successful for others can help you drive traffic, connect with your target audience, and increase sales. In this article, you'll discover 26 tips to improve your Pinterest marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Share Pin It for Later Links The Pin It button encourages users to pin content from your site onto their own boards. Engagement is captured even when users aren't on the platform. The same idea holds true for Pin It for Later links. You can post Pin It for Later links, along with the prompt "Pin it for Later" across social media. To create a Pin It for Later link, attach the URL of the pin you want users to save, add it to a post on social media after explaining what it is, and attach it to the phrase "Pin it for later!" This is a great way to drive traffic to Pinterest and build up repins. #2: Add 20-30 Keywords in Promoted Pins Keywords are the most important targeting feature you can use with promoted pins. Pinterest recommends that you use 20-30 keywords per promoted pin. That's just enough to get you noticed, but not so many that you're showing your content to the wrong people. Using a large number of keywords can help you cover all of the broad, specific, short, and long keywords you need. You'll show up better in searches when users are looking for content like yours, and it helps ensure that your pin is placed in the right category. These keywords won't show up on promoted pins; they work instead like targeting criteria, matching your content with the people looking for it. Think outside the box. Dollar Shave, for example, recently promoted their razors for Father's Day gifts, and attached a Father's Day keyword even though it's not a direct description of the product. #3: Feature Multiple Products in Single Pins Featuring multiple products in your pins can help them to get more engagement. This tactic can add value to a single pin for two reasons: first, you show users how many amazing things you have to offer; and second, you have a better chance of appealing to more users by featuring more options. You can feature multiple complementary products (like an assembled outfit from your collection) or show multiple uses for a single product (like six types of crafts that use mason jars). Not only does this increase the chance of appealing to more users, but it can also lead to larger sales. #4: Capitalize on Image Height Pinterest's pages are full of vibrant, high-quality, colorful images. So how do you make yours stand out? Image size (or image dimension) matters a great deal. While Pinterest automatically scales all images you upload to match the exact width, you choose the height of your images. Vertical pins (pins that appear taller) perform better on Pinterest. It's recommended that you use image dimensions from about 2:3 and 1.3:5 (with the minimum recommended width being 600 pixels). Note: While you can design pins with the extended dimensions 1.2:8, pins that reach the maximum height don't perform quite as well. #5: Include Text Overlay on Images While descriptions matter, images reign supreme on Pinterest. However, visuals still need a little help sometimes. To catch the attention of users scrolling quickly through feeds, add text overlay directly onto your images to make them stand out and explain why your pin and the content behind it are so valuable. In most cases, text shouldn't make up the majority of the pin. It can, however, be helpful to show off step-by-step tutorials, listicles, or a few words telling pinners what the pin is. Keep the text simple, the phrases short, and all of it easy to read. Bold text can make the description stand out. Plus, make sure the text is strongly contrasting in color from the rest of the image. #6: Choose Light Over Dark Images

How To Protect Your Website – (Tips To Secure Your Site)

by Tony Messer @ Pickaweb

How To Protect Your Website From Being Hacked How would you feel if you woke up one day and your website had been hacked? Maybe your site’s been suspended by your hosting company or even worse it’s disappeared or been replaced by something you definitely don’t want your clients to see. It’s every business owner’s

The post appeared first on Pickaweb!

SearchCap: Google AdWords ad suggestions, ad performance & Doodles

by Barry Schwartz @ SearchCap: Daily Search Engine News Recap

Below is what happened in search today, as reported on and from other places across the web.

The post SearchCap: Google AdWords ad suggestions, ad performance & Doodles appeared first on Search Engine Land.

Supporting Customers With Facebook: What Businesses Need to Know

Supporting Customers With Facebook: What Businesses Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are your customers active on Facebook? Have you got a plan to support your customers via Facebook? To learn how to use Facebook to support customers, I interview Mari Smith. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Mari Smith, the world's leading Facebook marketing expert. She co-authored Facebook Marketing: An Hour a Day and is author of The New Relationship Marketing. Mari also teamed up with Facebook to assist in educational events. Mari will explore a few new updates from Facebook and how to use Facebook for customer service and support. You'll discover how to create a good Facebook experience for your customers. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Supporting Customers With Facebook Recent Updates: Instant Articles and Facebook Messenger Mari believes Instant Articles were inspired by the video autoplay function on Facebook. Instant Articles, which make content more appealing, enticing and engaging, are only visible on the iPhone at this time. Introducing Instant Articles, a new tool for publishers to create fast, interactive articles on Facebook. Posted by Facebook Media on Tuesday, May 12, 2015   Currently there are only nine media partners that can create Instant Articles, which are posts that come alive with audio and movement on the page (animation, video). The New York Times, National Geographic, BuzzFeed, The Atlantic, The Guardian and BBC News are some of the publishers creating these interactive articles. Mari also shares about the changes to Facebook Messenger. At the F8 Conference in March 2015, Facebook announced they're opening up the Messenger API. This means any third-party developer can create an app that will work with Messenger. So if someone sends you a link to something in a Facebook message, it may ask you to install an app when you click on it. Messenger is also integrating with businesses, although there are only a few online merchants doing this as of now. With this functionality, when people make a purchase, Messenger will ask them if they want to get updates for this merchant via Facebook Messenger. That's almost as good as having a person's cell phone number, Mari explains, because there's a high open rate for SMS messages. Using this technology, merchants can make purchase recommendations or send shipment updates via Messenger, for example. It basically opens up the dialog between the business and the customer. Listen to the show to hear how Instant Articles are similar to LinkedIn Publisher. Why businesses should use Facebook for customer service Mari believes Facebook should be part of a business's customer service plan, since most people are already on Facebook and many use Facebook through mobile devices. Mari talks about how she was recently interviewed for a Wall Street Journal article on how companies like JP Morgan and Coca-Cola are turning off voicemail, and cutting millions of dollars in expenses by doing this. Mari thinks it's a sign of the times. The biggest challenge for businesses is that customers have so many different ways to contact them: a tweet or DM on Twitter or a Facebook wall post, comment or direct message. It can be unwieldy. Companies should also look at the features recently added for business pages on Facebook. The newest call to action button on ads is "Call Now." Facebook wants people to call businesses. They realize if a phone is in someone's hand, they can just press the Call button. The challenge is businesses would need to have staff on standby or a system in plac...

Marketing Trends: How to Think Differently and Predict the Future

Marketing Trends: How to Think Differently and Predict the Future

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to stay on top of the latest marketing trends? Looking to tap into the next big trend? To explore marketing trends, I interview Rohit Bhargava. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Rohit Bhargava, the author of Personality Not Included and Likeonomics. He's also the founder and CEO of the Influential Marketing Group. His latest book is Non-Obvious: How to Think Different, Curate Ideas and Predict the Future. In this episode Rohit explores why trends matter to marketers and reveals a few trends. You'll discover what makes something a trend. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Marketing Trends How Rohit became interested in trends Rohit spent many years working at marketing agencies and frequently crossed industries. For example, he'd work for a toothbrush brand in the morning and an enterprise data client in the afternoon. This is how he started making connections among industries and began thinking about trends. Rohit started writing trend reports in 2011. Rohit's experience includes working with Leo Burnett in Australia and Ogilvy in the United States. He did digital strategy and even worked on Intel's first social media guidelines. One of the biggest problems, Rohit explains, is a lot of trends are self-serving. "Imagine I have a company that sells hammers, and then I declare 2015 the year of hammers," he laughs. "How convenient is that?" People declare trends based on whatever they sell so it helps them, but what they point to isn't actually a trend. Rohit considers a trend to be an observation about the accelerating present. That means there are signs of something already happening that will become more important. A trend will either change the way consumers make decisions or change the way companies structure their business models or how they do business. Listen to the show to discover one of the biggest mistakes many trend writers make. Why marketers should care about trends The biggest benefit to knowing about trends, Rohit explains, is to know when to pivot. The term pivot is frequently used improperly. For example, if someone sells bicycles and then becomes a coffee shop, it's not a pivot, it's a completely new business. An actual pivot was seen when BMW, in addition to making cars, decided to start a program called DriveNow in which they rent electric cars. They're tapping into the trend of the sharing and collaborative economy, and experimenting with their business model. BMW is saying we still make super high-quality cars, but we now distribute them in different ways: we sell, lease and rent them. That's smart, Rohit says. It's the way to look at something that's happening in the marketplace and see how it affects your business. Marketers need to be on the lookout for trends and pivot accordingly, but also understand trends that are already happening. Listen to the show to learn about Rohit's haystack method and the difference between trend curating and trendspotting. Glanceable content The trend of glanceable content is a reaction to our shrinking attention spans, Rohit explains. There's material out there, like BuzzFeed headlines, that tantalize us so much we can't help clicking on them. But that alone doesn't make it a trend. This idea of the shrinking attention span leads to innovation in unexpected places. There's a team of MIT researchers working on studies of glance behavior: how fast can we read something in a situation when we need to consume it quickly? For example,

Book Marketing: Wisdom From Seth Godin

Book Marketing: Wisdom From Seth Godin

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Wondering how a master marketer thinks about books and the launch process? To explore book marketing, blogging and podcasts, I interview Seth Godin. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I'll interview Seth Godin, author of 17 books, including Purple Cow, Permission Marketing and Tribes. He blogs every day on topics related to marketing, leadership and more. He also has an excellent podcast mini-series called Seth Godin's Startup School. Seth and I explore his latest book along with his thoughts on publishing and marketing books. You'll discover Seth's philosophy on writing, the importance he puts on blogging and more. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Book Marketing Seth's new book Seth's latest book is called, What to Do When It's Your Turn (and It's Always Your Turn). He explains that he usually comes up with the title early in the process, and then writes the book to go with it. However, in this case, the title came second to last. The book exists because when his son was heading off to college, he asked Seth to write down his advice. A letter to his son turned into a book for everyone. It's a heavily illustrated book about fear, bravery and doing work that matters. Seth's background is in publishing and he was a book packager for 12 years, during which time he and his team wrote 120 books. These included almanacs, books on gardening, business and everything in between. In 1999, he started writing books as a solo author. One person with a point of view. That's when things shifted for him, he says. "I didn’t say, 'What book do I need to write next, because I need to pay the bills?' I said, 'What do I care enough about saying to put myself through all the pain and suffering it takes to bring a book into the world?' Seth's first "real book" was Permission Marketing which has his picture on the cover. Listen to the show to discover why Seth believes all of his books are marketing books. How Seth decides what to write when it comes to his books Seth doesn’t think he has much say in what he chooses to write about. While he is very strategic in most elements of his life, his best writing is not strategic at all. "I start with an itch and the writing is my scratching of the itch," Seth reveals. He starts a new book every few days, and some of them only last a paragraph or two, which is why it’s great to have a blog. If a book won’t go away, then he has to write it. Seth believes most people shouldn’t look at the book business as a way to make a living. The book business is an organized hobby, and a fabulous way to bring ideas into the world and a great thing to leave behind. For those who want to write a book to become a paid, professional author, Seth says, don't. Instead, think about using books as a generous way to spread ideas and earn trust. Listen to the show to learn why Seth doesn’t discuss upcoming projects with his peers. Why Seth decided to publish and distribute this book on his own Since most people don't finish the books on their Kindle, Seth wanted What to Do When It's Your Turn to be only available on paper. He also didn't want people to buy just one copy of the book. "If you buy 1 copy, I send you 2. If you buy 3 copies, I send you 5. If you buy 8 copies, I send you 12," he explains. "If you get an extra copy of a book, you have to give it away." Since ideas are now spreading person to person and not top down, Seth wanted this book to be his experiment with horizontal publishing.

6 Types of Online Advertising for Your Business

by ThriveHive @ ThriveHive

As new technology continues to change how we use the internet, marketers continue to find new ways to reach their audiences. While there are many free […]

The post 6 Types of Online Advertising for Your Business appeared first on ThriveHive.

Email and Social Media: Why Marketers Need Both

Email and Social Media: Why Marketers Need Both

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use email marketing for your business? Are you wondering how email and social can work well together? To learn how email marketing can integrate with social media, I interview DJ Waldow for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview DJ Waldow, co-author of The Rebel's Guide to Email Marketing. He's also the founder of Waldow Social, where he consults with businesses that want to improve their email marketing. DJ also co-hosts The Work Talk Show podcast. DJ shares why you should focus on email marketing and work it into your social media activities. You'll learn how to grow your email list using social media and get your blog readers to take action. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Email Marketing and Social Media Marketing Why social media marketers should focus on email marketing DJ tells a story of when he heard Jeff Pulver talk about his famous quote, "You live and die by your database." DJ explains how it's a phrase that he probably says at least once a week. The reason it's so important is because when it comes to marketing, email is your database. You have a virtual database of social media followers, but your database is your email contacts. Email is the glue that binds everything together. DJ doesn't discount social media, and he uses it a lot. But he explains that if Facebook decided to change their terms of service, then the connection with your friends and followers could disappear. Email addresses stick with you. With Facebook, there are over 100 different email notifications. Even if you turn off most of the notifications, Facebook still messages you through email and Twitter does the same. You'll discover how all social networks use email marketing. Listen to the show to find out why DJ encourages people to log out of Facebook or Twitter and go back to these sites for the first time. Why social media marketers should work email into their social media activities DJ explains how he has heard "social media folks" talking more about email. You'll hear examples of how Chris Brogan and Amy Porterfield focus on how to grow their email lists. You can take the loyal followers you have on social networks and bring them over to your email list. You'll find out the advantages of bringing your social media connections over to your email list and why it's easier to sell via the email channel versus the social channel. Listen to the show to find out how at Social Media Examiner, we have about 500 new people every day come to our content. Where email is heading in the future DJ shares how a lot happens with email behind the scenes that the average person doesn't necessarily see. There has been innovation around filters impacting email deliverability. From a consumer standpoint, there is a new app called Mailbox that helps you manage all of your marketing messages in one place. DJ has started to see a lot more integration of email into social and can see it play out in a couple of different ways. One of his favorite plugins for Chrome and Gmail is Rapportive. It sits on the side of Gmail and as you hover over somebody's email address, if that email address is used publicly to tie to different social networks, it will pull in all that information. You'll hear an example of what information it will show about that person and how salespeople can use it. DJ explains that the advantage of this plugin is that it shows a little bit more about wher...

How to Create Twitter RSS Feeds for Better Prospecting

How to Create Twitter RSS Feeds for Better Prospecting

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Twitter to find prospects? Looking for a better way to organize relevant conversations? You can use your favorite RSS reader to monitor customized Twitter searches, Twitter lists, and hashtags that relate to your business. In this article, you'll discover how to set up RSS feeds to easily monitor and manage a steady flow of Twitter leads. Listen to this article: Why Create RSS Feeds From Twitter Among social networks, Twitter has some major advantages to the social seller. It's generally acceptable for anyone to chime in on any conversation at any time. There's a mind-boggling volume of activity, and a great deal of it is relevant to prospecting. Many marketers find Twitter's web interface and mobile app to be less useful for mining opportunities, however. A better option to consider is to use an RSS reader app like Feedly, which makes it easy to organize feeds by theme, priority, stages in the buyer's journey, and any number of other useful parameters. Reader apps can be used as "asynchronous" queues, whereby aggregated content stays put until you view it. Here are step-by-step instructions for setting up Twitter timelines and organizing them into RSS feeds for maximum lead generation efficiency. #1: Create Targeted Twitter Timelines Create and Save Twitter Advanced Searches Twitter advanced searches can be goldmines to social sellers. You can set up queries that involve parameters like language, geographic location, sentiment, and the appearance of question marks. This helps you keep your finger on the pulse of what relevant people think of various brands and products, what they want to learn more about, and what their pain points are. For example, say you notice people asking about the best solution to pain points that your product is perfect for. If you're quick on the draw, you can jump in with content that answers users' questions and reach out to provide more advice if they're interested. To see who's talking about your company, type your company name in the Twitter search box, located at the top-right corner of the screen. On the results page, you'll see a list of tabs: Top, Live, Accounts, Photos, Videos, and More Options. Click on More Options, and from the drop-down menu, select Advanced Search. From here, you have virtually endless Twitter search refinement options. You can zero in on tweets with certain words, phrases, and hashtags, as well as the language they're written in. If you want to target when people are replying to your tweets (or anyone else's), add the relevant username in the To These Accounts box. Also choose whether you want to include positive, negative, questions, and/or retweets. When you're finished, click Search and then check out the results. If you need to refine your search, just click the Back button. Once you're satisfied with the search parameters you've set up, save the search by clicking More Options and selecting Save This Search. Repeat this process to set up advanced searches for the queries you want to track in your RSS-powered dashboard. Tip: Trying to set up a search that's returning results you aren't sure about? You can use the free tool from Warble to test-drive your advanced searches as daily email alerts. See what your queries return for a few days before you go through the RSS-creation process. It's also a good long-term option if you'd rather see tweets as emails than use an RSS reader. Subscribe to Relevant Twitter Lists Curated by Others Twitter lists can help you segment the Twitter accounts you monitor, making it easy to keep abreast of what's happening among specific groups of people and companies. You can use lists to monitor accounts without following them, so it's a great way to keep an eye on the competition, too. There are thousands of existing public lists that others have spent years curating and maintaining. Finding and subscribing to these can be useful when setting...

Facebook Marketing Declines: How Business Should React

Facebook Marketing Declines: How Business Should React

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Facebook to promote your business? Are you wondering how the recent Facebook algorithm changes will affect your marketing? To learn what the future of Facebook means for your brand or business, I interview Mari Smith and Jay Baer for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Mari Smith and Jay Baer. Mari is the co-author of Facebook Marketing: An Hour a Day and considered to be the world's leading expert on Facebook marketing and Jay is the author of Youtility: Why Smart Marketing Is About Help Not Hype. He's also host of the Social Pros podcast. Mari and Jay share how to be successful with Facebook's new algorithm and what these changes mean for your Facebook strategy. You'll learn how to monitor your reach and engagement, and how to navigate paid versus earned media in your content strategy. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Marketing Declines Recently, an article by AdAge referenced an official Facebook document that said, "We expect organic distribution of an individual page's posts to gradually decline over time, as we continually work to make sure people have a meaningful experience on the site." In other words, Facebook says that they are going to show less of your Facebook updates to your fans and followers. If you want to get seen, you will have to pay to play. This news has raised a lot of concern among marketers. Previous changes to the Facebook news feed Mari explains how up until a few months ago, the algorithm that governs what content goes into the news feed was called EdgeRank. The term used now is the Facebook news feed ranking algorithm. The formula changed dramatically, with Facebook telling everyone that on any given day, a user can potentially see 1,500 possible stories. A story includes likes, comments, shares, videos and photos. Once you click Like, Comment or Share, Facebook knows what type of content to show you. Most users are aware that the majority of content shown comes from friends. This means that business pages struggle to get organic visibility. On December 2, 2013, Facebook announced they will start to decline or diminish organic reach for pages because users predominantly want to see content from friends and brands that they enjoy interacting with. According to Inside Facebook, studies show more than 40% decreased organic reach on Facebook. Listen to the show to find out what type of content Facebook will give less weight to. Is Facebook trying to protect its fans from marketers?  I recently heard Gary Vaynerchuk say that Facebook is trying to protect its fans from marketers. It seems that Facebook has realized that they need to provide a quality user experience, otherwise people won't click on the ads. Jay explains why Facebook doesn't want to devolve into MySpace. They are now a public company, which needs to continue to generate tons of advertising money. One of the ways to do this is to squeeze the algorithm. Listen to the show to find out how Facebook has used one of the oldest business playbooks in history to get you hooked. Marketers see a decline in organic reach In December, an article by Ignite Social Media showed that brands saw massive declines in organic reach that month. Jay says that a large number of brands on Facebook have seen a decline in organic reach, but there are other brands that have not been impacted by the change at all. There are some exceptions to the rule.

Content Sharing: How to Build a Following Using Other People’s Content

Content Sharing: How to Build a Following Using Other People’s Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a content sharing strategy for your business? Are you interested in discovering ways to leverage great content to promote your business and drive sales? To learn how to build a following by sharing other people's content, I interview Guy Kawasaki. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Guy Kawasaki, the author of the book Enchantment and the chief evangelist at Canva. His newest book is called The Art of Social Media: Power Tips for Power Users. Guy explores how to build your social media following by sharing other people's content. You'll discover how to create a consistent brand image for your company, develop a strategy for consistently sharing great content with your audience and leverage that content to promote your products or services. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Content Sharing How Guy got started in social media  Depending on how you define social media, Guy was there at the very beginning with CompuServe forums. He says he was late to blogging, starting four or five years after it really took off, but gradually adopted social media much quicker over the years. Guy joined Twitter six or seven months after it started, but was on Google+ six days after it launched. Today, Guy considers social media as God's gift, especially for entrepreneurs, because it's fast, free and ubiquitous. It's a great equalizer and makes it possible to potentially reach millions of people with just one tweet, image or post. Listen to the show to discover why Guy says we're in the renaissance of marketing.  Have a consistent image and mantra across all of your social networks In Guy's new book he talks a lot about the importance of having a consistent brand image across all of your social media channels. Guy advises against adopting a different persona for each social media platform. It's much too difficult to manage and will make people question who you really are. You'll hear Guy explore the importance of having a mantra for your business and provides some great examples. Your mantra explains who you are and why your product, service or business exists in two or three simple words. It should go in the Bio or About Me sections of all of your social media profiles. Listen to the show to learn how your mantra is radically different than your company mission statement or slogan. The importance of the Incognito Window  Guy explains that the Incognito Window is a feature found on all browsers, which allows you to browse your pages and your social profiles anonymously. This mode lets you see how a new visitor to your website will see it. Many marketers will be amazed to discover that what they see on their own company's website on a day-to-day basis is not the same thing as most people see when they visit for the first time. The Incognito Window mirrors a different online experience that you or someone inside your company may not even realize exists because you've gotten past the sign-ins, cookies and gates, whereas other people have not. Listen to the show to learn why the Incognito Window matters to your business.  Guy's content-sharing philosophy Guy says there are two key components to his entire strategy. He believes the most important test of all of social media is what he calls the "reshare test," which is: "Are you sharing something that other people will share with their friends and followers?" You'll hear how he relates tipping in a restaurant to a +1 or a like, or something like a thumbs-up. Whereas with a share,

The Art of Persuasion: How to Craft Words That Sell

The Art of Persuasion: How to Craft Words That Sell

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do your words sell? Want to sharpen your copywriting skills? To explore the art of persuasion and why it's important to social marketers, I interview Ray Edwards. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Ray Edwards, author of Writing Riches and MoneyWords. He's host of The Ray Edwards Show. His latest book is called How to Write Copy That Sells: The Step-by-Step System for More Sales, to More Customers, More Often. Ray will explore how to craft written and spoken words that sell. You'll discover why marketers should care about creating persuasive content. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: The Art of Persuasion Ray's copywriting journey In 1974, at age 9, Ray saw his first direct-response copy at his grandparents' house in Pineville, Kentucky. His grandmother loved to read Weekly World News and The National Enquirer, and Ray's favorite part of those tabloids was the fascinating, full-page articles that were peppered with information about books and courses that were available for purchase. Those stories had headlines like, "Turn Your Mind Into a Mental Magnet That Attracts Friends, Power, Love, and Money" and "How Modern Chinese Medicine Helps Burn Disease Out of Your Body, Using Nothing More Than the Palm of Your Hand." Ray later learned these were not articles; they were full-page ads written by Eugene Schwartz, who was "a genius with direct-response copy." During his career in radio, Ray studied direct-response copywriting and marketing, and used them as his secret weapon in the business. While others were cranking out commercials and ad copy to fill 30- or 60-second spots, Ray wanted to get money into advertisers' businesses. That way they would keep doing business with the station and he could keep his job. In the early 2000s, radio started changing because of the Internet. People could take their favorite songs with them, which eliminated the things that annoy people about radio stations: static, commercials, and DJs. Ray recalls paying $1,200 to go to a group meeting at Seth Godin's office in New York. (This was before Seth was as big as he is now, but after he had written Permission Marketing and Unleashing the Ideavirus.) Ray figured Seth could offer "marketing wizardry" about how to fix the radio stations, but Seth's advice to Ray was to figure out what to do after he was out of the radio broadcasting industry. Ray realized everything he'd learned about marketing, persuasion, and selling in an entertaining and palatable way would transfer to the Internet. He hung out his shingle and has been working as an Internet copywriter since 2005. Listen to the show to discover which client (and handler) Ray and Mike had in common. The importance of persuasive content Marketers need to write so people will buy not only products, but also ideas. You want people to read your blog posts to the end, comment on or share them, or write about them. Ray explains that you know you're writing persuasively when other people are writing about your posts. You're the generator of the conversation, not only a participant. He says that at it's core, copywriting is the science and craft of persuasion in communication. Whether you're talking, writing a blog post, doing an interview, recording a podcast, or posting on Snapchat, every communication is persuasion. Listen to the show to learn why Mike feels this topic is so important. Ray's system for persuasion Because everyone is present on the social media playing field, you have to be persuasive and stand out.

26 WordPress Plugins for Social Media Marketers

26 WordPress Plugins for Social Media Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to improve your WordPress blog? Have you considered customizing WordPress with plugins? One of the biggest advantages of WordPress is the sheer number of easy-to-use plugins that help marketers add functions with little hassle. In this article, you'll discover 26 WordPress plugins for marketers. Listen to this article: #1: Social Profile Integration Plugins Social Login Plenty of websites have members-only areas or user accounts, or require users to log in to comment. Social Login will let users log into your site with a social media profile. There are more than 30 different networks you can choose to make available for users to log in with, including Amazon, Facebook, Google+, Instagram, WordPress, and more. Placement options for the login plugin include registration pages, sidebars, comments, and more. This plugin is free to download and use. Snapchat Snapcode Widget Snapchat users don't always actively search for brands on the platform. Because of this, getting followers can sometimes depend on advertising your Snapcode across different online platforms, including your website. The Snapchat Snapcode Widget is exactly what it sounds like; a small widget that allows you to place your Snapcode on your site. All your blog visitors have to do is take a picture of your Snapcode and upload it on Snapchat to find and follow you. This plugin is free and easy to use. WordPress Social Stream When you don't want to choose between featuring your Facebook or Twitter feed, WordPress Social Stream allows you to create a combined feed from multiple social platforms to display on your site. You can add platforms including Facebook, Twitter, Pinterest, YouTube, Dribble, StumbleUpon, LinkedIn, and Delicious. You can pay $19 for a regular license with 6 months of support, and have the option to upgrade to an extended license and/or 12 months of support. Pin It Button One of the most effective ways you can encourage users to share your content and products on Pinterest is to add Pin It buttons to your site, and the Pinterest Pin It Button comes with a range of customizable options. The plugin will let readers select the image they want to pin from your page, although you can also select an image users will be prompted to choose when pinning. To customize your button, choose from a variety of different colors and sizes and easily place your Pin It buttons anywhere on your blog with a shortcode. The features above come with the free version of the plugin, but you can upgrade to the pro version for more customization features. Custom Twitter Feeds Placing a Twitter feed on your blog is a great way to keep your readers up to date and integrate your social media presence with your site. Add Custom Twitter Feeds to your blog to display a customizable feed. You can choose to display only your Twitter feed, a feed from multiple Twitter users, a feed from a single user, or a feed from a hashtag. The top of whichever feed option you choose will display a clickable CTA encouraging users to follow you on Twitter. In addition, the Twitter feed from this plugin is mobile-responsive, automatically takes on the stylistic aspects of your theme, and search engines can find the feed content. This plugin is free and there is a pro version available. Instagram Feed The Instagram Feed plugin will display images from your Instagram profile on your site, and help drive traffic to your profile. Place Instagram Feed on your site to display photos from non-private Instagram accounts, including yours or those that you're tagged in, which is great for sharing user-generated content. You can have single or multiple feeds, plus it's mobile-responsive and was updated with the June 1 Instagram updates. This plugin is free and there is a pro version of the plugin available. Custom Facebook Feed

360° Virtual Business Tours Powered by Google Maps

360° Virtual Business Tours Powered by Google Maps


360° Virtual Business Tours

Bring your store to your searchers right from their computers or smart phones! Virtual tours allows searchers to come inside!

Google+ Marketing Tactics: How to Promote Your Content on Google+

Google+ Marketing Tactics: How to Promote Your Content on Google+

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Google+ for business? Are you wondering how to promote your content on Google+? To learn about Google+ tactics that are available to marketers, I interview Lynette Young for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Lynette Young, author of Google+ for Small Businesses. Her agency, Purple Stripe, helps businesses thrive with social media. Lynette is a Google+ marketing expert who has more than 1.5 million followers on Google+. Lynette shares why she got hooked on Google+, and how businesses can use the tools available to succeed on the platform. You'll discover how to get your content to show up in Google, and how Google+ users are different than Facebook users. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Google+ Marketing Tactics How did you get hooked on Google+? Lynette explains how she is always on the lookout for the next piece of digital publishing software, whether it be blogs in the late 90s or Twitter in 2004/05. She likes to explore what's new and the new places people go online to talk and build communities. So when the first private beta invites for Google+ started to go out, Lynette spent 4 hours on the platform. She fell in love with it straight away and has stuck with it ever since. Lynette says that when she started on Google+, she had a little more confidence than with other platforms because it's Google. She soon figured out the set of tools available and what they could offer for her as a person and as a marketer. Listen to the show to find out why Lynette feels that Google+ is very anti-Apple. The business benefits of using Google+ Lynette looks at Google+ as the Internet and part of Google. Right now they have about 60 products and Google+ is just one piece of it all. It's a way for Google to link all their products together. When you are in the Google ecosystem, it's where you live for search, email, videos, etc. Lynette sees Google+ as a platform that touches everything she does on the Internet. Since the platform launched, it's grown up in many ways and like it or not, Google owns quite a large chunk of the Internet. As marketers, we use a large number of their products in our everyday lives. When you're signed into Google+, you receive alerts when you get new activity. This appears in the right-hand corner of your screen as a bell icon. Lynette explains how it's not so much about the numbers you get, but what you do with them. So whenever you go to a Google property, you'll see these alerts. You'll hear why people are drawn into these numbers, even if they aren't on Google+. Listen to the show to find out how Google attracts you into their ecosystem and tracks your activity. What Facebook marketers need to know about Google+ users Google+ is more of an interest-based network, whereas Facebook is the place where people connect with others they already know. Lynette says that Google+ is more like Twitter or Reddit. Not in the form of how you can publish, but how the communities separate themselves and group together. As a marketer, this is what you want. If you want to get your message out, you obviously want to gravitate toward people you know will meet your criteria and will hopefully want your product. Lynette finds it a lot easier to reach these communities on Google+ than she does on Facebook. You'll discover why published content on Google+ takes a different path than it does on Facebook,

How to Build a Better Target Audience for Your Facebook Ads

How to Build a Better Target Audience for Your Facebook Ads

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to reach the right people with your Facebook Ads? Want to learn more about targeted audiences? Facebook's demographic and segmentation tools let you serve your Facebook ads to people who match your ideal customer persona. In this article you'll discover how to build a target audience for your Facebook ads. Listen to this article: #1: Explore Facebook Ad Targeting Options There are four primary sets of attributes to consider when targeting your audience with Facebook ads. Understanding what each one represents will give you the building blocks to construct your target audience. Locations Location targeting allows you to focus on an audience in a specific geographic area like a country, city, state or zip code. With advanced options, you can choose people who actually reside in the area or are just physically located in the area. This type of targeting is critical if you're focusing on an area around a retail store and want to offer a coupon to nearby shoppers. Demographics Demographic filters give you the option to target people based on criteria like education, profession, relationship status, life events and other cultural and social affiliations. Interests Interests data is based on Facebook's gathering of specific information when you use the platform. For instance, if you like a page about pop music, you won't be flagged as having an interest in rock and roll. Use Interests to filter people based on their interactions with pages, events and apps inside of Facebook. Behaviors Base behavior targeting on online and offline habits like mobile device use, travel patterns and digital activities like online gaming. For instance, you could segment your audience by those who are planning to travel or those who have just returned from travel. With proper use of these segmentation methods, you can narrow your audience and match your message or offer to a specific audience niche. Now you might be thinking, "That's great if I know the details about my audience demographics, but I don't." Don't worry; Facebook gives you the tools you need to gain valuable insight into your customers and your competition. #2: Gather Audience Details With Insights With Facebook's Audience Insights, you can get detailed information about your target audience. If you have a large enough customer base, you can import your customers' email addresses or phone numbers into Facebook as a custom audience. Once the process is complete, you then use Audience Insights to see the information about your customers' age and gender, location, lifestyle types, education, marital status, job titles, top interests and more. With this tool, you can also run insight reports on competitors, top brands or interests. The trick is to make sure you have a similar topic or brand to offer. For instance, say you own an appliance store and want to sell more Whirlpool appliances. By choosing that brand in Audience Insights, you can see that there are 400K+ active monthly Facebook members interested in Whirlpool. Of that group, 59% are married, over 50% have households of three or more and 32% are in the healthcare industry. Do you think a sponsored story about the health benefits of Whirlpool appliances for families with kids, citing healthcare professionals, would resonate with that audience? Yes, it would. #3: Build Your Audience Now that you understand the basic concepts of audience targeting and the tools, it's time to take a look at some real-world examples. These examples show how you can target customers using techniques for a variety of industries. Remember that these are just examples. The goal is to create your own interpretations to fit your business. Realtor Suppose you're a realtor and you want to target homebuyers. There isn't a segment on Facebook for active homebuyers, so how do you do this? Think about your customers and what motivates them to...

6 Ways to Increase Twitter Engagement

6 Ways to Increase Twitter Engagement

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to encourage more interaction with your Twitter followers? Looking for ways to engage your Twitter community? In this article you'll discover six ways to increase engagement on Twitter. #1: Offer Personalized Encouragement The best engagement is sometimes a simple response. Customers are thrilled when you devote time to interact with them. It's a sign of respect and appreciation. Listen to this article: Nike encourages customers to #JustDoIt. To align with the brand's value of inspiration, Nike tweets words of encouragement to their followers. So if you're anxious about your next run, the company could be your #1 fan. To do something similar with your brand, thoroughly read the timelines of 20 to 40 of your followers. Identify tweets that announce major milestones (such as a new baby, running a marathon, getting married or a first car purchase). Then craft a short message (aim for three to six words) of encouragement. You can make the message more personal if you don't use any hashtags or add it to your timeline feed. Make sure you stay away from disingenuous comments. If your business isn't known for encouragement, your customers may be confused by the message. People desire human connections, and a great way to do that is to motivate people to reach their potential. #2: Share Their Tweets It's human nature to want to be validated, so retweet your followers to show you recognize the value of their content. Let them know that what they're saying or posting online matters. ProFlowers retweets their fans often. The retweets usually reflect the beauty of flowers, so popular shares include floral arrangements, mantel ideas and centerpieces. If your business is an extension of your personal brand, you may want to retweet content on your personal account. When retweeting your followers, choose tweets that align with your brand's values. Check the user's profile to be sure it's a real person. Also consider adding a comment to the retweet to contribute something to the conversation. Some experts recommend that you retweet only 20% of your tweets, while others prefer a 50/50 split. Find out what works best for your industry and your audience and go from there. #3: Include a Relevant Hashtag Create and promote a hashtag campaign to reinvigorate your community and spark conversation around your brand. Subway is redefining their image with the #SaveLunchBreak hashtag. The fast-food chain encourages people not to give up their lunch breaks and to eat healthy. The campaign also asks customers to show how they're enjoying their lunch breaks. To start a hashtag campaign, decide on the goal of your campaign and how it will relate to your customers. Then research what your audience is talking about to come up with a hashtag that they'll identify with. #4: Link to Problem-Solving Content One way to grab your followers' attention is to provide content that will help improve their lives. This is a great way to integrate your brand into their lifestyles and strengthen the bond between you and your customers. Whole Foods gives their followers tips on how to prepare and cook food. The supermarket chain regularly tweets seasonal recipes, healthy eating advice and cookbook recommendations. To identify what content might be valuable to your audience, read through your followers' profiles to discover their likes, dislikes and current influences. Select a common issue that they're dealing with (for example, finding concert tickets or locating a logo designer for their business). Then create content that presents a solution to their problem and promote it on Twitter. Avoid creating content that is merely disguised selling tactics, though. Customers will quickly notice your deception and may decide to take their business elsewhere. Rather than sell to them, educate your followers by posting information that they'll find valuable.

3 Ways to Improve Your Twitter Ad Performance

3 Ways to Improve Your Twitter Ad Performance

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want a better return on your Twitter ads? Looking for cost-effective ways to reach relevant prospects? By adjusting your ad bidding and targeting, you can deliver affordable and appealing ads on Twitter. In this article, you'll discover three ways to improve your Twitter ad performance. Listen to this article: #1: Reduce Ad Costs With Bidding Options Automatic bidding is the default choice for Twitter ads, but other bid types can increase exposure among audience members who are more likely to click or follow. To change your bid type when creating a new ad, scroll to the Set Your Budget section and click Show Advanced Options. This reveals a drop-down menu, allowing you to select a bid. You'll see options for maximum and target bidding. Next, make a maximum bid to set how much a lead, click, or engagement is worth to you. You may actually spend less than you offer. Once you win an auction, your offer will be reset to only a penny more than the second-place bid. This method is beneficial for boosting ad performance, because you can end up earning more clicks, leads, and engagement than you thought your budget would allow. Or you can make a target bid to enter as many auctions as possible, potentially advertising to more users while controlling how much you spend. Set the average amount you want to spend per lead or link click. Twitter automatically stays within 20% of what you enter for auctions each day. For example, suppose you bid $3 per click. Twitter will win you auctions at $2.40 per click and others at $3.60, averaging out to your bid price. Compared to maximum bids, target bids can give you access to a larger audience. That's because Twitter won't shy away from auctions that exceed your set price, potentially earning more space on users' feeds. Compared to automatic bids, target bids can win you more auctions. That's because Twitter won't enter you with the lowest bid possible. On a case-by-case basis, making a maximum or target bid can improve your ad performance while saving some of your budget for future campaigns. #2: Refine Targeting With Audience Insights Twitter's built-in analytics suite can help not only when targeting specific audiences, but also when creating ads that appeal to them. To start, open Twitter Analytics and click the Audiences tab at the top of the page. From here, you can toggle between groups of users, ranging from your followers to profiles you've reached organically. You can also navigate the sub-tabs to see information about audience interests, languages, buying habits, and more. This data is valuable when setting the targeting criteria for your ads. For example, say the bulk of users who have engaged with your content are women, and they're mostly from the United States. You now know to target this demographic, which should generate clicks and other interactions. However, there's still the hurdle of crafting ad copy, images, and attention-grabbing calls to action. Referencing Twitter Analytics can help with this challenge, too. As you cycle through tabs that contain different audience metrics, you'll likely come up with different ways to frame your ads. User net worth and household income are factors that appeal to advertisers. Imagine your products or services have price tiers from $30 to $1,000 per month, while a noticeable group of your audience members have annual incomes greater than $250,000. You can glean two insights from this data. First, targeting an affluent demographic is a viable option. Second, advertising your highest price tier should yield some success. When crafting the creative aspects of the ad, you can use the Interests bar graph, which is located under the Overview and Lifestyle tabs. It ranks popular topics based on audience interest. Suppose you want to promote an apparel business and your audience is largely interested in sports. The ad can use an image of an athlete wearing y...

Get Found Locally Online – 10 Simple Local SEO Strategies

by Propel Marketing & Design, Inc. @ Propel Marketing & Design, Inc.

The landscape for local SEO is broadening and expanding off company’s websites onto social media websites and beyond. Local businesses need to embrace a new mindset and implement a few new simple strategies to take advantage of the evolution of the internet and local search. Today we’re looking at both on page and off page […]

The post Get Found Locally Online – 10 Simple Local SEO Strategies appeared first on Propel Marketing & Design, Inc..

How Content Can Help You Build a Loyal Following

How Content Can Help You Build a Loyal Following

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you trying to build an engaged loyal following that loves you and your business? Have you tried to use video, podcasting or social media to build engagement? I explore these questions with Pat Flynn for our new Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This New Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a brand-new show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Pat Flynn, founder of Smart Passive Income. Pat shares insights into his tactics and strategies and how social media content contributes to the success of his business. You'll learn how to create content to publish on different social media platforms to connect to a large audience. And you'll discover the techniques to use to build a loyal fan base. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Media Content for Business The business strategy behind Smart Passive Income  Pat explains how content plays a key role in his business. You'll learn why his focus is to provide valuable content for those looking for information. You'll hear how you can do this when you share content based on your own experiences. Pat shares the results his business has had from his different content platforms: blog, video and podcast. Listen to the show to discover Pat's personal stories behind his successful business. How to make a personal connection with your audience Pat talks about the different ways he shares personal information about himself to connect with his audience and how he incorporates this into his business content. Pat shares the reason why he gives his audience strategic insights into his personal story. Pat shares how he connects with his audience on Facebook. You'll find out the strategy behind the different components of Pat's Facebook page photo and how this strategy helps him connect with his audience. People like to connect with people. You'll pick up some useful tips on how to build affinity online. Listen to the show to discover why Pat leverages his "trifecta" content creation strategy (blogging, video and podcasting) to connect with a wide audience. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bJIJ_6G9Z84 Pat's video strategy YouTube is the #2 search engine in the world. Pat explains how he uses videos to respond to questions from his audience. Pat explains how this strategy works well for his business and drives traffic back to his website. Listen to the show to find out how Pat intentionally uses keywords in his videos for great results. Pat's blogging strategy Pat blogs three times a week. He publishes content based on his own experiences and explains what he does wrong, what he does right and the results he gets. He's very transparent with all of the different processes. Pat talks about the Niche Site Duel, where he was challenged to build a website from scratch. Pat publicly displayed the process and how it reached #1 in Google. Pat explains the role email marketing plays in his business model and why it's crucial for business. You'll discover why email is still the best tool to use to connect with people in a direct and personal way. Listen to the show to discover insights into the business strategies behind Pat's successful blog. Pat's podcasting strategy You'll discover how Pat was surprised by the extent that podcasting helps his brand. Learn how Pat discovered that 20% of his readers find his website through his podcasts. Find out how to train your podcast audience to get to your blog with calls to action in your podcast. Pat uses the Pretty Link Pro plugin and domain names for easy redirect URLs to get podcast listeners to come to his site.

Learn To Blog Correctly

by Edward @ Search Engine Optimization For Business

Blog Correctly Like A Copywriting Hero As an SEO company, one of the most frequent questions we get from our clients is how they should be managing and writing their blog. While there is some variation to what does and does not work for different forms of content, there are certain best practices that can help enhance..

The post Learn To Blog Correctly appeared first on Search Engine Optimization For Business.

National #SmallBusinessWeek Chat with @ScoreMentors and @Rieva

by Ray Sidney-Smith @ Blog – W3 Consulting :: Web and Beyond

[View the story “#SmallBusinessWeek chat hosted by @ScoreMentors and @Rieva” on Storify] SCORE Association (previously Service Corps of Retired Executives) and Rieva Lesonsky (CEO, GrowBiz Media & SmallBizDaily) hosted the #SmallBusinessWeek Twitter chat in honor of National Small Business Week.

Video Production: How to Create Quality Videos Quickly

Video Production: How to Create Quality Videos Quickly

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create videos for your fans and followers? Want to improve the quality? Today, Roberto Blake is with us to explore how quality videos are produced. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. Roberto Blake, a visual and video marketing expert, has a popular YouTube channel where he teaches YouTube marketing and video editing. You can find out more at RobertoBlake.com. Roberto explores the ins and outs of producing quality videos. You'll discover tools you need for video production. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Video Production Roberto's Story Like many kids, Roberto grew up watching Disney and was fascinated by all the behind-the-scenes information about the animators, storytellers, and moviemakers. He says animation wasn't in the cards, so at about 14 or 15 years old he switched to video and was producing online video as a hobby for about six years before YouTube existed. Rob says he didn't join the YouTube craze when it first launched, and shares that changed around the time he left corporate life for entrepreneurship.He'd already been running a blog to help creative professionals (designers, artists, web design), and found it was easier to answer questions and provide tutorials with video than it was to write and re-write the same email replies or blog comments over and over again. Roberto notes that if business people use video to address commonly expressed customer pain points, they're essentially buying back some of their time; it makes things easier on everyone. How did Roberto decide to turn video into a business? He'd been making ad revenue on the blog side and wanted to scale his existing freelance business. As he focused more on teaching web and graphic design, rather than social media marketing, he decided producing video content was faster than organizing his thoughts around screen captures and stills. Plus, Roberto believes that, if he's going to teach someone how to use Adobe Premiere Pro, a full-screen video tutorial like the one below is more helpful than still images and walls of text. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AxkXrPzEGtI Listen to the show to learn more about Roberto's early experience working with a wedding videographer. Why Video is so important today Roberto explains that one of the easiest and most practical ways for people to learn is through video, because they can see a process. Even when the video isn't based on a demonstration, like with software tutorials, there's value in seeing another human being; reading that person's micro-expressions and mannerisms can help cut the learning curve. Roberto remembers growing up watching Bob Ross, Reading Rainbow, and VideoSmarts, a program in the 1980s that helped children with memorization games, learning concepts, and reading. He notes that if individuals and businesses take advantage of educating via video, and make it engaging, fun, and informative, they'll find their content resonates with people. Listen to the show to discover my personal connection to early training DVDs. What to Do Before Recording Whether you're using a smartphone or a DSLR camera, one thing Roberto recommends before recording is to check the environment. Look for and remove any distractions from the background. For example, if there's noise from cars driving by you can change your location. If there's a part of your office that needs to be cleaned, you can tidy up. He also says you should think about the context of your background. For instance, when Roberto does personal vlogs as motivation for creatives and entrepreneurs who might be thin...

5 Ways to Use LinkedIn Publisher for Business

5 Ways to Use LinkedIn Publisher for Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Looking for a way to promote your business to a professional audience? Have you considered LinkedIn Publisher? Using a few simple tactics, LinkedIn Publisher can support business owners in their efforts to get more referrals, leads, and sales. In this article you'll discover five ways LinkedIn Publisher can help you grow your business. Listen to this article: #1: Create Conversions With Calls to Action Make sure you include a call to action in each LinkedIn Publisher post, whether it's to get more information from another link, contact you, or sign up for a free ebook or white paper. A call to action that speaks directly to your potential, ideal, or current clients will engage your audience and direct them to your funnel. Fabrizio Poli, who brokers private jets, offers downloadable white papers to his audience. People who are successful at generating leads with LinkedIn Publisher do a combination of their own content and sharing links to external resources that both inform and build their credibility. They also include a phone number, email address, or calendar link at the end of the post, so prospects can easily contact them. Fabrizio makes himself available in his posts by sharing his contact information and including a shortcut to booking a 15-minute call. Sharing a calendar link can be more effective for conversions than just your contact info alone. People may not be ready to talk to you now, but might be open to scheduling a time to speak with you in the future. #2: Establish Top of Mind Recognition Visuals can make or break whether people click on your LinkedIn Publisher articles. Cohesive, colorful, well-branded images will draw people to your article and drive them to open it. Human-resources professional Liz Ryan creates original images for every LinkedIn Publisher post for her company Human Workplace. The images are reflective of the brand, and users know by the visual that it's a Liz Ryan post. She uses humor and color to tell the story of her posts, which generates positive sentiment. Plus, readers get a sense of what the article is about just by looking at the image. Liz's approach to HR is unique in and of itself, and she uses consistently branded visuals (in her background image, within the post, on her website, in her media, and more) to get noticed. For your LinkedIn Publisher articles, you can use your own photos or stock photos, or create custom graphics with Canva or PicMonkey. If you're able to, consider hiring a graphic artist to create something special just for your brand. To add an image to the top of your LinkedIn Publisher post, click the camera icon in the header and upload your image. LinkedIn recommends a 700 x 400 image for the header. Be sure to add images throughout your post, as well. #3: Support Expert Positioning If you're already creating valuable content in the form of blog posts, newsletters, and other articles, you can repurpose content for LinkedIn Publisher. But you'll also want to create original content for your LinkedIn readers. One reason to publish original, unique content on LinkedIn audience is to use it as a testing platform. After you publish original content to LinkedIn Publisher, use the feedback to refine the article before you share it on your blog, as an ebook, or on a different platform. John White, Chief Marketing Officer of Social Marketing Solutions, offers a nice blend of existing content that he has repurposed for LinkedIn Publisher, as well as original content specifically for his LinkedIn audience. John's most-viewed post, with more than 600,000 views, 600 likes, and 1,900 comments, was repurposed from his master's thesis. Unlike what you hear about blogging, on LinkedIn Publisher the more words the better. The magic number seems to be 900-1,400 words. If you're repurposing a blog post that only has 300 or 400 words, consider expanding your content with more examples and case studie...

How to Vet Social Media Groups for Prospects

How to Vet Social Media Groups for Prospects

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you looking for ways to engage directly with your customers? Have you thought about joining social groups on Facebook, LinkedIn and beyond? Joining the right social groups allows you to connect with your customers by answering their questions and sharing valuable information. In this post you'll discover how to choose the best social groups for your business. Listen to this article: #1: Look for Real Discussions The most important thing to look for in a social group is discussion. You're not looking for posts; you're looking for posts with comments. This signals a group whose members are actively engaging with each other. In other words, you want to steer clear of the "link farms" of social groups. These are the ones where members stop by to drop a link to their latest content or sales page, and nothing more. Note that groups that allow people to share links can still have engagement. It's the groups that have zero engagement and lots of links that you'll want to avoid or leave at your earliest convenience. Sure, you could drop your own links into those groups, but chances are no one is listening. #2: Consider Groups Your Competitors Join If you're having trouble finding social groups to join for your business, take a look at what groups are listed on your competitors' profiles. Start by visiting your competitors' Facebook profiles. Click on their About tab and scroll down to see if they have any groups listed publicly on their profile. You can find a similar listing of groups on some LinkedIn profiles. Note that some LinkedIn users can see who has visited their profile. Also check the About tab on your competitors' Google+ profiles to see if they publicly share the communities they've joined. This research should point you toward groups that will be great for your business to participate in to find customers, colleagues and partners. #3: Make Sure Your Customers Are There To ensure that the groups you've joined are home to your customers (and that they're actively engaged), do a quick preview of engaged member profiles. You can do this by hovering over names of people engaged in discussions in Facebook groups. You can scroll through discussions on LinkedIn to see the headlines of discussion starters or hover over names in the comments or discussions. Both will usually include job titles and company names. On Google+, hover over names of Google+ users to see their taglines, many of which will also include job titles and company names. This research should ensure that your customers are participating in discussions within a group and help you figure out the right people to start engaging with yourself. #4: Go Local Whenever you're searching for great groups for your business, don't forget to go local in your search. Even if your business isn't solely local, you'll likely find great local groups on Facebook, LinkedIn and Google+ that focus on helping businesses refer other businesses. In many cases local groups tend to be more heavily moderated than general groups, making them invaluable. #5: Try Paid-Entry Groups Another option when searching for social groups with strong engagement is to focus on groups that require some form of payment to enter. This includes the use of paid products, courses, subscriptions, memberships, masterminds, events, conferences and other premium points of entry. To find these groups, ask yourself what premium resources your customers would buy. These groups likely are filled with the customers you want to connect with; ones who've shown they're willing to invest in premium education, products and services. Go Beyond Social Networks Don't just rely on the top social networks to connect with your customers. Look beyond social networks for forums, Q&A networks and other online communities within your industry. These also offer a wealth of opportunities to engage directly with your ideal cust...

Google AdWords Labels Go Green

by Ray Kirsch @ Dynamics Online

AdWords Labels Are Officially Turning Green After months of testing, Google has finally decided to officially roll out green AdWords labels. Prior to this, they were a bright yellow color. The green labels clearly blend more naturally with the search results. One would think the green color increases ad blindness […]

What Is Social Media Marketing (SMM)?

by admin @ SEO Company India, SEO Services, Digital Marketing Company SEO India – WebMatriks Technology

Social Media Marketing (SMM) Benefits, Features Social Media Marketing (SMM) means promotion of content of a targeted website or webpage […]

The post What Is Social Media Marketing (SMM)? appeared first on SEO Company India, SEO Services, Digital Marketing Company SEO India - WebMatriks Technology.

How to Curate a Roundup Blog Post of Industry Influencers

How to Curate a Roundup Blog Post of Industry Influencers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more exposure for your blog? Have you tried curating articles written by influencers? Roundup posts help you gain the attention of influencers who can increase the reach of your content. In this article I'll share five steps to creating a curated blog post. Listen to this article: #1: Choose a Topic To select a subject for your post, start by researching popular topics covered by your competitors. Make a list of three to five individuals or companies that share your area of expertise. Then, go to Buzzsumo.com, type in the name or URL for each competitor and click search. The results let you see their most successful articles. For example, a search of Social Media Examiner shows two of their most successful posts are about tools. After you search a few more companies, identify a common topic you want to feature in a curated post. #2: Identify Influencers to Feature After you choose your subject, strategically target experts to feature in the blog post. First, go over to Followerwonk, click on Search Bios and enter your topic keyword. This free tool lets you see the most influential Twitter users relative to your topic or keyword. Next, click the Social Authority tab to sort your list by who has the most influence. Ideally you want to target individuals with high authority and a large number of followers. I suggest individuals rather than companies, since people tend to be more responsive. For instance, on the topic of social media tools Ian Cleary has a high social authority and a large Twitter following. Finally, go back to Buzzsumo. This time, run a search for your topic. This is how you find the most popular blogs and authors on the subject. Compile a list of 5 to 15 of these influencers, including their blog URL, and move on to the next step. #3: Select Articles to Include Once you know which influencers to target, you need to find the most popular content they've published on your topic. Paste each influencer's blog URL into Buzzsumo search and look for a popular article that relates to the subject of your article. If you cannot find any relevant content from the author, don't panic. Type the topic keywords after the URL and search again. Make sure you read all of the articles (you may even want to make notes for later) and gather a nice cross-section of articles without any overlap. You're curating content from these influencers to share with your audience, so you want to create as valuable an article as possible. When you're done researching, choose one article written by each influencer on your list to feature in your roundup post. #4: Write a Roundup Blog Post Now it's time to construct your roundup blog post. Use the following blog post structure to increase the likelihood of getting shares from the influencers you mention. Headline & Introduction Start with a strong headline to drive clicks to your blog. Here are some headline formulas you can adapt for your roundup: X Most Popular [TOPIC] Posts From the Pros in [MONTH/YEAR] X Most Popular [TOPIC] Posts From [JOB TITLE] in [MONTH/YEAR] X Most Popular [TOPIC] Posts That Will [DESIRED RESULT] X Most Popular [TOPIC] Posts That Will [DESIRED RESULT] in [DESIRED TIME] Next, tell your readers what they will learn from your article. Keep the introduction short, punchy and to the point. Featured Blog Mention Title and Rank: Start with the numbered position of the article (#1, #2, #3, etc.). Then add the original post title and the amount of shares it received. Images: Gather and insert the logo, an eye-catching image of the header from the featured blog and a screen grab of the Buzzsumo share count for the original blog post. Attribution: It's essential to fully credit the website that posted the original article and cite the author. For example: Original Article: 7 Strategies for Growing Your Community Blog (ProBlogger).

How to Optimize Your Mobile Social Media Ads

How to Optimize Your Mobile Social Media Ads

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you trying to reach an on-the-go social media audience? Are your ads optimized for mobile users? More people are using social on their smartphones. If you want to reach them, you might need to rethink your ads. In this article you'll discover three ways to make your social media ads mobile-friendly. Listen to this article: #1: Use Simple Copy and Bold Imagery Advertising on mobile means that people will view your ads on a much smaller screen than a desktop monitor. Because of this, you need to make sure your ads are still visible and carry the same impact when viewed on mobile devices. Ads for desktop have the screen space to contain text-heavy copy and detailed images. Mobile ads don't have that advantage, so your mobile ad creative needs to be bold, simple, and beautiful to attract your audience's attention. Take a look at two Facebook ads for the shoe company Tieks. The desktop ad features an intricate and interesting image along with a good amount of text to drive engagement. The image in Tieks's mobile ad is much simpler and the perspective puts the viewer right in the ad. The copy consists of a short sentence driving users to click the ad. This ad works for mobile because people can easily read and understand it on a small smartphone screen. While these two ads look very different, they're both unmistakably from the same company. Including the same visual elements, such as Tieks's bold red flats, in each image ties them together and keeps the ads on-brand, regardless of which device they're viewed on. When migrating desktop ads to mobile, it's important to create campaigns that are easy to understand and compelling to users. Simple copy and bold creative are the best ways to boost engagement on mobile. #2: Create Mobile-Friendly Landing Pages The creative in your ads isn't the only thing you need to adjust for mobile. Make sure that once people click on your ad, they're taken to a website that they can view and navigate properly on their mobile device. A website designed for desktop won't do; viewers will quickly get frustrated by the non-intuitive layout and navigate away from your site. This mobile Twitter ad from Home Depot encourages users to apply for job openings at its stores. Rather than direct users to the company's home page, the ad sends users to a mobile-friendly page that's specifically dedicated to careers at Home Depot. This way, users who are interested in applying for a job don't need to search through the site to complete that objective. The ad's landing page is bright, friendly, and on-theme. It's designed to be visually appealing and easy to navigate for mobile users. These two elements mean that there's a better chance of users viewing the page and eventually doing exactly what Home Depot wants: applying for a job. Mobile ads require landing pages that are designed with mobile in mind. To ensure that people follow through on your desired action, make sure they're driven to a web page that is relevant to your ad and is easy for them to view and navigate on their mobile device. #3: Explore Mobile-Friendly Video Ads When it comes to mobile advertising, video is leading the pack. According to eMarketer, U.S. mobile video ad spend jumped over 80% in 2015, and is expected to see double-digit growth through 2019. Many marketers say that video ads have helped them drive brand awareness and engagement, in addition to achieving higher click-through rates. Why? Mobile video ads are perfectly suited to mobile consumption behaviors. There are several ways you can start including mobile video in your advertising campaigns on Instagram, Facebook, and Twitter. In fact, you may already have the resources on hand to craft video ads with very little money or effort. Website Videos Have a video on your website that introduces your product or service? Then you have a video that's ready to run as a mobile ad! In the video below,

Facebook News Feed: How to Respond to Facebook Changes

Facebook News Feed: How to Respond to Facebook Changes

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Facebook to promote your business? Are you curious how to respond to the recent changes to the Facebook news feed? To learn how to navigate these important changes to Facebook's news feed, I interview Mari Smith, the "Queen of Facebook." More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Mari Smith, who is the world's leading Facebook marketing authority. She's authored the books, The New Relationship Marketing and Facebook Marketing: An Hour a Day. This is her fourth appearance on the show! Mari explores what you need to know about marketing with Facebook, and in particular the news feed. You'll discover the importance of native links, why micro-video should be key to your Facebook posting strategy and how Atlas will change the way you do online advertising. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook News Feed What marketers need to think about this next year when it comes to Facebook marketing Mari shares that over the next year, marketers will have to embrace the idea of paid amplified posts. According to Mari, most businesses on Facebook will have to bite the bullet and allocate dollars to paid posts this coming year. Mari shares that another Facebook trend is the push for micro-video and user-generated content. You'll hear more about this in the show. The next big consideration is connecting with your mobile users. With 75% of Facebook users accessing the site from mobile devices, your content must be effective on a mobile feed and able to direct people to a mobile-friendly landing page. Listen to the show to find out why community managers are more important than ever to your Facebook marketing strategy.  Review your posting strategy With Facebook clearly giving preferential visibility to consumers rather than brands, marketers now have to rethink their posting strategy. Especially with all of the latest updates to the news feed. Mari explains that some of the changes have been around links, and as marketers we are all about the images. In the past we have been told that posts with photos get the best visibility in the news feed. Mari explains that marketers have tried all kinds of clever ways to circumvent the news feed ranking algorithm. When you wanted to include a link in your post, you could use an image and include the link in the description. Now what Facebook calls native link posts give you a bigger image preview on your posts. You type or paste a link into your publisher on your page or profile, and it automatically generates a preview with a large image. You'll hear the huge advantages of this type of post, and why you need to consider it for your posting strategy. Listen to the show to find out why Mari recommends you change up your posting strategy to integrate more links. How Facebook's Save feature works and its advantages At the end of July 2014, Facebook introduced a new Save feature, which lets you to save items found on Facebook to check out later when you have more time. Available on both mobile and desktop, the Save feature was initially only meant for native link posts, but Facebook quietly upgraded it to allow any post with a link, video, photo or status update to be saved. Even if a post has multiple links in it, you can save all of the links at once with this tool. Mari recommends that you remind your fans from time to time of how to save and retrieve their saved items. Although publishers don't have access to the metrics right now, Mari's educated guess is that this feature might ultimately have value and give priority...

Always Disclose Affiliate Links And State Your Intentions

by Nick Leffler @ Exprance

Your business relies on being the authority and being trustworthy. Your website plays a huge role in that so if you include affiliate links then you also need to disclose affiliate links properly. Learn the ways you can properly disclose them so you are trustworthy to your customers.

The post Always Disclose Affiliate Links And State Your Intentions appeared first on Exprance.

Overcoming Fear: How to Break Through and Get Stuff Done

Overcoming Fear: How to Break Through and Get Stuff Done

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is fear holding you back in your business? Are you wondering what you can do to face your fears? To learn about the kinds of fears we deal with as marketers, I interview two small businesses owners for this 52nd episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, it's a panel discussion with Pat Flynn, founder of Smart Passive Income, and John Lee Dumas, the host of Entrepreneur on Fire. Both Pat and John share the fears that could have held them back in their businesses. You'll learn about the common fears marketers face and practical steps you need to implement. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Overcoming Fear John, what were some of your doubts when you had the idea of starting a podcast? John says that he had many doubts and fears when he had the idea for his Entrepreneur on Fire podcast. The idea for the podcast came about when he was on a commute to work as a commercial real estate agent. He liked to listen to podcasts and soon ran out of content to listen to. At the time, Pat Flynn had his Smart Passive Income podcast, for which he released one episode every two weeks. John soon realized that if he was running out of content, then so were others. He had the idea to start Entrepreneur on Fire as a 7-day-a-week podcast featuring interviews with today's most inspiring and successful entrepreneurs. In the beginning, John approached Jamie Tardy, The Eventual Millionaire, for mentoring. She agreed but thought he was crazy to commit to 7 days a week. Jamie thought it would be too much for his listeners to consume. John also joined Cliff Ravencraft's Podcast Mastermind and was told the exact same thing. You'll hear what John did with the advice from mentors and people already in that space. Listen to the show to hear the fears and doubts John had, and still has today. Pat, in the early days what were some of your fears? Pat shares the fears he faced when he first started out. One of the them was that the work wouldn't be appreciated or seen and whether it was the right thing to do. One of the biggest was the fear of failure and looking bad. When he was first let go from his job, he had the fear of not being able to provide for his family. He wanted to go down the path that was good for his and his family's future. You'll discover the kind of support Pat received from his wife, family and mentors. It helped him face the fear, doubt and resistance he encountered and got him to take action. When he wrote his first ebook in 2008, which was aimed at the architecture industry, he feared that nobody would buy it. This is one of the things that could have easily stopped him from writing the ebook. The take-home message is that you may not know John, Pat or me, but one thing is certain: We have all dealt with significant fear. We have all overcome it and gone on to do some pretty exciting things. Listen to the show to hear my story of when I put my idea for a social media blog out to some extremely influential people. My idea became Social Media Examiner. What about the fear of missing out? John believes the fear of missing out is prevalent. As entrepreneurs, it's the bright, shiny object syndrome. You see all these amazing platforms that you want to try. With all this going on around him, John always tries to remain focused. His passion is for podcasting and interviewing entrepreneurs. So his focus is to follow one course until he succeeds and it has stood him well.